DEVELOP_ineo+6000+7000_ManualeUtente

8/21/2019 DEVELOP_ineo+6000+7000_ManualeUtente

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/developineo60007000manualeutente 1/615

DEVELOP

ineo+6000 +7000

Manuale Utente



.



bizhub PRO C6000/C7000, bizhub PRESS C6000/C7000/C7000P Contents-1

Table of contents

1 Introduction

1.1 Welcome .......................................................................................................................................... 1-3

1.1.1 Composition of User's Guide............................................................................................................. 1-3

1.2 Legal Restrictions on Copying....................................................................................................... 1-5

2 Trademarks and Copyrights

3 Precautions for Installation and Use

3.1 Safety Information........................................................................................................................... 3-3

3.1.1 Disassemble and Modification........................................................................................................... 3-3

3.1.2 Power Cord........................................................................................................................................ 3-4

3.1.3 Power Source .................................................................................................................................... 3-4

3.1.4 Power Plug......................................................................................................................................... 3-5

3.1.5 Grounding .......................................................................................................................................... 3-5

3.1.6 Installation.......................................................................................................................................... 3-5

3.1.7 Ventilation .......................................................................................................................................... 3-6

3.1.8 Actions in Response to Troubles....................................................................................................... 3-6

3.1.9 Consumables..................................................................................................................................... 3-6

3.1.10 When Moving the Machine ................................................................................................................ 3-7

3.1.11 Before Successive Holidays .............................................................................................................. 3-7

3.1.12 Paste Pellet ........................................................................................................................................ 3-7

3.1.13 Perfect Binder.................................................................................................................................... 3-8

3.2 Regulation Notices.......................................................................................................................... 3-9

3.2.1 Laser Safety....................................................................................................................................... 3-93.2.2 Ozone Release................................................................................................................................. 3-10

3.2.3 Electromagnetic Interference........................................................................................................... 3-11

3.3 Warning and Caution Labels........................................................................................................ 3-13

3.3.1 Caution Label on Fusing Part of Fixing Conveyance Unit ............................................................... 3-13

3.3.2 Caution Label on Fixing Conveyance Unit....................................................................................... 3-14

3.3.3 Caution Label on Hinges of ADF...................................................................................................... 3-14

3.3.4 Caution Label on Toner Recovery Box ............................................................................................ 3-15

3.3.5 Caution Label on Perfect Binder PB-503......................................................................................... 3-16

3.3.6 Caution Label on Finisher FS-531/Finisher FS-621......................................................................... 3-17

3.3.7 Caution Label on Large Capacity Unit LU-202................................................................................ 3-18

3.3.8 Caution Labels on Multi Punch GP-501 .......................................................................................... 3-18

3.4 Installation Space.......................................................................................................................... 3-19

3.5 Operation Precautions.................................................................................................................. 3-32

4 Preparation for Use

4.1 Machine Configuration ................................................................................................................... 4-3

4.1.1 External Machine Items...................................................................................................................... 4-3

4.1.2 Internal Machine Items....................................................................................................................... 4-6

4.1.3 Relay Unit RU-509 ............................................................................................................................. 4-8

4.1.4 Control Panel Layout ....................................................................................................................... 4-10

4.1.5 Standard/Optional Equipment for bizhub PRESS C6000/C7000/C7000P...................................... 4-12

4.1.6 Paper Feeder Unit PF-602............................................................................................................... 4-184.1.7 Large Capacity Unit LU-202 ............................................................................................................ 4-20

4.1.8 Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray MB-504.................................................................................................... 4-21



Contents-2 bizhub PRO C6000/C7000, bizhub PRESS C6000/C7000/C7000P

4.1.9 ADF (Automatic Document Feeder) ................................................................................................. 4-22

4.1.10 Original Cover OC-506..................................................................................................................... 4-23

4.1.11 Folding Unit FD-503......................................................................................................................... 4-24

4.1.12 Saddle Stitcher SD-506................................................................................................................... 4-26

4.1.13 Finisher FS-521................................................................................................................................ 4-28

4.1.14 Perfect Binder PB-503..................................................................................................................... 4-30

4.1.15 Large Capacity Stacker LS-505....................................................................................................... 4-34

4.1.16 Finisher FS-531 (Punch Kit PK-512/PK-513)................................................................................... 4-364.1.17 Finisher FS-612................................................................................................................................ 4-38

4.1.18 Post Inserter PI-502......................................................................................................................... 4-40

4.1.19 Output Tray OT-502......................................................................................................................... 4-41

4.1.20 Relay Unit RU-506........................................................................................................................... 4-42

4.1.21 Multi Punch GP-501 (Die Set DS-508 to DS-516 except DS-514) .................................................. 4-44

4.2 Turning On/Off the Power ............................................................................................................ 4-46

4.2.1 Turning On the Power...................................................................................................................... 4-46

4.2.2 Turning Off the Power...................................................................................................................... 4-48

4.3 Automatically Resetting the Machine: Auto Reset .................................................................... 4-49

4.4 Manually Resetting the Machine: Reset ..................................................................................... 4-50

4.5 Using Machine When Power Save LED Lights........................................................................... 4-514.5.1 To enable the machine..................................................................................................................... 4-51

4.5.2 Automatically Conserving Energy: Auto Low Power ....................................................................... 4-51

4.5.3 Automatically Conserving Energy: Auto Shut OFF .......................................................................... 4-52

4.5.4 Manually Conserving Energy ........................................................................................................... 4-52

4.5.5 Limiting Machine Usage: Weekly Timer........................................................................................... 4-52

4.6 Making User Authentication/Account Track.............................................................................. 4-54

4.7 Displaying Operation Guide: Help Message............................................................................... 4-57

4.8 Adjusting Response Time of Touch Keys: Accessibility ........................................................... 4-60

5 Paper Information

5.1 Paper Information ........................................................................................................................... 5-35.1.1 Paper Weight ..................................................................................................................................... 5-3

5.1.2 Paper Tray/Exit Tray Capacity ........................................................................................................... 5-5

5.1.3 Paper Size.......................................................................................................................................... 5-9

5.1.4 Auto Tray Switch Function............................................................................................................... 5-14

5.1.5 To Store Copy Paper ....................................................................................................................... 5-14

5.1.6 Print Speed ...................................................................................................................................... 5-15

5.1.7 Correcting Unevenness in Output Image on Large-Sized Paper and Improving Feedability in DuplexPrinting Using Small-Sized Thick Paper ..........................................................................................5-17

5.2 Original Information...................................................................................................................... 5-19

5.2.1 ADF Originals ................................................................................................................................... 5-19

5.2.2 Originals for Using Original Glass .................................................................................................... 5-20

6 Printing Operations

6.1 Machine Screen .............................................................................................................................. 6-3

6.1.1 Overview of the Machine Screen....................................................................................................... 6-3

6.1.2 Settings on the Machine Screen........................................................................................................ 6-5

6.2 Paper Setting................................................................................................................................... 6-8

6.2.1 Paper Setting Outlines ....................................................................................................................... 6-8

6.2.2 Paper type descriptions................................................................................................................... 6-11

6.2.3 Paper Setting Made for a Paper Tray .............................................................................................. 6-11

6.3 Both Sides Adjust.......................................................................................................................... 6-26

6.4 Curl Adjustment (Relay Unit RU-509) .......................................................................................... 6-31

6.5 To Stop Printing ............................................................................................................................ 6-34

6.6 Controlling and Monitoring Machine from Browser .................................................................. 6-35

6.6.1 Controlling Machine from Browser: Remote Panel.......................................................................... 6-36




6.6.2 Monitoring Machine from Browser: Remote Monitor ...................................................................... 6-37

6.6.3 Monitoring Multiple Machines from Browser: Multi Monitor............................................................ 6-38

6.7 Using Perfect Binder PB-503 ....................................................................................................... 6-39

6.7.1 Turning On/Off the Heater of the Perfect Binder ............................................................................. 6-43

6.7.2 Managing the Perfect Binder PB-503 and Glue Pellets................................................................... 6-45

6.8 Suspending/Resuming Output to Finisher FS-521 .................................................................... 6-46

6.8.1 To Suspend an Output Job.............................................................................................................. 6-46

6.8.2 To Cancel the Suspended Job ........................................................................................................ 6-476.9 Using Multi Punch GP-501 ........................................................................................................... 6-48

6.9.1 Punching File Holes in Prints: Punch............................................................................................... 6-48

6.9.2 Exchanging the Die Set.................................................................................................................... 6-49

6.10 Restarting Output the Next Day: Overnight Output ................................................................... 6-51

7 Job List Screen and HDD Recall Screen

7.1 Overview of the Job List Screen.................................................................................................... 7-3

7.2 Hold Job and HDD Store Job......................................................................................................... 7-5

7.2.1 Hold Job Screen of the Job List Screen............................................................................................ 7-5

7.2.2 HDD Recall Screen ............................................................................................................................ 7-7

7.2.3 Outputting Hold Job .......................................................................................................................... 7-8

7.2.4 Deleting Hold Job ............................................................................................................................ 7-10

7.2.5 Duplicating Hold Job ....................................................................................................................... 7-12

7.2.6 Storing Hold Job on HDD................................................................................................................ 7-13

7.2.7 Recalling HDD Store Job................................................................................................................. 7-16

7.2.8 Deleting HDD Store Job................................................................................................................... 7-18

7.3 Editing Hold Job: Job Edit............................................................................................................ 7-20

7.3.1 Outline of Job Edit ........................................................................................................................... 7-20

7.3.2 Job Ticket Edit Screen..................................................................................................................... 7-22

7.3.3 Image Page Edit Screen .................................................................................................................. 7-23

7.3.4 Register Crop Mark in Job Ticket Edit............................................................................................. 7-25

7.4 Schedule ........................................................................................................................................ 7-297.4.1 Outline of Schedule Screen ............................................................................................................. 7-29

7.4.2 Using [Unit Change], [-], and [+]....................................................................................................... 7-31

7.4.3 Operating Paper Setting Dialog via Operation Dialog ..................................................................... 7-32

7.4.4 Changing Output Order of Reserved Jobs ...................................................................................... 7-33

7.4.5 Changing Paper Setting of the Tray................................................................................................. 7-34

7.5 Checking and Operating Reserved Jobs.................................................................................... 7-36

7.6 Displaying Output History ............................................................................................................ 7-38

7.7 Displaying Send History ............................................................................................................... 7-40

7.8 Checking Incomplete Jobs .......................................................................................................... 7-42

8 Supplies, Disposals, and Handling8.1 How to Display a Help Message.................................................................................................... 8-3

8.2 Replenishing Toner Supply ............................................................................................................ 8-5

8.3 Replacing Toner Recovery Box..................................................................................................... 8-7

8.4 Replenishing Staple Supply ........................................................................................................... 8-9

8.4.1 Replenishing Staple Supply in Finisher FS-521................................................................................. 8-9

8.4.2 Replenishing Staple Supply in Finisher FS-531............................................................................... 8-11

8.4.3 Replenishing Staple Supply in Finisher FS-612............................................................................... 8-13

8.5 Disposing Punch Waste ............................................................................................................... 8-15

8.5.1 Emptying Scrap Box of Folding Unit FD-503 .................................................................................. 8-15

8.5.2 Emptying Scrap Box of Finisher FS-531 or Finisher FS-612........................................................... 8-17

8.5.3 Emptying Scrap Box of Multi Punch GP-501 .................................................................................. 8-18




8.6 Disposing Trimmings.................................................................................................................... 8-20

8.6.1 Emptying Scrap Box of Saddle Stitcher SD-506............................................................................. 8-20

8.6.2 Emptying Scrap Box of Perfect Binder PB-503............................................................................... 8-21

8.7 Adding Glue Pellets to Perfect Binder PB-503........................................................................... 8-23

8.8 Loading Paper ............................................................................................................................... 8-25

8.8.1 Checking Paper to Be Loaded......................................................................................................... 8-26

8.8.2 Loading Paper in Main Body Trays (Trays 1 to 3) ............................................................................ 8-28

8.8.3 Loading Paper in Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray MB-504 ....................................................................... 8-308.8.4 Loading Paper in Paper Feeder Unit PF-602 (Trays 4 and 5) .......................................................... 8-31

8.8.5 Making Fine Adjustment on Side Guides of Paper Feeder Unit PF-602 (Trays 4 and 5)................. 8-33

8.8.6 Loading Small Size Paper in Paper Feeder Unit PF-602 (Trays 4 and 5) ........................................ 8-35

8.8.7 Loading Paper in Large Capacity Unit LU-202 (Tray 4) ................................................................... 8-37

8.8.8 Loading Paper in Post Inserter of Folding Unit FD-503................................................................... 8-40

8.8.9 Loading Paper in Post Inserter PI-502............................................................................................. 8-41

8.9 Loading Cover Paper for Perfect Binding................................................................................... 8-42

8.9.1 Loading Cover Paper in Cover Tray of Perfect Binder PB-503 ....................................................... 8-42

8.10 Loading Tabbed Sheets............................................................................................................... 8-45

8.10.1 Loading Tabbed Sheets in Main Body Trays (Trays 1 to 3) ............................................................. 8-45

8.10.2 Loading Tabbed Sheets in Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray MB-504 ........................................................ 8-468.10.3 Loading Tabbed Sheets in Paper Feeder Unit PF-602.................................................................... 8-47

8.10.4 Loading Tabbed Sheets in Large Capacity Unit LU-202................................................................. 8-48

8.11 Replacing Trim Receiver of Saddle Stitcher SD-506................................................................. 8-49

8.12 Replenishing Water Supply in Humidifier Tank of Relay Unit RU-509 ..................................... 8-50

8.13 Removing Perfect-Bound Books from Perfect Binder PB-503 Tray ........................................ 8-52

8.14 Removing Finished Sets from Large Capacity Stacker LS-505................................................ 8-54

8.14.1 To Remove Paper from Stacker....................................................................................................... 8-54

8.14.2 To Secure Paper on Carriage .......................................................................................................... 8-55

9 Maintenance

9.1 Cleaning........................................................................................................................................... 9-39.1.1 Cleaning the Original Glass................................................................................................................ 9-3

9.1.2 Cleaning the ADF Guide Cover.......................................................................................................... 9-3

9.1.3 Cleaning the Original Cover ............................................................................................................... 9-3

9.1.4 Cleaning the Exterior of the Machine................................................................................................. 9-3

9.1.5 Cleaning the Control Panel ................................................................................................................ 9-4

9.1.6 Cleaning the Conveyance Belt of Saddle Stitcher SD-506 Tray........................................................ 9-4

9.1.7 Cleaning Scrap Box of Multi Punch GP-501 ..................................................................................... 9-5

9.2 Checking Copy Count..................................................................................................................... 9-7

9.3 Preventive Maintenance............................................................................................................... 9-10

9.4 Maintenance Service .................................................................................................................... 9-11

10 Troubleshooting

10.1 If [Please Call Service] Message Is Displayed: Call for Service ............................................... 10-3

10.1.1 Operations When Displaying the Call for Service Screen................................................................ 10-4

10.1.2 Limited Function .............................................................................................................................. 10-5

10.2 If [Mishandled paper] Message Is Displayed ............................................................................. 10-6

10.2.1 To remove mishandled paper .......................................................................................................... 10-8

10.2.2 Jam number and position display.................................................................................................... 10-9

10.3 If Paper Jam Indicator Lights on Perfect Binder PB-503........................................................ 10-11

10.4 If Burrs Remain in Punch Holes: Multi Punch GP-501............................................................. 10-13

10.5 If [MACHINE] Tab Flashes in Orange ........................................................................................ 10-14

10.5.1 Paper Misfeed................................................................................................................................ 10-1410.5.2 Tray Empty in a Copy Job in Progress .......................................................................................... 10-15




10.6 If [Memory Full] Message Is Displayed ..................................................................................... 10-18

10.6.1 Memory Overflow in Current Job................................................................................................... 10-18

10.6.2 Memory Overflow in Reserve Job.................................................................................................. 10-18

10.7 Troubleshooting Tips.................................................................................................................. 10-19

11 Adjustment

11.1 Function Overview ........................................................................................................................ 11-311.1.1 List of Adjustment Menu Items........................................................................................................ 11-3

11.2 [01 Machine Adjustment] ........................................................................................................... 11-12

11.2.1 [01 Printer Adjustment] - [01 Restart Timing Adjustment] ............................................................. 11-12

11.2.2 [01 Printer Adjustment] - [02 Centering Adjustment] ..................................................................... 11-13

11.2.3 [01 Printer Adjustment] - [03 FD-Mag. Adjustment]....................................................................... 11-14

11.2.4 [01 Printer Adjustment] - [04 CD-Mag. Adjustment] ...................................................................... 11-15

11.2.5 [02 Scan Adjustment] - [01 Restart Timing Adjustment]................................................................ 11-16

11.2.6 [02 Scan Adjustment] - [02 Centering Adjustment]........................................................................ 11-17

11.2.7 [02 Scan Adjustment] - [03 FD-Mag. Adjustment]......................................................................... 11-18

11.3 [02 Stabilization Adj. Setting]..................................................................................................... 11-19

11.4 [02 Execute Adjust Operation]................................................................................................... 11-20

11.5 [03 Finisher Adjustment] (Finisher FS-521)............................................................................... 11-21

11.5.1 [01 Staple Finisher Adjustment] - [01 Staple Center Position]....................................................... 11-21

11.5.2 [01 Staple Finisher Adjustment] - [02 Paper Width Adj. (Staple)]................................................... 11-22

11.5.3 [01 Staple Finisher Adjustment] - [03 Paper Width Adj. (Straight)] ................................................ 11-23

11.5.4 [01 Staple Finisher Adjustment] - [04 Exit Guide Center Pos. Adj.]............................................... 11-25

11.5.5 [01 Staple Finisher Adjustment] - [05 Exit Guide Paper Width Adj.].............................................. 11-26

11.6 [03 Finisher Adjustment] (Folding Unit FD-503) ....................................................................... 11-28

11.6.1 [02 Multi Folder (Punch) Adj.] - [01 Paper Width Adjustment] ....................................................... 11-28

11.6.2 [02 Multi Folder (Punch) Adj.] - [02 Punch Vertical Position Adj.] .................................................. 11-29

11.6.3 [03 Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.] - [01 Half-Fold Position Adj.].............................................................. 11-30

11.6.4 [03 Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.] - [02 Tri-Fold-in Pos. Adj.].................................................................. 11-32

11.6.5 [03 Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.] - [03 Tri-Fold-out Pos. Adj.] ............................................................... 11-3311.6.6 [03 Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.] - [04 Double Parallel Pos. Adj.] .......................................................... 11-35

11.6.7 [03 Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.] - [05 Z-Fold Position Adj.].................................................................. 11-36

11.6.8 [03 Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.] - [06 Gate Position Adj.]..................................................................... 11-38

11.7 [03 Finisher Adjustment] (Large Capacity Stacker LS-505) .................................................... 11-40

11.7.1 [05 Stacker Adjustment] - [01 Paper Width Adjustment] ............................................................... 11-40

11.7.2 [05 Stacker Adjustment] - [02 Paper Length Adjustment] ............................................................. 11-41

11.8 [03 Finisher Adjustment] (Saddle Stitcher SD-506).................................................................. 11-43

11.8.1 [06 Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.] - [01 Staple Center Position].......................................................... 11-43

11.8.2 [06 Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.] - [02 Staple Paper Width Adj.] ....................................................... 11-44

11.8.3 [06 Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.] - []03 Staple Pitch Adjustment ....................................................... 11-45

11.8.4 [06 Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.] - [04 Half-Fold Position Adj.].......................................................... 11-47

11.8.5 [06 Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.] - [05 Tri-Fold Position Adj.] ............................................................ 11-48

11.8.6 [06 Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.] - [06 Fold Paper Width Adj.]........................................................... 11-49

11.8.7 [06 Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.] - [07 Trimming Adjustment] ........................................................... 11-51

11.8.8 [06 Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.] - [08 Trimmer Receiver Adj.] .......................................................... 11-52

11.9 [03 Finisher Adjustment] (Perfect Binder PB-503) ................................................................... 11-53

11.9.1 [07 Perfect Binder Adjustment] - [01 Cover Trimming Adjustment]............................................... 11-53

11.9.2 [07 Perfect Binder Adjustment] - [02 Cover Lead Edge Adj.] ........................................................ 11-54

11.9.3 [07 Perfect Binder Adjustment] - [03 Spine Corner Forming Pos.]................................................ 11-55

11.9.4 [07 Perfect Binder Adjustment] - [04 Glue Start Position] ............................................................. 11-56

11.9.5 [07 Perfect Binder Adjustment] - [05 Glue Finish Position]............................................................ 11-58

11.9.6 [07 Perfect Binder Adjustment] - [06 Glue Formation Finish Pos.] ................................................ 11-59

11.9.7 [07 Perfect Binder Adjustment] - [07 Temperature Adjustment].................................................... 11-6011.9.8 [07 Perfect Binder Adjustment] - [08 Sub Compile CD Width Adj.] ............................................... 11-61

11.9.9 [07 Perfect Binder Adjustment] - [09 Clamp CD Width Adjustment] ............................................. 11-62




11.9.10 [07 Perfect Binder Adjustment] - [10 Cover Up/Down CD Width Adj.].......................................... 11-64

11.9.11 [07 Perfect Binder Adjustment] - [11 Clamp FD Position Adj.] ...................................................... 11-65

11.10 [03 Finisher Adjustment] (Finisher FS-531/Finisher FS-612)................................................... 11-66

11.10.1 [01 Saddle Stitcher Stopper] (Finisher FS-612 only)...................................................................... 11-66

11.10.2 [612 Half-Fold Stopper Adj.] (Finisher FS-612 only) ...................................................................... 11-67

11.10.3 [03 Punch Adjustment] - [01 Vertical Position Adj.] ....................................................................... 11-68

11.10.4 [03 Punch Adjustment] - [02 Horizontal Position Adj.]................................................................... 11-69

11.10.5 [03 Punch Adjustment] - [03 Registration Adjustment].................................................................. 11-7011.10.6 [03 Punch Adjustment] - [04 Paper Edge Detect Sensor].............................................................. 11-71

11.10.7 [04 Tri-Fold Adjustment] ................................................................................................................ 11-71

11.10.8 [05 2 Pos. Staple Pitch Adj.] .......................................................................................................... 11-72

11.10.9 [06 Post Inserter Tray Size] ............................................................................................................ 11-73

11.10.10 [07 Output Quantity Limit].............................................................................................................. 11-74

11.10.11 [08 Curl Adjustment] ...................................................................................................................... 11-75

11.11 [04 Density Balance Adjustment] .............................................................................................. 11-76

11.11.1 [01 Density Balance Chart Output] ................................................................................................ 11-76

11.11.2 [02 Density Balance Data Reg/Del]................................................................................................ 11-78

11.12 [05 Color Density]........................................................................................................................ 11-88

11.12.1 [01 Color Density Control].............................................................................................................. 11-8811.12.2 [02 Color Density Manual Control] ................................................................................................. 11-90

11.12.3 [ 03 Register Paper Category]........................................................................................................ 11-92

11.13 [06 Curl Adjustment]................................................................................................................... 11-97

12 Utility Menu Screen

12.1 Utility Menu Screen Outlines ....................................................................................................... 12-3

12.1.1 How to Access the Utility Menu Screen .......................................................................................... 12-3

12.1.2 List of Utility Menu Items ................................................................................................................. 12-5

12.2 [01 Scan Address Register]........................................................................................................ 12-26

12.3 [02 User Setting] - [01 System Setting]..................................................................................... 12-27

12.3.1 [01 Language Setting] .................................................................................................................... 12-2712.3.2 [02 Unit Setting] ............................................................................................................................. 12-28

12.3.3 [03 Paper Tray Setting] - [01 Paper Setting] .................................................................................. 12-28

12.3.4 [03 Paper Tray Setting] - [02 Auto Tray Selection Setting] ............................................................ 12-44

12.3.5 [03 Paper Tray Setting] - [03 Type for Auto Paper]........................................................................ 12-45

12.3.6 [03 Paper Tray Setting] - [04 Dehumidify Fan Heater] ................................................................... 12-46

12.3.7 [04 Reset Setting] - [01 Auto Reset Setting] .................................................................................. 12-47

12.3.8 [04 Reset Setting] - [02 Job Reset Setting].................................................................................... 12-48

12.3.9 [05 Default Screen Setting] ............................................................................................................ 12-49

12.3.10 [06 Set Zoom Ratio Setting]........................................................................................................... 12-50

12.3.11 [07 Power Save Setting]................................................................................................................. 12-51

12.3.12 [08 Date/Time Setting] ................................................................................................................... 12-52

12.3.13 [09 Operation/Info. Sound Setting] - [01 Volume Setting] ............................................................. 12-53

12.3.14 [09 Operation/Info. Sound Setting] - [02 Info. Sound Item Setting] ............................................... 12-54

12.3.15 [10 Key Response Time] ................................................................................................................ 12-55

12.3.16 [11 Shortcut Key Register] ............................................................................................................. 12-55

12.3.17 [12 Service Port Device Setting] .................................................................................................... 12-57

12.4 [02 User Setting] - [02 Initial Setting] ........................................................................................ 12-58

12.4.1 [01 Copy Initial Setting].................................................................................................................. 12-58

12.4.2 [02 Scan Initial Setting] .................................................................................................................. 12-59

12.5 [02 User Setting] - [03 Common Setting].................................................................................. 12-60

12.6 [02 User Setting] - [04 Copy Setting]......................................................................................... 12-62

12.7 [02 User Setting] - [05 Scan Setting]......................................................................................... 12-64

12.8 [02 User Setting] - [06 Printer Setting]...................................................................................... 12-65

12.8.1 [01 Gray Text Outline] .................................................................................................................... 12-65




12.9 [02 User Setting] - [07 Image Quality Setting].......................................................................... 12-66

12.9.1 [ 01 Screen] .................................................................................................................................... 12-66

12.9.2 [02 Screen Initial Setting] ............................................................................................................... 12-66

12.9.3 [03 Original Density Shift]............................................................................................................... 12-67

12.9.4 [04 ACS Adjustment]...................................................................................................................... 12-68

12.10 [02 User Setting] - [08 Password Change] ............................................................................... 12-69

12.11 [03 Administrator Setting] - [01 System Setting] ..................................................................... 12-70

12.11.1 [01 Power Save Setting]................................................................................................................. 12-7012.11.2 [02 Date/Time Setting] ................................................................................................................... 12-71

12.11.3 [03 Weekly Timer Setting] - [01 Weekly Timer ON/OFF Setting] ................................................... 12-72

12.11.4 [03 Weekly Timer Setting] - [02 Time Setting]................................................................................ 12-73

12.11.5 [03 Weekly Timer Setting] - [03 Date Setting]................................................................................ 12-74

12.11.6 [03 Weekly Timer Setting] - [04 Select Time for Power Save] ....................................................... 12-75

12.11.7 [03 Weekly Timer Setting] - [05 Password for Non-Business Hours] ............................................ 12-76

12.11.8 [04 Restrict User Access] - [01 Lock/Delete Mode Memory] - [01 Copy Mode Memory] ............. 12-77

12.11.9 [04 Restrict User Access] - [01 Lock/Delete Mode Memory] - [02 Scan Mode Memory].............. 12-78

12.11.10 [04 Restrict User Access] - [02 Change Restrict Setting] .............................................................. 12-79

12.11.11 [04 Restrict User Access] - [03 Scan Restrict Setting] .................................................................. 12-80

12.11.12 [04 Restrict User Access] - [04 Sample Print Restrict] .................................................................. 12-8112.11.13 [05 Expert Adjustment] - [01 AES Level Adjustment]..................................................................... 12-82

12.11.14 [05 Expert Adjustment] - [02 Erase Correction] - [01 Non-Image Area Erase]............................... 12-83

12.11.15 [05 Expert Adjustment] - [02 Erase Correction] - [02 ADF Frame Erase]....................................... 12-84

12.11.16 [05 Expert Adjustment] - [03 Printer Adjustment] - [01 Restart Timing Adjustment] ..................... 12-85

12.11.17 [05 Expert Adjustment] - [03 Printer Adjustment] - [02 Centering Adjustment]............................. 12-86

12.11.18 [05 Expert Adjustment] - [03 Printer Adjustment] - [03 FD-Mag. Adjustment]............................... 12-87

12.11.19 [05 Expert Adjustment] - [03 Printer Adjustment] - [04 CD-Mag. Adjustment] .............................. 12-88

12.11.20 [05 Expert Adjustment] - [03 Printer Adjustment] - [05 Lead Edge Erase Adjustment] ................. 12-89

12.11.21 [05 Expert Adjustment] - [03 Printer Adjustment] - [06 Registration Loop Adj.] ............................ 12-90

12.11.22 [05 Expert Adjustment] - [03 Printer Adjustment] - [07 Pre-registration Adj.]................................ 12-91

12.11.23 [05 Expert Adjustment] - [04 Finisher Adjustment] ........................................................................ 12-92

12.11.24 [05 Expert Adjustment] - [05 Scan Adjustment]............................................................................. 12-92

12.11.25 [05 Expert Adjustment] - [06 Process Adjustment] - [01 Front & Back Density]............................ 12-93

12.11.26 [05 Expert Adjustment] - [06 Process Adjustment] - [02 Toner Density Sensor Speed]................ 12-94

12.11.27 [05 Expert Adjustment] - [06 Process Adjustment] - [03 Maximum Density Adjustment] ............. 12-95

12.11.28 [05 Expert Adjustment] - [07 Quality Adjustment] - [01 Printer Gamma Offset Adj.] ..................... 12-96

12.11.29 [05 Expert Adjustment] - [07 Quality Adjustment] - [02 Printer Gamma Offset Auto.]................... 12-98

12.11.30 [05 Expert Adjustment] - [07 Quality Adjustment] - [03 Printer Gamma Sensor Adj.].................. 12-100

12.11.31 [05 Expert Adjustment] - [07 Quality Adjustment] - [04 Stabilization Adj. Setting] ...................... 12-103

12.11.32 [05 Expert Adjustment] - [07 Quality Adjustment] - [05 Custom Screen] .................................... 12-104

12.11.33 [05 Expert Adjustment] - [08 Execute Adjust Operation] ............................................................. 12-106

12.11.34 [06 List/Counter] .......................................................................................................................... 12-106

12.11.35 [07 Size Setting] - [01 Orig. Glass Size Search]........................................................................... 12-10812.11.36 [07 Size Setting] - [02 ADF Original Size Search] ........................................................................ 12-108

12.11.37 [07 Size Setting] - [03 Original Glass Small Size]......................................................................... 12-109

12.11.38 [07 Size Setting] - [04 K Size]....................................................................................................... 12-110

12.11.39 [07 Size Setting] - [05 ADF/Orig. Glass Priority]........................................................................... 12-110

12.11.40 [08 Perfect Binder Setting] - [01 Usable Paper Weight Select].................................................... 12-111

12.11.41 [08 Perfect Binder Setting] - [02 Paper Count Limit for PB] ........................................................ 12-112

12.11.42 [08 Perfect Binder Setting] - [03 Unfitting Cover Stop]................................................................ 12-112

12.11.43 [09 Operation Screen Customize] - [01 Font Weight Setting]...................................................... 12-113

12.11.44 [09 Operation Screen Customize] - [02 Copy Screen Customize Set] ........................................ 12-113

12.11.45 [09 Operation Screen Customize] - [03 Scan Screen Customize Set]......................................... 12-114

12.12 [03 Administrator Setting] - [02 Administrator Registration] ................................................ 12-115

12.13 [03 Administrator Setting] - [03 Scan Address Register] ...................................................... 12-116




12.14 [03 Administrator Setting] - [04 User Auth./Account Track]................................................. 12-117

12.14.1 [01 Authentication Method].......................................................................................................... 12-118

12.14.2 [02 User Authentication Set] - [01 Management Setting] ............................................................ 12-120

12.14.3 [02 User Authentication Set] - [02 User Registration] .................................................................. 12-121

12.14.4 [02 User Authentication Set] - [03 User Counter] ........................................................................ 12-124

12.14.5 [03 Account Track] - [01 Account Track Registration] ................................................................. 12-126

12.14.6 [03 Account Track] - [02 Account Track Counter] ....................................................................... 12-130

12.14.7 [04 Print without Authentication].................................................................................................. 12-13212.15 [03 Administrator Setting] - [05 Network Setting].................................................................. 12-133

12.15.1 [01 Machine NIC Setting] ............................................................................................................. 12-133

12.15.2 [02 E-mail Initial Setting] .............................................................................................................. 12-134

12.15.3 [03 http Communication Setting] ................................................................................................. 12-135

12.15.4 [04 Web LCD Setting] .................................................................................................................. 12-136

12.16 [03 Administrator Setting] - [06 Common Setting] ................................................................ 12-137

12.17 [03 Administrator Setting] - [07 Copy Setting] ....................................................................... 12-139

12.18 [03 Administrator Setting] - [08 Scan Setting]........................................................................ 12-141

12.19 [03 Administrator Setting] - [09 System Connection]............................................................ 12-142

12.19.1 [ 01 Administrator Call]................................................................................................................. 12-142

12.20 [03 Administrator Setting] - [09 Security Setting] .................................................................. 12-14312.20.1 [01 Administrator Password]........................................................................................................ 12-143

12.20.2 [02 HDD Management Setting] - [01 HDD Lock Password] ........................................................ 12-144

12.20.3 [02 HDD Management Setting] - [02 Delete Temp. Data Setting] ............................................... 12-145

12.20.4 [02 HDD Management Setting] - [03 Delete All Data Setting]...................................................... 12-146

12.20.5 [02 HDD Management Setting] - [04 Delete hold Job]................................................................. 12-147

12.20.6 [02 HDD Management Setting] - [05 Delete HDD Job]................................................................ 12-148

12.20.7 [02 HDD Management Setting] - [06 HDD Restore/Backup] ....................................................... 12-150

12.20.8 [02/03 Enhanced Security Mode]................................................................................................. 12-151

12.21 [04 Touch Panel Adjustment]................................................................................................... 12-152

13 Specifications13.1 Main Body Specifications............................................................................................................. 13-3

13.1.1 Main Body........................................................................................................................................ 13-3

13.2 Original Related Option Specifications....................................................................................... 13-5

13.2.1 ADF DF-622 ..................................................................................................................................... 13-5

13.2.2 Others .............................................................................................................................................. 13-5

13.3 Feeding Option Specifications..................................................................................................... 13-6

13.3.1 Paper Feeder Unit PF-602............................................................................................................... 13-6

13.3.2 Large Capacity Unit LU-202 ............................................................................................................ 13-6

13.3.3 Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray MB-504.................................................................................................... 13-7

13.3.4 Dehumidifier Heater HT-504/505..................................................................................................... 13-7

13.3.5 Dehumidifier Heater HT-503 ............................................................................................................ 13-8

13.4 Output Option Specifications....................................................................................................... 13-9

13.4.1 Relay Unit RU-509........................................................................................................................... 13-9

13.4.2 Humidifier HM-102........................................................................................................................... 13-9

13.4.3 Finisher FS-521.............................................................................................................................. 13-10

13.4.4 Folding Unit FD-503....................................................................................................................... 13-11

13.4.5 Large Capacity Stacker LS-505..................................................................................................... 13-12

13.4.6 Saddle Stitcher SD-506................................................................................................................. 13-13

13.4.7 Perfect Binder PB-503................................................................................................................... 13-14

13.4.8 Finisher FS-531.............................................................................................................................. 13-15

13.4.9 Finisher FS-612.............................................................................................................................. 13-16

13.4.10 Post Inserter PI-502....................................................................................................................... 13-17

13.4.11 Multi Punch GP-501 (Die Set DS-508 to DS-516, except DS-514) ............................................... 13-1713.4.12 Relay Unit RU-506 ......................................................................................................................... 13-18

13.4.13 Punch Kit PK-512/PK-513............................................................................................................. 13-18




13.4.14 Others ............................................................................................................................................ 13-18

13.5 Electronic Option Specifications............................................................................................... 13-19

13.5.1 Image Controller IC-601................................................................................................................. 13-19

13.5.2 Image Controller IC-306................................................................................................................. 13-19

13.5.3 Others ............................................................................................................................................ 13-19

13.6 Other Options .............................................................................................................................. 13-20

13.7 Incompatible Copy Conditions .................................................................................................. 13-21

13.7.1 Copy Conditions Incompatible with Basic Settings and Original Settings.................................... 13-2113.7.2 Copy Conditions Incompatible with Quality Adjustment, Application, and Output Settings......... 13-26

14 Software License Agreement

15 Index






1Introduction





bizhub PRO C6000/C7000, bizhub PRESS C6000/C7000/C7000P 1-3

1.1 Welcome 1

1 Introduction

1.1 Welcome

Thank you for purchasing this machine.This User's Guide describes the functions, operating instructions, precautions for correct operation, and sim-ple troubleshooting guidelines of this machine. In order to obtain maximum performance from this productand use it effectively, please read this User's Guide as necessary.

1.1.1 Composition of User's Guide

User's guide DVD manuals Overview

[Operation Quick Guide] This guide mainly describes how to use frequentlyused functions. Please refer to this guide for quickcomprehension of various features available on themachine.

[Safety Information] This guide describes trademarks, licenses, and copy-rights concerning this machine.It also provides precautions and requests that shouldbe followed to ensure safe usage of this machine.Please be sure to read this guide before using the ma-chine.

[User's Guide - Copier] This guide describes an outline of the machine andcopy operations.• Configuration and specifications of the main body

and options• Turning on/off the machine• Paper information• Making a basic copy and setting procedures• Supplies, disposals, and handling of output paper• Quality adjustments• Applications, output settings, and job list• Troubleshooting

[User's Guide - POD Administrator's Reference] This guide provides you with detailed information onmachine management and how to customize the ma-chine according to your daily use.• Both Sides Adjustment, Curl Adjustment• Controller settings• Adjustment, Utility Menu Screen• Network settings, PageScope Web Connection• Web Uti lities

[User's Guide - Printer (IC-601)] This guide describes the setting of the printer driverand utility tool.

• Adobe PS driver• PostScript3 Plug-in driver• Web Connection

[User's Guide - ColorCentro (IC-601)] This guide describes the setting of color when usingIC-601 image controller.• Calibration• Adjusting tone curve• Adjusting spot color• Setting alternative color• Managing profiles• Setting color defaults• Managing color configuration



Welcome1

1-4 bizhub PRO C6000/C7000, bizhub PRESS C6000/C7000/C7000P

1.1

[User's Guide - Network Scanner (IC-306)] This guide describes the operation of the IC-306 net-work scanner function.• Scan to E-mail• Scan to HDD• Scan to FTP• Scan to SMB• Scan to Queue

[User's Guide - Network Scanner (IC-601)] This guide describes the operation of the IC-601 net-work scanner function.• Scan to E-mail• Scan to HDD• Scan to FTP• Scan to SMB

[User's Guide - Security] This guide describes the security functions.Please refer to this guide for how to use the EnhancedSecurity mode, and for detailed machine operation inEnhanced Security mode.

User's guide DVD manuals Overview




1.2 Legal Restrictions on Copying 1

1.2 Legal Restrictions on Copying

Certain types of original must never be copied with the purpose or intent to pass copies of such documentsoff as the originals.

The following is not a complete list, but is meant to be used as a guide to responsible copying.

Financial Instruments

- Personal checks

- Traveler’s checks- Money orders

- Certificates of deposit

- Bonds or other certificates of indebtedness

- Stock certificates

Legal Documents

- Food stamps

- Postage stamps (canceled or uncanceled)

- Checks or drafts drawn by government agencies

- Internal revenue stamps (canceled or uncanceled)

- Passports

- Immigration papers- Motor vehicle licenses and titles.

- House and property titles and deeds

General

- Identification cards, badges, or insignias

- Copyrighted works without permission of the copyright owner

In addition, it is prohibited under any circumstances to copy domestic or foreign currencies, or works of artwithout permission of the copyright owner.

When in doubt about the nature of a document, consult with legal counsel.

This machine provides the account track function to forbid the user operating the machine without enteringa pre-established password, in order to prevent any misapplication of the machine.

Also, this account track function can limit the machine operation depending on the section, using the settingto permit/prohibit copying, printing, or scanning.

This machine also provides the forgery prevention function in order to prevent financial instruments from be-ing copied illegally.

We appreciate your understanding that printed images may infrequently have some noise or image data maynot be stored under certain circumstances due to this forgery prevention function.



Legal Restrictions on Copying1


1.2



2Trademarks and Copyrights






2

2 Trademarks and Copyrights

KONICA MINOLTA, the KONICA MINOLTA logo, symbol mark, and The essentials of imaging are registeredtrademarks or trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA HOLDINGS, INC.

PageScope, bizhub and bizhub PRESS are registered trademarks or trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA BUSI-

NESS TECHNOLOGIES INC.

Mozilla and Firefox are registered trademarks or trademarks of the Mozilla Foundation in the United Statesand other countries.

Novell and NetWare are registered trademarks or trademarks of Novell, Inc. in the United States and othercountries.

Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, Windows Vista and Windows 7 are either registered trademarks ortrademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

PowerPC is a registered trademark or trademark of International Business Machines Corporation in the Unit-ed States, other countries, or both.

Apple, AppleTalk, Bonjour, TrueType, Macintosh, Mac OS and Safari are registered trademarks or trade-marks of Apple, Inc.

CUPS and CUPS logo are trademarks of Apple Inc.

Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, PostScript, Flash, and Flash Player are registered trademarks or trademarksof Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.

Adobe PostScript is protected by patents in the United States and other countries.

InDesign and PageMaker are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United Statesand/or other countries.

Copyright © 2010 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.

Copyright © 2010 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved. Patents Pending.

This product contains Adobe ® Flash ® Player under license from Adobe Systems Incorporated.

Copyright © 1995-2007 Adobe Macromedia Software LLC. All rights reserved.

Copyright(C) 2009-2010 SOFHA GmbhSOFHA is a registered trademark of SOFHA GmbH in the United States, Japan and other countries.KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. or SOFHA GmbH maintains the copyright of this print-er driver.

Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.

RC4, RSA, RSA and BSAFE are registered trademark or trademark of RSA Security Inc. inthe United States and/or other countries.

License information

This product includes RSA® BSAFE™ Cryptographic software from RSA Security Inc.

GretagMacbeth is a registered trademark or trademark of Amazys Holding GmbH in the United States andother countries.

X-rite is a registered trademark or trademark of X-Rite, Incorporated in the United States and other countries.

i1 is a registered trademark or trademark of X-Rite, Incorporated in the United States and other countries.

All other product and brand names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies ororganizations.



2


Note

User's Guide may not be reproduced in part or in full without permission.

KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. will not be held liable for any incidents caused by us-ing this printing system or User's Guide.

Information included in User's Guide is subject to change without notice.



3Precautions for Installationand Use






3.1 Safety Information 3

3 Precautions for Installation and Use

3.1 Safety Information

This section contains detailed instructions on the operation and maintenance of this machine. To achieve op-timum utility of this device, all operators should carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual.

Please read the following section before connecting the machine to the supply. It contains important infor-mation related to user safety and preventing equipment problems.

Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine.

Make sure you observe all of the precautions appear in each section of this manual.

d ReferenceSome parts of the contents of this section may not correspond with the purchased product.

Warning and precaution symbols

The following indicators are used on the warning labels or in this manual to categorize the level of safety warn-ings.

Meaning of symbols

3.1.1 Disassemble and Modification

WARNING Ignoring this caution could cause injury or damage to property.

CAUTION Ignoring this caution could cause injury or damage to property.

A triangle indicates a danger against which you should take precaution.

This symbol warns against cause burns.

A diagonal line indicates a prohibited course of action.This symbol warns against dismantling the device.

A solid circle indicates an imperative course of action.This symbol indicates you must unplug the device.

WARNING

Do not attempt to remove the covers and panels which havebeen fixed to the product. Some products have a high-volt-age part or a laser beam source inside that could cause anelectrical shock or blindness.

Do not modify this product, as a fire, electrical shock, orbreakdown could result. If the product employs a laser, thelaser beam source could cause blindness.



Safety Information3


3.1

3.1.2 Power Cord

3.1.3 Power Source

WARNING

Do not scratch, abrade, place a heavy object on, heat, twist,bend, pull on, or damage the power cord. Use of a damagedpower cord (exposed core wire, broken wire, etc.) could re-

sult in a fire or breakdown.Should any of these conditions be found, immediately turnOFF the power switch, unplug the power cord from the pow-er outlet, and then call your authorized service representa-tive.

WARNING

Use only the specified power source voltage. Failure to dothat could result in a fire or electrical shock.

Connect power plug directly into wall outlet having the sameconfiguration as the plug. Use of an adapter leads to theproduct connecting to inadequate power supply (voltage,current capacity, grounding), and may result in fire or shock.If proper wall outlet is not available, the customer shall askqualified electrician for the installation.

Do not use a multiple outlet adapter nor an extension cord inprinciple. Use of an adapter or an extension cord could causea fire or electrical shock.Contact your authorized service representative if an exten-sion cord is required.

Before connecting the power cord, check that the electricaloutlet is equipped with a grounding terminal.

Consult your authorized service representative before con-necting other equipment on the same wall outlet. Overloadcould result in a fire.

CAUTION

The outlet must be near the equipment and easily accessible.Otherwise you can not pull out the power plug when an emer-gency occurs.





3.1.4 Power Plug

3.1.5 Grounding

3.1.6 Installation

WARNING

Do not unplug and plug in the power cord with a wet hand,as an electrical shock could result.

Plug the power cord all the way into the power outlet. Failureto do this could result in a fire or electrical shock.

CAUTION

Do not tug the power cord when unplugging. Pulling on thepower cord could damage the cord, resulting in a fire or elec-trical shock.

Remove the power plug from the outlet more than one time ayear and clean the area between the plug terminals. Dust thataccumulates between the plug terminals may cause a fire.

WARNING

Connect the power cord to an electrical outlet that isequipped with a grounding terminal.

WARNING

Do not place a flower vase or other container that containswater, or metal clips or other small metallic objects on thisproduct. Spilled water or metallic objects dropped inside theproduct could result in a fire, electrical shock, or breakdown.Should a piece of metal, water, or any other similar foreignmatters get inside the product, immediately turn OFF thepower switch, unplug the power cord from the power outlet,and then call your authorized service representative.

Do not use flammable sprays, liquids, or gases inside or nearthis machine. Do not clean the inside of this machine using aflammable gas duster. A fire or explosion could result.

CAUTION

After installing this product, mount it on a secure base. If theunit moves or falls, it may cause personal injury.

Do not place the product in a dusty place, or a site exposedto soot or steam, near a kitchen table, bath, or a humidifier. A fire, electrical shock, or breakdown could result.

Do not place this product on an unstable or tilted bench, orin a location subject to a lot of vibration and shock. It coulddrop or fall, causing personal injury or mechanical break-down.

Do not let any object plug the ventilation holes of this prod-uct. Heat could accumulate inside the product, resulting in afire or malfunction.



Safety Information3


3.1

3.1.7 Ventilation

3.1.8 Actions in Response to Troubles

3.1.9 Consumables

CAUTION

Always use this product in a well ventilated location. Operat-ing the product in a poorly ventilated room for an extendedperiod of time, you may feel uncomfortable due to the ex-

haust air. Ventilate the room at regular intervals.

WARNING

Do not keep using this product, if this product becomes inor-dinately hot or emits smoke, or unusual odour or noise. Im-mediately turn OFF the power switch, unplug the power cordfrom the power outlet, and then call your authorized servicerepresentative. If you keep on using it as is, a fire or electricalshock could result.

Do not keep using this product, if this product has beendropped or its cover damaged. Immediately turn OFF thepower switch, unplug the power cord from the power outlet,and then call your authorized service representative. If youkeep on using it as is, a fire or electrical shock could result.

CAUTION

The inside of this product has areas subject to high temper-ature, which may cause burns.When checking the inside of the unit for malfunctions such asa paper misfeed, do not touch the locations (around the fus-ing unit, etc.) which are indicated by a "Caution HOT" cautionlabel.

WARNING

Do not throw the toner cartridge or toner into an open flame.The hot toner may scatter and cause burns or other damage.

vCAUTION

Do not leave a toner unit or drum unit in a place within easyreach of children. Licking or ingesting any of these things

could injure your health.

Do not store toner units and PC drum units near a floppy diskor watch that are susceptible to magnetism. They couldcause these products to malfunction.





3.1.10 When Moving the Machine

3.1.11 Before Successive Holidays

3.1.12 Paste Pellet

CAUTION

Whenever moving this product, be sure to disconnect thepower cord and other cables. Failure to do this could damagethe cord or cable, resulting in a fire, electrical shock, or

breakdown.When moving this product, always hold it by the locationsspecified in the User's Guide or other documents. If the unitfalls it may cause severe personal injury. The product mayalso be damaged or malfunction.Special care is required to move the main body equippedwith options. Be sure to contact your service representativebefore moving this product.

CAUTION

Unplug the product when you will not use the product forlong periods of time.

CAUTION

Do not put paste pellets close to fire. Paste pellets are flam-mable and easy to catch on fire.

Do not swallow paste pellets. Should you swallow any, drink

large amount of water or milk to vomit, and immediately con-sult a doctor.

Keep out of reach of children in order to avoid unexpectedaccidents.



Safety Information3


3.1

3.1.13 Perfect Binder

CAUTION

Do not use the perfect binder without ventilation for an ex-tended period of time. Ensure to ventilate the room on a reg-ular basis. It is recommended that the perfect binder should

be installed in a place with a local exhaust system. Using theperfect binder in a room without appropriate ventilation couldpose health hazard.

Handle melted hot paste carefully. If it gets in the eye, do notrub nor tray to open the eye, but cool it with cold water im-mediately and consult a doctor.

Do not touch melted hot paste as it may cause burn injury. Ifit sticks on your skin, cool that part of the skin with cold waterimmediately and consult a doctor.

Do not touch the paste tank unit immediately after you turnedoff the machine to avoid burn injury. Wait until the unit is nolonger hot when you handle it directly with your hands.

Do not put the paste hopper and the paste tank unit close to

fire. Paste is flammable and easy to catch on fire.

Do not get close to the vapor emitted from melted hot paste.If you have irritation in or around your eyes, nose or throat,move to an area where you can get fresh air.

Do not block up the vent for the fan on the back of the perfectbinder. This will prevent the discharge of heat, and maycause fire or breakdown.

Do not change the temperature setting for the paste tankunit. This may cause fire or breakdown.




3.2 Regulation Notices 3

3.2 Regulation Notices

3.2.1 Laser Safety

This product employs a Class 3B laser diode having maximum power of 15 mW and wavelength of 785-800nm.

This product is certified as a Class 1 laser product. Since the laser beam is concealed by protective housings,the product does not emit hazardous laser radiation as long as the product is operated according to the in-structions in this manual.



Regulation Notices3


3.2

For Denmark users

7

ADVARSELUsynlig laserstråling ved åbning, når sikkerhedsafbrydere er ude af funktion. Undgå udsættelse forsråling. Klasse 1 laser produkt der opfylder IEC 60825-1 sikkerheds kravene.

- Dette er en halvlederlaser. Laserdiodens højeste styrke er 15 mW og bølgelængden er 785-800 nm.

For Norway users

7

ADVARSEL!Dersom apparatet brukes på annen måte enn spesifisert I denne bruksanvisning, kan brukeren ut-settes for usynlig laserstråling som overskrider grensen for laser klass 1.

- Dette en halvleder laser. Maksimal effekt till laserdiode er 15 mW og bøkgelengde er 785-800 nm.

For Finland, Sweden users

LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE

KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT

7

VAROITUSLaitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin tässä käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa käyttäjänturvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle.

- Tämä on puolijohdelaser. Laserdiodin suurin teho on 15 mW ja aallonpituus on 785-800 nm.

7

VARNINGOm apparaten används på annat sätt än I denna bruksanvisning specificerats, kan användaren utsät-tas för osynlig laserstrålning, som överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1.

- Det här är en halvledarlaser. Den maximala effekten för laserdioden är 15 mW och våglängden är785-800 nm.

3.2.2 Ozone Release

During print operation, a small quantity of ozone is released. This amount is not large enough to harm anyoneadversely. However, be sure the room where the machine is being used has adequate ventilation, especiallyif you are printing a high volume of materials, or if the machine is being used continuously over a long period.




3.2 Regulation Notices 3

3.2.3 Electromagnetic Interference

This product must be used with a shielded network cable and shielded USB interface cable.

The use of non-shield cables is likely to result in interference with radio communications and is prohibitedunder CISPR 22 and local rules.

For European users

This product complies with the following EU directives:

2004/108/EC and 2006/95/EC

This declaration is valid for the areas of the European Union (EU) or EFTA only.

This device must be used with a shielded network cable and shielded USB interface cable. The use of non-shielded cables is likely to result in interference with radio communications and is prohibited under2004/108/EC rules.

CE Marking (Declaration of Conformity) for Users of the European Union (EU)

This product complies with the following EU directives:

2004/108/EC and 2006/95/EC directives.

This declaration is valid for the area of the European Union.

This device must be used with a shielded network (10 Base-T/100 Base-TX) cable and a shielded parallel ca-ble. The use of non-shielded cables is likely to result in interference with radio communications and is pro-hibited under CISPR rules and local rules.

USER INSTRUCTIONS FCC PART 15 - RADIO FREQUENCY DEVICES (For U.S.A. Users)

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant toPart 15 of the FCC Rules.

These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment

is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequencyenergy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interfer-ence to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful in-terference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

7 WARNINGThe design and production of this unit conform to FCC regulations, and any changes or modifications

must be registered with the FCC and are subject to FCC control. Any changes made by the purchaseror user without first contacting the manufacturer will be subject to penalty under FCC regulations.

- This device must be used with a shielded network (10 Base-T/100 Base-TX) cable and a shielded par-allel cable. The use of non-shielded cables is likely to result in interference with radio communicationsand is prohibited under FCC rules.

For users in countries not subject to Class B regulations

7 WARNINGThis is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference inwhich case the user may be required to take adequate measures.

- This device must be used with a shielded network (10 Base-T/100 Base-TX) cable and a shielded par-allel cable. The use of non-shielded cables is likely to result in interference with radio communicationsand is prohibited under CISPR rules and local rules.



Regulation Notices3


3.2

For German users

Maschinenlarminformations -Verordnung - 3. GPSGV, 06.01.2004:

Der Höchste Schalldruckpegel beträegt 85 dB(A) oder weniger nach ISO 7779.




3.3 Warning and Caution Labels 3

3.3 Warning and Caution Labels

This machine has warning label, caution labels and indicators for safety precaution in the following location.These labels and indicators advise you to pay special attention to avoid any dangerous situations or seriousinjury when you replace the units.

7

CAUTION

Do not remove warning or caution labels!- Should any warning or caution label be removed, you may fail to check a specific part to be alert forunexpected trouble or injury. If you find any warning or caution label removed or illegible due to soilage,please contact your service representative.

3.3.1 Caution Label on Fusing Part of Fixing Conveyance Unit

7

CAUTIONDO NOT touch the fusing part of the fixing conveyance unit. Otherwise, you may get burned.

- Please be especially careful in withdrawing the fixing conveyance unit or opening the fusing part.



Warning and Caution Labels3


3.3

3.3.2 Caution Label on Fixing Conveyance Unit

7

CAUTIONDO NOT put your hand or arm between the main body and the fixing conveyance unit.

- Touching connecting terminals of electric parts may damage the machine or cause unexpected trouble.Please do not try to work yourself, but contact your service representative.

3.3.3 Caution Label on Hinges of ADF

7

CAUTIONDO NOT insert your fingers into the two ADF hinge portions. Otherwise, you may be injured.

- Please be careful when opening or closing the ADF.





3.3.4 Caution Label on Toner Recovery Box

7

WARNINGNEVER throw the toner recovery box into a fire.

- Otherwise, the toner may ignite and cause a dangerous situation.





3.3

3.3.5 Caution Label on Perfect Binder PB-503

7

CAUTIONDO NOT touch the paste tank unit. Otherwise, you may get burned.

- Please be especially careful if you push the paste tank unit backward in place.





3.3.6 Caution Label on Finisher FS-531/Finisher FS-621

7

CAUTIONDO NOT put your hand on the top of printed sheets when removing them from the primary (main) tray .

- Failure to do so may cause unexpected injury, such as getting your fingers squeezed between the mainbody and the primary (main) tray going upward. Be sure to hold both front and rear sides of paperwhen removing printed sheets from the tray.





3.3

3.3.7 Caution Label on Large Capacity Unit LU-202

7

CAUTIONDO NOT put your hand into the three holes on the tray bottom plate.

- Failure to do so may cause unexpected injury, such as getting your hand squeezed. Be especially care-ful when loading paper.

3.3.8 Caution Labels on Multi Punch GP-501

7

WARNING- This safety message means you could get an electrical shock because disconnecting power from this

section does not cut off power from adjacent sections of the machine.

7 WARNING- This safety message means that you might get seriously hurt or killed if you open the product and ex-

pose yourself to hazardous voltage. NEVER remove the screws on covers. ALWAYS refer service re-

quirements to qualified service personnel.




3.4 Installation Space 3

3.4 Installation Space

Allow sufficient space for facilitating copy operation, changing parts, and periodic inspection. Leave an ad-equate space behind the machine to let hot air out from the rear fan.

The whole machine may weigh approx. 1,882 kg (3,875.7 lb) at maximum, depending on the combination ofoptions. Be sure to choose a level and solid floor for the installation place.

All units used in the illustrations are mm.



Installation Space3


3.4

The total width shown are in mm and except Image Controller IC-306.







Installation Space3


3.4







Installation Space3


3.4







Installation Space3


3.4







Installation Space3


3.4







Installation Space3


3.4







Operation Precautions3


3.5

3.5 Operation Precautions

To ensure the optimum performance of this machine, observe the precautions described below.

Power source

The power source requirements are as follows.

Use a power source with as little voltage or frequency fluctuations as possible.

Operating environment

The environmental requirements for correct operation of the machine are as follows.

- Operating temperature: 10°C (50°F) to 30°C (86°F)

- Humidity: 10% to 80%

Storage of copies

To store copies, follow the recommendation listed below.

- Copies that are to be kept for a long time should be stored where they are not exposed to light or hightemperature in order to prevent them from fading or sticking together.

- Adhesive that contains solvent (e.g., spray glue) may dissolve the toner on copies.

Ozone release

During print operation, a small quantity of ozone is released. This amount is not large enough to harm anyoneadversely. However, be sure the room where the machine is being used has adequate ventilation, especiallyif you are printing a high volume of materials, or if the machine is being used continuously over a long period.

Destination North America Europe, Southeast Asia, Australia

Voltage 208 V to 240 V AC 220 V to 240 V AC

Frequency 60 Hz 50-60 Hz




3.5 Operation Precautions 3

Precaution for use of Folding Unit and Finisher

The primary (main) tray of Folding Unit FD-503, Finisher FS-521, Finisher FS-531, or of Finisher FS-612 gradually goes down while printed materials output. DO NOT allow any object to interfere with the operationof the tray on the left side of the staple finisher, as any interference may cause damage to the staple finisher.



Operation Precautions3


3.5



4Preparation for Use






4.1 Machine Configuration 4

4 Preparation for Use

4.1 Machine Configuration

4.1.1 External Machine Items



Machine Configuration4


4.1





No. Name Description

1 ADF DF-622 (option) Automatically feeds multiple originals one sheet at atime to the original glass for scanning.

2 Sub power switch Turns machine power on/off when pressed.

3 Port (type A) (USB 2.0/1.1 compati-ble)

Used to connect devices such as backup driver, key-board, and mouse.

This port is available for low-power devices only.Please provide an external supply of power for devic-es that require a large amount of power.

4 Touch panel Displays screens such as the Machine Screen to allowvarious settings and machine operations. Also, oper-ation or troubleshooting procedures can be provided.

5 Control panel Used for various settings and machine operations.

6 Toner access door Opens to allow toner supply.

7 Toner access door handle Pulled to the right to open the toner access door.

8 Tray 1 Holds 500 sheets (80 g/m2 ) of printing paper.

9 Tray 2 Holds 500 sheets (80 g/m2 ) of printing paper.

10 Tray 3 Holds 500 sheets (80 g/m2 ) of printing paper.11 Main body front door handle Pulled to the left to open the main body front door.

12 Main body front door Opens to allow removal of mishandled paper or toturn on/off the main power switch.

13 Original cover (option) Opens to place an original on the original glass, thencloses to hold it in position.

14 Work Table WT-508 (option) Provides a convenient workspace for documents be-fore and after copying.

15 Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray MB-504 (op-tion)

Opens to use copy paper of the other sizes or typesthan those loaded in the main body trays. Up to 250sheets (80 g/m2 ) can be loaded.

16 Toner recovery door Opens to allow replacement of toner recovery box.17 Right side door Opens rightward for removal of mishandled paper.

18 Output Tray OT-502 (option) Holds sets output in non offset mode.

19 Image Controller IC-601 (option) Mounted to use this machine as a printer.

20 Network port (10 Base-T, 100Base-T, 1000 Base-T)

Connected with an Ethernet cable to operate the ma-chine, or to use the machine as a network print-er/scanner.

21 Port (type B) (USB 2.0/1.1 compati-ble)

Used to operate as a USB-connected printer.

22 Image controller connection port Used to connect the image controller by cable.

23 HDD cover (option) Mounted with 6 HDDs.

24 Power cord Supplies the main body with electric power.

25 Dust proof filter Attached for cooling fan in order to keep out dust.





4.1

4.1.2 Internal Machine Items





7 WARNINGDO NOT THROW the used toner recovery box into a fire!

- The fusing part on the left side of the fixing unit is very hot. If you put your hand into the fusing part, youmay get burned. Please be especially careful in withdrawing the conveyance fixing unit.

7

CAUTIONDO NOT put your hand into the fixing unit.

- Otherwise, you may get burned. Be especially careful when removing mishandled paper.

7 CAUTIONDO NOT put your hand or arm between the main body and conveyance fixing unit.

- Connecting terminals of electric parts are located on the rear side of the conveyance fixing unit, andtouching them may damage the machine. Also, if you put your hand or arm between the main body andconveyance fixing unit, unexpected trouble may be caused. Please do not try to work yourself, but con-

tact your service representative.


1 Main power switch Used only by service representative to turn the ma-chine power on/off. Be sure not to turn it off in usualoperation.

2 Total counter Indicates the total number of prints made.

3 Black print counter Indicates the total number of black prints made.

4 Toner access door Opens upward to allow toner supply.

5 Toner bottle (Y, M, C, K) Supplies the main body with toner.

6 Conveyance fixing unit Pulled out for removal of mishandled paper. For han-dling levers and knobs of the conveyance fixing unit,follow the instruction on the screen to be displayedwhen paper misfeed occurs.

7 Drum unit Forms the copy image.

8 Lever [M1] Opened leftward to withdraw the conveyance fixingunit for removal of mishandled paper.

9 Fixing unit Fuses the toner onto paper.

10 Lock release lever Pulled up to release the lock in order to move side

guides.11 Rear guide Aligned to the rear edge of loaded paper.

12 Side guides Aligned to the edges of loaded paper.

13 Feed roller Feeds printing paper sheet by sheet to the printingunit.





4.1

4.1.3 Relay Unit RU-509






1 Relay Unit RU-509 front door Opens to allow removal of mishandled paper or sup-ply of water to the humidifier tank of Humidifier HM-102.

2 Lever [RU1] Opens rightward for removal of mishandled paper.

3 Lever [RU2] Opens downward for removal of mishandled paper.

4 Lever [RU3] Opens leftward for removal of mishandled paper.

5 Knob [RU4] Turned clockwise for removal of mishandled paper.

6 Lever [RU5] Opens upward for removal of mishandled paper.

7 Knob [RU6] Turned for removal of mishandled paper.

8 Lever [RU7] Pressed downward and then opened upper-rightwardfor removal of mishandled paper.



11 Jam position display Indicates the position of mishandled paper by LEDlamps.

12 Humidifier HM-102 (option) Humidifies both front and back sides of printing paperin order to flatten it out.

13 Handle [HM1] Held to withdraw the unit for removal of mishandledpaper inside the Humidifier HM-102.

14 Lever [HM2] Opens rightward for removal of mishandled paper.

15 Lever [HM3] Opens downward for removal of mishandled paper.

16 Knob [HM4] Turned counterclockwise for removal of mishandledpaper.

17 Handle [HM5] Opens upward for removal of mishandled paper.

18 Humidifier tank Supplied with water for humidification.

19 Humidifier tank cap Opens to allow supply of water to the humidifiertank.





4.1

4.1.4 Control Panel Layout


1 Keypad Enters numeric values.

2 Reset Restores the machine to the initial settings.

3 Power LED Lights up in red when the main power switch isturned on, then turns green when the sub powerswitch is turned on.

4 Data LED Flashes while the machine is receiving print data.

5 Interrupt Stops copying/printing/scanning in progress to allowa simple copying job.

6 Stop Ceases the machine operation; deletes the storedmemory.

7 Proof Copy Used to check the adjustments made on the Quality Adjustment Screen.

8 Start Activates various machine operations.

9 Start LED Lights up in blue when machine operation is available.It turns orange if any operation cannot be started.

10 C (Clear) Allows change in entered numeric value.

11 Access Sets the machine to allow the operation only when auser/account name and password are entered, if userauthentication or account track function is activated.

12 Mode Check Used to check settings of the print job in progress orthose currently made.

19

18

17

16

15 14 13 12 11

20

9 8

7

6

5

4

3

1

2

10





7

CAUTIONDo not press hard or pointed objects against the touch panel on the control panel.

- Otherwise, the glass may be scratched or break and you may be injured. Use fingers to operate thetouch panel.

7 CAUTIONStop the operation immediately when the Service Call Screen is displayed and copying cannot be continued

any more.- Otherwise, an unexpected trouble may be caused. Write down the report code as stated on the second

line of the message, turn off the sub power switch and main power switch in this order, then disconnectfrom the power socket. Contact your service representative and inform them of the report code.

NOTICE Be sure not to turn off the main power switch in usual operation.

Be sure not to turn off the main power switch before turning off the sub power switch .

Be sure not to turn off the main power switch while the following messages are displayed after turning offthe sub power switch .

[Cooling in progress / Power will be off when completed]

[Power off in progress / Please do not turn the main power switch off] Turning off the main power switch with these messages displayed may cause serious machine trouble suchas toner fixation.

d ReferenceSee page 4-48 for how to turn off the power.

13 Utility/Counter Displays the Utility Menu Screen and variouscounters.

14 Mode Memory Registers/Recalls the desired copy settings. Also re-calls previous job settings.

15 Accessibility Adjusts the response time in touch panel and controlpanel key operation.

16 Help Displays the Help Screen that provides information onhow to operate the screen currently displayed on thetouch panel. Also provides information on various supplies anddisposals when pressed with the Machine Screen dis-played.

17 Brightness adjustment dial Turned to adjust the brightness of the touch panel.

18 Power Save Enables temporary use of the machine when thePower Save LED is lit. Also, activates power-savingmode when pressed while the machine is inactive.

19 Power Save LED Lights when any power-saving mode is activated, ormachine power is off due to the timer function.

20 Touch panel Displays various screens to allow the function setting.






4.1

4.1.5 Standard/Optional Equipment for bizhub PRESS C6000/C7000/C7000P

d ReferenceDF-622 and OC-506 are only for bizhub PRO C6000/C7000 and bizhub PRESSC6000/C7000.









4.1









4.1









4.1

4.1.6 Paper Feeder Unit PF-602






1 Tray left side door Opens for removal of mishandled paper from themain body left side door or from the paper feederunit trays.

2 Tray left side door knob Held to open the tray left side door.

3 Upper tray (tray 4) Holds 3,000 sheets (80 g/m2 ) of standard, custom, or

tab paper sizes. Load paper of the weight from 64 to256 g/m2.

4 Lower tray (tray 5) Holds 3,000 sheets (80 g/m2 ) of standard, custom, ortab paper sizes. Postcards can be loaded. Load paperof the weight from 64 to 300 g/m2.

5 Lever [PF5] Opens leftward for removal of mishandled paper.

6 Lateral conveyance door Opens upper-leftward for removal of mishandled pa-per.

7 Lever [PF2] Opens upper-leftward for removal of mishandled pa-per.

8 Knob [PF4] Turned for removal of mishandled paper.

9 Lever [PF3] Opens upward for removal of mishandled paper.

10 Vertical conveyance door Opens leftward for removal of mishandled paper.

11 Lever [PF1] Opens leftward for removal of mishandled paper.

12 Feed roller Feeds copy paper sheet by sheet into the main body.

13 Small size guides (2 pieces) Opened inward for paper of the width less than139.7 mm.

14 Air nozzle Blows air to slightly float the paper.

15 Guide fixing knobs (4 pieces) Turned to move or fix the side guides.

16 Paper size indicator Indicates an appropriate position of side guides forthe paper size to be loaded.

17 Side guides (2 pieces) Aligned to the edges of loaded paper.

18 Side guide lock release lever Pushed backward to release the lock in order to moveside guides.

19 Side guide knobs (2 pieces) Held together with the side guide lock release lever in order to move the side guides.

20 Rear guide Aligned to the rear edge of loaded paper.

21 Rear guide lock release lever Pushed to release the lock in order to move the rearguide.

22 Tray handle Held to withdraw the tray.





4.1

4.1.7 Large Capacity Unit LU-202


1 LCU conveyance lever Opens downward for removal of mishandled paper.

2 LCU top door Opens to allow paper supply or removal of mishan-

dled paper.3 LCU left side door Opens to allow removal of mishandled paper.

4 Bottom plate lowering button Pressed to lower the tray bottom plate to allow papersupply.

5 Feed roller Feeds copy paper into the main body.

6 Side guides Hold the sides of loaded paper.

7 Side guide knobs Turned to move or fix the side guides.

8 Rear guide Hold the rear end of loaded paper.

9 Rear guide knob Turned to move or fix the rear guide.

10 Tray bottom plate Goes up automatically as paper supply becomes low.

Press bottom plate lowering button to lower it.





4.1.8 Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray MB-504


1 Side guides (2 pieces) Aligned to the edges of loaded paper.

2 Paper size indicator Indicates an appropriate position of side guides forthe paper size to be loaded.

3 Auxiliary guide Pulled out to load large paper sizes.





4.1

4.1.9 ADF (Automatic Document Feeder)





7 CAUTIONDO NOT insert your fingers into the two ADF hinge portions.

- Otherwise, you may be injured. Please be careful when opening or closing the ADF.

4.1.10 Original Cover OC-506


1 Left original conveyance cover Opens leftward to allow removal of mishandled origi-nal.

2 ADF original scale Indicates available original sizes, face to be placed,and unsuitable originals.

3 Original guides Aligned to the edges of loaded originals.

4 Original feed tray Loaded with the original to be scanned. Up to 100sheets can be set. Opens upward to allow removal ofmishandled original.

5 Original catch tray Holds the scanned original. Opens upward to allowremoval of mishandled original.

6 Conveyance knob Turned clockwise to feed mishandled original.

7 Right original conveyance cover Opens rightward to allow removal of mishandled orig-inal.

8 Reversed original catch tray Allows removal of mishandled original.

9 ADF guide cover Automatically positions the original on the originalglass. Or, closed to cover the original positionedmanually on the original glass.

10 Horizontal size guide Measures the original size in horizontal direction.

11 Original glass Scans original images into memory.

12 Vertical size guide Measures the original size in vertical direction.

No. Name Description1 Original folder Stores originals temporarily.

2 Original cover handle Held to open or close the original cover.

3 Original cover Opens to place an original onto the original glass,then closes to copy it.





4.1

4.1.11 Folding Unit FD-503





External view of Folding Unit FD-503

Internal view of Folding Unit FD-503


1 Primary (main) tray Holds folded or punched sets.

2 Fold mode tray Holds sets output in Tri-Fold-in, Tri-Fold-out, DoubleParallel, or Gate mode.

3 Coordinating stopper Holds double-parallel- or gate-folded sets in order to

prevent them from collapsing.

4 Lower tray Holds cover sheets.

5 Lower tray guides Hold cover sheets to fix the position.

6 Upper tray Holds cover sheets.

7 Upper tray guides Hold cover sheets to fix the position.

8 Upper cover handle Opens to allow removal of mishandled paper.

9 Folding unit control panel Manually operates the Folding Unit FD-503, FinisherFS-521, and Saddle Stitcher SD-506.

10 Folding Unit FD-503 front door Opens to allow removal of mishandled paper or wastepaper punched out.


11 Lever [FD1] Opens leftward for removal of mishandled paper.

12 Lever [FD2] Opens leftward for removal of mishandled paper.


14 Scrap box Withdrawn for removal of waste paper punched out.

15 Lever [FD6] Opens rightward for removal of mishandled paper.


17 Handle [FD11] Held to withdraw the unit for removal of mishandledpaper inside the folding unit.

18 Knob [FD3] Turned counterclockwise to ease removal of mishan-dled paper inside the folding unit.


20 Lever [FD13] Opens upward to allow removal of mishandled paperinside the folding unit.


22 Knob [FD8] Turned clockwise to ease removal of mishandled pa-per inside the folding unit.




26 Lever [FD15] Opens leftward to allow removal of mishandled paperinside the folding unit.

27 Lever [FD16] Opens leftward to allow removal of mishandled paperinside the folding unit.

28 Knob [FD5] Turned clockwise to ease removal of mishandled cov-

er paper.





4.1

4.1.12 Saddle Stitcher SD-506





External view of Saddle Stitcher SD-506

Internal view of Saddle Stitcher SD-506


1 Saddle Stitcher SD-506 secondary(sub) tray

Holds sets not processed by Saddle Stitcher SD-506.

2 Multi Tri-Fold mode outlet cover han-dle

Opens upward for removal of mishandled paper.

3 Multi Tri-Fold mode tray Holds sets output in Multi Tri-Fold mode.

4 Secondary (sub) tray Holds sets delivered from the machine on the rightside of Saddle Stitcher SD-506.

5 Saddle Stitcher SD-506 right sidedoor

Opens to allow removal of mishandled paper.

6 Saddle stitcher tray Withdrawn to hold sets output in Fold & Staple or Mul-ti Half Fold mode.

7 Trim scrap box Withdrawn for removal of waste paper.

8 Saddle Stitcher SD-506 left side door Opens to allow staple supply or removal of mishan-dled paper.


9 Lever [SD11] Opens to allow removal of mishandled paper insidethe folding unit.

10 Lever [SD3] Opens downward for removal of mishandled paper.

11 Handle [SD10] Held to withdraw the drawer for removal of mishan-dled paper inside the folding unit.

12 Lever [SD2] Opens upward for removal of mishandled paper.

13 Lever [SD1] Opens leftward for removal of mishandled paper.

14 Knob [SD6] Turned clockwise to feed mishandled paper to thefolding unit.


16 Lever [SD7] Opens rightward for removal of mishandled paper.

17 Handle [SD8] Opens the cover to allow removal of mishandled pa-per.

18 Lever [SD9] Opens upward for removal of mishandled paper.

19 Stapling unit Staples folded sets.

20 Knob [SD15] Turned clockwise to feed mishandled paper.

21 Lever [SD5] Opens leftward for removal of mishandled paper.

22 Lever [SD4] Opens downward for removal of mishandled paper.





4.1

4.1.13 Finisher FS-521






1 Finisher FS-521 front door Opens to allow staple supply and removal of mishan-dled paper or jammed staples.

2 Primary (main) tray Holds non offset, offset, or stapled sets.

3 Exit guides Neatly aligns offset sets, or sets punched/folded byFolding Unit FD-503.

4 Secondary (sub) tray Holds sets output in non offset mode.

5 Suspension button Pressed to suspend the current output job in order totake out printed sheets from the tray. To restart theoutput job, press Start on the control panel.

6 Lever [FS1] Opens leftward for removal of mishandled paper.

7 Lever [FS2] Opens upward for removal of mishandled paper.

8 Lever [FS4] Opens leftward for removal of mishandled paper.

9 Lever [FS5] Opens downward for removal of mishandled paper.

10 Knob [FS6] Turned clockwise to feed mishandled paper to thestapler unit.


12 Handle [FS8] Withdraws the unit to allow removal of mishandledpaper.

13 Knob [FS7] Turned counterclockwise to ease removal of mishan-dled paper.





4.1

4.1.14 Perfect Binder PB-503





External view of Perfect Binder PB-503

Internal view of perfect binder tray front door


1 Paste hopper cover Opens for supply of paste pellets.

2 Exhaust fan Exhausts air from Perfect Binder PB-503.

3 Secondary (sub) tray Holds sets output being processed by Perfect BinderPB-503.

4 Perfect Binder PB-503 front door Opens to allow removal of mishandled paper andwaste trimmings.

5 Cover tray Holds cover paper for perfect binding.

6 Perfect binder tray window Allows you to check the sets output to the perfectbinder tray.If the sets are piled on the right side of the perfectbinder tray, press the feeding button to feed them tothe carriage.

7 Perfect binder tray front door Opens to take out the bound sets from the tray.

8 Feeding button Feeds bound sets to the carriage.

9 Paper jam indicator Lights when a paper jam occurs in conveying sheets

output from the finishing section of Perfect BinderPB-503.


10 Book holding plate Aligned to output books to prevent them from collaps-ing during portage.

11 Carriage Carries perfect-bound books out from Perfect BinderPB-503.

12 Book stopper Inserted to an appropriate stopper positioning hole toprevent output books from collapsing during portage.

13 Book holding plate lever Moved to align the book holding plate to outputbooks.





4.1

Conveyance section


14 Conveyance section cover Opens to allow removal of mishandled paper whenpaper jam indicator lights.

15 Knob [PB14] Turned counterclockwise to ease removal of mishan-

dled paper.





Internal view of perfect binder front door

Internal view of cover tray

7

CAUTIONDO NOT touch the glue tank unit.

- The internal glue tank unit is very hot. If you touch them, you may get burned. Please be especially care-ful when you push the glue tank unit backward in place.


16 Body set release knob in clamp unit Turned clockwise to take out the body set fixed in theclamp unit.

17 Knob [PB6] Turned clockwise to feed the body set to the clampunit for removal of mishandled paper.

18 Lever [PB7] Turned clockwise to withdraw the clamp unit for re-moval of body set mishandled in the clamp unit.

19 Knob [PB2] Turned counterclockwise to feed the mishandled pa-per into the secondary (sub) tray.

20 Lever [PB3] Opens downward for removal of mishandled bodyset.

21 Lever [PB1] Opens upward for removal of mishandled body set.

22 Lever [PB12] Opens upward for removal of mishandled body set.

23 Lever [PB4] Opens leftward to allow removal of mishandled coversheet.

24 Lever [PB5] Opens leftward with the trim scrap box drawn out for

removal of mishandled cover sheet.25 Knob [PB13] Turned clockwise for removal of mishandled cover

sheet.

26 Trim scrap box Withdrawn for removal of waste trimmings.

27 Knob [PB11] Turned downward to let the binding unit down for re-moval of mishandled paper.


29 Knob [PB8] Turned clockwise for removal of cover sheet from thebinding unit.

30 Binding unit release knob Turned downward for removal of cover sheet from the

binding unit in the top position.31 Knob [PB9] Turned counterclockwise to release the cover fixing

plate for removal of mishandled paper.

32 Knob [PB10] Turned clockwise to release the cover fixing plate forremoval of mishandled paper.


33 Air nozzle Blows air to avoid feeding multiple cover sheets at atime.

34 Feed roller Feeds cover paper sheet by sheet to Perfect BinderPB-503.

35 Lock release lever Pushed backward to release the lock in order to moveside guides.

36 Rear guide Aligned to the rear edge of loaded paper.

37 Side guides Aligned to the edges of loaded paper.





4.1

4.1.15 Large Capacity Stacker LS-505







2 Top cover handle (left) Opens to allow removal of mishandled paper.

3 Top cover handle (right) Opens to allow removal of mishandled paper.

4 Paper removal indicator Lights while the stacker goes down when paper re-moval button is pressed.

5 Paper removal button Pressed to take out printed sheets from the stacker.

6 Large Capacity Stacker LS-505 frontdoor

Opens to take out printed sheets from the stacker.

7 Lever [LS7] Opens to allow removal of mishandled paper.

8 Handle [LS6] Opens to allow removal of mishandled paper.

9 Knob [LS3] Turned clockwise to feed mishandled paper to thestacker.

10 Knob [LS2] Turned clockwise to feed mishandled paper to thesecondary (sub) tray .

11 Knob [LS4] Turned clockwise to feed mishandled paper to the

outlet.12 Lever [LS1] Opens downward for removal of mishandled paper.


14 Stacker Holds sets output in non offset or offset mode.

15 Lever [LS5] Opens downward for removal of mishandled paper.

16 Carriage Carries output sheets together with the stacker.

17 Paper holder Mounted with paper stopper for holding outputsheets.

18 Paper stopper Holds output sheets to prevent them collapsing.





4.1

4.1.16 Finisher FS-531 (Punch Kit PK-512/PK-513)





7 CAUTIONDO NOT put your hand on the top of printed sheets when removing them from the primary (main) tray.

- Failure to do so may cause unexpected injury, such as getting your fingers squeezed between the mainbody and the tray going upward. Please be sure to hold both front and rear sides of paper when remov-ing printed sheets from the tray.


1 Finisher door Opens for staple supply, removal of mishandled pa-per, and also for removal of waste paper if the ma-chine is mounted with Punch Kit PK-512/PK-513.

2 Primary (main) tray Holds non offset, offset, or stapled sets.


4 Lever [FN4] Opens rightward for removal of mishandled paper.

5 Lever [FN1] Opens leftward for removal of mishandled paper.

6 Knob [FN3] Turned for removal of mishandled paper.

7 Lever [FN2] Opens downward for removal of mishandled paper.


9 Knob [FN7] Turned for removal of mishandled paper.

10 Handle [FN6] Withdraws the unit for removal of mishandled paper inthe stacker unit, or for staple supply.

11 Punch Kit PK-512/PK-513 (option) Punches file holes in output sheets.

12 Staple cartridge Removed for staple supply and added with staples.





4.1






External view of Finisher FS-612

Internal view of Finisher FS-612

7 CAUTIONDO NOT put your hand on the top of printed sheets when removing them from the primary (main) tray.

- Failure to do so may cause unexpected injury, such as getting your fingers squeezed between the mainbody and the tray going upward. Please be sure to hold both front and rear sides of paper when remov-ing printed sheets from the tray.


1 Finisher FS-612 front door Opens for staple supply, removal of mishandled pa-per, and also for removal of waste paper if the ma-chine is mounted with Punch Kit PK-512/PK-513.

2 Fold/Staple mode tray Holds sets output in Fold & Staple, Half Fold, or Tri-

Fold mode.3 Primary (main) tray Holds non offset, offset, or stapled sets.





7 Knob [FN3] Turned to allow removal of mishandled paper.

8 Punch Kit PK-512/PK-513 (option) Punches file holes in output sheets.9 Lever [FN2] Opens downward for removal of mishandled paper.

10 Punch kit scrap box (option) Holds waste paper punched out.

11 Stacker unit Mounted with stapler and devices for making foldedand stapled, half-folded, or tri-folded sets.

12 Knob [FN7] Turned to allow removal of mishandled paper.

13 Lever [FN8] Opens leftward with the stacker unit drawn out for re-moval of mishandled paper.


15 Handle [FN6] Withdraws the stacker unit for removal of mishan-dled paper in the stacker unit, or for staple supply.


17 Staple cartridge Removed for staple supply and added with staples.






4.1

4.1.18 Post Inserter PI-502


1 Post inserter control panel Manually controls post inserter operations.

2 Upper unit release lever Pulled up to slide the upper unit of post inserter left-ward for removal of mishandled paper.

3 Upper tray guides Aligned to cover sheets to fix the position.

4 Upper tray Holds cover sheets.

5 Lower tray Holds cover sheets.

6 Lower tray guides Aligned to cover sheets to fix the position.





4.1.19 Output Tray OT-502


1 Output tray Holds printed sheets.

2 Auxiliary tray Pulled out to hold large paper sizes.





4.1







1 Relay Unit RU-506 front door Opens to allow removal of mishandled paper.

2 Lever [RU1] Opens upward for removal of mishandled paper.

3 Lever [RU2] Turned to allow removal of mishandled paper.


5 Lever [RU3] Turned clockwise to allow removal of mishandled pa-per.

6 Lever [RU4] Turned clockwise to allow removal of mishandled pa-per.






4.1

4.1.21 Multi Punch GP-501 (Die Set DS-508 to DS-516 except DS-514)






1 Multi Punch GP-501 front door Opens to allow replacement of a die set, or removalof punch waste or mishandled paper.

2 Lever [GP1] Opens upward for removal of mishandled paper.

3 Knob [GP3] Turned to allow removal of mishandled paper.

4 Lever [GP2] Opens upper-rightward for removal of mishandled pa-

per.

5 Knob [GP4] Turned clockwise for replacement of a die set or re-moval of mishandled paper.

6 Die set Punches various types of file holes.

7 Scrap box Holds waste paper punched out.

8 Power switch Turned on to use the multi punch.

9 Lever [GP5] Opens downward for removal of mishandled paper.


11 Die set blade position indicator Used to check the position of the die set blade movedby turning knob [GP4] for replacement of the die set

or removal of mishandled paper.12 Lever [GP6] Opens upper-leftward for removal of mishandled pa-

per.


14 Die set rack Stored with die sets.



Turning On/Off the Power4


4.2

4.2 Turning On/Off the Power

This machine has two power switches, namely, main power switch and sub power switch.

4.2.1 Turning On the Power

1 Turn ON the main power switch.

The main power switch is located inside the machine and canbe reached from the left side door.

With the main power switch turned on, the Power LED on thecontrol panel lights in red.

NOTICE The main power switch should normally be kept turned on. Besure not to turn it off/on in usual operation.

2 Turn ON the sub power switch.

The sub power switch is located on the top-right surface ofthe main body.

With the sub power switch turned on, the power LED on thecontrol panel turns green.

3 The Wake-up Screen and Warm-up Screen will be displayed.

A few seconds after the Wake-up Screen appears on the touch panel, the Machine Screen with warm-up image will be displayed in succession.

The warm-up takes approx. 7.0 minutes.

OFF ON

OFF

ON




4.2 Turning On/Off the Power 4

% Pressing the [COPY] tab on the screen during warm-up displays the Copy Screen. When the mes-sage [Ready to set reserve job] appears on the Copy Screen, you can set reserve jobs and scanoriginals while the machine is warming up, so that the machine should start printing immediately

after warm-up is completed.

4 The message [Ready to print] appears on the Machine Screen to inform you that printing job is nowavailable.

% If a key counter or copy card is required, follow the instruction on the screen.



Turning On/Off the Power4


4.2

4.2.2 Turning Off the Power

NOTICE Be sure not to turn off the main power switch in usual operation.

Be sure not to turn off the main power switch before turning off the sub power switch .

Be sure not to turn off the main power switch while the following messages are displayed after turning offthe sub power switch .


[Power off in progress / Please do not turn the main power switch off]

Turning off the main power switch with these messages displayed may cause serious machine trouble suchas toner fixation.

When turning the main power switch off then on, be sure to wait 10 seconds or longer before turning themain power switch on again. If the main power switch is turned on again within 10 seconds, the machinemay not operate properly.

1 Turn OFF the sub power switch.

The sub power switch is located on the top-right surface ofthe main body. The touch panel and all the LEDs on the con-trol panel other than the Power LED will go out, and the Power

LED will turn red from green.% When the machine is under control of the Weekly Timer

function, do not turn off the sub power switch. Turning offthe sub power switch will deactivate the Weekly Timerfunction.

2 Turn OFF the main power switch.The main power switch is located inside the machine and canbe reached from the left side door.

OFF

ON

OFF ON




4.3 Automatically Resetting the Machine: Auto Reset 4

4.3 Automatically Resetting the Machine: Auto Reset

The machine automatically restores the screen specified as default after a certain period of inactivity. Thisfunction is called Auto Reset.

When Auto Reset is activated, the machine restores not only the default screen but also the initial copy con-ditions.

Setting a time interval As factory default, Auto Reset is programed to function after 1 minute of machine inactivity. The time intervalto activate Auto Reset can be selected from 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9 minutes. Or, you can also deactivatethis function.

Selecting the default screen

The Machine Screen is selected as factory default. The default screen can be selected from the MachineScreen, Hold Job Screen of the Job List Screen, and Reserved Job Screen of the Job List Screen.

d ReferenceThe initial copy conditions can be specified on the Copy Initial Setting Screen accessed from the Utility Menu

Screen. For details, see chapter "12 Utility Menu Screen" .For selection of the time interval to activate Auto Reset, or for selection of the default screen, see chapter

"12 Utility Menu Screen" .



Manually Resetting the Machine: Reset4


4.4

4.4 Manually Resetting the Machine: Reset

When Reset is pressed on the control panel, the machine clears all the copy conditions specified so far andrestores arbitrary settings. This function is called Reset.

Full Auto, Initial, or conditions programed to Mode Memory [30] can be specified as arbitrary settings. Initialis selected as factory default.

Copy conditions specified as Full AutoThese settings cannot be changed except Output Setting.

- Color: Full Color

- Original Setting: Normal

- Quality Adjustment: Standard

- Zoom: 1.000

- Simplex/Duplex: 1->1 ( ADF: ON)

- Application: None

- Output Setting: Selection available in the Utility mode

- Auto Paper: ON

- Image Rotation: ON

Copy conditions specified as Initial

To be specified on the Copy Initial Setting Screen accessed from the Utility Menu Screen

Copy conditions programed to Mode Memory [30]

To be programed by pressing Mode Memory on the control panel

Copy conditions common to the three arbitrary settings

The following settings function in common, irrespective of the selection made from Full Auto, Initial, and con-ditions programed to Mode Memory [30].

- Change User: Yes, No

- ADF Original Direction: Reset, Not Reset- Initial by Key Counter Insert: ON, OFF

- Status Hold When Auto Reset: Keep, Not Keep

- Next Job Staple Setting: Release, Do Not Release

- Original Set/Bind Direction: Release, Do Not Release

d ReferenceFor copy conditions specified as Initial, see the POD Administrator's Reference.

For copy conditions specified as Full Auto or common settings for three arbitrary settings, see the POD Ad-

ministrator's Reference.




4.5 Using Machine When Power Save LED Lights 4

4.5 Using Machine When Power Save LED Lights

If you find the Power Save LED lit, the machine is inactive due to the Power Save or Weekly Timer function.You cannot operate the machine with either of the functions activated.

4.5.1 To enable the machine

1 Press any key on the control panel.

% If the machine makes no response with any key pressed onthe control panel, press Power Save.

If Power Save has been activated, the machine will be ready forprinting.

If Weekly Timer has been activated, the Machine Screen will be

displayed with the message [Weekly timer is temporarily can-celed / Please enter password] in the message area. Enteringthe password allows you to use the machine temporarily. Seepage 4-53 for details.

% The Power Save function has two modes: Auto Low Powerand Auto Shut OFF. See the following description for details.

% Power Save can also be activated manually. See page 4-52 for details.

4.5.2 Automatically Conserving Energy: Auto Low Power

Auto Low Power conserves energy by lowering the power consumption.

This function is activated automatically after a specified period (15 minutes as factory default) of machine in-

activity with the Power Save LED lit, touch panel turned off, and all other LEDs except Start LED on thecontrol panel turned off. The Start LED turns red, while the Power LED keeps green.

% If the same period of time is specified for Auto Low Power and Auto Shut OFF, the machine power willbe shut off. The touch panel will not go off if the Jam Position Screen or screen to operate duplex print-ing is displayed.

d ReferenceThe Utility Menu Screen allows you to deactivate Auto Low Power or to change the set period of time (OFF,

5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 60 minutes, 90 minutes, 120 minutes, 240 minutes). For de-

tails, see chapter "12 Utility Menu Screen" .

To exit Auto Low Power

% Press any key on the touch panel or control panel. The machine returns to be ready for copying.



Using Machine When Power Save LED Lights4


4.5

4.5.3 Automatically Conserving Energy: Auto Shut OFF

Auto Shut OFF achieves further energy conservation by reducing power consumption.

This function follows Auto Low Power after a specified period (90 minutes as factory default) of machine in-activity, with the Power Save LED lit and all other LEDs on the touch panel and control panel turned off.

The Power LED keeps green.

d ReferenceThe Utility Menu Screen allows you to deactivate Auto Shut OFF or to change the set period of time (OFF, 0

minute, 1 minute, 30 minutes, 60 minutes, 90 minutes, 120 minutes, 240 minutes). For details, see chapter

"12 Utility Menu Screen" .

To exit Auto Shut OFF

% Press Power Save on the control panel. The machine returnsto be ready for copying.

4.5.4 Manually Conserving Energy

Follow the procedure below to operate Power Save function (Low Power or Shut Off) manually.

1 Hold down Power Save on the control panel for over a sec-ond.

The following message will be displayed.Using Shut Off mode:

[Entry shut off mode, after 10 sec. / Press key/screen to cancel]

Using Low Power mode:

[Entry low power mode, after 10 sec. / Press key/screen to can-cel]

2 Power Save will be activated.

The Power Save LED lights and the touch panel goes off.

Be sure to hold down Power Save on the control panel for over a second, otherwise Power Save willnot be activated with the following message displayed.

% The machine is initially set to activate the Shut Off mode manually. The Utility Menu Screen allows

you to manually activate the Low Power mode instead. For details, see chapter "12 Utility MenuScreen".

Keep [Power Save] pressed more than one second to enter auto shut off

Keep [Power Save] pressed more than one second to enter auto low power

4.5.5 Limiting Machine Usage: Weekly Timer

Weekly Timer turns a machine on and off at the time specified by the administrator.

When a machine is in OFF condition under control of Weekly Timer, the Power Save LED is lit and machineoperation is unavailable.

d Reference

Weekly Timer settings are provided on the Utility Menu Screen. For details, see chapter "12 Utility MenuScreen" .




4.5 Using Machine When Power Save LED Lights 4

To use the machine temporarily

The following procedure temporarily enables the machine operation. (Timer Interrupt)

1 Press Power Save on the control panel.

The Machine Screen will be displayed along with the message shown below.

[Weekly timer is temporarily canceled / Please enter password $###]

[Please enter desired copy time / 0 hour(s) 05 minute(s)]

If the above message is displayed, proceed to step 3.

% The machine power will be turned off automatically after 5 minutes from this state without any op-eration made.

2 Enter the Timer Interrupt password, then press Start on the control panel.

Enter a 4-digit Timer Interrupt password using the control panel keypad, then press Start.

[Weekly timer is temporarily canceled / Please enter password $###]

% The Timer Interrupt password is to be specified on the Utility Menu Screen. Ask your administratorfor the password.

% If an invalid password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.

3 Set the hour for the interrupt use, then press Start on the control panel.

Enter a 1-digit hour (from 0 to 9) using the control panel keypad, then press Start.


4 Set the minute for the interrupt use, then press Start on the control panel.

Enter a 2-digit minute (from 0 to 59) using the control panel keypad, then press Start.


Copying is now available with the message [Ready to print] displayed on the screen, until the set timeis up.

% To specify a 1-digit minute, enter [0] first to make it two digits. However, you cannot specify the timeshorter than 5 minutes. Entering 0 for hour and a number smaller than 5 for minute will set the minuteat 5. Also, a number larger than 60 is unavailable for minute.

5 When the machine operation is finished within the set period of time, hold down Power Save on thecontrol panel for over a second.

The machine returns to OFF condition.



Making User Authentication/Account Track4


4.6

4.6 Making User Authentication/Account Track

The machine can be set up to provide the following functions after a successful authentication is made byentering user name, user password, account name and account password (one of these, or more than onein combination) specified by the administrator.

- Copy functions: Functions accessible from [COPY] tab

- Scan functions: Functions accessible from [SCAN] tab

- Print functions: Functions for printing

- HDD Hold: Functions accessible from [JOB LIST] tab - [Hold Job], and also from [HDD RECALL] tab

This setting is referred to as the user authentication/account track.

Whenever users attempt to use any functions for which user authentication/account track is set, a prompt isdisplayed to enter credentials to authenticate as a qualified user or account.

0 Users who have been assigned a user name and password may use the machine, including for the func-tions configured by the administrator and for output within the configured upper limit.

0 Users who have been assigned an account name and account password may use the machine, includ-ing for the functions configured by the administrator and for output within the configured upper limit.

0 If public users are allowed to use the machine, you can use this machine as a public user by pressing[Allow] for Public User on the Authentication Method Screen. The administrator configures the functionsavailable for public users and the upper limit for output.

0 Registered user names are listed in the [User List] Screen.0 If the reset function is activated, or Access on the control panel is pressed, it returns to the User

Auth./Account Track Screen even if you are working on the screens that require proper credentials.

0 When Enhanced Security mode is set ON for the machine, the User Auth./Account Track Screen is dis-played every time users attempt to use the functions that require authentication. Passwords less than8 characters are not valid and not authenticated. When you enter a wrong user name or password, youmust wait 5 seconds to reenter it. The [User List] is no longer displayed.

0 User names and user passwords may be up to 64 characters, account names must be 8 characters,and account passwords may be up to 8 characters.

1 Enter the user name, user password, account name, and/or account password, as required.

One of the five screens is displayed according to the settings on the User Auth./Account Track Screen.Please follow the instruction on each screen.

% Enter a user name and a password.

% Enter only a user name when a user password is not set for that user.




4.6 Making User Authentication/Account Track 4

% If the administrator sets Synchronize User/Account Track to Synchronize, users cannot be authen-ticated by entering just their user name and password unless you preliminarily configure the accountname and account password for that user.

% Enter an account password for the corresponding account.% You will be authenticated even if a user name and user password is not set.

% Enter an account name and an account password for the corresponding account.

% You will be authenticated even if a user name and user password is not set.



Making User Authentication/Account Track4


4.6

% Enter a user name, a user password, and an account password.

% Enter a user name, the user password for that user, an account name, and the account passwordfor that account.

2 Press [OK].

The screen you attempt to access will be displayed.

% The message [Copy limit reached] may be displayed and the machine may become unusable.Please contact your administrator.

% If the user or account is not allowed to use the function, the function screen will not be displayed.

3 Start operation.

You can use the machine normally.

% When the reset function is activated, it changes to the Machine Screen. You need to gain authenti-cation again when accessing screens that require authentication.

4 When machine operation is completed, press Access on the control panel.

You need to gain authentication again when accessing screens that require authentication. Otherwise,you cannot access and work on these screens.




4.7 Displaying Operation Guide: Help Message 4

4.7 Displaying Operation Guide: Help Message

This function provides you with the information about the screen currently displayed, such as operating in-structions or comments, in the message area.

With the Machine Screen displayed, the message provides instructions for toner supply, replacing toner re-covery box, adding staples, disposing punch scraps and trimmings, supplying glue pellet, and loading paper.

Help message for operating instructions

1 Display the screen to make the desired setting.

2 Press [ ] at the upper-right corner of the screen, or press Help on the control panel.

The help message will appear in the upper part of the screen.

3 Read the message to check the operation procedure or comments for the screen currently displayed.

% If the current screen does not have any comments, the [ ] key at the upper-right corner of thescreen appears grayed out. In this case, pressing [ ] on the screen or Help on the control panel will not display a help message.

4 Proceed to the next operation.

% It does not matter to proceed to the next operation with the help message displayed on the screen.

% To clear the help message, press [ ] on the screen or Help on the control panel.



Displaying Operation Guide: Help Message4


4.7

Help message for supply/disposal

1 Press the [MACHINE] tab to display the Machine Screen.

2 Press [ ] on the Machine Screen, or press Help on the control panel.

3 Press [Consumable/Scrap] at the lower-right corner of the help message area.

4 Press the desired tab to check the supply/disposal procedure.

% Another section is provided to describe the supply/disposal procedure. For details, see chapter"8 Supplies, Disposals, and Handling".




4.7 Displaying Operation Guide: Help Message 4

5 Proceed to the next operation.

% It does not matter to proceed to the next operation with the help message displayed on the screen.

% To clear the help message, press [ ] on the screen or Help on the control panel.



Adjusting Response Time of Touch Keys: Accessibility 4


4.8

4.8 Adjusting Response Time of Touch Keys: Accessibility

This machine sets a specific interval of time between pressing the touch panel key and machine responsein advance. Press Accessibility on the control panel to select this interval, so that the machine should re-spond to the touch panel key operation only when the key is held down for a specified period of time.

This function is convenient for physically handicapped users who have difficulty in pressing keys with accu-racy.

d ReferenceThe Utility Menu Screen provides the setting for response time. For details, see chapter "12 Utility Menu

Screen"

0 Response time can be selected from Normal, 0.5 second, 1 second, 2 seconds, and 3 seconds.

1 Press Accessibility on the control panel.

The Accessibility LED lights in green to indicate that the spec-ified response time is set on the machine.

% If [Normal] is selected as response time, pressing Accessi-

bility will not make any change in the touch key operation.

2 To deactivate this function, hold down Accessibility on the control panel for over a second.

The Accessibility LED goes off, and normal response time will be restored in touch key operation.



5Paper Information






5.1 Paper Information 5

5 Paper Information

5.1 Paper Information

This machine is equipped with the following trays for loading paper.- Main body trays (trays 1 to 3)

- Paper Feeder Unit PF-602 (trays 4 and 5)

- Large Capacity Unit LU-202 (tray 4)

- Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray MB-504

- Perfect Binder PB-503

- Post inserter (equipped in Folding Unit FD-503 as standard)

- Post Inserter PI-502 (equipped in Finisher FS-612/FS-531 as option)

Also, the following items of equipment are provided to convey/process/deliver paper.

- ADU (Automatic Duplex Unit) (equipped in the main body as standard)

- Finisher FS-521

- Finisher FS-531- Finisher FS-612

- Folding Unit FD-503

- Large Capacity Stacker LS-505

- Saddle Stitcher SD-506

- Multi Punch GP-501

- Punch Kit PK-512/PK-513

- Relay Unit RU-506

- Relay Unit RU-509

- Output Tray OT-502

5.1.1 Paper Weight

The setting or registration/deletion of paper weight to be specified for each paper tray is available in the PaperSetting accessed from the Machine Screen.

NOTICE Be sure to use paper only of the weight specified for the tray; otherwise copy quality may be deteriorated ormachine trouble may occur.

Paper trays Weight

Main body trays (trays 1 to 3) 64 to 209 g/m2: sizes less than 215.9 mm in width and lessthan 279.4 mm in length (such as A5 w or B5 w / v )64 to 256 g/m2: sizes 215.9 mm or larger in width and279.4 mm or larger in length (such as A4 w / v, 8.5 e 11 w / v,B4 w, A3 w )

Paper Feeder Unit PF-602 (trays 4 and 5) Upper tray (tray 4): 64 to 256 g/m2

Lower tray (tray 5): 64 to 300 g/m2

Cover paper for perfect binding: 81 to 220 g/m2

Large Capacity Unit LU-202 64 to 300 g/m2


Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray MB-504 64 to 300 g/m2


Cover tray of Perfect Binder PB-503 81 to 220 g/m2


Post inserter (equipped in Folding UnitFD-503 as standard)

50 to 300 g/m2

Post Inserter PI-502 (equipped inFinisher FS-612/FS-531 as standard)

50 to 200 g/m2



Paper Information5


5.1

*1: Using the post inserter of Folding Unit FD-503

*2: Using the post inserter mounted on Finisher FS-612

NOTICE With any subsequent option connected to Folding Unit FD-503 , finished sets output in Tri-Fold-in, Tri-Fold- out, Double Parallel, or Gate mode are delivered only to the fold mode tray of Folding Unit FD-503 . No othertrays are available.

Equipment Weight

ADU 64 to 300 g/m2

Relay Unit RU-509 64 to 300 g/m2

Finisher FS-521 Secondary (sub)tray

64 to 300 g/m2

Primary (main)

tray

64 to 300 g/m2 (50 to 300 g/m2*1 )

Staple: 64 to 244 g/m2 (50 to 244 g/m2*1 )

Folding Unit FD-503

Fold mode tray Tri-Fold-in, Tri-Fold-out: 64 to 130 g/m2 (50 to 130 g/m2*1 )Double Parallel, Gate: 64 to 91 g/m2 (50 to 91 g/m2*1 )

Primary (main)tray

64 to 300 g/m2

Punch: 64 to 216 g/m2 (50 to 216 g/m2*1 ), double sheetspunched 64 to 91 g/m2 (50 to 91 g/m2*1 )Half-Fold, Tri-Fold-in, Tri-Fold-out, Z-Fold: 64 to 130 g/m2 (50 to 130 g/m2*1 )Double Parallel, Gate: 64 to 91 g/m2 (50 to 91 g/m2*1 )

Large CapacityStacker LS-505

Secondary (sub)tray

64 to 300 g/m2

Stacker 64 to 244 g/m2

Saddle StitcherSD-506

Secondary (sub)tray

64 to 300 g/m2

Saddle stitchertray

Fold & Staple, Trimming: 64 to 244 g/m2

5 sheets folded in Multi Half Fold: 64 to 81 g/m2



Multi tri-foldmode tray

5 sheets folded in Multi Tri-Fold: 64 to 81 g/m2

3 sheets folded in Multi Tri-Fold: 82 to 91 g/m2

Perfect BinderPB-503

Secondary (sub)tray

64 to 300 g/m2

Perfect bindertray

Body: 64 to 105 g/m2

Cover: 81 to 209 g/m2

Conveyance sec-tion

64 to 300 g/m2


50 to 300 g/m2

Primary (main)tray

62 to 300 g/m2

Staple: 62 to 209 g/m2


64 to 300 g/m2 (50 to 300 g/m2*2 )

Fold/Staplemode tray

Fold & Staple, Half-Fold, Tri-Fold: 64 to 105 g/m2 (50 to105 g/m2*2 )

Primary (main)

tray

64 to 300 g/m2 (50 to 300 g/m2*2 )

Staple: 64 to 105 g/m2

(50 to 105 g/m2*2

)Relay Unit RU-506 64 to 300 g/m2

Multi Punch GP-501 75 to 300 g/m2

Punch Kit PK-512/PK-513 (equipped inFinisher FS-612 as option)

60 to 128 g/m2

Output Tray OT-502 64 to 300 g/m2





5.1.2 Paper Tray/Exit Tray Capacity

Paper trays Capacity

Main body trays (trays 1 to 3) 500 sheets (80 g/m2 ) each

Paper Feeder Unit PF-602 (trays 4 and 5) 3,000 sheets (80 g/m2 ) each

Large Capacity Unit LU-202 (tray 4) 3,000 sheets (80 g/m2 )

Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray MB-504 Tray: 250 sheets (80 g/m2, height 27.5 mm)

Cover tray of Perfect Binder PB-503 1,000 sheets (81 g/m2 )500 sheets (209 g/m2 )

Post inserter (equipped in Folding UnitFD-503 as standard)

Upper/Lower tray: 500 sheets (80g/m2 ) each

Post Inserter PI-502 (equipped inFinisher FS-612/FS-531 as option)

Upper/Lower tray: 200 sheets (80g/m2 ) each

Equipment Capacity

ADU Unlimited

Relay Unit RU-509 80 ppm: A4 v, 8.5 e 11 v


200 sheets (80 g/m2 )Z-Fold: 20 sheets (80g/m2 )Half-Fold: 40 sheets (80g/m2 )

Primary (main)tray (non-Staple)

Depends on paper weight/size.See the table on page 5-8. (*1)

Primary (main)tray (Staple)

Max. 1,000 sheets (80g/m2 )2-9 sheets stapled: 75 sets (150 sets for paper width 182-364 mm)10-20 sheets stapled: 50 sets21-30 sheets stapled: 30 sets31-40 sheets stapled: 25 sets41-50 sheets stapled: 20 sets

51-60 sheets stapled: 15 sets61-100 sheets stapled: 10 setsSee the table on page 5-8 for the maximum number of stapledsheets per set. (*2)

Folding Unit FD-503

Primary (main)tray

2,500 sheets: A4 w / v, B5 w / v, 8.5 e 11 w / v, 9 e 11 v1,500 sheets: A3 w, B4 w, Foolscap, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,8.5 e 14 w, SRA3 w, SRA4 w / v, 13 e 19 w500 sheets: A5 w / v, B6 w, 5.5 e 8.5 w / v

Fold mode tray 30 sets or more (all folding types, weight 80 g/m2 or less)To be delivered in order


Secondary (sub)tray

200 sheets (80 g/m2 )Z-Fold: 20 sheets (80 g/m2 )Half-Fold: 40 sheets (80 g/m2 )

Stacker 5,000 sheets (80 g/m2 ): A3 w, B4 w, A4 w / v, Foolscap,13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w,8.5 e 11 w / v, SRA3 w, SRA4 w / v, 9 e 11 v2,000 sheets (80 g/m2 ): B5 v, A5 v3,000 sheets (80 g/m2 ): Coated paper of 380 mm or longer inlength



Paper Information5


5.1


Secondary (sub)tray

200 sheets (80 g/m2 )Z-Fold: 20 sheets (80 g/m2 )Multi Half Fold: 40 sheets (80 g/m2 )

Fold & Staple 64 to 81 g/m2: 50 sheets or 49 sheets+ 1 (200 g/m2 )82 to 91 g/m2: 30 sheets or 29 sheets+ 1 (200 g/m2 )92 to 130 g/m2: 20 sheets or 19 sheets+ 1 (200 g/m2 )

131 to 161 g/m2

: 15 sheets or 14 sheets+ 1 (200 g/m2

)162 to 209 g/m2: 10 sheets210 to 244 g/m2: 5 sheets

Fold & Staple(Coated/Color Spe-cific)

64 to 81 g/m2: 30 sheets or 29 sheets+ 1 (200 g/m2 )82 to 91 g/m2: 15 sheets or 14 sheets+ 1 (200 g/m2 )92 to 130 g/m2: 10 sheets or 9 sheets + 1 (200 g/m2 )131 to 161 g/m2: 5 sheets or 4 sheets + 1 (200 g/m2 )

Fold & Staple (longgrain paper)

64 to 91 g/m2: 30 sheets or 29 sheets+ 1 (200 g/m2 )92 to 130 g/m2: 10 sheets or 9 sheets + 1 (200 g/m2 )131 to 161 g/m2: 5 sheets or 4 sheets + 1 (200 g/m2 )

Trimming Max. 50 sheets (80 g/m2 ) e 2, or {49 sheets (80 g/m2 ) + 1(200 g/m2 )} e 2

Multi Half Fold 3 sheets (82 to 130 g/m2 )2 sheets (131 to 244 g/m2 )Tray capacity: 30 sets (with full-load detection activated)

Multi Tri-Fold 3 sheets (82 to 91 g/m2 )Tray capacity: 20 sets (with full-load detection activated)


Secondary (sub)tray

200 sheets (80 g/m2 ) (with full-load detection activated)

Perfect binder tray 1 set of maximum thickness (approx. 30mm) e 11 e 2 col-umns* (approx. 6,600 sheets, 80 g/m2 )*Automatically shifts to the second column when the first col-umn is detected as full load.

Conveyance sec-tion

Unlimited


Max. 100 sheets


500 sheets (80 g/m2 ) (A5 w / v, B6 w, 5.5 e 8.5 w / v )3,000 sheets (80 g/m2 ) (A4 w / v, B5 w, 8.5 e 11 w / v )1,500 sheets (80 g/m2 ) (SRA3 w, SRA4 w, A3 w, B4 w,12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w, Foolscap)Tray capacity varies depending on paper weight.• Up to 80 g/m2: 1,500 sheets• 81 to 135 g/m2: 1,000 sheets• 136 to 209 g/m2: 700 sheets• 210 to 300 g/m2: 500 sheets

Primary (main)tray (Staple) (*3)

Max. 50 sheets (80 g/m2 ) per set2-9 sheets stapled: 100 sets (150-417 mm in length)/50 sets

(others)10-20 sheets stapled: 50 sets21-30 sheets stapled: 30 sets31-40 sheets stapled: 25 sets41-50 sheets stapled: 20 sets

Equipment Capacity






200 sheets (80 g/m2 )

Primary (main)tray (straight deliv-ery, offset delivery)

2,500 sheets (80 g/m2 ): A4 w / v, B5 w / v, 8.5 e 11 w / v,9 e 11 v1,500 sheets (80 g/m2 ): A3 w, B4 w, Foolscap, 12 e 18 w,11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w, SRA4 w

500 sheets (80 g/m2

): A5 w / v, B6 w, 5.5 e 8.5 w / vPrimary (main)tray (Staple)

Tray capacity:2-9 sheets stapled: 100 sets (paper length 417 mm or less), 50sets (paper length 418 mm or more)10-20 sheets stapled: 50 sets21-30 sheets stapled: 30 sets31-40 sheets stapled: 25 sets41-50 sheets stapled: 20 setsNumber of stapled sheets per set:50 sheets: Plain, Fine (64 to 80 g/m2 )30 sheets: Colored, Coated (64 to 80 g/m2 )30 sheets: Plain, Fine (81 to 105 g/m2 )16 sheets: Colored, Coated (81 to 105 g/m2 )Use recommended paper for Fine, Colored, and Coated. The

above folding capacity applies to the sets of 5.5 mm or less inthickness. Up to two thick covers (200 g/m2 ) can be includedin the maximum number.

Fold/Staple modetray

Number of fold & staple sheets per set:20 sheets: Plain, Fine (64 to 80 g/m2 )20 sheets: Colored, Coated (64 to 80 g/m2 )20 sheets: Plain, Fine (81 to 105 g/m2 )16 sheets: Colored, Coated (81 to 105 g/m2 )Tray capacity of fold and staple:5 sheets folded and stapled: 20 sets (20 pages e 20 sets = 400pages)20 sheets folded and stapled: 5 sets (80 pages e 5 sets = 400pages)

Number of half-folded sheets per set: 3 sheets (64 to105 g/m2 )Tray capacity for half-folded sets:3 sheets folded: 33 sets (12 pages e 33 sets = 396 pages)

Number of tri-folded sheet per set: 1 sheet (64 to 105 g/m2 )Tray capacity for tri-folded sheet: Approx. 50 sheets

Relay Unit RU-506 71 ppm: A4 v70 ppm: 8.5 e 11 v

Multi Punch GP-501 70 ppm: A4 v


Unlimited

Output Tray OT-502 150 sheets

Equipment Capacity



Paper Information5


5.1

Standard height of folded and stapled booklets

The following table shows the standard height of folded and stapled booklets.

*1: Finisher FS-521 primary (main) tray capacity (not stapled)

Large sizes: A3 w, B4 w, Foolscap, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w, SRA3 w, SRA4 w / v,Custom (324mm e 460mm)

Small sizes: A4 w / v, B5 w / v, 8.5 e 11 w / v, 9 e 11 vExtra-small sizes: A5 w / v, B6 w, 5.5 e 8.5 w / v

*2: Finisher FS-521 stapling capacity

Even though a stapled set keeps within the capacity mentioned above, be sure not to exceed the followingthickness:

- 23 mm for paper length of 219 mm or less

- 20 mm for paper length of 220 mm or more

Number of sheets (1 set) Paper sizes

A3 w, 12 e 18 w,11 e 17 w (401 mm or more)

B4 w,8.5 e 14 w (301 mm to

400 mm)

A4 w,8.5 e 11 w (261 mm to

300 mm)

B5 w (260 mm orless)

2 to 5 sheets 35 mm 40 mm 45 mm Not specified

6 to 15 sheets 45 mm 50 mm Not specified Not specified



Paper Weight Large sizes Small sizes (offset) Extra-small sizes

50 to 71 g/m2 500 750 100

72 to 81 g/m2 1500 3000 (1500) 750

82 to 91 g/m2 1000 2000 (1500) 500

92 to 130 g/m2 750 1500 400

131 to 161g/m2 750 1500 350

162 to 216g/m2 500 1000 250

217 to 244g/m2 375 750 200

245 to 300g/m2 375 750 200

Paper Weight Number of sheets per set including a thick cover (200 g/m2 )

Not coated(except Fine paper)

Fine paper Coated/Color Spe-cific

Lengthless than400 mm

Length400 mmor more


321 mmto399 mm

Length400 mmor more


Length400 mmor more

50 to 71 g/m2 100 50 50 20 e 35 35

72 to 81 g/m2 100 50 30 30 30 35 35

82 to 91 g/m2 60 50 30 30 30 35 35

92 to 130 g/m2 50 50 30 30 30 30 30

131 to 161 g/m2 40 40 30 30 30 25 25

162 to 216 g/m2 25 25 25 25 25 20 20

217 to 244 g/m2 25 25 25 25 25 15 15





*3: Finisher FS-531 stapling capacity

* Up to two cover sheets (200g/m2 max.) can be inserted from the post inserter. The stapling capacity men-tioned above includes the number of attached cover sheet.

5.1.3 Paper Size

Paper weight Paper type

Plain Fine Color Specific Coated

64 to 80 g/m2 50 sheets 50 sheets 50 sheets 40 sheets

81 to 105g/m2 40 sheets 30 sheets 30 sheets 25 sheets

106 to 135g/m2 30 sheets 30 sheets 25 sheets 20 sheets

136 to 209g/m2 20 sheets 20 sheets 15 sheets ---

Paper trays Available sizes

Main body trays (trays 1 to 3) Standard: SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w,SRA4 w, A4 w / v, A5 w,B5 w / v, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 11 w

Custom: Max. 330 mm e 487 mm to min. 140 mm e 182 mm

To select K sizes or Foolscap, or to switch JIS/ISO (ISO se-lected as default), please contact your service representa-tive.

Detectable standard sizes can be switched as follows.• SRA4 w, (8.5 e 14 w and 8.5 e 11 w ), 8 e 13 w,

8.12 e 13.2 w, 8.25 e 13 w, or 8.5 e 13 w• (SRA3 w, A4 w, and A5 w ) or (13 e 19 w, 8.5 e 11 w,

and 5.5 e 8.5 w )• 9 e 11 v or 8.5 e 11 v

Paper Feeder Unit PF-602 (trays 4 and 5) Standard: SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w*2, SRA4 w / v, A4 w / v,

B5 w / v*2

, A5 w / v*1

, B6 w*2

, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w,11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w / v

Custom:Tray 4 (upper tray): Max. 330 mm e 487 mm to min. 100 mme 182 mmTray 5 (lower tray): Max. 330 mm e 487 mm to min. 100 mme 148 mm

Tab paper: A4 v, 8.5 e 11 v

Detectable standard sizes can be switched as follows.• A5 w or 5.5 e 8.5 w• 9 e 11 v or 8.5 e 11 v

Large Capacity Unit LU-202 Standard: SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w / v, A4 w / v, B5 v,13 e 19 w, 11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 v



Detectable standard sizes can be switched as follows.• 12 e 18 w or A4 w• (8.5 e 14 w and 8.5 e 11 w ) or (SRA4 w and A4 w )• 9 e 11 v or 8.5 e 11 v



Paper Information5


5.1

Paper Feeder Unit PF-602

*1: A5 v and A6 w are available in tray 5 (lower tray) only.

*2: B4, B5, and B6 are ISO standard sizes. If JIS standard sizes are desired, please contact your service rep-resentative.

Post Inserter

*1: Loading perfect binding cover requires the same setting as made for custom sizes loaded in PFU. Stand-ard sizes, Tab Paper sizes, and postcards are unavailable.

Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray MB-504 Standard: SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w / v, A4 w / v,B5 w / v, A5 w / v, B6 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 11 w


To select K sizes or Foolscap, or to switch JIS/ISO (ISO se-lected as default), please contact your service representa-

tive.

Detectable standard sizes can be switched as follows.• (SRA4 w and A4 w ), 8.5 e 14 w, 8 e 13 w,

8.12 e 13.2 w, 8.25 e 13 w, or 8.5 e 13 w• (SRA3 w, A5 v / w, and B6 w ) or (13 e 19 w, 8.5 e 11 w,

and 5.5 e 8.5 w )• 9 e 11 v or 8.5 e 11 v

Cover tray of Perfect Binder PB-503 Length (head to foot): Same as that of body setWidth: Twice the book width + body set’s thickness + 5 mm(trimming width) or moreMax. 307mm e 472 mm

Post inserter (equipped in Folding Unit

FD-503 as standard)

Standard (detectable sizes): SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, A4 w / v,

SRA4 w / v, B5 w / v, A5 v, Foolscap, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w,11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w / v, 5.5 e 8.5 v, Custom,Tab Paper

Max. 331 mm e 483 mm to min. 182 mm e 139 mm

Changing list of cover/sheet size detected• A5 v or 5.5 e 8.5 v• SRA4 or (A4 w and 8.5 e 14 w ),

SRA4 or (8.5 e 11 w and 8.5 e 14 w ),SRA4 or (A4 w and 8 e 13 w/8.12 e 13.2 w /8.25 e 13w /8.5 e 13 w ), orSRA4 or (8.5 e 11 w and 8 e 13 w/8.12 e 13.2 w /8.25 e 13 w /8.5 e 13 w )

• SRA3 w or 13 e 19 w

• 8.5 e 11 v or 9 e 11 v

Perfect binding covers*1: Max. 307 mm e 483 mm to min.182 mm e 279 mm

Post Inserter PI-502 (equipped in Finish-er FS-612/FS-531 as option)

Standard (detectable sizes): SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, A4 w / v,SRA4 w / v, B5 w / v, A5 v, Foolscap, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w,11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w / v, 5.5 e 8.5 v, Custom,Tab Paper

Max. 331 mm e 483 mm to min. 182 mm e 139 mm

Changing list of cover/sheet size detected• A5 v or 5.5 e 8.5 v• (SRA4 w and A4), (8.5 e 14 w and 8.5 e 11 w ), 8 e 13 w,

8.12 e 13.2 w, 8.25 e 13 w, or 8.5 e 13 w• A3 w or 12 e 18 w• 8.5 e 11 v or 9 e 11 v

Perfect binding covers*1: Max. 307 mm e 483 mm to min.182 mm e 279 mm

Paper trays Available sizes





Equipment Available sizes

ADU Unlimited

Relay Unit RU-509 SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w / v, A4 w / v, B5 w / v, A5 w / v, B6 w, A6 w, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w / v, 5.5 e 8.5 w / v, Foolscap,9 e 11 v, Custom, Tab PaperCustom: Max. 331 mm e 487 mm to min. 100 mm e

140 mm


SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, A4 w / v, SRA4 w / v, B5 w / v, A5 w / v, A6 w, B6 w, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w / v, 5.5 e 8.5 w / v, Foolscap,9 e 11 v, Custom, Tab Paper (only with the tab side aheadin output direction)Max. 331 mm e 488 mm to min. 100 mm e 133 mm


Large sizes: A3 w, B4 w, Foolscap, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,8.5 e 14 w, SRA3 w, SRA4 w / v, 13 e 19 w

Small sizes: A4 w / v, B5 w / v, 8.5 e 11 w / v, 9 e 11 v

Extra-small sizes: A5 w / v, B6 w, 5.5 e 8.5 w / v

Others: Custom (Max. 324 mm e 463 mm to min. 148mm e 139 mm), Tab Paper (only with the tab side ahead in outputdirection)

Straight delivery only: B6 w, 13 e 19 w, 5.5 e 8.5 wCustom (Max. 331 mm e 483 mm to min. 128 mm e 139 mm)


SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, A4 w / v, SRA4 w / v, B5 v, A5 v,Foolscap, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w,8.5 e 11 w / v, 5.5 e 8.5 v, 9 e 11 v, Custom, Tab Paper(only with the tab side ahead in output direction)Max. 324 mm e 463 mm to min. 203 mm e 139 mm

Folding Unit

FD-503

Fold mode tray /

Fold

A3 w, B4 w, A4 w, SRA4 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,

8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w, CustomMax. 305 mm e 458 mm to min. 210 mm e 279 mm

Primary (main)tray

SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w / v, A4 w / v, B5 w / v, A5 w / v, B6 w, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w / v, 5.5 e 8.5 w / v, Foolscap,9 e 11 v, Foolscap, Custom, Tab Paper (only with the tabside ahead in output direction)Max. 331 mm e 483 mm to min. 95 mm e 139 mm

Punch(2 holes)

A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w / v, B5 w / v, A5 w / v,12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w / v,5.5 e 8.5 v, 9 e 11 v, Foolscap, Tab paper

Punch(4 holes)

SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, A4 v, B5 v, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,8.5 e 11 v, 9 e 11 v, Tab paper


Stacker SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w / v, A4 w / v, B5 v, A5 v,Foolscap, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w,8.5 e 11 w / v, 9 e 11 v, Custom (max. 331 mm e 483 mmto min. 210 mm e 148 mm)Tab paper (1 to 15 tabs*) (However, output sets cannot beoffset when including tabbed sheets.)

Secondary (sub)tray

SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w / v, B5 w / v, A5 w / v,B6 w, Foolscap, A6 w, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w / v, 5.5 e 8.5 v, 9 e 11 v, Custom,Tab Paper (only with the tab side ahead in output direction)Max. 331 mm e 488 mm to min. 95 mm e 139 mm



Paper Information5


5.1


Secondary (sub)tray

SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w / v, A4 w / v, B5 w / v, A5 w / v, B6 w, Foolscap, A6 w, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w,11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w / v, 5.5 e 8.5 w / v,9 e 11 v, Custom, Tab Paper (only with the tab side aheadin output direction)Max. 331 mm e 488 mm to min. 95 mm e 139 mmWith the saddle stitcher tray drawn out: 1,441 (D) mm

Fold & Staple/Trimming function

SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w, B5 w, 12 e 18 w,11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w, Foolscap, CustomMax. 324 mm e 463 mm to min. 182 mm e 257 mm

Multi folding func-tion

Multi Half Fold: SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w,B5 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w,Foolscap, CustomMax. 324 mm e 463 mm to min. 182 mm e 257 mmMulti Tri-Fold: A4 w, 8.5 e 11 w


Secondary (sub)tray

SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w / v, B5 w / v, A5 w / v,Foolscap, A6 w, B6 w, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w / v, 5.5 e 8.5 v, 9 e 11 v, Custom,Tab Paper (only with the tab side ahead in output direction)Max. 324 mm e 463 mm to min. 100 mm e 139 mm

Perfect bindertray

Body: A4 v, B5 v, A5 w / v, 8.5 e 11 w, 5.5 e 8.5 w / v;307 mm e 221 mm max.Cover: 307 mm e 472 mm max.

Finisher FS-531 Primary (main)tray (straight/off-set delivery)

Standard: SRA3 w*1, SRA4 w, A3 w, B4 w, A4 w / v,B5 w / v, A5 w*1 / v, B6 w*1, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w / v, 5.5 e 8.5 w*1 / v

Custom*2: Max. 314 mm e 458 mm to min. 182 mm e 148 mm

Tab paper: A4 w, 8.5 e 11 w


Standard: A3 w, B4 w, A4 w / v, SRA4 w, B5 w / v, A5 v,12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w / v,

5.5 e 8.5 v, 7.25 e 10.5 w / v



Secondary (sub)tray

Standard: SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, A4 w / v, SRA4 w / v,B5 w / v, A5 w / v, B6 w, A6 w, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w,11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w / v, 5.5 e 8.5 w / v,7.25 e 10.5 w / v








Finisher FS-531

*1: SRA3 w, A5 w, B6 w, and 5.5 e 8.5 w are available for straight output only.

*2: Max. 314 mm e 458 mm to min. 128 mm e 148 mm for straight output only.

Finisher FS-612 Primary (main)tray (Staple)

A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w / v, B5 w / v, A5 v, Foolscap,12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w / v,5.5 e 8.5 v, 9 e 11 v, CustomMax. 314 mm e 458 mm to min. 182 mm e 139 mmTab Paper (only with the tab side ahead in output direction)

Primary (main)

tray (Fold & Sta-ple)

A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,

8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w, CustomMax. 314 mm e 458 mm to min. 210 mm e 279 mm

Primary (main)tray (Half-Fold,Tri-Fold)

Half-Fold: A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w, 12 e 18 w,11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w, CustomMax. 314 mm e 458 mm to min. 210 mm e 279 mmTri-Fold: A4 w, 8.5 e 11 w

Primary (main)tray (straight/off-set delivery)

A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w / v, B5 w / v, A5 v, Foolscap,12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w / v, 9 e 11 v,CustomMax. 314 mm e 458 mm to min. 182 mm e 148 mmTab Paper (only with the tab side ahead in output direction)

The following sizes are available only in straight delivery: A5 w, B6 w, 5.5 e 8.5 w

Min. 128 mm e 139 mm

Secondary (sub)tray

SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w / v, A4 w / v, B5 w / v, A5 w / v, B6 w, A6 w, Foolscap, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w,11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w / v, 5.5 e 8.5 w / v,9 e 11 v, CustomMax. 331 mm e 488 mm to min. 100 mm e 139 mmTab Paper (only with the tab side ahead in output direction)

Relay Unit RU-506 Standard: SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, A4 w / v, SRA4 w,B5 w / v, A5 v, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w / v, 5.5 e 8.5 v, Foolscap, 9 e 11 v,Tab Paper

Custom:Max. 324 mm e 463 mm to min. 95 mm e 133 mm

Multi Punch GP-501 A4 v, 8.5 e 11 v


2 holes (PK-512): A3 w, B4 w, Foolscap, A4 w / v, B5 w / v, A5 w / v,11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w / v, 5.5 e 8.5 w4 holes (PK-512): A3 w, B4 w, A4 v, B5 v, 11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 11 vSwedish 4 holes (PK-513): A3 w, B4 w, A4 v, B5 v

Output Tray OT-502 Max. 331 mm e 488 mm to min. 100 mm e 148 mm




Paper Information5


5.1

5.1.4 Auto Tray Switch Function

When the selected paper tray becomes empty while printing is in progress, the machine automatically switch-es the paper tray source to continue printing without interruption only if there is another tray that meets thefollowing conditions.

Make the following settings in [02 User Setting] - [01 System Setting] - [03 Paper Tray Setting].

- In [02 Auto Tray Selection Setting], select the trays to be automatically selected when Auto Paper func-tions. Priority order can also be specified.

- In [03 Type for Auto Paper], specify those trays with different paper settings to be the target tray in ATS.

Paper trays should be loaded with paper as specified below.

- The same size in the same orientation

- The same paper type

5.1.5 To Store Copy Paper

Observe the following precautions when storing copy paper.

- Store paper in a cool, dry area. Using damp paper may cause a paper misfeed.

- Keep partially used packages tightly wrapped during storage.

- Do not place paper packages vertically to store. Paper curl due to the vertical storage may cause a pa-

per misfeed.- Do not leave paper in a place within easy reach of children.





5.1.6 Print Speed

This machine is equipped with a temperature humidity sensor, and automatically controls the print speed ac-cording to the detected internal temperature.

Also, [Speed Down] and [CPM Down] modes are provided in Process Adjustment to control the print speed.See the following table for details.

d ReferenceFurther adjustment can be made by a service engineer to obtain increased stability in printing. Please contact

your service representative, if desired.

Table 1: bizhub PRO C7000/bizhub PRESS C7000/bizhub PRESS C7000P plain paper A4 v print speed

Table 2: Speed Setting for 106-135 g/m2 A4 v plain paper (bizhub PRO C7000/bizhub PRESS C7000/ bizhub PRESS C7000P)

Detectedinternaltempera-ture

Paper weight [Normal] mode [Speed Down]mode

[Glossy] mode

17°C orhigher

64-74 g/m2 71 ppm 51 ppm 51 ppm

75-80 g/m2

81-105 g/m2

106-135 g/m2 See Table 2. 35 ppm 35 ppm

136-162 g/m2 51 ppm

163-209 g/m2

210-256 g/m2 35 ppm

257-300 g/m2

Lower than17°C

64-74 g/m2 65 ppm 47 ppm 47 ppm

75-80 g/m2

81-105 g/m2


136-162 g/m2

47 ppm163-209 g/m2

210-256 g/m2 33 ppm

257-300 g/m2

SpeedSetting

[High] [Middle] (Default) [Auto Change]

External

tempera-ture

- 17°C or

higher

Lower

than17°C

25°C or higher 17°C or

higherLowerthan 25°C

Lower

than 17°C

Internaltempera-ture

- - - 30°C orhigher

Lowerthan 30°C

- -

Printspeed

65 ppm 51 ppm 47 ppm 65 ppm 51 ppm 51 ppm 47 ppm



Paper Information5


5.1

Table 3: bizhub PRO C6000/bizhub PRESS C6000 plain paper A4 v print speed

Table 4: Speed Setting for 106-135 g/m2 A4 v plain paper (bizhub PRO C6000/bizhub PRESS C6000)

Detectedinternaltempera-ture

Paper weight [Normal] mode [Speed Down]mode

[Glossy] mode

17°C orhigher

64-74 g/m2 60 ppm - -

75-80 g/m

2

81-105 g/m2


136-162 g/m2 -

163-209 g/m2

210-256 g/m2 30 ppm

257-300 g/m2

Lower than17°C

64-74 g/m2 60 ppm 45 ppm 45 ppm

75-80 g/m2

81-105 g/m2


136-162 g/m2 45 ppm

163-209 g/m2

210-256 g/m2 30 ppm

257-300 g/m2

SpeedSetting

[High] [Middle] (Default) [Auto Change]

Externaltempera-ture

- 17°C orhigher

Lowerthan17°C

25°C or higher 17°C orhigherLowerthan 25°C

Lowerthan 17°C

Internaltempera-ture

- - - 30°C orhigher

Lowerthan 30°C

- -

Printspeed

60 ppm - 45 ppm 60 ppm 45 ppm - 45 ppm





5.1.7 Correcting Unevenness in Output Image on Large-Sized Paper and Improv-ing Feedability in Duplex Printing Using Small-Sized Thick Paper

The output image may show unevenness when the original (data) having a high proportion of texts and photosis printed on large-sized paper.

This unevenness shown on paper sizes larger than A4 w / v or 8.5 e 11 w / v can be corrected by operatingcompression adjusting lever of the fixing unit mounted on the main body.

Also, if feedability becomes low in duplex printing using small-sized thick paper, it can be improved by in-creasing the compression in the fixing unit mounted on the main body.

Follow the procedure below to adjust the compression in the fixing unit.

0 Correctable copy paper sizes are A4 w / v, 8.5 e 11 w / v or larger. Do not operate the compression adjusting lever of the fixing unit when using paper sizes smaller than A4 w / v or 8.5 e 11 w / v.

7 CAUTIONDO NOT touch the fusing part on the left side of the fixing unit. Otherwise, you may get burned.

- Please be especially careful in withdrawing the fixing conveyance unit.

7

CAUTIONDO NOT put your hand or arm between the main body and the fixing conveyance unit.

- Touching connecting terminals of electric parts may damage the machine or cause unexpected trouble.Please do not try to work yourself, but contact your service representative.

NOTICE Do not move the compression adjusting lever for purposes other thanthis adjustment. Be also sure to keep the compression adjusting leverusually at the middle triangle position.

1 Open the main body front door.



Paper Information5


5.1

2 Turn down the lever [M1] leftward, then withdraw the fixing con-veyance unit.

3 Push up the lever [M8], then open the left cover of the fixing unitleftward.

4 To correct the unevenness in output images on large-sized pa-per, slide the compression adjusting lever to the right side toalign it to the right triangle position.

5 To improve feedability in duplex printing using small-sized thickpaper, slide the compression adjusting lever to the left side toalign it to the left triangle position.

6 Close the left cover of the fixing unit.

Return the fixing conveyance unit to its original position, then reset the lever [M1].

7 Close the main body front door.




5.2 Original Information 5

5.2 Original Information

5.2.1 ADF Originals

The ADF provides the following three modes to scan originals.

- Normal mode

- Mixed mode

- Z-Folded mode

Specifications for each mode are described as follows.

Normal mode

Detectable original size can be selected from AB series, Inch series, only A series, and AB series and Inchseries mixed.

- Feedable original size: Min. 128 mm e 139.7 mm to 297 mm e 431.8 mm

- Detectable original sizes: A3 w, B4w, A4 w / v, B5 w / v, A5 w / v, B6 w, 11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w,8.5 e 11 w / v, 5.5 e 8.5 w / v, Foolscap

- Original weight: Single-sided original 35 g/m2 to 210 g/m2, Double-sided original 50 g/m2 to 210 g/m2

- Curling tolerance: 10 mm or less for 5-sheet set

- Feeder capacity: 100 sheets (80 g/m2 )

- Feeding tolerance of the same original: 5 times or less (single-sided), 3 times or less (double-sided)

Mixed mode

Use Mixed mode to copy mixed size originals.

- Detectable original size: The types of size combination are determined by the ADF guide width.

– A3 w, B4 w, A4 w / v, B5 v, and A5 v mixed– B4 w, A4 w, B5 w / v, and A5 v mixed– A4 w, B5 w, and A5 v mixed





See below for the ADF guide width of each combination.

Z-Folded mode

Use Z-Folded mode to scan z-folded originals without using the size detection sensor of the ADF.

- Detectable original sizes: Min. 128 mm e 139.7 mm to 297 mm e 431.8 mm





Guide width for A3 w and A4 v: Guide width for B4 w and B5 v: Guide width for A4 w and A5 v:



Original Information5


5.2

5.2.2 Originals for Using Original Glass

Use the original glass when originals and the copy conditions are not suitable for use with the ADF.

Unsuitable ADF originals

Specifications of originals for using original glass

Detectable original sizes: A3 w, B4 w, A4 w / v, B5 w / v, A5 w / v*1, 11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w / v, 5.5e 8.5 w / v,

*1: B6 w / v or 5.5 e 8.5 w / v can be detected instead of A5 w / v.

Original weight: 6.8 kg or less

Original thickness: 30 mm or less

7 CAUTION- Do not place too heavy originals. Do not also press strongly when thick original is placed. The original

glass may be broken and you may be injured.

Curled, wrinkled, or folded Paste-ups or cutouts Book

OHP transparencies, art pa-per, or cellophane paper

Double-folded, paper with manyholes or staples

Thick paper that is hard to bend orthin paper such as letter paper forair mail



6Printing Operations






6.1 Machine Screen 6

6 Printing Operations

6.1 Machine Screen

6.1.1 Overview of the Machine Screen


1 [MACHINE] tab Pressed to display the Machine Screen.

2 [JOB LIST] tab Pressed to display the Job List Screen which allowsyou to manage jobs.

3 Heater switch for the perfect binder Pressed to turn ON or OFF the PB (perfect binder)heater. If you know when to use the perfect binder inadvance, turn it ON so that you can work efficiently.When you do not use the heater, turn it OFF to preventthe deterioration of glue.

4 [HDD RECALL] tab Pressed to retrieve the output data from the machineHDD.

5 Date and time indicator Displays current date and time.

6 [Info.Sound/Voice ON/OFF] Pressed to turn ON or OFF all information sounds orvoices.

7 [Help] Pressed to display the help message, which providesinformation on a currently selected screen. Depend-ing on a screen, [ ] may be grayed out and no helpmessage is displayed.When you press it in the Machine Screen, the instruc-tions to replace toners, replace toner recycle boxes,add staples, dump the scrap of punch and trim, sup-ply glue pellet, and load paper are displayed.

8 Output information indicator Indicates the print count, set count, and job number ofthe current job while printing.

9 Machine management information

indicator

Indicates the number or reserved jobs, remaining

memory amount, original count, and file systemamount.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

89

10

11

12

13

14

151617181920

21

22

23

24



Machine Screen6


6.1

10 Execute Sample Print Pressed to make a sample print during an output job.This key is displayed when the machine is mountedwith Image Controller IC-601.

11 Machine configuration display Displays the configuration of main body and options.

12 Tray information indicator (tray 1 totray 5)

Displays paper size, orientation, name, weight, andpaper amount remaining in the tray.

13 Tray information indicator ( Uppertray and lower tray of the post insert-er, PB cover tray )

For the machine equipped with Folding Unit FD-503,it provides information on paper size, orientation,name, weight and paper amount of the upper tray and lower tray of the post inserter.For the machine equipped with Perfect Binder PB-503, it provides information on paper size, orientation,name, weight, and paper amount of the PB covertray .If Finisher FS-531 or Finisher FS-612 is mountedwith the optional Post Inserter PI-502, it provides in-formation on paper size and paper amount of the up-per tray and lower tray of the post inserter.

14 Machine status indicator/right Displays [Supply], [PM Call], [Collect], [Modem Err],

[Drum/Deve], fusing web exchange icon, dark toneicon, and [Rotation]. Up to 5 indicators can be dis-played in normal size; when 6 or more indicators arerequired, small icons will substitute for the indicatorsbelow [Drum/Deve].

15 Sample Print Setting Pressed to make a setting for sample print.This key is displayed when the machine is mountedwith Image Controller IC-601.

16 [Curl Adjustment] Pressed to perform the curl adjustment for each tray(tray 1 to tray 5, bypass tray). When Humidifier HM-102 is mounted on Relay Unit RU-509, you can makethe humidification setting for each tray.

17 [Controller] Pressed to configure the controller.

18 [Adjustment] Pressed to make adjustments on the main body andoptional equipment.

19 [Both Sides] Pressed to make adjustments for images printed onthe front and back sides of paper loaded in each tray(tray 1 to tray 5, bypass tray), as well as for registrationloop and chart adjustment.

20 [Paper Setting] Pressed to set paper conditions for the main bodytrays, paper feeder unit, bypass tray , large capac-ity unit, upper tray and lower tray of the post inserter,and cover tray of Perfect Binder PB-503.

21 Machine status indicator/left Indicates the [shutoff time] when using Weekly timer,or the status of IP controller. The [shutoff time] indica-tion has priority.

22 Consumable and Scrap Indicators Indicates the current status of toner supply. Also, itnotifies via a red indicator when staples need to besupplied to the optionally mounted stapler, when thetoner recovery box / hole-punch scrap box is full, orwhen water needs to be supplied to the humidifier.

23 Job list Displays the current status of the jobs to be operatedon the machine.

24 Message area Displays messages concerning the current status ofthe machine or operation currently required.






6.1.2 Settings on the Machine Screen

The following keys are available at the bottom of the Machine Screen: [Paper Setting], [Both Sides], [Adjust-ment], [Controller], and [Curl Adjustment].

[Paper Setting]

1 Press [Paper Setting] to display the Paper Setting Screen.

% You can make paper settings for the main body trays, paper feeder unit, Multi-Sheet BypassTray MB-504, Large Capacity Unit LU-202, upper tray / lower tray of the post inserter of theFolding Unit FD-503, cover tray of Perfect Binder PB-503, and upper tray / lower tray of Post

Inserter PI-502 mounted on Finisher FS-531 or Finisher FS-612.

2 Press [Close] to restore the Machine Screen.



Machine Screen6


6.1

[Both Sides Adjust]

1 Press [Both Sides] to display the Both Sides Adjust Screen.


[Adjustment]

1 Press [Adjustment] to display the Adjustment Screen.

This screen provides various adjustments related to the output from the main body, and also related toeach function of Finisher FS-521, Finisher FS-531, Finisher FS-612, Folding Unit FD-503, Large Ca-

pacity Stacker LS-505, Saddle Stitcher SD-506, or of Perfect Binder PB-503, if mounted.

2 Press [Exit] to restore the Machine Screen.





[Controller]

1 Press [Controller]to display the Controller Setting Menu Screen.

% You can configure the controller on this screen.


NOTICE The type of Controller Machine Screen varies depending on the image controller mounted on the machine.The screen shown below is to be displayed on the machine with Image Controller IC-601 .

d ReferenceFor details of the Controller Machine Screen to be displayed on the machine with Image Controller IC-601 ,

see the User's Guide - Printer (IC-601).

For details of the Controller Machine Screen to be displayed on the machine with Image Controller IC-306 ,

see the user's guide supplied with IC-306.



Paper Setting6


6.2

6.2 Paper Setting

This section describes how to make a paper setting for each tray. Feature descriptions and usage of AutoPaper and Image Rotation are also provided.

6.2.1 Paper Setting Outlines

The paper setting offers two types of usage depending on what the setting is intended for.

One is to make the setting for a paper tray which needs paper conditions specified.

The other is to register paper conditions for the paper to be used.

This section describes how to make the setting for a paper tray.

% Paper conditions specified for a paper tray can also be registered. That procedure is provided in thissection.

The paper setting can be made for the following trays:

- Main body trays (trays 1 to 3)

- Trays of Paper Feeder Unit PF-602 (trays 4 and 5)



- Upper tray / lower tray of the post inserter of Folding Unit FD-503 (PI 1, PI 2)

- Upper tray / lower tray of Post Inserter PI-502 to be mounted on Finisher FS-531 or Finisher FS-612 (PI 1, PI 2)

- Cover tray of Perfect Binder PB-503 (PB)

Paper setting for the tray to be used consists of the following 12 conditions that can be specified as desired.

Setting item Description Setting options

Paper Type Seven paper types are provided ac-cording to the plainness of paper.See the table on page 6-11 for detailsof paper types.

Plain, Fine, Color Specific, Coated-GL,Coated-ML, Coated-GO, Coated-MO

Profile Name No entry can be made in setting the pa-per conditions for the tray to be used.Enter the paper file name when youregister the paper conditions specifiedfor a tray.

Up to 50 alphanumeric characters canbe entered.

Paper Size Selecting Standard automatically de-tects the standard size of paper loadedin the selected tray.Selecting Custom allows you to enterthe desired dimensions from thescreen. This setting can also be madeby recalling a custom size previouslyregistered.To specify Tab Paper, select either A4Tv or 8.5 e 11 v and specify the numberof tabs.

Detectable standard sizes vary de-pending on the paper tray.Custom:Min. 100 mm e 182 mm to max. 330mm e 487 mm Up to 20 custom sizescan be registered and recalled.Tab Paper: A4T v, 8.5 e 11T v (number of tabs: 1 to15)




6.2 Paper Setting 6

Weight Select one of 8 types provided on thescreen. Four types of coated paper be-comes available when the weight over81 g/m2 is selected.The unit of weight can be switched. Theunit used to register the condition willalso be used to display that condition

on the Machine Screen when recalled.Speed setting is available only for 106to 135 g/m2 paper, providing [High],[Middle], and [Auto Change] as settingoptions. As default, [Middle] is specified for plainpaper, and [Auto Change] for coatedpaper. Setting with Glossy mode, ifspecified, takes priority. With ProcessSpeed Down specified, this speed set-ting will be ineffective.

Weight Setting:64-74 g/m2

75-80 g/m2

81-105 g/m2

106-135 g/m2

136-162 g/m2

163-209 g/m2

210-256 g/m2

257-300 g/m2

Unit Change:g/m2, Duodecimo-Kg, Octavo-Kg, lbBond, lb Index, lb CoverSpeed Setting:High, Middle, Auto Change

Colored Paper Specify whether or not the paper iscolored.

White, Non-White

Punch Specify whether or not the paper ispunched. Use this setting to avoid us-ing the punched paper mixed with pa-per without punch holes.

Pre-Punched, No Hole-Punch

Both Sides Adjust Specify magnification ratios (vertical,horizontal), image shift amounts(up/down, right/left), and registrationloop amount for both front and backpages, in order to align the imagesprinted on front and back pages in du-plex printing.For Both Sides Adjust, note that the de-gree of shrinkage varies depending onthe type or brand of paper, and hygro-thermal environment of storage. It isrecommended to make the adjustmentfor each paper to be used.The horizontal magnification ratio of theback page can be adjusted from [Com-mon Setting] of the Administrator Set-ting.

Vertical Zoom:-100 to +100 (1 step = 0.01%)Horizontal Zoom:Front -100 to +100 (1 step = 0.01%),Back -80 to +20 (1 step = 0.01%)Image Shift Up/Down:-100 to +100 (1 step = 0.1 mm)Image Shift Right/Left:-30 to +30 (1 step = 0.1 mm)Registration Loop:-99 to +99 (1 step = 0.1 mm)

Curl Adjustment The machine mounted with the optionalRelay Unit RU-509 provides [Curl Ad- justment] on the screen, which allowsyou to correct the curl of output paper. Also, switching ON and [OFF] for Hu-midifier Setting is available if the relayunit is equipped with [Humidifier HM-102].

Curl Adjustment:-2, -1, 0 +1, +2Humidifier Setting: ON, OFF

Air Assist Use this function to blow air to paperfrom paper guides inside the tray in or-der to prevent feeding multiple sheetsor paper misfeed, which is likely to oc-cur depending on the paper type.The Air Assist function provided toLarge Capacity Unit LU-202 and cov-er tray of Perfect Binder PB-503 canalso be turned ON/OFF, but is unavail-able to be controlled with ON (Strong)and ON (Weak) options.

Auto, ON (Strong), ON (Weak), OFF

Thickness The machine mounted with Hard DiskKit HD-514 provides [Thickness] on thescreen, and selecting [Specify] allowsthe machine to estimate the remainingamount of paper in the tray with greateraccuracy.

Not Specify, Specify




Paper Setting6


6.2

NOTICE Among the paper settings provided on the Machine Screen, only the process adjustment is initially disabledand can be enabled later. Contact your service representative, if desired.

d ReferenceSee page 6-31 for details of Both Sides Adjust and Curl Adjustment.

Process Adjust-ment

Make the process adjustment for eachof transfer, separation, and fusing func-tions, and make a selection for SpeedDown, 2nd Transfer Pressure, CPMDown, and Fusing Air Level.Selecting [ON] for Speed Down may re-quire further adjustments to 2nd Trans-

fer Output, Separation AC, orSeparation DC.

2nd Transfer Output Adj. (Front): -50 to+502nd Transfer Output Adj. (Back): -50 to+502nd Transfer-Lead Edge (Front): -20 to+ 02nd Transfer-Lead Edge (Back): -20 to

+ 02nd Transfer-Rear Edge (Front): -50 to+502nd Transfer-Rear Edge (Back): -50 to+50Separation AC (Front): -50 to +50Separation AC (Back): -50 to +50Separation DC (Front): -30 to +30Separation DC (Back): -30 to +30Upper Roller Temperature (Idle): -10 to+10Upper Roller Temperature (Print): -10 to+10Lower Roller Temperature (Idle): -20 to+20Lower Roller Temperature (Print): -20 to+20Compulsive OFF Up Heater: <261 mm:-20 to +20Compulsive OFF Up Heater: <=261mm: -20 to +20Speed Down: OFF, ONCPM Down: Normal, Down

Color Density The machine mounted with Relay UnitRU-509 provides [Color Density] on thescreen. This setting is enabled when[Yes] is selected for [Use Color DensityControl] accessed from [06 Color Den-sity Control] - [01 Color Density Control]

on the Adjustment Menu Screen.

Default Adj. Data, Paper Category, OFF





6.2 Paper Setting 6

6.2.2 Paper type descriptions

6.2.3 Paper Setting Made for a Paper Tray

Each paper tray has been preset with paper specifications. If you want to use another paper type than anyloaded in the trays, follow the procedure below to change the paper setting.

1 Load printing paper into the tray with the setting to be changed.


3 Check the specifications of each tray displayed under [Paper Tray].

The screen provides Size, Name, and Weight in a line for each tray. The Name normally shows a papertype, or a profile name if registered specifications are recalled.

Paper name Description

Plain The plain paper is used for printing in general and is called "PPC pa-per", and is usually not recycled. Select [Plain] for the plain paper orrecycled paper to be used in monochrome printing.

Fine The fine paper is non-coated paper generally used for offset printing.

This paper type has a high degree of whiteness and used for variouspurposes. Select [Fine] for the paper having such characteristics asmentioned above.

Color Specific Color Specific is the type of paper used in color printing to preventthe color from dulling on fine paper. Specify [Color Specific] for thepaper having such characteristics as mentioned above.

Coated-GL (Gloss Laser) Glossy paper for laser printing. This paper type is selectable onlywhen the weight is set to 81 g/m2 or heavier.

Coated-ML (Mat Laser) Matte paper for laser printing. This paper type is selectable onlywhen the weight is set to 81 g/m2 or heavier.

Coated-GO (Gloss Offset) Glossy paper for offset printing. This paper type is selectable onlywhen the weight is set to 81 g/m2 or heavier.

Coated-MO (Mat Offset) Matte paper for offset printing. This paper type is selectable onlywhen the weight is set to 81 g/m2 or heavier.



Paper Setting6


6.2

4 Press [Paper Setting].

The Paper Setting Screen will be displayed.

5 Press the tray key to change the setting.

% Tray keys are provided in the left side area of the Paper Setting Screen. Pressing a tray key showsthe conditions specified for that tray.

6 Press either [Recall] or [Change Set].

% Pressing [Recall] displays the Recall Screen, on which paper specifications registered for each pa-per can be selected. Proceed to step 7.

% Pressing [Change Set] displays the Change Individual Set Screen to change the specifications indi-

vidually. Proceed to step 11.




6.2 Paper Setting 6

7 Press [+] or [,] on the screen to scroll to the entry of the desired specifications in the list, then press theentry.

The selected entry will be highlighted.

% If registered specifications do not match with those of the selected tray, that entry will be grayedout to show unavailability. In this case, change the tray to be used.

8 Press [Confirm Details].

Details of the selected entry will be displayed. When finished with checking, press [Close].

9 Press [OK] on the Recall Screen.

The Paper Setting Screen will be restored.

The paper profile name will change to that of recalled specifications.% Proceed to step 30, if no setting change is desired for recalled specifications.

10 Press [Change Set].

11 Select the desired one from the keys under [Paper Type].

% You can select [Coated-GL], [Coated-ML], [Coated-GO], and [Coated-MO] when you set the valueof [Weight] more than 81 g/m2.

12 Press [Paper Size].

The Size Setting Screen will be displayed.



Paper Setting6


6.2

13 Select the desired one from [Standard], [Custom], and [Tab Paper].

% Proceed to step 14 for setting [Standard].

% Proceed to step 15 for setting [Custom].

% Proceed to step 16 for setting [Tab Paper].

[Tab Paper] will not be displayed with [PI 1] or [PI 2] selected in step 5.

[Standard] and [Tab Paper] will not be displayed with [PB] selected in step 5.

14 With [Standard] selected, the machine automatically detects the standard size when loaded in that tray.

There is, however, a group of sizes having subtle distinctions, so that the machine cannot distinguishin the operation of size detection. Let the machine detect a specific size by identifying these sizes asany one of them.

% Press [Detect Size Setting]. The Detect Size Setting Screen will be displayed.

% Groups of indistinguishable sizes are arranged in columns. Press the desired size in each columnto select it. Press [OK].

% Proceed to step 17.




6.2 Paper Setting 6

15 Pressing [Custom] will display the Custom Size Screen.

To specify a custom size:

% Press [(1)], then use the touch panel keypad, [,], [+], or control panel keypad to enter the desiredlengthwise dimension.

% Press [(2)], then use the touch panel keypad, [,], [+], or control panel keypad to enter the desiredwidthwise dimension.

% Press [(3)], then use the touch panel keypad, [,], [+], or control panel keypad to enter the desired

trimming amount for covers used in Fold & Staple/Multi Half Fold mode. The key to enter the trim-ming amount appears for the machine with Saddle Stitcher SD-506 installed.

To register a specified custom size:

% When you complete entering the desired size, press [Size Registration]. The Size RegistrationScreen will be displayed. Entries from [01] to [20 ] are provided on the screen.

% Press the desired number key, using [Previous] and [Next] as needed to scroll.

% Press [Add]. The Custom Size Name Setting Screen will be displayed.



Paper Setting6


6.2

% Enter the desired name. Up to 8 characters can be entered.

% Press [OK].

To recall a registered custom size:

% Press [Size Recall]. The Size Recall Screen will be displayed.

% Use [Previous] and [Next] to scroll to the desired custom size. Entries from [01] to [20 ] are providedon the screen.

% Press the number key of the custom size to be used, then press [OK].





6.2 Paper Setting 6

16 Pressing [Tab Paper] will display the Tab Paper Screen.

% Select either [A4T] or [8.5x11T].

% Use the touch panel keypad, [,], or [+] to enter the number of tabs. Setting range for the number oftabs is from 1 to 15.

% Press [OK].

17 Press [Weight].

The Weight Setting Screen will be displayed. Select the desired weight key under [Weight Setting].

% The keys [(1) 64-74 g/m2], [(2) 75-80 g/m2], [(7) 210-256 g/m2], and [(8) 257-300 g/m2] are unavail-able for the upper tray [PI 1] and lower tray [PI 2] of the post inserter of Folding Unit FD-503, andalso for the cover tray [PB] of Perfect Binder PB-503.

% Select the desired unit key under [Unit Change]. The screen will display the paper weight in the se-lected unit.

% Selecting the weight [(4) 106-135 g/m2] enables the keys provided under [Speed Setting] to specifythe processing speed. Select the desired key.



Paper Setting6


6.2

18 Press [Colored Paper].

% Select [Non-White] to use colored paper, or [White] to use white paper.

19 Press [Punch].% Select [Pre-Punched] to use paper with punch holes, or [No Hole-Punch] to use normal paper.




6.2 Paper Setting 6

20 Press [Both Sides Adj.].

The Both Sides Adjust Screen will be displayed.

This procedure describes how to adjust the registration loop amount. For further details of Both Sides Adjust and Chart Adjustment, see page 6-26.

% Press [Front], and then press [Registration Loop]. Use the touch panel keypad, [,], [+], or the con-trol panel keypad to enter the desired value.

% Press [+/-] to specify the value to be positive or negative.

% Press [Back] to similarly enter the desired adjustment value, specifying it to be positive or negative.% Press [Reset] to restore the previous values.

21 Press [Curl Adjustment].

The Curl Adjustment Screen will be displayed.

% See page 6-31 for details of Curl Adjustment.

% For 64 to 135 g/m2 of [Color Specific] and 81 to 135 g/m2 of [Coated GL], [Coated ML], [Coated GO],and [Coated MO], selecting [ON] or [OFF] for [Humidifier Setting] is unavailable.



Paper Setting6


6.2

22 Press [Air Assist].

The Air Assist Screen will be displayed.

% Selecting [Tray 4] or [Tray 5] of Paper Feeder Unit PF-602 in step 5 will display the following Air Assist Screen.

% [Select Auto], [ON (Strong)], [ON (Weak)], or [OFF], as desired.

% Pressing [Air Assist] with [Tray 4] of Large Capacity Unit LU-202 selected in step 5 will display an-other type of the Air Assist Screen as shown below.

% Select [Auto], [ON], or [OFF], as desired.




6.2 Paper Setting 6

% Pressing [Air Assist] with [PB] of Perfect Binder PB-503 selected in step 5 will display another typeof the Air Assist Screen as shown below.

% Select [Auto], [ON], or [OFF], as desired.

% Press [OK].

23 Press [Thickness].

% Select the desired key from under [Thickness].

% Select [Specify] to calculate the amount of paper remaining in the tray more precisely.



Paper Setting6


6.2

24 Press [Process Adj.].

% To set the items from [2nd Transfer Output Adj. (Front)] to [Compulsive OFF Up Heater: >=261 mm]accessed by pressing [Next] on the screen, select the desired item key, then use the touch panelkeypad, [,], [+], or control panel keypad to enter the adjustment value.


% Press [Next] to display the screen that provides [Speed Down], [2nd Trans. Pressure], and [CPMDown].

% Select the desired key for each item.




6.2 Paper Setting 6

% Press [Next] to display the screen that provides [Fusing Air Separation Air Level Setting].

% To operate it automatically, press [Auto].

% The air level decreases each time [Weak] is pressed, or increases each time [Strong] is pressed.

% Press [OK] to complete the setting. To cancel the change, press [Cancel]. In either case, the RegisterType/Weight Screen will be restored.

25 Press [Color Density].

The Color Density Control Screen will be displayed.

% The setting of Color Density Control provided here is available only when it is activated on the Ad- justment Screen.



Paper Setting6


6.2

26 Press [OK].

The Paper Setting Screen will be restored. The screen shows newly-specified paper conditions.

% When completing the paper setting, press [Close]. The Machine Screen will be restored.% Proceed to step 27 to register the paper conditions specified in steps 11 to 26.

27 Press [Register].

The Register Screen will be displayed.

28 Press the desired row on the list using [+] and [,] as needed to scroll.




6.2 Paper Setting 6

The Paper Profile Name Setting Screen will be displayed.

% If an entry with a paper profile name displayed is selected, the registered specifications will be over-written with new settings.

29 Enter the desired paper profile name.

30 Press [OK].

The Register Screen will be restored.

31 Press [Close].

The Paper Setting Screen will be restored.

32 Press [Close].

The Machine Screen will be restored.



Both Sides Adjust6


6.3

6.3 Both Sides Adjust

Adjust the magnification ratio or position of images to be printed on the front and back sides of paper loadedin the following trays. You can also adjust the image position using registration loop adjustment and chartadjustment. These adjustments are available individually for each tray.





The both sides adjustment can also be registered as a paper condition not with a tray but with a paper profile.

When this paper condition is recalled in a paper setting, the specified both sides adjustment will be reflectedto the tray specified with that paper setting.

This section describes the adjustment procedure to be performed when you press [Both Sides] on the Ma-chine Screen.


2 Press [Both Sides].

The Both Sides Adjust Screen will be displayed.

3 Press a paper tray key under [Tray Setting] to select a tray that you want to set the both sides adjust-ment.




6.3 Both Sides Adjust 6

4 Press [Front] tab under [Both Sides Adjust] to adjust the front side.

% Proceed to Step 11 to adjust the back side.

The adjustment screen of the front side is displayed.

5 Select [Vertical] or [Horizontal] under [Zoom], and then enter a value using the touch panel keypad orcontrol panel keypad.

% Use [+/-] to specify the value to be positive or negative.

% Press [Clear] to reset the value to [0].

% Adjustment range: -100 to +100 (1 step = 0.01%) for vertical zoom and -100 to +100 (1 step =0.01%) for horizontal zoom.

6 Select [Up/Down] or [Right/Left] under [Image Shift], and then enter a shift amount using the touch pan-el keypad or control panel keypad.


% Press [Clear] to reset the value to [0].% Adjustment range: -100 to +100 (1 step = 0.1 mm) for up/down and -30 to +30 (1 step = 0.1 mm) for

right/left.

7 Press [Registration Loop], and then enter an amount for the registration loop using the touch panel key-pad or control panel keypad.



% Available range: -99 to +99, 1 step = 0.1 mm

8 Press [Chart Adjustment] to display the Chart Adjustment/Front Screen.

% You cannot apply the chart adjustment when you set the both sides adjustment for paper.



Both Sides Adjust6


6.3

9 Print the chart and measure each point and then enter the measurement distance.

% Press [Print Mode] and press Start on the control panel.

% Measure each point on the printed chart and enter the distance between the points using the key-pad on the screen.

% Press [Clear] key to reset the entered numeric value to [0].

10 To start the adjustment, press [Adjustment Start].

% If you do not want to adjust, press [Close].

% The entered value for the chart adjustment will be cleared when you press either [Adjustment Start]or [Close].

When you finish the chart adjustment, return to the Both Sides Adjust Screen.

11 Press [Back] tab under [Both Sides Adjust] to adjust back side.

The adjustment screen of back side is displayed.

12 Select [Vertical] or [Horizontal] under [Zoom], and then enter a value using the touch panel keypad orcontrol panel keypad.



% Adjustment range: -100 to +100 (1 step = 0.01%) for vertical zoom and -80 to +20 (1 step = 0.01%)for horizontal zoom.

% You cannot set the horizontal zoom unless you set [Back Side Magnification Adj.] to [ON](accessedfrom [Common Setting] of User Setting).




6.3 Both Sides Adjust 6

13 Select [Up/Down] or [Right/Left] under [Image Shift], and then enter a shift amount using the touch pan-el keypad or control panel keypad.



% Adjustment range: -100 to +100 (1 step = 0.1 mm) for up/down and -30 to +30 (1 step = 0.1 mm) forright/left.

14 Press [Registration Loop], and then enter an amount for the registration loop using the touch panel key-pad or control panel keypad.



% Available range: -99 to +99, 1 step = 0.1 mm

15 Press [Chart Adjustment] to display the Chart Adjustment/Back Screen.

% You cannot apply the chart adjustment when you set the both sides adjustment for paper.

16 Print the chart and measure each point and then enter the measurement distance.

% Press [Print Mode] and press Start on the control panel.

% Measure each point on the printed chart and enter the distance between the points using the key-

pad on the screen.% Use [+/-] to specify the value to be positive or negative.

% Press [Clear] key to reset the entered numeric value to [0].

17 To start the adjustment, press [Adjustment Start].

% If you do not want to adjust, press [Close].

% The entered value for the chart adjustment will be cleared when you press either [Adjustment Start]or [Close].

When you finish the chart adjustment, return to the Both Sides Adjust Screen.



Both Sides Adjust6


6.3

18 If you want to reset all settings on the both sides adjustment that you performed in Step 4 to 17, press[Reset].

% Reset all settings for both front and back sides.

19 Press [Close].





6.4 Curl Adjustment (Relay Unit RU-509) 6

6.4 Curl Adjustment (Relay Unit RU-509)

Curl adjustment is performed by Relay Unit RU-509.

The curl adjustment provides the following two methods:

- Mechanical method: Decurl section strokes the paper to reduce curl. Select one of five curl correctionstrength levels.

- Humidification method: Use the decurl unit of Humidifier HM-102 to humidify the paper and adjust the

amount of moisture contained in the paper after printing to reduce curl.These adjustments are available individually for each tray.

You can also register curl adjustment as a paper condition by setting it to paper, not to trays. When this papercondition is recalled in a paper setting, the specified curl adjustment will be reflected to the tray specifiedwith that paper setting.

0 The mechanical curl adjustment is effective for coated paper.

0 Both the mechanical and the humidification curling adjustment methods are effective for paper, exceptfor coated types.

0 In addition to the decurl unit of Relay Unit RU-509, the other feeding parts also help to reduce curl bycooling paper after printing.




3 Press a paper tray key under "Tray Setting" to select a tray that you want to set the curl adjustment.



Curl Adjustment (Relay Unit RU-509)6


6.4

4 Select an adjustment direction and a strength level for the mechanical curl adjustment.

% The adjustment value goes positive or negative depending on the setting of Face in Output Settingin simplex/duplex printing. Refer to the table below to determine it.

% If you do not perform the mechanical curl adjustment, select [0].

% Pressing [Reset] sets the mechanical curl adjustment value to [0] for all trays.

Simplex/Duplex Face in OutputSetting

Curl adjustment direction Strength level

1->12->1

Face Up [+1][+2]

[-1][-2]

Face Down [-1][-2]

[+1][+2]

1->22->2

– [+1][+2]

[-1][-2]




6.4 Curl Adjustment (Relay Unit RU-509) 6

5 Specify whether to perform the humidification curl adjustment or not.

If you perform the humidification curl adjustment, select [ON] on the right side of "Humidifier Setting",or select [OFF] if not.

% With Humidifier HM-102 mounted, pressing [Reset] resets the machine as described in the tablebelow.

6 Press [OK].


Paper Type Weight Humidification curl adjust-ment ON/OFF

Plain, Fine 64 g/m2 to 300 g/m2 ON

Color SpecificCoated-GL/ML/GO/MO

64 g/m2 to 135 g/m2 Unavailable

136 g/m2 to 300 g/m2 OFF



To Stop Printing6


6.5

6.5 To Stop Printing

Follow the procedure below to stop the job currently in process.

0 This procedure is effective only for the job in progress. To stop reserved jobs on standby, operate itfrom the Job List Screen.

1 Press Stop on the control panel while the current job is in progress.

The current machine operation of the selected job will be suspended, and a dialog will be displayed onthe Machine Screen.

2 Select the job to cancel.

% Press [Cancel Job] to cancel the job.

% Press [Continue] to resume the job.

% Press [Temporary Stop] to suspend printing. Press Start on the control panel to resume the job.

% Press [Stop at a Set] to suspend printing when the set currently output is completed. Press Start

on the control panel to resume the job.NOTICE The [Stop at a Set] key is displayed when the machine is mounted with Image Controller IC-601 andHard Disk Kit HD-514 .




6.6 Controlling and Monitoring Machine from Browser 6

6.6 Controlling and Monitoring Machine from Browser

When the machine is connected with a PC over a network, the web browser activated on the PC enables youto operate the machine. Also, the state of the machine can be monitored through web browser. This functionpromotes efficiency in operation using PC keyboard and mouse.

- Set the Enhanced Security mode OFF on the machine.

- The machine should be connected with a PC over a network with TCP/IP enabled.

- Specify the IP address of the machine.

- Specify the IP address of the PC to be used for Remote Panel function, using Web Utilities setting ona PC.

- JavaScript must be active. The dialog box such as paper misfeed prompt will not be updated automat-ically when using Remote Panel. After a long period of inactivity, click [Reload] at the upper corner ofthe screen to display the current status.

Remote Panel functions

- Touch panel screens can be displayed on the web browser and operated using a mouse.

- Control panel keys can be displayed on the web browser and operated using a mouse.

- Passwords can be entered using PC keyboard.

- Operations performed using remote panel can be recorded and replayed.

- You can disable any operations with the touch panel and the control panel on the main body and en-

able only operations using the Remote Panel.Remote Monitor functions

- The touch panel screen, job condition, and state of the machine can be monitored using the automaticreload function of the web browser.

- The remote panel can be displayed in an exclusive window.

Multi Monitor functions

- Up to 10 remote monitors can be displayed in a browser to overlook 10 machines at a time.

- The remote panel and remote monitor can be displayed in the same browser.

The following functions are unavailable.

- Reading the screen performed by subsidiary system

- Managing the power switch ( main power switch / sub power switch, Power Save, Weekly Timer)

- Reporting paper misfeed, or displaying counter in real time



Controlling and Monitoring Machine from Browser6


6.6

6.6.1 Controlling Machine from Browser: Remote Panel

1 Start the web browser, then enter the IP address of the main body in the address bar.

The Web Utilities screen will be displayed.

2 Click [Remote Panel] on the Web Utilities screen.

The browser displays touch panel and control panel screen currently displayed on the machine.

3 Using a mouse and keyboard, perform job operation.

Operations performed using remote panel can be recorded and replayed.

% Click [Operation Log On], then start the operation.

% To save the operation, click a number key under [Save to MFP].

% To recall the operation, click the desired number key under [Load from MFP].

% To replay the operation, click [Execute].

% Clicking [Lock Real Panel] will activate the Operation Panel Lock function to void any operation fromthe touch panel and control panel. In this case, the machine operation is available from the Re-

mote Panel only.




6.6 Controlling and Monitoring Machine from Browser 6

6.6.2 Monitoring Machine from Browser: Remote Monitor

1 Start the web browser, then enter the IP address of the machine in the address bar.


2 Click [Remote Monitor] on the Web Utilities screen.

The state of the machine, touch panel screen, and job condition will be displayed.

Clicking the touch panel screen on the Remote Monitor will display the Remote Panel in an exclusivewindow to allow the machine operation from PC.

% The background color of the Remote Monitor varies according to the state of the machine. Green:IDLING, WARMUP, ADJUSTMENT. Blue: OPERATING. Yellow: JAM. Red: SC

% When the Operation Panel Lock function is activated, the Remote Monitor displays the lock screenof the touch panel. Click the lock screen to enable the machine operation from the Remote Panel.



Controlling and Monitoring Machine from Browser6


6.6

6.6.3 Monitoring Multiple Machines from Browser: Multi Monitor

1 Start the web browser, then enter the IP address of the machine in the address bar.


2 Click [Multi Monitor] on the Web Utilities screen.

The state of the machine, touch panel screen, and job condition of up to 10 machines are displayed in

tile view. The Remote Panel will also be displayed in the same browser.

Clicking the touch panel screen of the desired Remote Monitor in the browser will display the RemotePanel of the selected machine, to allow its operation from PC.

% The background color of the Remote Monitor varies according to the state of the machine. Green:IDLING, WARMUP, ADJUSTMENT. Blue: OPERATING. Yellow: JAM. Red: SC

% When the Operation Panel Lock function is activated, the Remote Monitor displays the lock screenof the touch panel. Click the lock screen to enable the machine operation from the Remote Panel.




6.7 Using Perfect Binder PB-503 6

6.7 Using Perfect Binder PB-503

The machine with Perfect Binder PB-503 installed automatically attaches a printed set with a cover sheet tomake a perfect-bound book, applying a dab of glue to the spine.

Original: single-sided, even number

Body set: duplex printing

Cover Print: OFF



Cover print: ON, simplex

A: Body setB: CoverC: HeadD: Foot

[1] Back side of front cover[2] Back side of back cover[3] Front side of front cover[4] Front side of back cover[5] Spine width[6] Cover trimming[7] Cover lead edge adjustment[8] Left binding (upside down for rightbinding)

Front cov-er original

Body set original Back cover origi-nal

Body set output Cover print



Using Perfect Binder PB-5036


6.7



Cover print: ON, duplex

Original: single-sided, odd number


Cover Print: OFF






Front cover orig-inal

Body set original Back cover orig-inal









Cover print: ON, simplex



Cover print: ON, duplex

- Both simplex and duplex printing modes are available for body sets.

- Specify whether to be blank, simplex-printed, or duplex-printed for covers. Covers can also be trimmedto match with the thickness of the body set.

- The binding direction can be either left or right.

- Auto Low Power/Auto Shut Off: The low power/shut off mode activates at the same time on the main

body and Perfect Binder PB-503.- Paper tray

– Body: Main body trays (trays 1 to 3), Paper Feeder Unit PF-602 (trays 4 and 5), Multi-Sheet Bypass

Tray MB-504, Large Capacity Unit LU-202 (tray 4)– Cover: Main body trays (trays 1 to 3), Paper Feeder Unit PF-602 (trays 4 and 5), Multi-Sheet Bypass

Tray MB-504, Large Capacity Unit LU-202 (tray 4) (available for Cover Print), cover tray of PerfectBinder PB-503 (unavailable for Cover Print), upper/lower tray of Folding Unit FD-503 post inserter (unavailable for Cover Print)

- Paper size for cover

– Custom size of the body length (head to foot) within 5 mm difference, and of the body width e 2 + bodythickness (1 mm or more) + (5 mm or more of trimming width if Trimming mode is specified)

– Perfect Binder PB-503 cover tray : min. 139 mm e 279 mm to max. 307 mm e 472 mm– Upper/lower tray of Folding Unit FD-503 post inserter: min. 182 mm e 279 mm to max.

307 mm e 472 mm




Front cover orig-inal

Body set original Back cover orig-inal






6.7

- Paper weight

– Body: 64 to 105 g/m2 (can be specified from 64 to 74 g/m2, 75 to 80 g/m2, and 81 to 105 g/m2.)– Cover: 81 to 209 g/m2 (can be specified from 81 to 105 g/m2, 106 to 135 g/m2, 136 to 162 g/m2, and

163 to 209 g/m2.)

- Paper type

– Body: Fine, Plain, Color– Cover: Fine, Plain, Coated-GL, Coated-ML, Coated-GO, Coated-MO

- Number of sheets to be bound:– Fine, Plain: 10 sheets min. to 300 sheets max., or within 30 mm thick– Colored, Coated: 10 sheets min. to 150 sheets max., or within 15 mm thick– Z-folded insertions: 4 sheets max. in duplex mode, or 2 sheets max. in simplex mode using Fine/Plain

Maximum number of z-folded insertions and body sheets:

- Covers fed from main body trays (trays 1 to 3), Paper Feeder Unit PF-602 (trays 4 and 5), Multi-SheetBypass Tray MB-504, or Large Capacity Unit LU-202 (tray 4) can be simplex- or duplex-printed. Cov-ers fed from the cover tray of Perfect Binder PB-503 or from the upper/lower tray of Folding Unit

FD-503 post inserter cannot be printed.

- Cover Trim

– With Cover Trim specified, the machine trims the cover by the amount automatically estimated from thefollowing formula, in the range from 30 mm to 40 mm in 0.1 mm increments.

– (Cover width) - (Body width e 2) - (Spine width)– If the estimated amount exceeds 10 mm, the machine will automatically trim the cover whether this

function is activated or not.

- Fine Adjustment

– Cover Lead Edge Adjustment: Adjusts the lateral position of front cover and body set in the range from-12.8 mm to +12.8 mm, in 0.1 mm increments.

– Cover Trimming Adjustment: Adjusts the trimming width in the range from -5.0 mm to +5.0 mm, in0.1 mm increments.

– Cover Image Shift Adjustment: Adjusts the position of image to be printed on the front/back cover whenusing Cover Print mode.

For 8.5 e 11 v body set to be bound with a cover fed from main body trays (trays 1 to 3), Paper Feeder UnitPF-602 (trays 4 and 5), Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray MB-503, or Large Capacity Unit LU-202, the maximumthickness should be less than 30 mm.

Cover Trim OFF: 460 - (216 e 2) = 28 mm

Cover Trim ON: 460 - (216 e 2) - (3 mm in trimming width) = 25 mm

If thickness of 8.5 e 11 v body set is more than that mentioned above, use the cover feeding tray of PerfectBinder PB-503 or the upper/lower tray of Folding Unit FD-503 post inserter to attach a cover.

d ReferenceYou can specify the paper weight of body sets and covers available in Perfect Binder PB-503 .

The minimum/maximum number of sheets to be bound in perfect binding can be changed according to the

paper weight of body set.

The machine can be set to detect the thickness of body set and to stop the binding operation temporarily if

the cover width to be used is unsuitable for the body set.

Z-folded insertions Body sheets Total at maximum

1 sheet 200 sheets 201 sheets

2 sheets 150 sheets 152 sheets







6.7.1 Turning On/Off the Heater of the Perfect Binder

The Perfect Binder PB-503 has an inner heater to add heat to glue pellets for making perfect-bound books.It requires approximately 20 minutes of warmup time to melt the pellets to be ready for the operation.

Adding heat continuously to glue pellets, however, may deteriorate them if thePerfect Binder PB-503 is keptunoperated.

To prevent the deterioration of glue pellets, the heater of the perfect binder is designed to be turned off au-tomatically in the following condition.

- One minute after a perfect binding job is completed

- One minute after completion of the warmup if any operation has not been made on the perfect binder

To turn on the heater of the perfect binder

Turning on the sub power switch of the main body does not turn on the heater of the perfect binder at thesame time to start warming up automatically.

The heater of the perfect binder automatically starts warming up when [Perfect Bind] is selected on the Out-put Setting Screen, or when a print job using perfect binder is received.

If you know the time to use the Perfect Binder PB-503 in advance, calculate the timing to turn on the heaterwith required warmup time, then manually turn it on by pressing the inner heater switch for the perfect binder[ON] on the Machine Screen.

% Press [ON] for the inner heater switch for the perfect binder provided on the Machine Screen to startthe heater of the perfect binder warming up. The message right to the inner heater switch for the perfectbinder is changed to [PB Shut Off] to [PB Warming Up].

% When the Perfect Binder PB-503 become available, this message is changed to [PB Heater].





6.7

d ReferenceThe heater of the perfect binder can be set to start warming up automatically with the sub power switch

turned on. Contact your service representative, if desired.

NOTICE Once started, the warmup of the heater will not be interrupted even when the Auto Low Power/ Auto Shut Offfunctions on the main body. Once [Perfect Bind] selected on the Output Setting Screen, the heater of the perfect binder will continue warming up even though the setting is canceled with [Function Off] pressed on thePerfect Binding Screen or with Reset pressed on the control panel . If not using the Perfect Binder PB-503 ,be sure to turn off the heater by pressing the heater switch of the perfect binder OFF on the Machine Screen.

To turn off the heater of the perfect binder

When the job using perfect binder is completed, the heater of the perfect binder will automatically be turnedoff in one minute.

The heater will also be turned off automatically in one minute if any operation has not been made on the Per-fect Binder PB-503 after completion of the warmup.

The heater can be turned off manually by pressing the heater switch for the perfect binder [OFF] on the Ma-chine Screen while warming up or ready for operation,

Pressing the heater switch for the perfect binder [OFF] will not function if any perfect binding jobs are entered.

d ReferenceService can set the heater not to be turned off automatically after one-minute interval. Contact your service

representative, if desired. In this case, the heater will not be turned off till the Auto Low Power/Auto Shut Off

functions on the main body. Please be careful not to allow the glue pellets to deteriorate.





6.7.2 Managing the Perfect Binder PB-503 and Glue Pellets

To ensure safety and product reliability, observe the precautions for using the Perfect Binder PB-503 andglue pellets.

7 CAUTIONNEVER touch the thermally melted glue.

-The thermally melted glue is very hot. If you touch them, you may get burned. Handle thermally meltedhot glue only with great care. If you need to clean or replace thermally melted glue, contact your servicerepresentative.

Precautions for Perfect Binder

- Use only the glue GC-501 for this binder.

- When you do not use the perfect binder, be sure to turn the heater switch OFF to prevent the deterio-ration of glue. It is recommended that you adjust the time settings for the low power mode and shut-offmode of the main body to suit the usage of the perfect binder PB-503, since then apply to the binderas well.

- Do not overload the glue hopper with glue pellets.

- Do not touch the lever in the glue hopper with your hand. It may cause machine trouble.

Precautions for Glue Pellets- Glue pellets are not edible. Do not put them in your mouth nor swallow them.

- Keep glue pellets out of reach of children.

- Store glue pellets in dark, cool indoors, avoiding direct sunlight or exposure to water. The storage tem-perature is between 5 and 35 degrees Celsius.

- Glue pellets may become degraded by such products as common oils, organic solvents, solvents usedin ink formulations, or volatile fragrances. Such degradation may cause deterioration in adhesiveness,resulting in poor binding performance.



Suspending/Resuming Output to Finisher FS-5216


6.8

6.8 Suspending/Resuming Output to Finisher FS-521

Finisher FS-521 can hold 3,000 output sheets (1,500 sheets for sizes larger than 8.5 e 11/500 sheets forsmaller than 5.5 e 8.5) at maximum on the primary (main) tray.

Follow the procedure below to suspend the current output job in order to take out printed sheets from theprimary (main) tray, and then to restart it.

6.8.1 To Suspend an Output Job

1 Keep the suspension button pressed till the LED starts flash-ing.

To let the LED flash, keep the suspension button pressed forapproximately one second.

The machine temporarily stops printing, and then the LED of thesuspension button turns steady.

% The suspension button will not function in Staple mode, orwhen printed sheets are delivered to another tray than theprimary (main) tray.

2 Take out the printed sheets delivered to the primary (main) tray.

The LED of the suspension button will go out when all sheetsare removed from the primary (main) tray.

% There will be no trouble in restarting the output job withprinted sheets left in the tray. In this case, the LED of thesuspension button will remain lit.

3 Press Start on the control panel to restart the output job.

The machine will resume printing.

% To cancel the output job without restarting it, press Stop onthe control panel. See the following subsection "To cancelthe suspended job" for details.




6.8 Suspending/Resuming Output to Finisher FS-521 6

6.8.2 To Cancel the Suspended Job

1 Press Stop on the control panel.

A dialog box will be displayed for selecting whether or not tocancel the suspended job.

2 Press [Stop].



Using Multi Punch GP-5016


6.9

6.9 Using Multi Punch GP-501

Using Multi Punch GP-501, the following eight types of punch holes can be made in printed sheets.

6.9.1 Punching File Holes in Prints: Punch

Prints will be punched in this mode. Follow the procedure below to select the paper size A4 v and punchposition. To select the punch hole type, change the die set to the desired one.

- Available paper size is A4 v only. Do not use A4 w.

- A power switch is provided on the multi punch. Be sure to turn it on before turning on the main and subpower switches of the main body.

- The die set model currently mounted on the multi punch cannot be checked from the control panel. Ifrequired, open the front door of the multi punch to check it before the operation.

Die set model Hole type

DS-508

DS-509

DS-510

DS-511

DS-512

DS-513

DS-515

DS-516

Ring Binder 4-Hole, 5/16" Diameter

Plastic Bind Cerlox Standard 21 Hole

WireBind - 3:1 Round 34 Hole

WireBind - 2:1 Rectangular 23 Hole

Color Coil - 4:1 Round 47 Hole

VeloBind - 1:1 Round 12 Hole

Ring Binder 2-Hole A4 die set

Plastic Bind Cerlox 20-Hole




6.9 Using Multi Punch GP-501 6

6.9.2 Exchanging the Die Set

1 Open the multi punch front door.

2 Turn the knob [GP4] clockwise to set the die set punch bladeposition indicator to the horizontal position as shown in the il-lustration.

% Be sure to align the die set punch blade position indicator tothe horizontal line, otherwise the die set cannot be with-drawn.

3 Slowly withdraw the die set.

4 Take out the desired die set from the rack to replace it with theone currently set.

% Securely set the die set in position.



Using Multi Punch GP-5016


6.9

5 Put the replaced die set into the rack.

% The replaced die set is supposed to be stored in the rack.

6 Close the multi punch front door.




6.10 Restarting Output the Next Day: Overnight Output 6

6.10 Restarting Output the Next Day: Overnight Output

This function allows you to stop the job currently in process, then restart it on the following day.

0 Using this function, you can continue such jobs as the current job in progress, print job being ready foroutput, or a hold job being output on the following day.

NOTICE The overnight output function is available on the machine mounted with Image Controller IC-601 and HardDisk Kit HD-514 .

1 Display the Machine Screen, then press Stop on the control

panel.

A dialog will be displayed to specify the overnight output.

2 Press [Temporary Stop].

The Machine Screen will be displayed.

3 Press [JOB LIST] tab.

The Reserved Job Screen will be displayed.



Restarting Output the Next Day: Overnight Output6


6.10

4 Press the power key [ Save Job List then Power OFF] at the bottom-left corner of the screen.

A dialog will be displayed to confirm the power-off.

5 To continue the job next day, press [Yes].

% Or, press [No] to cancel the overnight output function. The Job List Screen will be restored.

6 Check the message displayed on the dialog, then turn off the sub power switch.

7 To continue the output job, turn on the sub power switch, then operate it from the Job List Screen.

OFF

ON



7Job List Screen and HDDRecall Screen






7.1 Overview of the Job List Screen 7

7 Job List Screen and HDD Recall Screen

This section describes indications and operating procedure of the Job List Screen. Also, follow the procedureprovided here to recall the data stored on the HDD to the Hold Job Screen of the Job List Screen for output.

7.1 Overview of the Job List Screen

The Job List Screen allows you to check/operate the following items.

- Hold Job

- Reserved Job

- Schedule

- Output History

- Send History

- Incomplete History

NOTICE The Hold Job and HDD Recall functions require the machine to be mounted with Hard Disk Kit HD-514 andPreview Kit PH-102 .

The Schedule function requires the machine to be mounted with Image Controller IC-601 , Hard Disk KitHD-514 , and Preview Kit PH-102 .

1 Press [JOB LIST] tab on the screen.

The Job List Screen will be displayed.



Overview of the Job List Screen7


7.1

2 Press the desired list item key on the screen.

% See the following pages for details of each subsequent screen.

3 Press any tab key on the screen to exit the Job List mode.




7.2 Hold Job and HDD Store Job 7

7.2 Hold Job and HDD Store Job

The machine can temporarily store job data scanned from the ADF or from the original glass into memory,and then allows you to check them on the Job List Screen for output or saving them on an HDD.

The jobs stored on the HDD can be output from the HDD Recall Screen, returned to the Hold Job Screen,and also deleted from the HDD.

This section describes how to output, duplicate, and delete the hold jobs from the Hold Job Screen of the

Job List Screen, to store the jobs on the HDD (HDD Store), and also to edit the jobs (Job Edit). Proceduresto be performed on the HDD Recall Screen are also provided, such as printing, recalling, and deleting the jobs stored on the HDD.

7.2.1 Hold Job Screen of the Job List Screen


1 [Hold Job] Pressed to display the Hold Job Screen.

2 [JOB LIST] tab Pressed to display the Job List Screen which allows you an accessto the Hold Job Screen.

3 Preview icon Displays the first page of the hold job as an icon. If a password hasbeen created on the Hold Job Screen, a lock mark appears insteadof the preview icon.Pressing the title section of the preview icon will sort the list by typeof the icon.

4 [File Name] Displays the file name of a hold job. If a specific file name has beenentered on the Hold Job Screen, that name will be displayed. If noentry has been made, the last 4 digits of the job ID will be displayed.The jobs having the same name will be marked on the right side.The file name of the job with a password created will not be dis-played.Pressing the title [File Name] will sort the list by file name.

5 [User Name] Displays the authenticated user name for the hold job which hasbeen created after successful user authentication. Also displays theauthenticated account name for the hold job which has been creat-ed after successful account authentication.Pressing the title [User Name] will sort the list by user name.

6 Hold Job Number dis-play

Displays the number of hold jobs. Up to 100 jobs can be stored. Thedisplay turns red when the job counts 91 or more. The machine willbe unavailable to hold another job when the hold job count exceeds100.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

10

11

1213

14

15

16

17181920

21

22

23

8 9



Hold Job and HDD Store Job7


7.2

7 [Last Update] Displays the date when the hold job was created. The date will beupdated when the job is duplicated or recalled from the HDD.Pressing the title [Last Update] will sort the list by date.

8 [Pages] Displays the page count of the hold job.Pressing the title [Pages] will sort the list in descending/ascendingorder of page count.

9 [Sets] Displays the print quantity of the hold job.Pressing the title [Sets] will sort the list in descending/ascending or-der of set count.

10 [Multi-Sel.] Pressed first before selecting multiple hold jobs from the list. Press[Multi-Sel.] again to cancel this function. The hold job set up with apassword cannot be selected by pressing the row of that job after[Multi-Sel.] is pressed.

11 [All Select] Pressed to select all the hold jobs on the list. Press [All Select] againto cancel this function. The hold job set up with a password cannotbe selected by pressing [All Select].

12 [Delete] Pressed to delete the hold job.

13 [Copy] Pressed to duplicate a hold job in the Hold Job Screen.

14 [HDD Store] Pressed to store the hold job on the HDD.

15 [Job Ticket] Pressed to display the Job Ticket Edit Screen in order to edit a hold job using the Job Ticket Edit function. You can shift the display fromthe Job Ticket Edit Screen to the Image Page Edit Screen.

16 [Page Edit] Pressed to display the Image Page Edit Screen in order to edit a hold job using Image Page Edit function. You can shift the display fromthe Image Page Edit Screen to the Job Ticket Edit Screen.

17 [Output] Pressed to output the hold job. The job data will be a reserve job tobe ready for output.

18 [With Job Delete] Specifies whether or not to delete the hold job after output. Press thecheck button to put a check mark in it, if desired.

19 Scroll buttons Used to scroll the list. The current page number and total page countof the list are displayed between the buttons.

20 [Lock Release] Pressed to release the lock of password-protected job. With a pass-word entered and [OK] pressed, the preview icon will appear insteadof a lock mark to show that the lock of the job has been released.

21 Scroll buttons for select-ed jobs

Pressed to scroll the list of selected jobs.

22 Hold job information Displays a preview image and specified copy conditions of the jobselected in the hold job list. The password-protected job cannot bedisplayed unless its lock is released.

23 Duplication mark Appears when another job having the same name is created in thehold job list.






7.2.2 HDD Recall Screen


1 HDD Store Route Displays the superior directories on the HDD. Pressed to move to ahigher level from the directory currently displayed.

2 Path name Displays the subordinate directory.

3 Preview icon Displays the first page of the stored job as an icon. If a password hasbeen created for the job, a lock mark appears instead of the previewicon.Pressing the title section of the preview icon will sort the list by type

of the icon.4 [Name] Displays the same name as that of the hold job.

Pressing the title [Name] will sort the list by name.

5 [HDD RECALL] tab Pressed to display the HDD Recall Screen.

6 [User Name] Displays the same user name as that of the hold job.Pressing the title [User Name] will sort the list by user name.

7 File Number Displays the number of files included in the directory currently dis-played as a list.

8 [Last Update] Displays the date when the job was stored on the HDD.Pressing the title [Last Update] will sort the list by date.

9 [New] Pressed to create a new folder in the superior directory.

10 [Delete] Pressed to delete the subordinate directory (folder). Delete all the jobs in the directory first before deleting itself.

11 [Multi-Sel.] Pressed first before selecting multiple jobs from the list. Press [Multi-Sel.] again to cancel this function. The hold job set up with a pass-word cannot be selected by pressing the row of that job after [Multi-Sel.] is pressed.

12 [All Select] Pressed to select all the stored jobs on the list. Press [All Select]again to cancel this function. The hold job set up with a passwordcannot be selected by pressing [All Select].

13 [Delete] Pressed to delete the stored job.

14 [Recall] Pressed to recall the stored job. Select the desired recalling functionfrom [Print], [Hold], and [Hold + Print].

15 Scroll buttons Used to scroll the list. The current page number and total page countof the list are displayed between the buttons.

1 2 3 4 6 7 8

11

12

13

141516

17

18

19

9 105





7.2

7.2.3 Outputting Hold Job

Follow the procedure below to output a hold job.

1 Press [JOB LIST] tab to display the Job List Screen.

2 Press [Hold Job].

The Hold Job Screen will be displayed.

3 Select the job to be output.

Press the row of the desired job on the list.

% If the desired job is not found on the list, use the scroll buttons [,] and [+] to display that job.

% Pressing each title in the title row will sort the list in selected order.

% If the data with the same file name exist, " " mark appears on the right side of the file name.

% Press [Multi-Sel.] first to select multiple jobs.% Press [All Select] to select all jobs on the list. Pressing this key selects all jobs on the list, but [Multi-

Sel.] appears highlighted instead.

16 [Lock Release] Pressed to release the lock of password-protected job. With a pass-word entered and [OK] pressed, the preview icon will appear insteadof a lock mark to show that the lock of the job has been released.

17 Scroll buttons for select-ed jobs

Pressed to scroll the list of selected jobs.

18 Stored job information Displays a preview image and specified copy conditions of the jobselected in the stored job list. The password-protected job cannotbe displayed unless its lock is released.

19 Duplication mark Appears when another job having the same name is created in theHDD store job list.






% Neither [Multi-Sel.] nor [All Select] can select the hold job set up with a password in the Hold Setting.

4 Press the check box of [With Job Delete].

Put a check mark in the check box to delete the job after output.Keep the check box blank to leave the job after output.

% The machine allows you to specify whether or not to put a check mark in the check box as the initialsetting. For details, see chapter "12 Utility Menu Screen".

5 Press [Output].

The machine will send the hold job data to the Reserved Job Screen and start printing.





7.2

% With a check mark put in the check box of [With Job Delete], a confirmation dialog will pop up onthe screen. Press [Yes] to delete it, or press [No] to cancel.

% The Reserved Job Screen allows you to manage output jobs. See page 7-36 for details.

7.2.4 Deleting Hold Job

Follow the procedure below to delete a hold job. To delete a hold job after output, see page 7-8.


2 Press [Hold Job].


3 Select the job to be deleted.





% Press [Multi-Sel.] first to select multiple jobs.

% Press [All Select] to select all jobs on the list. Pressing this key selects all jobs on the list, but [Multi-Sel.] appears highlighted instead.





4 Press [Delete].

A confirmation dialog will be displayed.

5 Press [Yes].

Or, press [No] to cancel.

The selected job will be deleted and the Hold Job Screen will be restored.





7.2

7.2.5 Duplicating Hold Job

Follow the procedure below to duplicated a hold job.


2 Press [Hold Job].


3 Select the job to be duplicated.


% If another data with the same file name exists, " " mark appears on the right side of the file name.



% The hold job set up with a password cannot be selected by pressing [All Select][].

4 Press [Copy].

The selected job will be duplicated and added to the list.





7.2.6 Storing Hold Job on HDD

Follow the procedure below to store a hold job on the HDD.


2 Press [Hold Job].


3 Select the job to be stored on the HDD.







% Neither [Multi-Sel.] nor [All Select] can select the hold job set up with a password.

4 Press [HDD Store].

The HDD Store Route Screen will be displayed.





7.2

5 Specify the directory of the HDD.

% Proceed to step 6, if you store the data in the current directory on the HDD Store Route Screen.

% If another folder provided on the HDD Store Route Screen is desired, press the section of that folder.The contents of selected folder will be listed on the screen.

% Press [Close] to return to the Hold Job Screen.

% If a new folder is desired, press [New]. The New Folder Creation Screen will be displayed. Enter afolder name and a password, then press [OK]. The entry of Password can be omitted. The createdfolder will appear as a blank list on the screen.

% Pressing [Cancel] restores the [HDD Store Route] Screen.





% The created folder can also be deleted, if any job has not yet been stored. Press [Delete].

% Press [Close] to return to the Hold Job Screen.

% To return to the HDD Store Route Screen, press [HDD Store].

6 Press [Store].

The machine stores the job selected in step 3 onto the HDD.

% If the file name of the job has been duplicated, a confirmation dialog will be displayed. Press [Yes]to store the data, or press [No] to cancel.





7.2

7.2.7 Recalling HDD Store Job

Follow the procedure below to recall a job stored on the HDD.

0 Only one job can be recalled at a time. You cannot select multiple jobs to recall.

0 When recalling a job stored on the HDD, select the desired operation from [Print], [Hold], and [Hold +Print].

0 The stored job retains the information of specified print quantity, however, you can change it as desiredwhen recalling a job.

1 Press [HDD RECALL] tab to display the HDD Recall Screen.

The HDD Store Route Screen of the HDD Recall Screen will be displayed.

2 Display the directory including the job to be recalled.

% Proceed to step 3, if the job to be recalled shows on the HDD Store Route Screen.


% When recalling a job stored in another folder provided on the HDD Store Route Screen, press thesection of that folder. The contents of selected folder will be listed on the screen.





3 Select the job to be recalled.


% If the desired job is not found on the list, use the scroll buttons to display that job.


% You cannot select multiple jobs to recall. Be sure to use neither [Multi-Sel.] nor [All Select].

4 Press [Recall].

A dialog to select [Print], [Hold], or [Hold + Print] will be displayed.

5 Use the control panel keypad to change the print quantity, if desired, then select one of the three op-tions.

% The stored job retains the information of specified print quantity, however, you can change it as de-sired.

% Press [Print] to start printing.

% With [Hold] selected, the job data will be recalled to the list of the Hold Job Screen without beingoutput.

% With [Hold + Print] selected, the machine will start printing while the job data being recalled to thelist of the Hold Job Screen.





7.2

7.2.8 Deleting HDD Store Job

Follow the procedure below to delete a job stored on the HDD.

0 Multiple jobs can be deleted at a time.

0 The folder created on the HDD Store Route Screen can also be deleted.

0 If another data with the same file name exists, " " mark appears on the right side of the file name.

1 Press [HDD RECALL] tab to display the HDD Recall Screen.

The HDD Store Route Screen of the HDD Recall Screen will be displayed.

2 Display the directory including the job to be deleted.

% Proceed to step 3, if the job to be deleted shows on the HDD Store Route Screen.

% When deleting a job stored in another folder provided on the HDD Store Route Screen, press thesection of that folder. The contents of selected folder will be listed on the screen.






% Neither [Multi-Sel.] nor [All Select] can select the hold job set up with a password.





4 Press [Delete].


5 Press [Yes].

% Or, press [No] to cancel.

The selected job will be deleted and the HDD Store Route Screen will be restored.



Editing Hold Job: Job Edit7


7.3

7.3 Editing Hold Job: Job Edit

7.3.1 Outline of Job Edit

Job Edit provides the following two editing functions.

Follow the procedure below to display the Job Ticket Edit Screen and Image Page Edit Screen, and edit the jobs referring to the description of each screen.

d ReferenceThe description of Register Crop Mark is provided in another section. See page 7-25 for details.

If output conditions (such as option configuration) differ from those of the hold job, the symbol e will be dis-played to show unavailability of output and overwriting.


2 Press [Hold Job].


3 Select the file to be edited on the Hold Job Screen.

4 Press [Job Ticket] to display the Job Ticket Edit Screen, or press [Page Edit] to display the Image PageEdit Screen.

Function Description

Job Ticket Edit Allows you to check the Basic Setting, Output Setting, Application Setting,Paper Setting, and Quality Adjustment made for a hold job or job stored onthe HDD, and also to partially change them for output.

Image Page Edit Provides preview images of the page sequence. This function also allowsyou to insert, move, or copy the images or sheets (covers).




7.3 Editing Hold Job: Job Edit 7

% See page 7-22 for details of the Job Ticket Edit Screen.

% See page 7-23 for details of the Image Page Edit Screen.





7.3

7.3.2 Job Ticket Edit Screen

This section describes an outline of the operation of the Job Ticket Edit Screen. Perform an operation in com-bination with the Image Page Edit Screen in order to edit a job.

d ReferenceSee page 7-23 for an outline of the operation of the Image Page Edit Screen.


1 Image sheet setting items and set con-tents

Displays setting items and set contents of the previewimage data. Press the key available for selection to

change the setting. Use [*] and [)] at the bottom ofeach area to scroll the items and contents.

2 [Front], [Back] Pressed to preview the front or back side image of thedata scanned as a double-sided original.

3 Preview image display Displays the preview image of the file selected on theHold Job Screen.

4 File name display Displays the name of the file selected on the Hold JobScreen.

5 Sheet No. display Displays the total sheet count of the file selected onthe Hold Job Screen, and also the sheet count of thepreview images.

6 Rotation/Output direction key Pressed to rotate the preview image, or to check the

output direction of the image.

7 Enlarged preview key Pressed to set crop marks or Image Shift function.

8 [Job Ticket Edit] tab Pressed to display the Job Ticket Edit Screen.

9 [Image Page Edit] tab Pressed to display the Image Page Edit Screen.

10 [Error Check] Flashes in orange when you made a setting changeunavailable for output. Press this key to display thecause.

11 [*] [)] Pressed to scroll the preview image.

12 [Overwrite] Overwrites to save the setting changes along with theimage data.

13 [New Store] Newly stores the setting changes along with the im-age data.

14 [Cancel] Pressed to cancel the setting changes.

2 3 4 6 7 8

1011

1

121315

1

95

14





7.3.3 Image Page Edit Screen

This section describes an outline of the operation of the Image Page Edit Screen. Perform an operation incombination with the Job Ticket Edit Screen in order to edit a job.

d ReferenceSee page 7-22 for an outline of the operation of the Job Ticket Edit Screen.

15 [Sample Output] Pressed to output a sample set or a sheet of previewimage in order to check the result of setting changes.


2 4 6

9

8

12

25

28

51 3 7

10

11

13141516171819202122232426

27

32

31

30

29





7.3


1 Insertion point Designates the point to insert sheets or images. Whenselected, the triangle turns white on the brighter back-ground.

2 Sheet count Indicates the sheet count of the file.

3 Image count Indicates the image count of the file.

4 Preview image display Displays the preview image of the file selected on theHold Job Screen. Up to 30 sheets can be displayed.The background becomes brighter when selected.

5 File name display Displays the name of the file selected on the Hold JobScreen.

6 [Job Ticket Edit] tab Pressed to display the Job Ticket Edit Screen.

7 [Image Page Edit] tab Pressed to display the Image Page Edit Screen.

8 Image Page Edit operating section Used to perform Image Page Edit.

9 [<<] [*] [)] [>>] Displays the previous 30 sheets of the Image PageEdit operating section with [*] pressed, or the next 30sheets with [)] pressed, when multiple pages are pro-vided. Press [<<] to display the first 30 sheets, or [>>]to display the last 30 sheets of the Image Page Editoperating section.

10 [Delete] Deletes the image selected in the Image Page Edit op-erating section. Multiple images can be deleted at atime.

11 [Insert/Move] Inserts/Moves the image selected in the Image PageEdit operating section to the location specified withthe insertion point. Multiple images can be insert-ed/moved at a time.

12 [Blank Insert] Inserts a blank image into the location specified withthe insertion point.

13 [Overwrite] Overwrites to save the Image Page Edit information

along with the image data.14 [Continuous] Pressed to select multiple preview images in the Im-

age Page Edit operating section.

15 [All Select] Pressed to select all preview images in the ImagePage Edit operating section.

16 [New Store] Newly stores the Image Page Edit information alongwith the image data.

17 [Chapters] Pressed to divide the sheets into chapters at the loca-tion specified with the insertion point.

18 [Copy] Copies the image selected in the Image Page Edit op-erating section to the location specified with the inser-tion point. Multiple images can be copied at a time.

19 [Cancel] Pressed to cancel the Image Page Edit information.

20 Insertion setting display Displays the paper setting made for insertions.

21 [Change] Pressed to change the paper setting made for inser-tions.

22 Insertion icon Selected to specify the location of insertions. Selectthe insertion icon to highlight it, select the insertionpoint, then press [Insert/Move] to insert the insertioninto the specified location.

23 Tab paper setting display Displays the paper setting made for tabbed sheets.

24 [Change] Pressed to change the paper setting made for tabbedsheets.

25 [Sample Output] Pressed to output a sample set in order to check theresult of specified Image Page Edit.





7.3.4 Register Crop Mark in Job Ticket Edit

This section describes the Register Crop Mark function to be specified on the Job Ticket Edit Screen.

Use this function to print the lines indicating the trim size (corner crop marks) along with image data storedin a hold job. Also, lines indicating the center of the image (center crop marks) can be printed on the headand foot of the page.

- The crop mark can be printed with image data stored in a hold job of copy job or print job. Setting fora scan job is unavailable. You can make the setting to eliminate the corner crop mark.

- You can make the setting to eliminate the corner crop mark.

- The following three types of the corner crop mark are provided to allow a selection. The line width isapproximately 0.1 mm.

- For Print Object setting, select either Image Unit or Comp. Unit.

0 The trim margin indicated by the corner crop mark can be specified from 0.1 mm to 20 mm. The defaultsetting is 3 mm.

26 Tab paper icon Selected to specify the location of tabbed sheets. Se-lect the tab paper icon to highlight it, select the inser-tion point, then press [Insert/Move] to insert thetabbed sheet into the specified location.

27 [Insert Sheet] tab Pressed to make the paper setting for copy paper ortabbed sheets to be used as insertions.

28 [Insert Image] tab Pressed to insert image data selected from the imagefile of the hold job.

29 [Call Insert Job] Pressed to select the image data to be inserted fromthe image file of the hold job.

30 File name display Displays the name of the image file of the hold job se-lected for insertions.

31 [Image Only] Selected to insert the image data only.

32 [Image + Page Set] Selected to insert image data along with the page set-ting of the data.


Type 1 Type 2 Type 3

Image Unit Comp. Unit





7.3

0 The size of the corner crop mark is 5 mm in each projection. Changing this size is unavailable.

0 You can make the setting to eliminate the center crop mark.

0 The type of the center crop mark is a cross shape only. The line width is approximately 0.1 mm.

0 The print position of the center crop mark can be specified on the Utility Menu Screen. see chapter"12 Utility Menu Screen".

0 The size of the center crop mark is 4 mm in length and 6 mm in width. Changing this size is unavailable.

0 The print position of the corner crop mark and center crop mark can be offset within the range from -

20 mm (inward) to +20 mm (outward) in 0.1 mm increment for both X-coordinate and Y-coordinate. Thedefault setting is 0.0 mm.

0 Select either both sides or the front side only for the print side of the corner crop mark and center cropmark in duplex printing.

0 Specify whether or not to synchronize the print position of the corner crop mark and center crop markwith Page Margin.


2 Press [Hold Job].


3 Select the file to be printed with crop marks on the Hold Job Screen.

4 Press [Job Ticket].

The Job Ticket Edit Screen will be displayed.

5 Press [Register Crop Mark] in [Application].

The Register Crop Mark dialog will be displayed.





6 Select either [ON] or [OFF] under [Center Crop Mark].

% Select [OFF] to eliminate the corner crop mark in printing.

7 Select the type provided under [Corner Crop Mark].% Select [OFF] to eliminate the corner crop mark in printing.

8 Select [Trim Margin], [Offset <-->], or [Offset (up/down arrows)] as desired, then use the touch panelkeypad, [,], or [+] to enter the desired numerical value.

9 Select either [Comp. Unit] or [Image Unit] for [Print Object].

% [Print Object] cannot be specified if [OFF] is selected for the corner crop mark in step 7.

10 Make the desired selection for [Back Side Printing OFF] for duplex printing, and [Page Margin Synchro-nize OFF] for the job using Page Margin.

11 Press [OK].





7.3

12 Press [New Store] or [Overwrite] to save the setting.

% Press [Sample Output] to output a sample set or a sheet of preview image, in order to check theprint result of the setting.




7.4 Schedule 7

7.4 Schedule

7.4.1 Outline of Schedule Screen

The Schedule Screen shows the printing, suspended, or reserved jobs displayed on the Reserved Job Screenusing job bars. It also allows you to change the order of reserved jobs from the job bar display, or to changethe paper tray specified for a reserved job.

The job bar display shows the relation between the paper tray to be used in a job and the following.

- Number of sheets to be used in the job

- Estimated time to start and complete the job

- Time required for the job (minute)

NOTICE The Schedule function requires the machine to be mounted with Image Controller IC-601 and Hard DiskKit HD-514 .


1 [Schedule] Pressed to display the Schedule Screen of the JobList Screen.

2 Paper tray items Displays loaded paper size, remaining amount, andpaper weight and type specified for the tray in PaperSetting.

3 Unit of operation line Indicates the number of sheets to be used, required

time (minutes), or estimated time for reserved jobs.

4 Job bar display Separates the rows into reserved job areas with shad-ing of gray, and indicates each job using blue, yellow,or orange bar according to the following rules.Blue: Available for output with plenty of paperYellow: Short supply of paperOrange: Highly likely to stop due to a lack of paper, noappropriate paper loaded, or unavailable for outputdue to a different paper setting specified

5 [Unit Change] Pressed to switch the three units of operation-line(Sheet Volume, Timetable, Time Volume (m)).

6 [-] [+] Pressed to change the scale of the job bar display.

7 Paper setting dialog Appears when a bar in the job bar display is selected.It provides detailed paper setting of the selected job.

3 1 9 10

11

12

4

8765

13

2

2



Schedule7


7.4

The Schedule Screen will be reloaded when the machine goes into the following conditions.

- When a paper tray is loaded, pulled out, or changed in paper amount

- When the paper setting has been changed- When a job operation has started or restarted

- When a reserved job is added, changed in output order, or deleted

- When an output job is completed

- When the screen has not been reloaded for more than 30 seconds during output

0 The job bar for the current output job indicates the remaining amount of that job, becoming shorter overtime.

0 The job bar will be shown in the job bar display after scanning the original or transferring images fromthe image controller is completed.

0 The required time shorter than a minute will be indicated as a minute.

1 Make settings to output a job.

% Use Reserve or Hold Job function to output multiple jobs.


3 Press [Schedule] on the Job List Screen.

8 [Change Tray Paper] Pressed to change the tray selection of the reserved job, or to change the paper setting of the selectedtray.

9 Operation dialog Appears when a bar in the job bar display is pressed.The dialog provides [Job Reselect], [Tray Select], and[Order Change] to make each operation for the job.

10 [Job Reselect] Switches the paper setting dialog between jobs whenmultiple job bars are displayed.

11 [Tray Select] Switches the paper setting dialog from one tray to an-other, if the selected job uses more than one tray.

12 [Order Change] Changes the output order of reserved jobs.

13 Paper Mismatch Displays a job bar when no appropriate tray is foundfor the paper setting of the reserved job, or the corre-sponding tray runs out of paper.





7.4 Schedule 7

7.4.2 Using [Unit Change], [-], and [+]

This section describes how to use [Unit Change], [-], and [+] keys on the Schedule Screen.

1 Follow the procedure on page 7-29 to display the Schedule Screen.

2 Press [Unit Change] to switch the unit of time-line item.

The unit switches to [Sheet Volume], [Time Schedule], or [Time Volume (m)] every time you press [UnitChange]. The desired unit can be specified as default. See chapter "12 Utility Menu Screen".

3 Press [-] or [+] to change the display scale.

The display scale can be changed within the following range.

Time-line item Available range using [-] and [+]

Sheet Volume 1,500 sheets to 70,000 sheets

Time Schedule 30 minutes later to 24 hours later

Time Volume (m) 30 minutes to 24 hours



Schedule7


7.4

7.4.3 Operating Paper Setting Dialog via Operation Dialog

This section describes how to display and operate the operation dialog on the Schedule Screen.

0 You cannot exit the Schedule Screen with the operation dialog and paper setting dialog displayed. Toexit the Schedule Screen, press [x] in the upper-right corner of the dialog to make it disappear from thescreen.


2 Select the desired job bar from the job bar display.

The operation dialog and paper setting dialog of the selected job bar will be displayed.

3 Use the right and left arrow keys of [Job Reselect] to display the paper setting dialog of the desired job.

% Pressing [->] changes the paper setting dialog to that of the next job. When it comes to the last job,[->] becomes grayed out to show inactivity.

% Pressing [<-] changes the paper setting dialog to that of the previous job. When it comes to the first job, [<-] becomes grayed out to show inactivity.

4 If the selected job uses more than one tray, use the right and left arrow keys of [Tray Select] to switchthe paper setting dialog of the job from one tray to another.

% Pressing [->] changes the paper setting dialog to that of the next tray to be used. When it comes tothe last tray, [->] becomes grayed out to show inactivity.

% Pressing [<-] changes the paper setting dialog to that of the previous tray to be used. When it comesto the first tray, [<-] becomes grayed out to show inactivity.




7.4 Schedule 7

7.4.4 Changing Output Order of Reserved Jobs

This section describes how to change the output order of reserved jobs.

0 You cannot exit the Schedule Screen with the operation dialog and paper setting dialog displayed. Toexit the Schedule Screen, press [x] in the upper-right corner of the dialog to make it disappear from thescreen.


2 Select the job bar from the job bar display to change its output order.

% If the job to be changed in output order uses more than one tray, select any one of them.

The operation dialog and paper setting dialog of the selected job bar will be displayed.

3 Use the keys on both sides of [Order Change] to change the output order of the selected job.

% Press [<-] to advance the job by one in output order, or [<<] to output it next to the current printing

job.% Press [->] to delay the job by one in output order, or [>>] to output it last.

% The keys to change the output order are unavailable if they appear grayed out.

d ReferenceChanging output order of reserved jobs is also available on the Reserved Job Screen. See page 7-36 for de-

tails.



Schedule7


7.4

7.4.5 Changing Paper Setting of the Tray

If no appropriate tray is found for a reserved job, the paper setting of that job needs to be changed. Displaythe Change Tray Paper dialog to change the paper setting.

The following conditions are required for the tray to be changed.

- The job to change the paper setting is currently suspended or idling.

- The tray to change the paper setting is not scheduled for use in jobs to be output before the job in ques-tion.

- The tray information is mismatched to make it unavailable for feeding.

If a tray cannot be changed in the paper setting, the tray key appears grayed out on the Change Tray Paperdialog to show inactivity.


2 Select the job bar to be changed in the paper setting of the tray.

The operation dialog and paper setting dialog will be displayed.

3 Select the tray to be changed in the paper setting from the operation dialog, then press [Change TrayPaper].

The Change Tray Paper dialog will be displayed.




7.4 Schedule 7

4 Select the desired tray key, then press [Change Setting].

The Schedule Screen will be restored with the paper setting changed.



Checking and Operating Reserved Jobs7


7.5

7.5 Checking and Operating Reserved Jobs

Printing, suspended and reserved jobs are listed on the screen.

The list includes following information.

- File Name: Displays the file name when applied

- User Name: Displays the user name when registered

- Status: Printing or Reserved (current status of the job)

- Pages: Max. 5-digit page count- Sets: Max. 4-digit set count

- Remain: Max. 4-digit pages to be output (= sheets e sets)

- Minute(s): Time required for completing each job (minute)

- Mode: Copy or Printer

For printing and suspended jobs, you can check the status of these jobs.

For reserved jobs, you can check the order of reservation and the status of the jobs.

Follow the procedure below to operate.

1 Press [JOB LIST] on the Screen and then press [Reserved Job].

2 Check the information for printing, suspended and reserved jobs from the list in the screen.

% Use [+] or [,] to scroll, if 15 or more jobs are listed.




7.5 Checking and Operating Reserved Jobs 7

3 Select the desired active job to highlight it, then perform the job operation in the right of the screen.

% Perform the job operation in the list.

% To specify a job to be printed next: Press the desired job to highlight it, then press [To Top]. Thehighlighted job will be moved just under the current print job. This will not function if printing oper-ation has already been started for the selected job.

% To change an order of jobs: Press and highlight a job that you want to raise the priority in the list,then press [Up]. The selected job will slide up by one in printing order unless the job preceding theselected one is already in progress. Press and highlight a job that you want to lower the priority inthe list, then press [Down]. The selected job will slide down by one in printing order unless the jobpreceding the selected one is already in progress.

% To specify a job to be printed last: Press the desired job to highlight it, then press [To Bottom]. Thespecified job moves to the bottom of the list.

% To specify an active job: Press a job that you want to delete, then press [Delete]. All the data of theselected job will be cleared.

% To check details of a job: Press a job that you want to check the detail, then press [Ticket Details]

in Job Confirm. The Ticket Details Screen for the job that you select is displayed. Press [Close] afteryou confirm the details.



Displaying Output History 7


7.6

7.6 Displaying Output History

Use this function to display output history as a list.




- Result: Complete or Cancel

- Pages: Max. 5-digit page count- Sets: Max. 4-digit set count

- Time: Displays the time you print


Follow the procedure below to check the details of output jobs.

1 Press [JOB LIST] tab on the screen, then press [Output History].

2 Check the status of output jobs in the list of the screen.Use [+] and [,] to scroll, if 15 or more jobs are listed.




7.6 Displaying Output History 7

3 Press and highlight a job that you want to check it, then press [Details].

The Ticket Details Screen is displayed.

4 Check the details on the Ticket Details Screen.

5 Check the settings, then press [Close].



Displaying Send History 7


7.7

7.7 Displaying Send History

Use this function to display the send history as a list.




- Address: Displays an address to send a job

- Result: Displays a result of a sent job- Time: Displays time that you sent a job


Follow the procedure below to check the details of jobs.

1 Press [JOB LIST] tab on the screen, then press [Send History].

2 Check the status of jobs sent in the list of the screen.

Use [+] and [,] to scroll, if 15 or more jobs are listed.




7.7 Displaying Send History 7

3 Press and highlight a job that you want to check it, then press [Details].

The Ticket Details Screen is displayed.

4 Check the details on the Ticket Details Screen.

5 Check the settings, then press [Close].



Checking Incomplete Jobs7


7.8

7.8 Checking Incomplete Jobs

Use this function to display incomplete jobs as a list.




- Incomplete Cause: Displays causes that you cannot output such as memory overflow and cancel op-

eration.Follow the procedure below to check the details of incomplete jobs.

1 Press [JOB LIST] tab on the screen, then press [Incomp. History].

2 Check the status of incomplete jobs in the list of the screen.

Use [+] and [,] to scroll, if 15 or more jobs are listed.



8Supplies, Disposals, andHandling






8.1 How to Display a Help Message 8

8 Supplies, Disposals, and Handling

This section describes the indicators to be displayed when a specific process is required, and provides in-structions on how to perform the process.

Supply-related processes

- Replenishing toner supply

- Replenishing staple supply

- Loading paper

- Loading cover paper for perfect binding

- Loading tabbed paper

- Adding glue pellets for perfect binding

- Replenishing water supply in humidifier tank

Disposal-related processes

- Replacing toner recovery box

- Disposing punch waste

- Disposing trimmings

Output-related processes

- Removing finished sets from perfect binder tray

- Removing finished sets from large capacity stacker

A help message to be displayed on the Machine Screen provides you with the instructions on some process-es listed above: namely, replenishing toner/staple supply, disposing punch waste/trimmings, adding gluepellets, and loading paper.

The following also describes how to display the help message.

8.1 How to Display a Help Message


2 Press [ ] at the upper-right corner of the Machine Screen, or press Help on the control panel.

A help message for the Machine Screen will be displayed.



How to Display a Help Message8


8.1

3 Press [Consumable/Scrap] at the lower-right corner of the help message area.

4 Press the tab of the desired process.

5 Perform the process while using [+] and [,] to follow the steps.

6 When the process is completed, press [ ] at the upper-right corner of the Machine Screen, or pressHelp on the control panel.

The help message will disappear from the screen.




8.2 Replenishing Toner Supply 8

8.2 Replenishing Toner Supply

This machine is equipped with a toner storage to spare some toner so that the machine can keep copyingfor a while even if the toner in toner bottle is used up.

When toner supply from the toner bottle becomes low, the message such as [Ready to print / Please addtoner (K)] will be displayed.

The toner color indicator to be supplied lights in red in the Consumable and Scrap Indicators area of the Ma-

chine Screen.

When toner supply from the toner storage also becomes low, the message will change to [No toner / Pleaseadd toner].

0 Before changing a toner bottle, be sure to check the toner type number indicated on the front of tonerbottle inlet, and use a toner bottle of the same number. Using wrong toner bottles may cause machinetrouble.

0 Use the cap of new toner bottle for the used one, then place it into the package. For the subsequenttreatment, please contact your service representative.

7 WARNINGDO NOT THROW a toner bottle (including an empty one) into a fire!

If thrown into a fire, toner may ignite and cause a dangerous situation.

- For handling an empty toner bottle, please contact your service representative.



Replenishing Toner Supply 8


8.2

7

CAUTIONPrecautions for storage and handling of toner bottles

If too much of toner is inhaled or toner gets in your eyes, your health may be affected.

- Keep toner bottles away from children.

- Be careful not to spill toner inside the machine or not to get toner on your clothes or hands.

- If your hands become soiled with toner, wash them with soap and water.

- If toner gets in your eyes, immediately flush them with water, and then seek professional medical atten-tion.

1 Display the help message on the Machine Screen, then press [Consumable/Scrap].

2 Press the [Rep. Toner] tab of the help message on the Machine Screen.


d ReferenceSee page 8-3 for details of the help message.




8.3 Replacing Toner Recovery Box 8

8.3 Replacing Toner Recovery Box

When the toner recovery box becomes full with used toner, the following message/indicator will be displayedon the screen.

When the toner recovery box collects considerable amount of used toner and becomes due to be replaced,the message [Ready to print / Please replace toner recovery box] will be displayed.

The Toner Recovery Box indicator also informs you that the toner recovery box is full, lighting in red in the

Consumable and Scrap Indicators area of the Machine Screen.

Finally, when the machine becomes unavailable for printing due to the toner recovery box full of used toner,the message will change to [Toner recovery box is full / Please replace recovery box].

7 WARNINGDO NOT THROW the toner recovery box into a fire!

If the toner recovery box is thrown into a fire, the toner may ignite and cause a dangerous situation.

- For the treatment of used toner recovery box full of toner, please contact your service representative.



Replacing Toner Recovery Box8


8.3


2 Press [Toner Rec. Box] in the help message area.






8.4 Replenishing Staple Supply 8

8.4 Replenishing Staple Supply

8.4.1 Replenishing Staple Supply in Finisher FS-521

When the staple cartridge of Finisher FS-521 becomes empty, the following message will appear in the mes-sage area of the screen.

[Please pull out staple finisher stacker and add staples to the front stapler]

[Please pull out staple finisher stacker and add staples to the back side stapler]

The Staple Cartridge indicator lights in red in the Consumable and Scrap Indicators area of the MachineScreen.

Be sure to supply the designated stapler with staples.

NOTICE Do not pull the tape upward. Otherwise, the tape may rip and remain inside the cartridge, so that the staplescannot be used.



Replenishing Staple Supply 8


8.4


2 Press [Staple Add] in the help message area.

% The machine equipped with both Finisher FS-521 and Saddle Stitcher SD-506 provides two [Sta-ple Add] tabs on the screen. Be sure to select the required one.









[Please pull out stacker and add staples to the front side stapler]

[Please pull out stacker and add staples to the back side stapler]

The Staple Cartridge indicator lights in red in the Consumable and Scrap Indicators area of the Machine

Screen.






8.4











[Please pull out stacker and add staples to the front side stapler]

[Please pull out stacker and add staples to the back side stapler]

The Staple Cartridge indicator lights in red in the Consumable and Scrap Indicators area of the Machine

Screen.


NOTICE

Do not pull the tape upward. Otherwise, the tape may rip and remain inside the cartridge, so that the staplescannot be used.





8.4








8.5 Disposing Punch Waste 8

8.5 Disposing Punch Waste

The following options have a puncher installed.

- Folding Unit FD-503

- Finisher FS-531

- Finisher FS-612

This section describes indications on the screen to inform you that the disposal of punch waste is due, and

also instructions on how to dispose it.

8.5.1 Emptying Scrap Box of Folding Unit FD-503

When the scrap box of Folding Unit FD-503 becomes full, the following message will appear in the messagearea of the screen.

[Scrap of punch unit is full / Please empty scrap box]

The Punch-Hole Scraps Box indicator lights in red in the Consumable and Scrap Indicators area of the Ma-chine Screen.

Empty the scrap box.


2 Press [Punch Scrap]in the help message area.



Disposing Punch Waste8


8.5


d Reference

See page 8-3 for details of the help message.





8.5.2 Emptying Scrap Box of Finisher FS-531 or Finisher FS-612

If Finisher FS-531 or Finisher FS-612 is mounted with Punch Kit PK-512/PK-513, the following messagewill appear in the message area of the screen when the scrap box of Punch Kit PK-512/PK-513 becomesfull.

[Scrap of punch unit is full / Please empty scrap box]




2 Press [Punch Scrap] in the help message area.



Disposing Punch Waste8


8.5


d Reference


8.5.3 Emptying Scrap Box of Multi Punch GP-501

When the scrap box of Multi Punch GP-501 becomes full, the following message will appear in the messagearea of the screen.

[Multi puncher scrap box is full / Please empty scrap box]



NOTICE Once withdrawing the scrap box from the multi punch, be sure to empty it.

The machine resets the counter every time the scrap box is withdrawn, irrespective of whether or not thescrap box is empty.





1 Open the multi punch front door.

2 Withdraw the scrap box.

3 Empty the scrap box.

4 Return the scrap box to its original position, then close the multipunch front door securely.



Disposing Trimmings8


8.6

8.6 Disposing Trimmings

The following options have a trimmer installed.

- Saddle Stitcher SD-506

- Perfect Binder PB-503

This section describes indications on the screen to inform you that the disposal of trimmings is due, and alsoinstructions on how to dispose it.

8.6.1 Emptying Scrap Box of Saddle Stitcher SD-506

When the trim scrap box of Saddle Stitcher SD-506 becomes full, the following message will appear in themessage area of the screen.

[Trim scrap box is full / Please empty scrap box]

The Saddle Stitcher Trim Scrap indicator lights in red in the Consumable and Scrap Indicators area of theMachine Screen.

Follow the procedure below to empty the trim scrap box.

NOTICE The trim scrap box cannot be withdrawn while machine operation is in progress. Be sure that the machinehas stopped before withdrawing it. Be sure to return the trim scrap box to its original position. Otherwise, thetrimming function cannot be performed.


2 Press [Trim Scrap] in the help message area.

% The machine equipped with both Saddle Stitcher SD-506 and Perfect Binder PB-503 providestwo [Trim Scrap] tabs on the screen. Be sure to select the required one.




8.6 Disposing Trimmings 8


d Reference


8.6.2 Emptying Scrap Box of Perfect Binder PB-503

When the trim scrap box of Perfect Binder PB-503 becomes full, the following message will appear in themessage area of the screen.

[Perfect binder trim scrap box is full / Please empty trim scrap box]

The Saddle Stitcher Trim Scrap indicator lights in red in the Consumable and Scrap Indicators area of theMachine Screen.

Follow the procedure below to empty the trim scrap box.

NOTICE Never open the perfect binder front door while the machine operation is in process. Otherwise, a paper jammay be caused.

Be sure that the machine has stopped before opening the front door.



Disposing Trimmings8


8.6


2 Press [Trim Scrap] in the help message area.

% The machine equipped with both Perfect Binder PB-503 and Saddle Stitcher SD-506 providestwo [Trim Scrap] tabs on the screen. Be sure to select the required one.






8.7 Adding Glue Pellets to Perfect Binder PB-503 8

8.7 Adding Glue Pellets to Perfect Binder PB-503

When the perfect binder is out of glue pellets, the following message will appear on the Machine Screen, andthe binding operation becomes unavailable due to failure in warm-up of the perfect binder.

[Please open glue hopper cover of perfect binder, add glue pellet to glue hopper]

If glue pellets run out during the binding operation performed by perfect binder, the machine stops the jobimmediately and binding operation becomes unavailable any more.

Add glue pellets to the perfect binder.

0 Be sure to use the glue GC-501 exclusively provided for Perfect Binder PB-503. Using any other gluemay cause machine trouble.

0 Handle melted hot glue with great care.

0 Do not overload the glue hopper with glue pellets.

0 Do not touch the lever in the glue hopper with your hand to avoid breakdown.

0 Be sure to loosen glue pellets inside the bag before adding them. Clustered glue pellets may stick inside

the glue hopper. If glue pellets stick inside the glue hopper, please contact your service representative.0 Do not add glue pellets above the limit level indicated inside the glue hopper.

0 Be sure to close the glue hopper cover firmly. Otherwise, an error message will be displayed.


2 Press [Glue Pellet] in the help message area.



Adding Glue Pellets to Perfect Binder PB-5038


8.7


d Reference





8.8 Loading Paper 8

8.8 Loading Paper

The Machine Screen displays the amount of paper remaining in each tray.

The following 5 icons are provided to indicate the remaining amount of paper in main body trays (trays 1 to 3).

The following 8 icons are provided to indicate the remaining amount of paper in Paper Feeder Unit PF-602 (trays 4 and 5) and Large Capacity Unit LU-202 (tray 4).

For Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray MB-504, post inserter trays, and cover tray of Perfect Binder PB-503, thefollowing 2 icons are used to indicate whether or not the tray is loaded with paper.

When paper in any tray becomes empty, the icon " " appears on the screen.

If you select the tray with " " displayed on the Copy Screen, starts flashing.

NOTICE Paper setting for each tray can be made from the Machine Screen or Copy Screen by pressing [Paper Set- ting].

Be sure to load specified paper for output. Otherwise, a paper jam may be caused.

d Reference A help message to be displayed on the Machine Screen provides you with the instructions on loading paper

in main body trays (trays 1 to 3) and Paper Feeder Unit PF-602 (trays 4 and 5). See page 8-3 for details.



Loading Paper8


8.8

8.8.1 Checking Paper to Be Loaded

This machine achieves high-speed processing of large amounts of paper. Consequently, a considerableamount of paper may be wasted once feeding trouble occurs.

We recommend that you observe the fol lowing precautions for usual management of paper to be used.

1 Lay a bundle of paper on a flat place to unwrap it.

NOTICE Be careful not to fold or damage the paper while checking it.

2 Check the stack for folds and damages, and remove the sheet that shows any trouble as illustrated be-low.

Folded

Folded in the corner




8.8 Loading Paper 8

Pasted

Folded along the edge

3 Also check the other side of the stack.

% It is recommended to check the stack by holding it as illus-trated.

4 Check if the sheets are stuck together by static electricity.

% Fan the stack by 1 cm or so from the top to check for crack-ling sounds.

% If any sounds can be heard, the stack carries a static charge.It is advisable not to use it.



Loading Paper8


8.8

5 Thoroughly fan the stack of paper before loading it into a tray.

Fan the stack at both front and rear edges in feeding direction,holding it as illustrated below.

% Be sure to lay the stack of paper onto a flat place to fan it.Holding up and fanning the stack may result in damage tothe paper due to droppage.

% Do not fan a large amount of paper at a time.

8.8.2 Loading Paper in Main Body Trays (Trays 1 to 3)

To use paper other than loaded in a tray, change the setting of that tray in [Paper Setting] from the MachineScreen or Copy Screen.

1 Withdraw the tray to be supplied with paper, and then open thefeed roller.

NOTICE Be sure to fully withdraw the tray until a blue label shows on therear-left side of the tray. Otherwise, the feed roller may not openor other machine trouble may be caused.

To load the same size as loaded before, proceed to step 3.To load a different size of paper, proceed to step 2.




8.8 Loading Paper 8

2 Adjust the position of side guides.

% Pull up the lock lever of the front side guide, then slide theside guides to the desired position.

% Use the size indication on the bottom plate of the tray to de-termine the position.

% Push down the lock lever securely to fix the side guides inposition.

3 Adjust the position of the rear guide.

% To slide the rear guide to the right, hold the top as illustrat-ed, and slide the rear guide while pressing it down slightly.

% On the other hand, hold and slightly press down the bottomof the rear guide to slide the rear guide to the left.

NOTICE The rear guide cannot be slid smoothly to the right side withoutbeing pressed down. Also, holding the rear guide at the topmay fail to slide it to the left side.

Be careful not to move the rear guide by force, otherwise it maybe damaged.

4 Load paper into the tray, then align the rear guide to the paper.

% Align the stack of paper to the right side of the tray.

NOTICE Do not load more than 500 sheets (80 g/m 2 ). Also, do not loadpaper above the limit indicated on the side guide . Otherwise, a

paper jam may be caused.

NOTICE Be sure that the rear guide is securely aligned to the paper. Ifany gap is left between the rear guide and paper, the machinecannot detect the correct paper size, and machine trouble maybe caused.

5 Push in the tray until it locks into place.

The Amount indicator of the tray will change from to on the Machine Screen and CopyScreen.



Loading Paper8


8.8

8.8.3 Loading Paper in Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray MB-504

To use paper loaded in Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray MB-504, change the setting of the tray in [Paper Setting]from the Machine Screen or Copy Screen.

NOTICE Do not use paper with staples or paper that conducts electricity (silver, carbon, etc.), otherwise a fire may becaused.

Do not use treated paper (heat-sensitive paper, ink-jet printer paper, etc.) OHP transparencies are unavailable. Do not load them onto Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray MB-504 .

1 Open the multi-sheet bypass tray.

% When loading a large paper size, pull out the auxiliary guide.

2 Load copy paper, then align the side guides to the paper.

% The Amount indicator of the tray will change from toon the Machine Screen and Copy Screen.

NOTICE Do not load more than 250 sheets (80 g/m 2 ). Also, do not loadpaper above the limit indicated on the side guide. Otherwise, apaper jam may be caused.

3 When printing is completed, close the multi-sheet bypass tray.




8.8 Loading Paper 8

8.8.4 Loading Paper in Paper Feeder Unit PF-602 (Trays 4 and 5)

To use paper other than loaded in a tray, change the setting of that tray in [Paper Setting] from the MachineScreen or Copy Screen.

1 Withdraw the tray to be supplied with paper.

NOTICE Trays cannot be withdrawn when the machine is not powered.

Be sure to turn the sub power switch ON.

NOTICE Only one tray can be withdrawn at a time.

To load a different size of paper, proceed to step 2. To load thesame size as loaded before, proceed to step 5.

2 Fully widen the side guides and rear guide.

% Turn the two guide fixing knobs of the side guides counter-clockwise to loosen them.

% Fully widen the side guides and rear guide while pressing

the lock release lever of the side guides and rear guide.NOTICE When moving the side guides , be sure to hold the lock releaselever of the front side guide and the handle of the rear sideguide. If moved only with the front side guide , the side guides may not be fixed in position.

3 Pushing the lock release lever of the side guide, move the sideguides to an appropriate position according to the size indica-tion provided on the tray bottom plate.



Loading Paper8


8.8

4 Turn the guide fixing knobs (4 pieces) of the side guides clock-wise to fix the guides.

5 Load paper into the tray with print side up, then align the rearguide to the edge of paper.

% Align the stack of paper to the left side of the tray.

NOTICE Do not load above the limit level indicated on the side guide ofthe tray.

NOTICE The two side guides are provided with small size guides . Besure to open them only when loading paper of the width lessthan 182 mm.

For usage of small size guides, see page 8-35.

6 Align the rear guide to the paper.

% Press the lock release lever of the rear guide to move it tothe edge of the paper.

NOTICE Be sure that the rear guide is securely aligned to the paper. Ifany gap is left between the rear guide and paper, the machinecannot detect the correct paper size, and machine trouble maybe caused.



NOTICE Do not bump the tray into the main body. Otherwise, machine trouble may be caused due to unexpected shock.




8.8 Loading Paper 8

8.8.5 Making Fine Adjustment on Side Guides of Paper Feeder Unit PF-602 (Trays4 and 5)

If front and rear side guides are not fixed upright, in other words, any gap is found between top and bottomedges of the side guides, feeding trouble may be caused. In this case, follow the adjustment procedure belowto properly fix the top and bottom edges of the side guides.

1 Withdraw the tray to be adjusted.

% Trays cannot be withdrawn when the machine is not pow-ered. Be sure to turn the sub power switch ON.

2 Place a sheet of paper of the desired size into the tray to be adjusted.

3 Turn the bottom plate fixing knob counterclockwise to loosenit, slide it to the rear side, then turn it clockwise to fix it in thatposition.

4 Return the tray until it locks into place, then withdraw it after the bottom plate of the tray goes up com-pletely.

% When the automation of bottom plate is completed, the Amount indicator of the tray will change toon the Machine Screen and Copy Screen. Withdrawing the tray at this point, you will find

that the bottom plate has been elevated to the top position.



Loading Paper8


8.8

5 Align the side guides to the paper.

% Turn the guide fixing knobs (4 pieces) of the side guides counterclockwise to loosen them.

% Pushing the lock release lever of the front side guide,move the front and rear side guides to align them to the pa-per.

6 Fix the position of side guides.

% Turn the guide fixing knobs (4 pieces) of the side guides clockwise to fix them.

% Compare the two scales between the guide fixing knobs to check that they are roughly equivalent.

7 Turn the bottom plate fixing knob counterclockwise to re-lease the lock.

The bottom plate automatically goes down.




8.8 Loading Paper 8

8 Load paper with the print side up.

% Align the stack of paper to the feed roller side of the tray.

% Pushing the lock release lever of the rear guide, align it tothe edge of paper.

NOTICE Do not load above the limit level indicated on the side guide ofthe tray. Also, carefully load paper not to block the air nozzle.

NOTICE Be sure that the rear guide is securely aligned to the paper. Ifany gap is left between the rear guide and paper, the machinecannot detect the correct paper size, and paper misfeed or machine trouble may be caused.



8.8.6 Loading Small Size Paper in Paper Feeder Unit PF-602 (Trays 4 and 5)The minimum width of the side guides of the paper feeder unit is 139.7 mm.

Open the small sizes guides to load small paper sizes.

Available small sizes are different between tray 4 (upper tray) and tray 5 (lower tray). See the following tablefor details.

0 When loading a paper size larger than the minimum width of the side guides, do not open the smallsize guides.

0 Be sure to open small size guides as a pair when using the small size guides. Do not open only a halfof them to load paper.

1 Withdraw the tray to be loaded with paper (tray 4 or 5).

NOTICE Trays cannot be withdrawn when the machine is not powered.

Be sure to turn the sub power switch ON.

NOTICE Only one tray can be withdrawn at a time.

Small sizes Without using small size guides Using small size guides

Tray 4 (uppertray)

Tray 5 (lowertray)

Tray 4 (uppertray)

Tray 5 (lowertray)

A5 v N/A Available N/A N/A

A5 w N/A N/A Available Available

B6 w N/A N/A Available Available

A6 w N/A N/A N/A Available



Loading Paper8


8.8

2 Move the front and rear side guides closer until they stop.


% Pushing the lock release lever of the front side guide,move the front and rear side guides closer until they stop.

3 Open the small size guides provided for each of front and rearside guides.

NOTICE The small size guides cannot be opened unless the front andrear side guides are moved closer to stop.

4 Adjust the position of side guides.% Pushing the lock release lever of the front side guide,

move the guides to an appropriate position according tothe size indication provided on the bottom plate.

% Turn the guide fixing knobs (4 pieces) clockwise to fix theguides.




8.8 Loading Paper 8


% Align the stack of paper to the feed roller side of the tray.

% Pushing the lock release lever of the rear guide, align itto the edge of paper.

NOTICE Do not load above the limit level indicated on the small sizeguides .

NOTICE Be sure that the rear guide is securely aligned to the paper. If

any gap is left between the rear guide and paper, the machinecannot detect the correct paper size, and paper misfeed or machine trouble may be caused.



8.8.7 Loading Paper in Large Capacity Unit LU-202 (Tray 4)

To use paper other than currently loaded in the large capacity tray, change the setting of the large capacity

tray in [Paper Setting] from the Machine Screen or Copy Screen.

1 Open the tray top door.

The tray bottom plate goes up.

NOTICE Without the main body power turned on, the tray bottom platewill not function. Be sure to turn the sub power switch ON.

To load the same size as loaded before, proceed to step 4.

To load a different size of paper, proceed to step 2.

2 Adjust the position of side guides.



Loading Paper8


8.8


% Move the two side guides to an appropriate position ac-cording to the size indication provided on the top of theguides.

% Turn the guide fixing knobs (2 pieces for each) of the side

guides clockwise to fix the guides.

3 Adjust the position of the rear guide.




8.8 Loading Paper 8

% Turn the guide fixing knobs (2 pieces) of the rear guide counterclockwise to loosen them.

% Move the rear guide to an appropriate position according tothe size indication provided on the tray bottom plate.

% Turn the guide fixing knobs (2 pieces) of the rear guide clockwise to fix the guide.




Loading Paper8


8.8

5 Press the bottom plate lowering button.

NOTICE Without the main body power turned on, the bottom plate lowering button will not function. Be sure to turn the sub powerswitch ON.

6 Repeat the steps 4 and 5 until the tray bottom plate will not godown any more.

NOTICE Do not load above the limit level indicated on the side guide ofthe tray.

Be sure that the rear guide is securely aligned with the loadedpaper. If making the space between the rear guide and papertoo wide or too narrow, paper misfeed or machine trouble maybe caused.

7 Close the tray top door.


8.8.8 Loading Paper in Post Inserter of Folding Unit FD-503

Change the settings of upper tray or lower tray of the post inserter in [Paper Setting] from the MachineScreen or Copy Screen.

1 Load paper in the upper tray / lower tray of the post inserter.

Align the side guides to the paper.

NOTICE Do not load more than 500 sheets (80 g/m 2 ) for each of the upper tray and lower tray . Also, do not load above the limit lineindicated on the side guides .

The Amount indicator of the tray will change from toon the Machine Screen and Copy Screen.




8.8 Loading Paper 8

8.8.9 Loading Paper in Post Inserter PI-502

Make the settings of upper tray or lower tray of the post inserter in [Paper Setting] from the Machine Screenor Copy Screen.

1 Load paper in the upper tray / lower tray of the post inserter.

The Amount indicator of the tray will change from toon the Machine Screen and Copy Screen.

2 Align the side guides to the paper.

NOTICE Do not load more than 200 sheets (80 g/m 2 ) or 30 mm in height for each of the upper tray and lowertray .



Loading Cover Paper for Perfect Binding8


8.9

8.9 Loading Cover Paper for Perfect Binding

The cover paper to be used for perfect binding can be loaded in the following trays.

- Cover tray of Perfect Binder PB-503




- Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray MB-504- Post Inserter PI-502

- Post inserter of Folding Unit FD-503

This section describes how to load cover paper into the cover tray of Perfect Binder PB-503.

8.9.1 Loading Cover Paper in Cover Tray of Perfect Binder PB-503

Paper setting for cover tray can be made from the Machine Status Screen or Copy Screen, using the [PaperSetting] key.

1 Withdraw the cover tray .

2 Open the feed roller.

3 Load cover paper with the front side up.

Align it to the feed roller side.

NOTICE Do not load above the limit level indicated on the side guide of

the tray. Carefully load paper to be seated under the paper control lever at the air nozzle.




8.9 Loading Cover Paper for Perfect Binding 8

% When making books bound on the left side, load cover pa-per with the front side up, and with the head facing the rearside of the tray. Loaded covers will be trimmed on the leftside when made into books.

% When making books bound on the right side, load cover pa-

per with the front side up, and with the head facing the frontside of the tray. Loaded covers will be trimmed on the leftside when made into books.

4 Align the side guides and rear guide to cover paper.

% Pushing the lock release lever of the front side guide, movethe side guides to align them to the cover paper.

% Then, move the rear guide to the edge of cover paper.

NOTICE Be sure that the side guides and rear guide are securelyaligned to the cover paper. Otherwise, a paper jam may becaused.

5 When paper is seated properly, close the feed roller.

6 Push in the cover tray until it locks into place.



Loading Cover Paper for Perfect Binding8


8.9

NOTICE Do not bump the tray into the main body. Otherwise, machine trouble may be caused due to unexpected shock.




8.10 Loading Tabbed Sheets 8

8.10 Loading Tabbed Sheets

Tabbed sheets are available for copying when loaded in the following trays.





d ReferenceWhen loading a tray with tabbed sheets, be sure to make the size setting of the tray to specify a tab paper

size to be used.

8.10.1 Loading Tabbed Sheets in Main Body Trays (Trays 1 to 3)

Example: 3 tabbed sheets loaded in position for one finished set

Example: 9 tabbed sheets loaded in position for 3 finished sets

Loading orientation Stacking order Finished set


Rear

Front

1st tab

2nd tab

3rd tab

Printed/ copied side

1st tab

2nd tab

3rd tab

One finished set

Rear

Front

1st tab

2nd tab

3rd tab


1st tab 2nd tab

3rd tab

3 finished sets



Loading Tabbed Sheets8


8.10

1 Withdraw the tray to be loaded with tabbed sheets.

Withdraw the tray specified for a tab paper size.

2 Open the feed roller.

3 Load tabbed sheets into the tray.

% Place tabbed sheets on the main body tray referring to the illustration shown above.

NOTICE Do not load above the limit level indicated on the side guide of the tray.

4 Move the side guides to the edge of tabbed sheets.

% Align the tabbed sheets to the feed roller side of the tray.

% Press the lock release lever of the front side guide to move the guides, and also move the rear

guide to the edge of tabbed sheets.

NOTICE Be sure that the side guides and rear guide are securely aligned to the paper. Otherwise, the machinecannot detect the correct paper size, and machine trouble may be caused.


8.10.2 Loading Tabbed Sheets in Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray MB-504





Rear

Front

1st tab

3rd tab


2nd tab

1st tab

2nd tab

3rd tab

One finished set

Rear

Front

1st tab

2nd tab

3rd tab


1st tab 2nd tab

3rd tab

3 finished sets




8.10 Loading Tabbed Sheets 8

1 Open the multi-sheet bypass tray.

2 Specify [Paper Size] of the multi-sheet bypass tray as [Tab Paper] in [Paper Setting].

3 Load tabbed sheets into the multi-sheet bypass tray.

% Place tabbed sheets on the multi-sheet bypass tray referring to the illustration shown above.

NOTICE

Do not load above the limit level indicated on the side guide of the multi-sheet bypass tray.

4 Align the side guides with tabbed sheets.

8.10.3 Loading Tabbed Sheets in Paper Feeder Unit PF-602


1 Withdraw the tray to be loaded with tabbed sheets.

Withdraw the tray specified for a tab paper size.

2 Turn the two guide fixing knobs of the side guides counterclockwise to loosen them.


% Place tabbed sheets on the paper feeder unit tray referring to the illustration shown above.

NOTICE Do not load above the limit level indicated on the side guide of the tray.

4 Align the side guides to the edge of tabbed sheets, then turn the guide fixing knobs clockwise to fixthem.

NOTICE Be sure that the side guides and rear guide are securely aligned to tabbed sheets. If 1 mm or more ofa gap is found or tabbed sheets skew in the tray, feeding trouble may be caused.

5 Align the rear guide to tabbed sheets.



Rear

Front

Rear

Front

1st tab

2nd tab

3rd tab


1st tab 2nd tab

3rd tab

3 finished sets



Loading Tabbed Sheets8


8.10

8.10.4 Loading Tabbed Sheets in Large Capacity Unit LU-202



1Specify [Paper Size] of the large capacity unit (tray 4) as [Tab Paper] in [Paper Setting].

2 Open the tray top door of the large capacity unit.


% To change the position of side guides or rear guide, see page 8-45.

4 Press the bottom plate lowering button to lower the tray bottom plate.

5 Close the tray top door.



Rear

Front

1st tab

2nd tab

3rd tab

Printed/ copied side 1st tab

2nd tab

3rd tab

One finished set

Rear

Front

1st tab

2nd tab

3rd tab


1st tab 2nd tab

3rd tab

3 finished sets




8.11 Replacing Trim Receiver of Saddle Stitcher SD-506 8

8.11 Replacing Trim Receiver of Saddle Stitcher SD-506

This machine trims the printed sets using a cutting blade and its receiver. This receiver, being consumable ina long period of use, may require replacement. When replacement is due, [Saddle Stitcher Receiver] appearsin the Consumable and Scrap Indicators area of the Machine Screen.

If the above message is displayed, please contact your service representative.

% The administrator can call for service from the Administrator Setting in the Utility mode. In this case,

you don't have to make a call for preventive maintenance, because your machine has been monitoredautomatically by your service representative.



Replenishing Water Supply in Humidifier Tank of Relay Unit RU-5098


8.12

8.12 Replenishing Water Supply in Humidifier Tank of Relay UnitRU-509

When water supply from the humidifier tank of Relay Unit RU-509 becomes low, the following message willappear in the message area of the screen, and the curl adjustment becomes unavailable due to failure in hu-midification.

[Humidifier relay unit is out of water / Please supply the tank with water]

7 CAUTIONDo not add dirty water, well water, or filtered water to the humidifier tank.

- The tank should be easily contaminated. Use decontaminated tap water, mineral water, or ionized al-kaline water.




8.12 Replenishing Water Supply in Humidifier Tank of Relay Unit RU-509 8

Add water to the humidifier tank.

1 Open the relay unit front door.

2 Remove the cap of the humidifier tank.

3 Add water into the tank.

4 Return the cap onto the humidifier tank, then close the frontdoor.



Removing Perfect-Bound Books from Perfect Binder PB-503 Tray 8


8.13

8.13 Removing Perfect-Bound Books from Perfect Binder PB-503 Tray

1 Check the stacks through the perfect binder tray window.

If piled books show only on the right side of the tray, proceed to step 2.

If two columns of books show on the tray, proceed to step 3.

2 Press the feeding button to move the books to the carriage.

% Delivery to the perfect binder tray is available even if the car-riage is not installed inside the perfect binder tray. In thiscase, tray capacity will be a half of that with the carriage in-stalled. (1 set 30 mm thick e 11 e 1 column = approx. 3,300sheets)

% The feeding button does not function while the machine isdelivering finished books onto the perfect binder tray.

% The feeding button does not function without the carriageinstalled.

3 Open the perfect binder tray front door.

% The perfect binder tray front door does not open while the

machine is delivering finished books onto the perfect bindertray, or sliding them with the feeding button pressed.

4 Slowly withdraw the carriage.

% Be sure to withdraw the carriage slowly. Otherwise, the piledbooks may collapse.

5 When moving the carriage with books piled on it, use the bookholding plate and book stopper to fix the books onto the car-riage, in order to prevent them from collapsing.

% Move the book holding plate lever to align the plate to the

books.




8.13 Removing Perfect-Bound Books from Perfect Binder PB-503 Tray 8

% Insert the book stopper into the desired positioning hole onthe carriage to align it to the books.

6 Take out the books from the carriage.

Before taking out the books, be sure to remove the book holding plate and book stopper, if used.

7 Return the carriage to its original position, then close the perfect binder tray front door.

8 If the column of books is left on the right side of the tray, repeat steps from 2 to 7.



Removing Finished Sets from Large Capacity Stacker LS-5058


8.14

8.14 Removing Finished Sets from Large Capacity Stacker LS-505

The Large Capacity Stacker LS-505 can hold 5,000 output sheets at maximum (3,000 sheets for coatedpaper of max. 331 mm e 483 mm to min. 210 mm e 380 mm/2,000 sheets for B5 and A5).

Follow the procedure below to take out paper from the stacker.

8.14.1 To Remove Paper from Stacker

1 Press the paper removal button.

The stacker unit will move down to the carriage.

% The paper stopper is provided to secure the paper in posi-tion when moving the carriage. See page 8-55 for usage ofthe paper stopper.

2 Open the large capacity stacker door.

% Once the stacker holds a sheet of output paper, the largecapacity stacker door will be locked and cannot open till thestacker unit goes down fully to the carriage.

3 Withdraw the carriage by holding its handle.

NOTICE Be sure to withdraw the carriage straightforward. Do notchange the direction forcibly while driving it. The carriage is forthe exclusive use of carrying paper. Do not drive it in any otheruse. Never put yourself in the large capacity stacker.

4 Remove paper from the carriage.

The stacker unit can be removed from the carriage.

NOTICE Once lowering the stacker unit for the purpose of removing mishandled paper or checking output sheets, copying cannot bestarted till output sheets are removed. If the carriage is returnedwith any sheets left on the stacker unit, machine trouble may becaused. Be sure to remove all the sheets.




8.14 Removing Finished Sets from Large Capacity Stacker LS-505 8

5 Return the carriage to its original position, then close the largecapacity stacker door.

NOTICE When returning the stacker unit to its original position, fit thetwo projections of the carriage to the two holes of the stackerunit. If the stacker unit is not properly set, the carriage cannotbe returned to its original position.

8.14.2 To Secure Paper on Carriage

1 Remove the paper stopper from the carriage.

2 Mount the paper stopper on the paper holder.

% Fit the two projections of paper stopper to the holder, thenraise the other side as illustrated.

3 Hold the paper using the paper stopper.

% Turn the paper stopper to the paper.

NOTICE Do not push it too strong. Otherwise, output sheets may be tornor wrinkled.



Removing Finished Sets from Large Capacity Stacker LS-5058


8.14

% Push down the paper stopper.

4 Remove the paper stopper from the paper holder.

% Pull up and turn the paper stopper as illustrated, then re-move the stopper from the paper holder.

5 Return the paper stopper to its original position.

NOTICE Return the paper stopper properly. Otherwise, the stacker doormay not be closed.



9Maintenance






9.1 Cleaning 9

9 Maintenance

9.1 Cleaning

In order to maintain optimum copy quality, always keep the following areas clean.

9.1.1 Cleaning the Original Glass

Raise the document feeder, then clean the original glass with a cleansoft cloth. The glass may also clean with a soft cloth dampenedslightly with water, if it is difficult to clean.

NOTICE Never use paint solvents, such as benzine or thinners, to clean theoriginal glass .

9.1.2 Cleaning the ADF Guide Cover

The ADF guide cover should be kept clean; otherwise soil marks maybe copied or the original size cannot be detected from the originalglass correctly. Raise the document feeder, then clean the cover witha clean soft cloth.

NOTICE Never use paint solvents, such as benzine or thinners, to clean the ADF guide cover .

9.1.3 Cleaning the Original Cover

The original cover should be kept clean; otherwise soil marks maybe copied. Raise the original cover, then clean the inner originalholder with a dry soft cloth.

NOTICE Never use paint solvents, such as benzine or thinners, to clean theoriginal cover and inner original holder.

9.1.4 Cleaning the Exterior of the Machine

Wipe the exterior clean with a soft cloth dampened slightly with neu-tral detergent.

NOTICE Be sure to turn off the main power switch of the main body beforecleaning. Never use paint solvents, such as benzine or thinners, toclean the exterior of the machine.



Cleaning9


9.1

9.1.5 Cleaning the Control Panel

Clean the control panel with a dry soft cloth.

NOTICE Be careful not to press the keys or touch panel too hard while cleaning the control panel . Never use neutral detergent, glass cleaner, orpaint solvents such as benzine or thinners to clean the control panel .

9.1.6 Cleaning the Conveyance Belt of Saddle Stitcher SD-506 Tray

The conveyance belt of saddle stitcher tray should be kept clean, otherwise soil marks may be copied. Fol-low the procedure below to clean the conveyance belt of saddle stitcher tray .

In order to maintain optimum copy quality, we recommend to clean it every time before using the saddlestitcher tray.

If any soil marks are found while printing, perform this cleaning procedure immediately.

1 Fully withdraw the saddle stitcher tray .

2 Open the tray stand.

NOTICE Never fail to open the tray stand; otherwise the machine may bedamaged.

3 Clean the surface of the two conveyance belts with a soft clothdampened slightly with alcohol (cleaner).




9.1 Cleaning 9

4 Move the conveyance belt to clean the whole length.

% Raise the two belts lightly, then pull them both forward at thesame time in order to show the hidden parts.

% Clean the belts using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol.

% Repeat steps 2 and 3 (about three times) to clean the wholeround of the belt.

NOTICE

Do not raise the belt higher than need be. Or, never fail to pullthe two belts at the same time. Otherwise, machine trouble maybe caused.

5 Clean the bottom plate of the saddle stitcher tray .

% Wipe the whole surface of the bottom plate with a soft clothslightly dampened with alcohol (cleaner).

6 Return the tray stand to its original position, then return the saddle stitcher tray .

NOTICE Never return the saddle stitcher tray to its original position with the tray stand opened.

9.1.7 Cleaning Scrap Box of Multi Punch GP-501

Punch waste can fall into the Multi Punch Unit, and it may have adverse effects on machine operation. Pleaseclean the Multi Punch Unit on a routine basis according to the procedure below.

1 Open the front door of the Multi Punch Unit and then open thelever GP5.

2 Remove punch waste inside of the Unit using a vacuum cleaner.



Cleaning9


9.1

3 Withdraw the scrap box.

NOTICE Once withdrawing the scrap box from the multi punch, be sureto empty it. The machine resets the counter every time thescrap box is withdrawn, irrespective of whether or not the scrapbox is empty.

4 Vacuum punch wastes inside of the Unit using a cleaner.

5 Close the front door of the Multi Punch Unit after you finish cleaning.




9.2 Checking Copy Count 9

9.2 Checking Copy Count

The Utility Menu Screen allows you to view the current indication of the following counters as a list.

- Total counter

- Full color counter

- Single color counter

- Black counter

- Printer total counter- Copy total counter

- Scan total counter

The product life cycle of the drum, developer, transfer belt, charging corona, toner f ilter, developing unit, and2nd fusing unit can also be checked. This information can be printed, if desired.

With Perfect Binder PB-503 installed, [Perfect Bind Counter] appears on the Utility Menu Screen to providethe following information on perfect bound books.

- Total Book Volumes (classified by trimming width)

- Total Bodies

- Total Thickness

d ReferenceMachine can be set to display [CMS Part Count List] on the Utility Menu Screen, for displaying and editing

the CMS part count list (part name, P/N, limit), and also resetting the count. For details, please contact your

service representative.

% Pressing [System Information] displays the system information of the machine. Press [Close] to restorethe previous screen.

1 Press Utility/Counter on the control panel.

The Utility Menu Screen will be displayed.

2 Check the counter information.

The counter information is displayed in the left side area of the screen.



Checking Copy Count9


9.2

% With Perfect Binder PB-503 installed, [Perfect Bind Counter] appears on the Utility Menu Screen.Pressing this key provides you with three types of perfect binding counter. When finished withchecking, press [Close].

3 Press [Details Counter].

Detailed counter will be displayed as a list.

The list can be printed, if desired. Proceed to step 4. If printed list is not desired, press [Close]. Proceedto step 6.




9.2 Checking Copy Count 9

4 Press [Print Mode].

The Print Mode Screen will be displayed.

Select the desired simplex/duplex mode, output mode, and paper tray making paper setting, then pressStart on the control panel.

5 Press [Exit Print Mode].

The Utility Menu Screen will be restored.

6 Press [Exit].




Preventive Maintenance9


9.3

9.3 Preventive Maintenance

When preventive maintenance is due, a message and the PM Call icon will prompt you to contact your servicerepresentative for maintenance.

Contact your service representative for details of replacement cycle individually specified for each part.

d ReferenceThe administrator can call for service from the Administrator Setting in the Utility mode.

In this case, you don't have to make a call for preventive maintenance, because your machine has been mon-

itored automatically by your service representative.




9.4 Maintenance Service 9

9.4 Maintenance Service

Holding period of performance parts for repair

The minimum period for which we will keep the performance parts necessary to repair and maintain the func-tions of the machine is seven years after discontinued production of the product.



Maintenance Service9


9.4



10Troubleshooting






10.1 If [Please Call Service] Message Is Displayed: Call for Service 10

10 Troubleshooting

10.1 If [Please Call Service] Message Is Displayed: Call for Service

A [Please call service] message indicates a machine condition that requires the attention of your service rep-resentative.

The Call for Service Screen usually displays the telephone and facsimile numbers of your service represent-ative.

Be sure to contact your service representative immediately by following the procedure below.

If the following message is displayed on the Call for Service Screen, the limited function is available.



If [Please Call Service] Message Is Displayed: Call for Service10


10.1

10.1.1 Operations When Displaying the Call for Service Screen

1 Make note of the report code [C-####], indicated in the second line of the message area.

The administrator can call for service from the Utility Menu Screen. In this case, you don't have to makea call for the report code, because your machine has been monitored automatically by your service rep-resentative.

% For details about the call for service used by the administrator, see chapter "12 Utility Menu

Screen".

2 Turn the power OFF.

Turn OFF the sub power switch, then turn OFF the main power switch.

NOTICE Be sure not to turn off the main power switch before turning off the sub power switch . Be sure notto turn off the main power switch while the following messages are displayed after turning off the sub power switch .


[Power off in progress / Please do not turn the main power switch off]

Turning off the main power switch with these messages displayed may cause serious machine troublesuch as toner fixation.

3 Unplug the machine.

4 Contact your service representative and report the condition and report code number.




10.1 If [Please Call Service] Message Is Displayed: Call for Service 10

10.1.2 Limited Function

If the message shown below is displayed on the Call for Service Screen, you may continue operating the ma-chine on a limited function basis and utilize the trays and ADU that are not affected by the trouble.

If the limited use of the machine is available, the following message is displayed in the message area insteadof the report code.

For example: [Tray2 failure / Press [Help] to disengage]

NOTICE To obtain this limited functionality of the machine, consult your service representative.

NOTICE Be sure to utilize the limited function only temporarily, and arrange for machine repair immediately.

1 Press Help on the control panel.

The following message will be displayed.

[Please turn on power again C-0202]

2 Turn OFF then ON the sub power switch.

A copying/printing job can continue without using the troubledtray (e.g. tray 2) of the machine.

7 CAUTIONThe machine should not keep operating by limited use for long time.

- Otherwise, an unexpected accident may happen. Be sure to contact your service representative imme-diately when the Call for Service Screen is displayed.

OFF

ON



If [Mishandled paper] Message Is Displayed10


10.2

10.2 If [Mishandled paper] Message Is Displayed

When a paper misfeed occurs in a printing job, the machine displays the message [Mishandled paper] andmisfeed area(s) on the screen.

The Start LED turns red on the control panel, and machine operation cannot be continued until all the loca-tions are cleared.

Jam Position Screen


1 Message area Detailed instruction to remove misfed paper is displayed.

2 Jam number Indicates a position of paper jam.

3 [Illustration] Press this key to display a screen that explains the first preference

method of fixing a problem, along with illustrations.

1

2

3




10.2 If [Mishandled paper] Message Is Displayed 10

Screen that explains the disposal action

All the misfeed locations will be indicated by flashing/lighting numbers and arrows on this screen.

Flashing number and arrow indicate the jammed position of the highest priority.

Action to remove mishandled paper is displayed in the message area.

Pressing [Illustration] will display subsequent screens for the disposal action.

When clearing mishandled paper, heed the following precautions.

- Do not turn off the main power switch while removing mishandled paper. Otherwise, the trays or con-veyance fixing unit cannot be withdrawn.

- If mishandled paper is left in the feeding inlet/outlet of the main body, the lever [M4] cannot be turneddown rightward to draw out the conveyance fixing unit. Never turn down the lever [M1] forcibly.

- When removing mishandled paper, be sure to leave no torn paper inside the machine.

d Reference A jam code can be displayed in the message area of the Jam Position Screen. Contact your service repre-

sentative, if desired.


1 Message area Explains in words the process to remove jammed paper, as shownin the illustrations.

2 Jam number Displays the process to remove jammed paper in preferential orderusing illustrations.

3 [Next]/[Previous] The keys are displayed when there are two or more screens that ex-plain the process to remove jammed paper. Press the key to moveto next or previous screen.

4 [Jam Position] Press this key to return to the Jam Position Screen.

3 4

1

2





10.2

10.2.1 To remove mishandled paper

1 Press [Illustration] on the screen.

The screen illustrating the method for the disposal action will be displayed.

% Press [Next] to go to the next page of a series of illustrations, if provided.

% Press [Jam Position] to return to the Jam Position Screen.

2 Follow the procedure on the screen to remove misfed paper.

NOTICE Before performing the clearing procedure, be sure to check the caution label locations inside the machine.

3 When completed, the Machine Status Screen will be restored.

If any misfeed location is left, the Jam Position Screen will be restored with the next disposal procedurein the message area and the location number in the jam position display. Repeat steps 1 to 2 until allthe locations are cleared. When all procedures for removing paper have been completed, it returns tothe Machine Screen.

7 CAUTION

DO NOT put your hand into the fusing part on the left side of the fixing unit.- Otherwise, you may get burned. Be especially careful when removing mishandled paper.

7 CAUTIONDO NOT put your hand or arm between the main body and conveyance fixing unit.

- Connecting terminals of electric parts are located on the rear side of the conveyance fixing unit, andtouching them may damage the machine. Also, if you put your hand or arm between the main body andconveyance fixing unit, unexpected trouble may be caused. Please do not try to work yourself, but con-tact your service representative.

7

CAUTIONRemoving Staples StuckStaples are very sharp!

- Be careful of removing staples stuck inside the machine so as not to get injured.

7 CAUTIONDO NOT touch the fusing device of the 2nd fusing unit.

- The top surface and both right and left sides of the fusing device are very hot. If you touch them, youmay get burned. Please be especially careful in withdrawing the fusing device.

7

CAUTIONDO NOT put your hand or arm between the main body and 2nd fusing unit.

- If you put your hand or arm between the main body and 2nd fusing unit, unexpected trouble may becaused. Please do not try to work yourself, but contact your service representative.

7 CAUTIONDO NOT touch the glue tank unit.

- The internal glue tank unit is very hot. If you touch them, you may get burned. Please be especially care-ful when you push the glue tank unit backward in place.




10.2 If [Mishandled paper] Message Is Displayed 10

10.2.2 Jam number and position display





10.2

No. Location

1 Tray 1 (main body tray)



4 Tray 4 ( Large Capacity Unit LU-202 )

5 Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray MB-504 feeding section6 Vertical conveyance section on the right side of main body

7 Large Capacity Unit LU-202 feeding conveyance section

8 Horizontal conveyance section of main body

9 Transfer and fixing unit of main body

10 Delivering section of main body

11 Reversing and delivering section of main body

12 Reversing and conveyance section of main body/ADU

14 ADF feeding section

15 ADF delivering section

16 Finisher FS-531 / Finisher FS-612 inlet, puncher, stacker

17 Finisher FS-531 / Finisher FS-612, Post Inserter PI-502, or secondary (sub) tray

18 Finisher FS-612 folding section, tri-folding section

19 Large Capacity Stacker LS-505

20 Large Capacity Stacker LS-505 (2nd unit)

21 Saddle Stitcher SD-506

22 Finisher FS-521

23 Perfect Binder PB-503

24 Multi Punch GP-501

25 Relay Unit RU-506

26 Relay Unit RU-509

29 Tray 4 ( Paper Feeder Unit PF-602 )

30 Tray 5 ( Paper Feeder Unit PF-602 )

31 Vertical conveyance section of tray 4 ( Paper Feeder Unit PF-602 )

32 Relay horizontal conveyance section of tray 4 ( Paper Feeder Unit PF-602 )




10.3 If Paper Jam Indicator Lights on Perfect Binder PB-503 10

10.3 If Paper Jam Indicator Lights on Perfect Binder PB-503

For the machine with Finisher FS-521 installed on the left side of Perfect Binder PB-503, the paper jam in-dicator lights for a paper jam in the conveyance section of the perfect binder, which occurred in conveyingpaper to the finisher.

NOTICE When a paper jam occurs, make sure to check whether the paper jam indicator for the perfect binder is onor not.

Remove mishandled paper according to the procedure below.

1 Open the conveyance cover of the perfect binder.

2 Turn the knob PB14 to the left, and remove the paper jammed in the inlet of the conveyance section.

3 If there is jammed paper in the outlet of the conveyance section,remove it.



If Paper Jam Indicator Lights on Perfect Binder PB-50310


10.3

4 Check whether there is jammed paper in the Finisher FS-521.

5 Check that the paper jam indicator is OFF.




10.4 If Burrs Remain in Punch Holes: Multi Punch GP-501 10

10.4 If Burrs Remain in Punch Holes: Multi Punch GP-501

If you find burrs remaining in punch holes when using the multi punch GP-501, lubrication is required for thedie set currently used.

Lubricate it at the position illustrated below.

NOTICE Never use the oil on the general market. For the oil to be used in this procedure, please contact your servicerepresentative.

If burrs still remain in punch holes after the lubrication, apply grease to the positions illustrated below.

NOTICE Never use the grease on the general market. For the grease to be used in this procedure, please contact yourservice representative.



If [MACHINE] Tab Flashes in Orange10


10.5

10.5 If [MACHINE] Tab Flashes in Orange

If any trouble occurs in the machine, one of the following messages appears in the message area, and the[MACHINE] tab flashes in orange.

- Paper misfeed: [Mishandled paper]

- Tray empty: [Please load designated $####### paper]

- Inconformity in paper setting: [Please load reserved paper to the indicated tray][Select tray and set des-ignated paper to selected tray]

With the message above, [Confirm Details] also appears on the Machine Screen.

Press [Confirm Details], and follow the instruction on the screen.

10.5.1 Paper Misfeed

If a paper jam has occurred with the print/scan job in progress while you are setting a reserve job, the ma-chine stops its operation and the [MACHINE] tab may flash in orange.

If pressing [Confirm Detail] displays the Jam Position Screen, see page 10-6.


1 [MACHINE] tab Blinks in orange when a trouble happens.

2 [Confirm Details] Displayed when a trouble happens.

1

2




10.5 If [MACHINE] Tab Flashes in Orange 10

10.5.2 Tray Empty in a Copy Job in Progress

When the tray being used in the current output job becomes empty, the output operation immediately stopswith the message [Please load paper in tray $] displayed on the screen.

Follow the procedure below to restart the output job. Two methods are provided:

- Supplying the tray with paper

- Changing the tray selection

Supplying the tray with paper

1 Load paper in the empty tray.

NOTICE Be sure to load the same paper as that loaded before. The machine cannot restart the printing operationwith a different paper size loaded. Using different paper type or weight may cause paper misfeed ormachine trouble.

When the tray is supplied with paper, the message will change to [Press [Start] to restart].

2 Press Start on the control panel.

Output operation will resume using the tray supplied with paper.



If [MACHINE] Tab Flashes in Orange10


10.5

Changing the tray selection

1 Press [Confirm Details].

A dialog will be displayed.

2 Select an available tray other than the empty one.

% The trays provided here should be loaded with paper of the same paper type and weight specifiedby [Type for Auto Paper] in [User Setting]. For details, see chapter "12 Utility Menu Screen".




10.5 If [MACHINE] Tab Flashes in Orange 10

3 Press [Close].

The Machine Screen will be restored with the message [Press [Start] to restart] displayed.


Paper will be fed from newly selected tray to continue the printing operation.



If [Memory Full] Message Is Displayed10


10.6

10.6 If [Memory Full] Message Is Displayed

In certain modes, this machine uses memory to make copying operations convenient and smooth flowing.

If installed memory is inadequate for the job conditions selected, the machine will stop its operation and dis-play a dialog screen as shown below.

10.6.1 Memory Overflow in Current Job

When memory overflow occurs while scanning the first job, the machine immediately stops and displays thefollowing screen.

% Press Stop on the control panel.

All the scanned data will be cleared.

10.6.2 Memory Overflow in Reserve Job

When memory overflow occurs while scanning a reserve job with printing in progress, the machine immedi-ately stops and displays the following screen.

% Press either one of the following keys on the control panel.

Stop: All the data scanned for reserve job will be cleared. Printing job will be completed normally.

Start: The machine will output the stored data and continue scanning when memory becomes availa-ble.




10.7 Troubleshooting Tips 10

10.7 Troubleshooting Tips

Case Checkpoint Remedy

M a i n B o d y

The machine doesnot operate even ifthe sub powerswitch is turnedON.

Is the power plug firmly inserted inwall socket?

Firmly insert the power plug in wallsocket.

Is the main power switch turnedON?

Keep the main power switch turnedON usually.

Is the Power Save LED on? The machine cannot be turned ondue to the Weekly Timer function.Operate Timer Interrupt (see thePOD Administrator's Reference), orconsult your administrator.

Is the screen for user/account au-thentication displayed?

Enter required information for us-er/account authentication (see thePOD Administrator's Reference).

Copying does notbegin.

Is the left/right side door of the ma-chine open?

Securely close the left/right sidedoor of the machine.

Is there appropriate paper size in atray?

Load the paper size selected for theoriginal.

Is the print quantity set to [0]? Enter an appropriate number forprint quantity.

Is the staple finisher/foldingunit/large capacity stacker dooropen?

Securely close the finisher door,folding unit door, and large capacitystacker door.

Copy image is notclean or showsspots.

Is the original glass clean? Wipe the original glass, if neces-sary.

Is the original document clean? Erase spots on the original, if any.

Is the density adjustment madeproperly?

Manually specify copy density toselect an appropriate exposure lev-el.

Copy image is toolight.

Is the density adjustment madeproperly?

Manually specify copy density toselect an appropriate exposure lev-el.

Is the message "Please add toner"displayed on the Machine Screen?

Add toner.

Copy quality ispoor.

Is copy paper damp? Replace the paper, if necessary.Consult your service representative.

Copying does notresume after mis-handled paper isremoved.

Is any mishandled paper left? Check copier diagram on thescreen for additional indications ofmishandled paper.

2->1 or 2->2 modecannot be select-

ed.

Is ADF open? Fully close ADF.

Using user/ac-count authentica-tion, copies cannotbe made afterpassword is en-tered.

Is the message [limit reached] dis-played?

Contact your administrator.

A D F

ADF cannot beused after Reset ispressed.

Is ADF slightly open? Fully close ADF.

Is ADF selected for use? Change the original paper to any ofrecommended size and weight.Position originals properly in ADF.

Original paper can-not be fed.

Is ADF slightly open? Fully close ADF.

Does the original type conform tothe specifications?

Change the original paper to any ofthe recommended size and weight.

Are originals correctly loaded? Position originals properly in ADF.



Troubleshooting Tips10


10.7

F i n i s h e r F S - 5 2 1

Finisher FS-521 does not operate.

Is any mishandled paper left insidethe Finisher FS-521?

Check for paper misfeed and re-move it, as required.

Is finisher door slightly open? Securely close the finisher door.

Staples are incor-rectly positioned(rotated by 90 de-grees) in copies.

Is Image Rotation activated? Reload copy paper in appropriatedirection.

Copies skew in theoutput sets andcannot be stapledin position.

Is paper excessively curled? Reload the paper upside down intothe tray.

Inside of FinisherFS-521Paper misfeed fre-quently occurs.

Are the side guides of the selectedtray aligned to paper?

Make sure the side guides are se-curely aligned to paper in the tray tobe used.

Using Punchmode, printedsheets cannot bepunched.

Does the Punch-Hole Scraps Boxindicator light on the MachineScreen?


Printed sheets can-not be stapled inposition.


Printed sheets can-not be deliveredneatly to the sec-ondary (sub) tray .

Do output sheets reach to the edgeof the secondary (sub) tray ?

Temporarily release the lock of thesecondary (sub) tray to be raisedslightly.

S a d d l e S t i t c h e r S D - 5 0 6 Using trimming

function, printedsheets cannot betrimmed.

Does the Saddle Stitcher TrimScrap indicator light on the MachineScreen?

Empty the scrap box of SaddleStitcher SD-506, or contact yourservice representative.

P

e r f e c t B i n d e r P B - 5 0 3 Using Perfect Bind

mode, printedsheets cannot bebound.

Does the front door, perfect bindertray cover, or glue hopper cover ofPerfect Binder PB-503 open?

Securely close the front door, per-fect binder tray cover, and gluehopper cover of Perfect BinderPB-503.





10.7 Troubleshooting Tips 10

If remedies mentioned above do not work, contact your service representative.

F i n i s

h e r F S - 5 3 1 / F S - 6 1 2

Finisher does notoperate.

Is any mishandled paper left insidethe finisher?

Check for paper misfeed and re-move it, as required.

Is finisher front door slightly open? Securely close the finisher frontdoor.

Staples are incor-rectly positioned(rotated by 90 de-grees) in copies.

Is Image Rotation activated? Reload copy paper in appropriatedirection.

Copies skew in theoutput sets andcannot be stapledor punched in posi-tion.


Are the side guides of the selectedtray (or paper guides of PI tray )aligned to paper?

Make sure the side guides (or pa-per guides) are securely aligned topaper in the tray to be used.

Using Punchmode, printedsheets cannot bepunched.

Does the Punch-Hole Scraps Boxindicator light on the MachineScreen?

Empty the scrap box of the punchkit.

Printed sheets can-not be stapled inposition.





Troubleshooting Tips10


10.7



11 Adjustment






11.1 Function Overview 11

11 Adjustment

11.1 Function Overview

% Press [Adjustment] on the Machine Screen to display the Adjustment Menu Screen.

Various adjustments for output and scanning operations are available from this screen.

If the machine is equipped with a finisher, function-based adjustments are also provided.

Also, perform the pre-rotation of drum or cleaning of charging coronas.

11.1.1 List of Adjustment Menu Items

Menu Item/Description Default

01 Machine Adjustment

01 Printer Adjustment

01 Restart Timing Adjustment Adjust the image position of lead edge in paperfeed direction in the printer engine.Prerequisite: FD-Mag. Adjustment is completed.

Objects of Adjustment:Restart Timing (Tray 1 to Tray 5), RestartTiming (Back), Tray Large Plain Offset, TrayLarge Thick Offset, Tray Small Plain Offset,Tray Small Thick Offset, Bypass Offset/LPlain, Bypass Offset/L Thick, Bypass Off-set/S Plain, Bypass Offset/S Thick, LargePlain Offset (ADU), Large Thick Offset (ADU),Small Plain Offset (ADU), Small Thick Offset(ADU) Adjustment Range:-60 (Lower) to +60 (Higher)(1 step = 0.1 mm)

02 Centering Adjustment Adjust the image position in crosswise direction inthe printer engine.Prerequisite: CD-Mag. Adjustment is completed.

Objects of Adjustment:Tray 1 to Tray 5, Bypass, ADU, Large SizeOffset (Tray 1 to Tray 5, Bypass), Small SizeOffset (Tray 1 to Tray 5, Bypass), 8.5 e 5.5Offset (Tray 1 to Tray 3, Bypass), Large PlainOffset (ADU), Large Thick Offset (ADU),Small Plain Offset (ADU), Small Thick Offset(ADU), 8.5 e 5.5 Plain Offset (ADU), 8.5 e 5.5Thick Offset (ADU) Adjustment Range:

-40 (Front) to +40 (Back)(1 step = 0.1 mm)



Function Overview11


11.1

03 FD-Mag. Adjustment Adjust the magnification in paper feed direction inthe printer engine.Prerequisite: Registroller line speed adjustment iscompleted.

Objects of Adjustment:Printer FD-Mag., Tray 1 Offset (ADU) toTray 5 Offset (ADU), Bypass Offset (ADU) Adjustment Range:-100 (Short) to +100 (Long)(1 step = 0.01%)

04 CD-Mag. Adjustment Adjust the magnification in crosswise direction inthe printer engine.

Objects of Adjustment:Printer CD-Mag., Tray 1 Offset (ADU) toTray 5 Offset (ADU), Bypass Offset (ADU) Adjustment Range:-100 (Short) to +100 (Long)(1 step = 0.01%)

02 Scan Adjustment

01 Restart Timing Adjustment Adjust the position to start scanning when usingthe original glass to scan the original.Prerequisite: FD-Mag. Adjustment is completed.

Objects of Adjustment:Scanning device of the original glass Adjustment Range:-10 (Image Fast) to +20 (Image Slow)(1 step = 0.1 mm)

02 Centering Adjustment

Adjust the image position in crosswise directionwhen scanning the original from the originalglass.Prerequisite: Printer Centering Adjustment is com-pleted.

Objects of Adjustment:

ADF Centering-Front, ADF Centering-Back,Orig. Glass Centering Adjustment Range:-60 (Front) to +30 (Back)(1 step = 0.1 mm)

03 FD-Mag. Adjustment Adjust the magnification in paper feed directionwhen scanning the original from the originalglass.Prerequisite: Printer FD-Mag. Adjustment is com-pleted.

Objects of Adjustment:Scanning device of the original glass Adjustment Range:-40 (Short) to +40 (Long)(1 step = 0.05%)

02 Stabilization Adj. Setting

Set priority to either output speed or image quality

stability for each of copy job and print job.

Copy Job: Speed, Stability

Printer Job: Speed, Stability03 Execute Adjust Operation

Execute the desired adjustment selected from Gam-ma Automatic Adjustment, Color Registration Auto-matic Adjustment, Toner Refresh Mode, and BeltRefresh Mode.

04 Finisher Adjustment ( Finisher FS-521 )

01 Staple Finisher Adjustment

01 Staple Center Position Adjust the center position of staples determinedby the finisher.Prerequisite: Paper Width Adjustment (Staple) is

completed.

Adjustment Range:-20 (Forward) to +20 (Backward)(1 step = 0.1 mm)

02 Paper Width Adj. (Staple) Adjust the width of stacker adjustment plates ofthe finisher to be used in Staple mode.

Objects of Adjustment:Full Area, SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w / v, A4 w / v, B5 v, A5 v, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w / v, 8.125 e 13.25 w,8.5 e 13 w, 8.25 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, 8K w,16K v, 9 e 11 v, Custom (380-460 mm),Custom (220-379 mm), Custom(148-219 mm) Adjustment Range:-20 (Wide) to +20 (Narrow)(1 step = 0.1 mm)






03 Paper Width Adj. (Straight) Adjust the width of stacker adjustment plates ofthe finisher to be used in straight delivery.

Objects of Adjustment:Full Area, SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w / v, A4 w / v, B5 v, A5 v, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w / v, 8.125 e 13.25 w,8.5 e 13 w, 8.25 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, 8K w,16K v, 9 e 11 v, Custom (380-460 mm),Custom (220-379 mm), Custom

(148-219 mm) Adjustment Range:-20 (Wide) to +20 (Narrow)(1 step = 0.1 mm)

04 Exit Guide Center Pos. Adj. Adjust the center position of exit guides of the fin-isher.

Objects of Adjustment:Straight (Small), Straight (Large), Shift Front(Small), Shift Front (Large), Shift Back(Small), Shift Back (Large) Adjustment Range:-50 (Forward) to +50 (Backward)(1 step = 0.1 mm)

05 Exit Guide Paper Width Adj. Adjust the width of exit guides of the finisher.

Objects of Adjustment:Full Area, SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w / v,

A4 w / v, B5 v, A5 v, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w / v, 8.125 e 13.25 w,8.5 e 13 w, 8.25 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, 8K w,16K v, 9 e 11 v, Custom (380-460 mm),Custom (220-379 mm), Custom(148-219 mm) Adjustment Range:-50 (Wide) to +50 (Narrow)(1 step = 0.1 mm)

04 Finisher Adjustment ( Folding Unit FD-503 )

02 Multi Folder (Punch) Adj.

01 Paper Width Adjustment Adjust the width of adjustment plates of the fold-ing unit.

Objects of Adjustment:Full Area, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w / v,B5 w / v, A5 w / v, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w / v, 8.125 e 13.25 w,8.5 e 13 w, 8.25 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, 8K w,16K w / v, 9 e 11 v Adjustment Range:-20 (Narrow) to +20 (Wide)(1 step = 0.1 mm)

02 Punch Vertical Position Adj. - 01 2-Hole Punch Adjust the vertical position of punch holes madeby the folding unit.

Objects of Adjustment:Full Area, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w / v,B5 w / v, A5 w / v, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w / v, 8.125 e 13.25 w,8.5 e 13 w, 8.25 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, 8K w,16K w / v, 9 e 11 v Adjustment Range:-40 (Narrow) to +40 (Wide)

(1 step = 0.1 mm)

02 Punch Vertical Position Adj. - 02 4-Hole Punch Adjust the vertical position of punch holes madeby the folding unit.

Objects of Adjustment:Full Area, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 v, B5 v,12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 11 v, 8K w,16K v, 9 e 11 v

Adjustment Range:-40 (Narrow) to +40 (Wide)(1 step = 0.1 mm)




Function Overview11


11.1

03 Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.

01 Half-Fold Position Adj. Adjust the half-folded position determined by thefolding unit.

Objects of Adjustment:Full Area, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w,12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w,8.5 e 11 w, 8K w, Custom (380-458 mm),Custom (279-379 mm)

Adjustment Range:-50 (Short) to +50 (Long)(1 step = 0.1 mm)

02 Tri-Fold-in Pos. Adj. Adjust the folded positions in Tri-Fold-in mode de-termined by the folding unit.The baseline of Single Fold is calculated from theedge of the sheet, while that of Double Fold is cal-culated from the position of the Single Fold line.Be sure to start with the Double Fold adjustment,then proceed to the Single Fold adjustment.

Objects of Adjustment:Full Area, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w,12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w,8.5 e 11 w, 8K w, Custom (380-458 mm),Custom (279-379 mm) Adjustment Range:-50 (Short) to +50 (Long)(1 step = 0.1 mm)

03 Tri-Fold-out Pos. Adj. Adjust the folded positions in Tri-Fold-out modedetermined by the folding unit.

The baseline of Single Fold is calculated from theedge of the sheet, while that of Double Fold is cal-culated from the position of the Single Fold line.Be sure to start with the Single Fold adjustment,then proceed to the Double Fold adjustment.

Objects of Adjustment:Full Area, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w,12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w,

8.5 e 11 w, 8K w, Custom (380-458 mm),Custom (279-379 mm) Adjustment Range:-50 (Short) to +50 (Long)(1 step = 0.1 mm)

04 Double Parallel Pos. Adj. Adjust the folded positions in Double Parallelmode determined by the folding unit.The baseline of Single Fold is calculated from theedge of the sheet, while that of Double Fold is cal-culated from the position of the Single Fold line.Be sure to start with the Single Fold adjustment,then proceed to the Double Fold adjustment.

Objects of Adjustment:Full Area, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w,12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w,8.5 e 11 w, 8K w, Custom (380-458 mm),Custom (279-379 mm) Adjustment Range:-50 (Long) to +50 (Short)(1 step = 0.1 mm)

05 Z-Fold Position Adj. Adjust the folded positions in Z-Fold mode deter-mined by the folding unit.The baseline of Single Fold is calculated from theedge of the sheet, while that of Double Fold is cal-culated from the position of the Single Fold line.Be sure to start with the Single Fold adjustment,then proceed to the Double Fold adjustment.


06 Gate Position Adj. Adjust the folded positions in Gate mode deter-mined by the folding unit.The baseline of Single Fold is calculated from theedge of the sheet, while that of Double Fold is cal-culated from the position of the Single Fold lineand that of Triple Fold from the Double Fold line.

Be sure to start with the Single Fold adjustment.

Objects of Adjustment:Full Area, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w,12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w,8.5 e 11 w, 8K w, Custom (380-458 mm),Custom (279-379 mm) Adjustment Range:Single Fold/Triple Fold: -50 (Long) to +50

(Short)(1 step = 0.1 mm)Double Fold: -50 (Short) to +50 (Long)(1 step = 0.1 mm)






04 Finisher Adjustment ( Large Capacity StackerLS-505 )

05 Stacker Adjustment

01 Paper Width Adjustment Adjust the position of adjustment plates if outputsheets show misalignment in crosswise directionon the stacker tray.

Objects of Adjustment:Stacker No. 1, Stacker No. 2 Adjustment Range:-20 (Narrow) to +20 (Wide)(1 step = 0.1 mm)

02 Paper Length Adjustment Adjust the position of the front stopper if outputsheets show misalignment in paper feed directionon the stacker tray.

Objects of Adjustment:Stacker No. 1, Stacker No. 2 Adjustment Range:-20 (Opposite direction) to +20 (Paper feeddirection)(1 step = 0.1 mm)

04 Finisher Adjustment ( Saddle Stitcher SD-506 )

06 Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.

01 Staple Center Position Adjust the center position of staples determined

by the saddle stitcher.Prerequisite: Paper Width Adjustment (Staple) iscompleted.

Adjustment Range:-20 (Leftward) to +20 (Rightward)

(1 step = 0.1 mm)

02 Staple Paper Width Adj. Adjust the width of adjustment plates of the saddlestitcher to be used in Staple mode.

Objects of Adjustment:Full Area, SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w, B5 w, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w,11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w,8.125 e 13.25 w, 8.5 e 13 w, 8.25 e 13 w,8 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K w, Custom(380-463 mm), Custom (257-379 mm) Adjustment Range: -20 (Narrow) to +20(Wide)( 1 step = 0.1 mm)

03 Staple Pitch Adjustment Adjust the staple pitch determined by the saddlestitcher.

Objects of Adjustment:Full Area, SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w, B5 w, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w,11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w,8.125 e 13.25 w, 8.5 e 13 w, 8.25 e 13 w,8 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K w, Custom(380-463 mm), Custom (257-379 mm) Adjustment Range:-20 (Narrow) to +20 (Wide)(1 step = 0.1 mm)

04 Half-Fold Position Adj. Adjust the half-folded position determined by thesaddle stitcher.

Objects of Adjustment:Full Area, SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w, B5 w, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w,11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w,8.125 e 13.25 w, 8.5 e 13 w, 8.25 e 13 w,

8 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K w, Custom(380-463 mm), Custom (257-379 mm) Adjustment Range (Top of output sheet):-50 (Short) to +50 (Long)(1 step = 0.1 mm)

05 Tri-Fold Position Adj. Adjust the folded positions in Tri-Fold-in mode de-termined by the saddle stitcher.The baseline of Single Fold is calculated from theedge of the sheet, while that of Double Fold is cal-culated from the position of the Single Fold line.Be sure to start with the Double Fold adjustment,then proceed to the Single Fold adjustment.

Objects of Adjustment:Full Area, A4 w, 8.5 e 11 w Adjustment Range:Single Fold: -100 (Short) to +100 (Long)(1 step = 0.1 mm)Double Fold: -100 (Long) to +100 (Short)(1 step = 0.1 mm)




Function Overview11


11.1

06 Fold Paper Width Adj. Adjust the width of adjustment plates if half-foldedor tri-folded sheets show misalignment.

Objects of Adjustment:Full Area, SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w, B5 w, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w,11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w,8.125 e 13.25 w, 8.5 e 13 w, 8.25 e 13 w,8 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K w, PI, Custom(380-463 mm), Custom (257-379 mm)


07 Trimming Adjustment Adjust the trimming width. The trimming widthshould be more than 2.0 mm, otherwise the trim-ming operation may not performed properly.

Objects of Adjustment:Full Area, SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w, B5 w, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w,11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w,8.125 e 13.25 w, 8.5 e 13 w, 8.25 e 13 w,8 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K w, Custom(380-463 mm), Custom (257-379 mm) Adjustment Range:-400 (Short) to +400 (Long)(1 step = 0.1 mm)

08 Trimmer Receiver AdjustmentFrequent trimming operations may cause damageto the receiver, resulting in trimming failures. Movethe receiver automatically or manually.

Objects of Adjustment:Trimmer Count, Move Pitch

04 Finisher Adjustment ( Perfect Binder PB-503 )

07 Perfect Binder Adjustment

01 Cover Trimming Adjustment Adjust the trimming width on the lead edge of theright cover page. To align the lead edges of leftand right cover pages, be sure to perform CoverLead Edge Adjustment in advance.

Objects of Adjustment:Perfect Binder Tray, Except PB Tray Adjustment Range:-128 (Short) to +127 (Long)(1 step = 0.1 mm)

02 Cover Lead Edge Adj. Adjust the lead edge position of left cover page

determined with reference to the body set. Thesizes referred in this section are those of body setscorresponding to cover sizes.

Objects of Adjustment:PB Tray: Full Area, A4 v, B5 v, A5 w / v,

8.5 e 11 v, 5.5 e 8.5 w, 16K v, Custom(220-379 mm), Custom (148-219 mm)Except PB Tray: Full Area, A4 v, B5 v, A5 w / v, 8.5 e 11 v, 5.5 e 8.5 w, 16K v, Cus-tom (220-379 mm), Custom (148-219 mm) Adjustment Range:-128 (Short) to +127 (Long)(1 step = 0.1 mm)

03 Spine Corner Forming Pos. Adjust the state of spine corners formed in coversheets.

Objects of Adjustment:Up/Down Forward Adj. (Front), Up/DownRear Adj. (Rear) Adjustment Range:-128 (Down: circle) to +127 (Up: square)(1 step = 0.1 mm)

04 Glue Start Position Adjust the position to start gluing on the body set.The sizes referred in this section are those of bodysets corresponding to cover sizes.

Objects of Adjustment: Ahead (rear): Full Area, A4 v, B5 v, A5 w / v,8.5 e 11 v, 5.5 e 8.5 w, 16K v, Custom(220-379 mm), Custom (148-219 mm)Back (front): Full Area, A4 v, B5 v, A5 w / v,8.5 e 11 v, 5.5 e 8.5 w, 16K v, Custom(220-379 mm), Custom (148-219 mm) Adjustment Range:-128 (Soon) to +127 (Late)(1 step = 0.1 mm)






05 Glue Finish Position Adjust the position to finish gluing on the body set.The sizes referred in this section are those of bodysets corresponding to cover sizes.

Objects of Adjustment: Ahead (rear): Full Area, A4 v, B5 v, A5 w / v,8.5 e 11 v, 5.5 e 8.5 w, 16K v, Custom(220-379 mm), Custom (148-219 mm)Back (front): Full Area, A4 v, B5 v, A5 w / v,8.5 e 11 v, 5.5 e 8.5 w, 16K v, Custom(220-379 mm), Custom (148-219 mm)

Adjustment Range:-128 (Soon) to +127 (Late)(1 step = 0.1 mm)

06 Glue Formation Finish Pos. Adjust the position to finish equalizing the glue ap-plied on the body set. The sizes referred in thissection are those of body sets corresponding tocover sizes.

Objects of Adjustment:Full Area, A4 v, B5 v, A5 w / v, 8.5 e 11 v,5.5 e 8.5 w, 16K v, Custom (220-379 mm),Custom (148-219 mm) Adjustment Range:-128 (Soon) to +127 (Late)(1 step = 0.1 mm)

07 Temperature AdjustmentGlue Tank - Top*:The machine supplies glue pellets on detecting

the temperature of solution surface lower than theset point. Recommended to be set higher in ther-mal environment where the machine tends to failin detection.Glue Tank -Mid:Set the temperature to reach when warm-up iscompleted, and to start rotating the roller. Settingit higher helps glue temperature to be stable soon-er.Glue Tank -Low: Adjust the temperature to control the tank heater.Low temperature: Increases glue viscosity.High temperature: Decreases glue viscosity.Glue Apply Roller: Adjust the temperature to control the roller heater.

This also supports heating of the glue.Low temperature: Increases glue viscosity.High temperature: Decreases glue viscosity.*: Contact your service representative if settingchange in Glue Tank - Top and Glue Tank - Mid isdesired.

Glue Tank -Top:Initial: 132°CRecommended: 128 to 136°C

Glue Tank -Mid:Initial: 145°CRecommended: 140 to 145°CGlue Tank -Low:Initial: 185°CRecommended: 180 to 190°CGlue Apply Roller:Initial: 165°CRecommended: 160 to 170°C (1 step = 0.1°C)

08 Sub Compile CD Width Adj.Change the adjustment width if output sheets can-not be aligned in sub compile section. The sizesreferred in this section are those of body sets cor-responding to cover sizes.

Objects of Adjustment:Full Area, A4 v, B5 v, A5 w / v, 8.5 e 11 v,5.5 e 8.5 w, 16K v, Custom (220-379 mm),Custom (148-219 mm) Adjustment Range:-20 (Wide) to +20 (Narrow)(1 step = 0.1 mm)

09 Clamp CD Width Adjustment

Change the adjustment width in crosswise direc-tion if output sheets show misalignment in a bodyset. The sizes referred in this section are those ofbody sets corresponding to cover sizes.


Full Area, A4 v, B5 v, A5 w / v, 8.5 e 11 v,5.5 e 8.5 w, 16K v, Custom (220-379 mm),Custom (148-219 mm) Adjustment Range:-20 (Wide) to +20 (Narrow)(1 step = 0.1 mm)

10 Cover Up/Down CD Width Adj.Change the adjustment width in matching bodysets and covers, in order to adjust their positionsin crosswise direction.

Objects of Adjustment:Perfect Binder Tray, Except PB Tray Adjustment Range:-20 (Wide) to +20 (Narrow)(1 step = 0.1 mm)




Function Overview11


11.1

11 Clamp FD Position Adj.Change the adjustment width in paper feed direc-tion if output sheets show misalignment in a bodyset. The sizes referred in this section are those ofbody sets corresponding to cover sizes.

Objects of Adjustment:Full Area, A4 v, B5 v, A5 w / v, 8.5 e 11 v,5.5 e 8.5 v, 16K v, Custom (220-379 mm),Custom (148-219 mm) Adjustment Range:-20 (Wide) to +20 (Narrow)(1 step = 0.1 mm)

04 Finisher Adjustment ( Finisher FS-531 / Finisher FS-612 )

01 Saddle Stitcher Stopper Adjust the staple positions in widthwise direction ofpaper determined in Fold & Staple mode.( Finisher FS-612 only)

Objects of Adjustment:Full Area, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w,12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w,8.5 e 11 w, 8.125 e 13.25 w, 8.5 e 13 w,8.25 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K w, Cus-tom (380-460 mm), Custom (220-379 mm) Adjustment Range: Adjustment Range: -128 to +127(1 step = 0.1 mm)

02 Half-Fold Stopper Adj. Adjust the misalignment in edges of output sheets foreach paper size.

( Finisher FS-612 only)

Objects of Adjustment:Full Area, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w,12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w,

8.5 e 11 w, 8.125 e 13.25 w, 8.5 e 13 w,8.25 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K w, Cus-tom (380-460 mm), Custom (220-379 mm) Adjustment Range (Top of output sheet):-128 (Long) to +127 (Short)(1 step = 0.1 mm)

03 Punch Adjustment (with Punch Kit PK-512 only)

01 Vertical Position Adj. Adjust the misalignment in center positions of pa-per and punch holes for each paper size.

Objects of Adjustment:Full Area, A3 w, B4 w, A4 w / v, B5 w / v, A5 w / v, 11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w,8.5 e 11 w / v, 5.5 e 8.5 w / v,8.125 e 13.25 w, 8.5 e 13 w, 8.25 e 13 w,8 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K w / v, 9 e 11 v Adjustment Range:-50 (Backward) to +50 (Forward)(1 step = 0.1 mm)

02 Horizontal Position Adj. Adjust the distance from the edge of the outputsheet to the center of punch holes.

Objects of Adjustment:PI Tray, Main Body Tray Adjustment Range:-50 (Wide) to +50 (Narrow)(1 step = 0.1 mm)

03 Registration Adjustment Adjust the registration amount if punch positionsare inclined.

Objects of Adjustment:Main Body/Reverse, Main Body/ADU, PI 1Tray, PI 2 Tray Adjustment Range:-20 to +20(1 step = 0.8 mm)

04 Paper Edge Detect SensorDetect the edge of paper to be a reference point inpunching operation.( Finisher FS-612 only)

Start

04 Tri-Fold Adjustment Adjust the tri-folded positions for each paper size.( Finisher FS-612 only)

Objects of Adjustment:Full Area, A4 w, 8.5 e 11 w, 16K w Adjustment Range:-128 (Leftward) to +127 (Rightward)(1 step = 0.1 mm)

05 2 Pos. Staple Pitch Adj. Adjust the staple pitch determined in Fold & Stapleand Staple modes.

Objects of Adjustment:Fold & Staple, Staple Adjustment Range:+128 to +160

(1 step = 1 mm)






*1: Displayed when the machine is equipped with Finisher FS-531 or Finisher FS-612 without Relay Unit

RU-508 mounted.

*2: Displayed when the machine is mounted with Relay Unit RU-508.

*3: Displayed when the machine has no finishing options.

06 Post Inserter Tray Size Adjust the tray size of post inserter.(Available only with Post Inserter PI-502 mounted)

Objects of Adjustment:8.5 e 11 w, A4 w

07 Output Quantity LimitSpecify the limit on output sheets.(Only three Staple options are available for Finisher

FS-531.)

Objects of Adjustment:Staple/64-80 g/m2, Staple/81-105 g/m2,Staple/106-209 g/m2, Fold & Staple/

64-80 g/m2

, Fold & Staple/81-105 g/m2

,Half-Fold/64-105 g/m2, Tri-Fold/64-80 g/m2

Adjustment Range:Staple 64-80 g/m2, Staple 81-105 g/m2: +2to +50, Staple 106-220 g/m2: 0, +2 to +20,Fold & Staple 64-80 g/m2, Fold & Staple81-105 g/m2: +2 to +20, Half-Fold64-105 g/m2, Tri-Fold 64-80 g/m2: +1 to +3 (1 step = 1 sheet)

08 Curl Adjustment*1

Make the curl adjustment for Simplex, Duplex, andTri-Fold (inside print) modes.(The curl adjustment on Tri-Fold (inside print) is avail-able for Finisher FS-612 only.)

Objects of Adjustment:Simplex (Tri-Fold 64-80 g/m2: Inside Print)Simplex (Tri-Fold 81-105 g/m2: Inside Print)Simplex (Print Side <Except Tri-Fold>:Front)

Adjustment Range: +0, +1, +205 Density Balance Adjustment

01 Density Balance Chart OutputOutput a chart for the density balance adjustment incrosswise direction.

Objects of Adjustment:Measure Spectrophotometer-1 (i1-iSis XL)Type 1: Simple checking chart (for 8-stepgradation)Type 2: Detailed checking chart (for 16-stepgradation)Measure Spectrophotometer-2 (i1-Pro)Type 1: Simple checking chart (for 1-stepgradation)Type 2: Detailed checking chart (for 3-stepgradation)

02 Density Balance Data Reg/DelLoad the colorimetric data, or manually register thedata on the machine.

06 Color Density Control*2

01 Color Density ControlMake settings for controlling the color density of out-put paper.

02 Color Density Manual ControlMake settings for manually controlling the color den-sity of paper output in print mode.

03 Register Paper CategoryRegister the density adjustment data correspondingto each paper type.

06 Curl Adjustment*3

Set the curl adjustment to be made in the decurlingsection of the main body.

Objects of Adjustment:Face Up: +2, +1, 0Face Down: +2, +1, 0Duplex: +2, +1, 0




[01 Machine Adjustment]11


11.2

11.2 [01 Machine Adjustment]

11.2.1 [01 Printer Adjustment] - [01 Restart Timing Adjustment]

Adjust the image position of lead edge in paper feed direction in the printer engine.

Objects of Adjustment: Restart Timing (Tray 1 to Tray 5), Restart Timing (Back), Tray Large Plain Offset, TrayLarge Thick Offset, Tray Small Plain Offset, Tray Small Thick Offset, Bypass Offset/L Plain, Bypass Offset/LThick, Bypass Offset/S Plain, Bypass Offset/S Thick, Large Plain Offset (ADU), Large Thick Offset (ADU),Small Plain Offset (ADU), Small Thick Offset (ADU)

NOTICE Make this adjustment after completing [03 FD-Mag. Adjustment].

1 Press [Adjustment] on the Machine Screen to display the Adjustment Menu Screen.

2 Press [01 Machine Adjustment], [01 Printer Adjustment], and [01 Restart Timing Adjustment] in se-quence.

The Restart Timing Adjustment Screen will be displayed.

3 Press the key of the object to be adjusted.


5 Load A3 w paper into the tray to be adjusted, then select that tray key.

6 Press Start on the control panel. A sample pattern will be output.

7 Measure the resultant restart timing.

Allowance: 20 +/- 0.5 mm

8 If any adjustment is required, press [Exit Print Mode] to return to the Restart Timing Adjustment Screen.




11.2 [01 Machine Adjustment] 11

9 Use the touch panel keypad or control panel keypad to enter the setting data.

% First enter the numeric value, then use [+/-] to specify the value to be positive or negative.

% Press [Set] to change the current data.

% Adjustment Range: -60 (Lower) to +60 (Higher) (1 step = 0.1 mm)

10 Repeat the steps from 4 to 9 until the desired result is obtained.

11 Press [Return] to restore the Printer Adjustment Menu Screen.

11.2.2 [01 Printer Adjustment] - [02 Centering Adjustment]

Adjust the image position in crosswise direction in the printer engine.

Objects of Adjustment: Tray 1 to Tray 5, Bypass, ADU, Large Size Offset (Tray 1 to Tray 5, Bypass), SmallSize Offset (Tray 1 to Tray 5, Bypass), 8.5 e 5.5 Offset (Tray 1 to Tray 3, Bypass), Large Plain Offset (ADU),Large Thick Offset (ADU), Small Plain Offset (ADU), Small Thick Offset (ADU), 8.5 e 5.5 Plain Offset (ADU), 8.5e 5.5 Thick Offset (ADU)

NOTICE Make this adjustment after completing [04 CD-Mag. Adjustment].


2 Press [01 Machine Adjustment], [01 Printer Adjustment], and [02 Centering Adjustment] in sequence.

The Centering Adjustment Screen will be displayed.





7 Fold the output sheet at the center in the paper feed direction, and check the misalignment of the centerline of the print and folded line.

Allowance: within 0 +/- 1.5 mm

8 If any adjustment is required, press [Exit Print Mode] to return to the Centering Adjustment Screen.




% Adjustment Range: -40 (Front) to +40 (Back) (1 step = 0.1 mm)






11.2


11.2.3 [01 Printer Adjustment] - [03 FD-Mag. Adjustment]

Adjust the magnification in paper feed direction in the printer engine. This adjustment value will be the stand-ard for Both Sides Adjust in Paper Setting.

Objects of Adjustment: Printer FD-Mag., Tray 1 Offset (ADU) to Tray 5 Offset (ADU), Bypass Offset (ADU)


2 Press [01 Machine Adjustment], [01 Printer Adjustment], and [03 FD-Mag. Adjustment] in sequence.

The FD-Mag. Adjustment Screen will be displayed.





7 Measure the resultant magnification in the paper feed direction.

Allowance: +/- 0.5% or less (full size)

Within 205.7 +/- 1 mm

8 If any adjustment is required, press [Exit Print Mode] to return to the FD-Mag. Adjustment Screen.




% Adjustment Range: -100 (Short) to +100 (Long) (1 step = 0.01%) Tray 1 Offset (ADU) to Tray 5 Offset

(ADU): -80 (Short) to +20 (Long) (1 step = 0.01%)







11.2.4 [01 Printer Adjustment] - [04 CD-Mag. Adjustment]

Adjust the magnification in crosswise direction in the printer engine.

Objects of Adjustment: Printer CD-Mag., Tray 1 Offset (ADU) to Tray 5 Offset (ADU), Bypass Offset (ADU)


2 Press [01 Machine Adjustment], [01 Printer Adjustment], and [04 CD-Mag. Adjustment] in sequence.

The CD-Mag. Adjustment Screen will be displayed.



5Load A3 w paper into the tray to be adjusted, then select that tray key.


7 Measure the resultant magnification in the direction perpendicular to the paper feed direction.

Allowance: +/- 0.5% or less

Within 190 +/- 1 mm

8 If any adjustment is required, press [Exit Print Mode] to return to the CD-Mag. Adjustment Screen.




% Adjustment Range: -100 (Short) to +100 (Long) (1 step = 0.1 mm)







11.2

11.2.5 [02 Scan Adjustment] - [01 Restart Timing Adjustment]

Adjust the position to start scanning when using the original glass to scan the original.

NOTICE Make this adjustment after completing [03 FD-Mag. Adjustment].


2 Press [01 Machine Adjustment], [02 Scan Adjustment], and [01 Restart Timing Adjustment] in sequence.



4 Load A3 w paper into a tray, then select that tray key.

5 Place the test chart on the original glass, then press Start on the control panel. A sample pattern willbe output.

6 Check the misalignment by comparing the original and the output.


7 If any adjustment is required, press [Exit Print Mode] to return to the Restart Timing Adjustment Screen.




% Adjustment Range: -10 (Image Fast) to +20 (Image Slow) (1 step = 0.1 mm)


10 Press [Return] to restore the Scan Adjustment Menu Screen.





11.2.6 [02 Scan Adjustment] - [02 Centering Adjustment]

Adjust the image position in crosswise direction when scanning the original from the original glass.

Objects of Adjustment: ADF Centering-Front, ADF Centering-Back, Orig. Glass Centering

NOTICE Make this adjustment after completing [01 Machine Adjustment] - [01 Printer Adjustment] - [02 Centering Ad- justment].


2 Press [01 Machine Adjustment], [02 Scan Adjustment], and [02 Centering Adjustment] in sequence.





6 Place the test chart on the original glass or into the ADF, according to the selected object.




9 If any adjustment is required, press [Exit Print Mode] to return to the Centering Adjustment Screen.


%First enter the numeric value, then use [+/-] to specify the value to be positive or negative.% Press [Set] to change the current data.

% Adjustment Range: -30 (Front) to +30 (Back) (1 step = 0.1 mm)







11.2

11.2.7 [02 Scan Adjustment] - [03 FD-Mag. Adjustment]

Adjust the magnification in paper feed direction when scanning the original from the original glass.

NOTICE Make this adjustment after completing [01 Machine Adjustment] - [01 Printer Adjustment] - [03 FD-Mag. Ad- justment].


2 Press [01 Machine Adjustment], [02 Scan Adjustment], and [03 FD-Mag. Adjustment] in sequence.




5 Place the test chart on the original glass, then press Start on the control panel. A sample pattern will

be output.


Allowance: 0 +/- 0.5% or less (full size)

Within 205.7 +/- 1 mm

7 If any adjustment is required, press [Exit Print Mode] to return to the FD-Mag. Adjustment Screen.




% Adjustment Range: -40 (Short) to +40 (Long) (1 step = 0.05%)






11.3 [02 Stabilization Adj. Setting] 11

11.3 [02 Stabilization Adj. Setting]

Set priority to either output speed or image quality stablity for each of copy job and print job.

d ReferenceSelecting the image quality stability allows you to specify the frequency of gamma correction and maximum

density correction individually for copy job and print job in the Administrator Setting.


2 Press [02 Stabilization Adj. Setting].

The Stabilization Adjustment Operation Frequency Setting Screen will be displayed.

3 Select either [Speed] or [Stability] on the right side of [Copy Job] to give priority in output.

Select either Speed or Stability on the right side of [Printer Job] to give priority in output.

Selection can be made individually for [Copy Job] and [Printer Job].

4 Press [OK] to complete the setting.

% To cancel the change, press [Cancel].

In either case, the Adjustment Menu Screen will be restored.



[02 Execute Adjust Operation]11


11.4

11.4 [02 Execute Adjust Operation]

Execute adjustment operations of Gamma Automatic Adjustment, Color Registration Auto Adj., Toner Re-fresh Mode, and Belt Refresh Mode.

[Gamma Automatic Adj.]: Make this adjustment when color reproducibility is poor in the whole output.

[Color Registration Adj.]: Make this adjustment when misalignment of YMC is found in comparing the originaland the output during successive output operations.

[Toner Refresh Mode]: Make this adjustment when output images show the following defective conditions.- Grainy images

- Random small spots

- Small round white spots

[Belt Refresh Mode]: Make this adjustment when lines caused by paper edges appear in the image printedon paper wider than a paper size that has been continuously used before. However, repeated refreshing op-erations may result in fine, glossy lines on output images.


2 Press [02 Execute Adjust Operation].

3 Select the key of the desired adjustment.

Either single or multiple selections are available.

4 Press [OK]. The Copy Screen will be restored to start the operation.




11.5 [03 Finisher Adjustment] (Finisher FS-521) 11

11.5 [03 Finisher Adjustment] (Finisher FS-521)

11.5.1 [01 Staple Finisher Adjustment] - [01 Staple Center Position]

Adjust the center position of staples determined by Finisher FS-521.

NOTICE Make this adjustment after completing [01 Staple Finisher Adjustment] - [02 Paper Width Adj. (Staple)].


2 Press [03 Finisher Adjustment], [01 Staple Finisher Adjustment], and [01 Staple Center Position] in se-quence.

The Staple Center Position Adjustment Screen will be displayed.



5 Press Start on the control panel. A stapled test pattern will be output.

6 Fold the output sheet at the center in the paper feed direction, and check the misalignment of the centerposition of staples and folded line.

7 If any adjustment is required, press [Exit Print Mode] to return to the Staple Center Position AdjustmentScreen.




% Adjustment Range: -20 (Forward) to +20 (Backward) (1 step = 0.1 mm)


10 Press [Return] to restore the Staple Finisher Adjustment Menu Screen.

[1] Center line of paper [2] Center position of staples



[03 Finisher Adjustment] (Finisher FS-521)11


11.5

11.5.2 [01 Staple Finisher Adjustment] - [02 Paper Width Adj. (Staple)]

Adjust the width of stacker adjustment plates of the finisher to be used in Staple mode.

Objects of Adjustment: Full Area, SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w / v, A4 w / v, B5 v, A5 v, 12 e 18 w,11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w / v, 8.125 e 13.25 w, 8.5 e 13 w, 8.25 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K v,9 e 11 v, Custom (380-460 mm), Custom (220-379 mm), Custom (148-219 mm)

NOTICE

With [Full Area] selected, the entered value will be applied to all sizes. With a specific paper size selected, setvalue will be the sum of the entered value and the value previously specified for [Full Area].


2 Press [03 Finisher Adjustment], [01 Staple Finisher Adjustment], and [02 Paper Width Adj. (Staple)] insequence.

The Paper Width Adjustment (Staple) Screen will be displayed.

3 Select the size to be adjusted using [+] and [,] to scroll.


5 Load the paper size to be adjusted, then select that tray key.


7 Open the finisher door, and then withdraw the staple unit.

% When using paper with a length of 239 mm or longer, the staple unit cannot be withdrawn. Removethe output paper from the delivery end, withdraw the staple unit, and then reset the paper in the unit.





8 Check the gap between adjustment plates and output paper.

Check if the stapled set shows misalignment (a) (caused if specified paper width is larger than the actualwidth), or is curved (b) (caused if specified paper width is smaller than the actual width).

9 Remove the paper from the staple unit, return the staple unit to its original position, then close the fin-isher door.

10 If any adjustment is required, press [Exit Print Mode] to return to the Paper Width Adjustment (Staple)Screen.




% Adjustment Range: -20 (Wide) to +20 (Narrow) (1 step = 0.1 mm)



11.5.3 [01 Staple Finisher Adjustment] - [03 Paper Width Adj. (Straight)]

Adjust the width of stacker adjustment plates of the finisher to be used in straight delivery.

Objects of Adjustment: Full Area, SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w / v, A4 w / v, B5 v, A5 v, 12 e 18 w,11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w / v, 8.125 e 13.25 w, 8.5 e 13 w, 8.25 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K v,

9 e 11 v, Custom (380-460 mm), Custom (220-379 mm), Custom (148-219 mm)

NOTICE With [Full Area] selected, the entered value will be applied to all sizes. With a specific paper size selected, setvalue will be the sum of the entered value and the value previously specified for [Full Area].





11.5


2 Press [03 Finisher Adjustment], [01 Staple Finisher Adjustment], and then [03 Paper Width (Straight)].

The Paper Width Adjustment (Straight) Screen will be displayed.



5 Load the paper size to be adjusted, then select that tray key .


7 Open the finisher door, and then withdraw the staple unit.

% When using paper with a length of 239 mm or longer, the staple unit cannot be withdrawn. Removethe output paper from the delivery end, withdraw the staple unit, and then reset the paper in the unit.

8 Check the gap between adjustment plates and output paper.

Check if the stapled set shows misalignment (a) (caused if specified paper width is larger than the actualwidth), or is curved (b) (caused if specified paper width is smaller than the actual width).

9 Remove the paper from the staple unit, return the staple unit to its original position, then close the fin-isher door.

10 If any adjustment is required, press [Exit Print Mode] to return to the Paper Width Adjustment (Straight)

Screen.











11.5.4 [01 Staple Finisher Adjustment] - [04 Exit Guide Center Pos. Adj.]

Align the center position of exit guides of Finisher FS-521 to the center line of paper.

Objects of Adjustment: Straight (Small), Straight (Large), Shift Front (Small), Shift Front (Large), Shift Back(Small), Shift Back (Large)

NOTICE Perform [01 Staple Finisher Adjustment] - [05 Exit Guide Paper Width Adj.] along with this adjustment.

NOTICE This adjustment is effective against the paper with a width in horizontal scanning direction of 182 mm (B5 w )or more in straight delivery, or 210 mm (A4 w ) or more in shift delivery. Small sizes such as A5 w , B6 w , or5.5 e 8.5 w are unavailable because adjustment guides will not operate for those small sizes.


2 Press [03 Finisher Adjustment], [01 Staple Finisher Adjustment], and [04 Exit Guide Center Pos. Adj.] insequence.

The Exit Guide Center Position Adjustment Screen will be displayed.

3 Press the desired key to select the condition for adjusting the center position of exit guides.

[Straight (Small)]: Using small sizes (182 mm or more in length, 297 mm or less in width) in straight de-livery

[Straight (Large)]: Using large sizes (182 mm or more in length, 298 mm or more in width) in straightdelivery

[Shift Front (Small)]: Using small sizes (210 mm or more in length, 297 mm or less in width) offset to thefront in shift delivery

[Shift Front (Large)]: Using large sizes (210 mm or more in length, 298 mm or more in width) offset tothe front in shift delivery

[Shift Back (Small)]: Using small sizes (210 mm or more in length, 297 mm or less in width) offset to theback in shift delivery

[Shift Back (Large)]: Using large sizes (210 mm or more in length, 298 mm or more in width) offset tothe back in shift delivery

Small/Large sizes used in straight delivery are not exactly the same as those used in shift delivery(front/back). Classifications of standard sizes are as follows.

Straight (Small): A4 w / v, B5 w / v, A5 v, 8.5 e 11w / v, 5.5 e 8.5 v

Straight (Large): A3 w, B4 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, Foolscap

Shift Front/Back (Small): A4 w / v, B5 v, 8.5 e 11 w / v, 5.5 e 8.5 v

Shift Front/Back (Large): A3 w, B4 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, Foolscap








11.5

7 Check the misalignment (a) of the sheets delivered to the primary (main) tray.

Check the gap between output sheets and exit guides in operation to estimate the adjustment datafrom it.

8 If any adjustment is required, press [Exit Print Mode] to return to the Exit Guide Center Position Adjust-ment Screen.



%Press [Set] to change the current data.

% Adjustment Range: -50 (Forward) to +50 (Backward) (1 step = 0.1 mm)

NOTICE For straight delivery, specify the same adjustment data for both small and large sizes.

The adjustment data of straight delivery will not be reflected in the shift amount of shift delivery.

With excessively estimated data specified, exit guides may interfere with output sheets in delivery.When making this adjustment, be sure to check the operation of exit guides.

When making an adjustment for shift delivery, be sure neither to have a space along the fixed exit guide,nor to give any stress to output sheets.



11.5.5 [01 Staple Finisher Adjustment] - [05 Exit Guide Paper Width Adj.]

Adjust the width of exit guides of Finisher FS-521.

Objects of Adjustment: Full Area, SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w / v, A4 w / v, B5 v, A5 v, 12 e 18 w,11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w / v, 8.125 e 13.25 w, 8.5 e 13 w, 8.25 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K v,9 e 11 v, Custom (380-460 mm), Custom (220-379 mm), Custom (148-219 mm)

NOTICE Perform [01 Staple Finisher Adjustment] - [04 Exit Guide Center Pos. Adj.] along with this adjustment.

NOTICE This adjustment is effective against the paper with a width in horizontal scanning direction of 182 mm (B5 w )

or more in straight delivery, or 210 mm (A4 w ) or more in shift delivery. Small sizes such as A5 w , B6 w , or5.5 e 8.5 w are unavailable because adjustment guides will not operate for those small sizes.







2 Press [03 Finisher Adjustment], [01 Staple Finisher Adjustment], and [05 Exit Guide Paper Width Adj.]in sequence.

The Exit Guide Paper Width Adjustment Screen will be displayed.





7 Check the misalignment (a) of the sheets delivered to the primary (main) tray.

Check the gap between output sheets and exit guides in operation to estimate the adjustment datafrom it.

8 If any adjustment is required, press [Exit Print Mode] to return to the Exit Guide Paper Width Adjustment

Screen.





% If the width is adjusted too narrow, output sheets may be misaligned in vertical scanning direction.





[03 Finisher Adjustment] (Folding Unit FD-503)11


11.6

11.6 [03 Finisher Adjustment] (Folding Unit FD-503)

11.6.1 [02 Multi Folder (Punch) Adj.] - [01 Paper Width Adjustment]

Adjust the width of adjustment plates for a specific paper size if punch holes made by the Folding UnitFD-503 dislocate largely.

Objects of Adjustment: Full Area, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w / v, B5 w / v, A5 w / v, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w / v, 8.125 e 13.25 w, 8.5 e 13 w, 8.25 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K w / v, 9 e 11 v



2 Press [03 Finisher Adjustment], [02 Multi Folder (Punch) Adj.], and [01 Paper Width Adjustment] in se-quence.

The Paper Width Adjustment Screen will be displayed.




6 Set the print quantity to 10, then press Start on the control panel. A sample pattern will be output.

7 Check the diameter of holes penetrating through piled output sets.

% Check if the punch holes show misalignment (a) (caused if the width of adjustment plates is largerthan the paper width), or are curved (b) (caused if the width of adjustment plates is smaller than thepaper width).

Number of punch holes Allowance

2 holes 5.0 mm or more in diameter

4 holes 6.5 mm or more in diameter




11.6 [03 Finisher Adjustment] (Folding Unit FD-503) 11

8 If any adjustment is required, press [Exit Print Mode] to return to the Paper Width Adjustment Screen.




% Adjustment Range: -20 (Narrow) to +20 (Wide) (1 step = 0.1 mm)

% Adjusting the width too wide may dislocate the center position of punch holes, or adjusting it too

narrow may change the position of punch holes variously.


11 Press [Return] to restore the Multi Folder (Punch) Adjustment Menu Screen.

11.6.2 [02 Multi Folder (Punch) Adj.] - [02 Punch Vertical Position Adj.]

Adjust the vertical position of punch holes made by Folding Unit FD-503. Adjust the distance between punchholes and the edge of paper.

Objects of Adjustment: 2-Hole Punch: Full Area, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w / v, B5 w / v, A5 w / v, 12 e 18 w,11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w / v, 8.125 e 13.25 w, 8.5 e 13 w, 8.25 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K w / v,9 e 11 v

4-Hole Punch: Full Area, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 v, B5 v, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 11 v, 8K w, 16K v,9 e 11 v



2 Press [03 Finisher Adjustment], [02 Multi Folder (Punch) Adj.], and [02 Punch Vertical Position Adj.] insequence.

3 Select either [01 2-Hole Punch] or [02 4-Hole Punch].









11.6

8 Measure the distance (a) from the edge of the output sheet to the center of punch holes.

9 If any adjustment is required, press [Exit Print Mode] to return to the Punch Vertical Position AdjustmentScreen.






12 Press [Return] to restore the Punch Vertical Position Adjustment Menu Screen.

11.6.3 [03 Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.] - [01 Half-Fold Position Adj.]

Adjust the half-folded position determined by Folding Unit FD-503.Objects of Adjustment: Full Area, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11w, 8K w, Custom (380-458 mm), Custom (279-379 mm)


Number of punch holes Allowance

2 holes 10.5 +/- 4.0 mm or more

4 holes 9.5 +/- 4.0 mm or more






2 Press [03 Finisher Adjustment], [03 Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.], and [01 Half-Fold Position Adj.] in se-quence.

The Half-Fold Position Adjustment Screen will be displayed.





7 Measure the misalignment (a) between the edges of output sheet.

Allowance: a = 0 +/- 1.5 mm

8 If any adjustment is required, press [Exit Print Mode] to return to the Half-Fold Position AdjustmentScreen.





% The measurement (a) in step 7 will decrease with positive value entered, and increase with negativevalue entered.


11 Press [Return] to restore the Multi Folder (Fold) Adjustment Menu Screen.





11.6

11.6.4 [03 Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.] - [02 Tri-Fold-in Pos. Adj.]

Adjust the folded positions in Tri-Fold-in mode determined by Folding Unit FD-503.

Objects of Adjustment: Full Area, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w,8K w, Custom (380-458 mm), Custom (279-379 mm)

NOTICE When adjusting both Single Fold and Double Fold, be sure to start with the Double Fold adjustment. The po-

sition of Single Fold is calculated from the edge of the sheet, while that of Double Fold is calculated from theposition of Single Fold; consequently the measurement (b) in step 7 is subject to the change in either positionof the fold.



2 Press [04 Finisher Adjustment], [03 Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.], and [02 Tri-Fold-in Pos. Adj.] in sequence.

The Tri-Fold-in Position Adjustment Screen will be displayed.





7 Measure the lengths (a) and (b) of the output sheet.

Allowance: a = 0 +/- 1.5 mm, b = +/- 1.5 mm

Paper Size a b

11 e 17 w 142.9 mm 145.9 mm

A3 w 139.0 mm 142.0 mm

B4 w 116.6 mm 119.6 mm

8.5 e 14 w 117.5 mm 120.5 mm

A4 w 98.0 mm 101.0 mm

8.5 e 11 w 92.1 mm 95.1 mm

8K w 129.0 mm 132.0 mm

12 e 18 w 151.4 mm 154.4 mm

SRA4 w 105.6 mm 108.6 mm





8 If any adjustment is required, press [Exit Print Mode] to return to the Tri-Fold-in Position AdjustmentScreen.

9 Select [Double Fold].





% The measurement (a) in step 7 will increase with positive value entered, and decrease with negative

value entered.

11 Select [Single Fold].

12 Repeat step 10.

% The measurement (b) in step 7 will increase with positive value entered, and decrease with negativevalue entered.



11.6.5 [03 Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.] - [03 Tri-Fold-out Pos. Adj.] Adjust the folded positions in Tri-Fold-out mode determined by Folding Unit FD-503.


NOTICE When adjusting both Single Fold and Double Fold, be sure to start with the Single Fold adjustment. The position of Single Fold is calculated from the edge of the sheet, while that of Double Fold is calculated from theposition of Single Fold; consequently the measurement (b) in step 7 is subject to the change in either positionof the fold.


[1] Single Fold [2] Double Fold





11.6


2 Press [04 Finisher Adjustment], [03 Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.], and [03 Tri-Fold-out Pos. Adj.] in sequence.

The Tri-Fold-out Position Adjustment Screen will be displayed.






Allowance: a +/- 1.5 mm, b +/- 1.5 mm

8 If any adjustment is required, press [Exit Print Mode] to return to the Tri-Fold-out Position AdjustmentScreen.


10 Use the touch panel keypad or control panel keypad to enter the setting data.% First enter the numeric value, then use [+/-] to specify the value to be positive or negative.



% The measurement (a) in step 7 will increase with positive value entered, and decrease with negativevalue entered.


12 Repeat step 10.

% The measurement (b) in step 7 will increase with positive value entered, and decrease with negativevalue entered.



Paper Size a b

11 e 17 w 289.9 mm 147.9 mm

A3 w 282.0 mm 144.0 mm

B4 w 236.3 mm 119.6 mm

8.5 e 14 w 238.1 mm 120.5 mm

A4 w 199.0 mm 101.0 mm

8.5 e 11 w 187.3 mm 95.1 mm

8K w 262.0 mm 134.0 mm

12 e 18 w 306.8 mm 156.4 mm

SRA4 w 214.3 mm 108.6 mm






11.6.6 [03 Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.] - [04 Double Parallel Pos. Adj.]

Adjust the folded positions in Double Parallel mode determined by Folding Unit FD-503.


NOTICE When adjusting both Single Fold and Double Fold, be sure to start with the Single Fold adjustment. The po-

sition of Single Fold is calculated from the edge of the sheet, while that of Double Fold is calculated from theposition of Single Fold; consequently the measurement (b) in step 7 is subject to the change in either positionof the fold.



2 Press [03 Finisher Adjustment], [03 Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.], and [04 Double Parallel Pos. Adj.] in se-

quence.

The Double Parallel Position Adjustment Screen will be displayed.







Paper Size a b

11 e 17 w 214.4 mm 106.7 mm

A3 w 208.5 mm 103.8 mm

B4 w 175.0 mm 87.0 mm

8.5 e 14 w 176.3 mm 87.7 mm

A4 w 147.0 mm 73.0 mm

8.5 e 11 w 138.2 mm 68.6 mm

8K w 193.5 mm 96.3 mm

12 e 18 w 227.1 mm 113.1 mm

SRA4 w 158.5 mm 78.7 mm





11.6

8 If any adjustment is required, press [Exit Print Mode] to return to the Double Parallel Position Adjust-ment Screen.





% Adjustment Range: -50 (Long) to +50 (Short) (1 step = 0.1 mm)

% The measurement (a) in step 7 will decrease with positive value entered, and increase with negative

value entered.


12 Repeat step 10.

% The measurement (b) in step 7 will decrease with positive value entered, and increase with negativevalue entered.



11.6.7 [03 Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.] - [05 Z-Fold Position Adj.] Adjust the folded positions in Z-Fold mode determined by Folding Unit FD-503.

Objects of Adjustment: Full Area, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11w, 8K w, Custom (380-458 mm), Custom (279-379 mm)

NOTICE When adjusting both Single Fold and Double Fold, be sure to start with the Single Fold adjustment. The position of Single Fold is calculated from the edge of the sheet, while that of Double Fold is calculated from theposition of Single Fold; consequently the measurement (b) in step 7 is subject to the change in either positionof the fold.








2 Press [03 Finisher Adjustment], [03 Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.], and [05 Z-Fold Position Adj.] in sequence.

The Z-Fold Position Adjustment Screen will be displayed.







8 If any adjustment is required, press [Exit Print Mode] to return to the Z-Fold Position Adjustment Screen.






% The measurement (a) in step 7 will decrease with positive value entered, and increase with negativevalue entered.


12 Repeat step 10.




Paper Size a b

11 e 17 w 108.5 mm 111.5 mm

A3 w 105.5 mm 108.5 mm

B4 w 88.7 mm 91.7 mm

8.5 e 14 w 94.0 mm -

A4 w 74.8 mm 77.8 mm

8.5 e 11 w 70.4 mm 73.4 mm

8K w 98.0 mm 101.0 mm

12 e 18 w 114.8 mm 117.8 mm

SRA4 w 80.5 mm 83.5 mm






11.6

11.6.8 [03 Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.] - [06 Gate Position Adj.]

Adjust the folded positions in Gate mode determined by Folding Unit FD-503.

Objects of Adjustment: Full Area, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11w, 8K w, Custom (380-458 mm), Custom (279-379 mm)

NOTICE When adjusting all of Single Fold, Double Fold, and Triple Fold, be sure to start with the Single Fold adjust-

ment in order. The position of Single Fold is calculated from the edge of the sheet, while that of Double Foldis calculated from the position of Single Fold and that of Triple Fold from that of Double Fold; consequentlythe measurements (a), (b) and (c) in step 7 are subject to the change in any position of the fold.



2 Press [03 Finisher Adjustment], [03 Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.], and [06 Gate Position Adj.] in sequence.

The Gate Position Adjustment Screen will be displayed.





7 Measure the lengths (a), (b), and (c) of the output sheet.

Allowance: a +/- 1.5 mm, b +/- 1.5 mm, c +/- 1.5 mm

Paper Size a b c

11 e 17 w 106.5 mm 218.9 mm 109.5 mm

A3 w 103.5 mm 213.0 mm 106.5 mm

B4 w 86.7 mm 179.5 mm 89.7 mm

8.5 e 14 w 87.4 mm 180.8 mm 90.4 mm

A4 w 72.8 mm 151.5 mm 75.8 mm

8.5 e 11 w 68.4 mm 142.7 mm 71.4 mm

8K w 96.0 mm 198.0 mm 99.0 mm

12 e 18 w 112.8 mm 231.6 mm 115.8 mm

SRA4 w 78.5 mm 163.0 mm 81.5 mm





8 If any adjustment is required, press [Exit Print Mode] to return to the Gate Position Adjustment Screen.





% Adjustment Range: Single Fold/Triple Fold: -50 (Long) to +50 (Short) (1 step = 0.1 mm) Double Fold:-50 (Short) to +50 (Long) (1 step = 0.1 mm)


11 Press [Double Fold] or [Triple Fold] similarly to make an adjustment as needed.

% In Double Fold, the measurement (b) in step 7 will increase with positive value entered, and decreasewith negative value entered.

% In Triple Fold, the measurement (c) in step 7 will increase with positive value entered, and decreasewith negative value entered.



[1] Single Fold [2] Double Fold [3] Triple Fold



[03 Finisher Adjustment] (Large Capacity Stacker LS-505)11


11.7

11.7 [03 Finisher Adjustment] (Large Capacity Stacker LS-505)

11.7.1 [05 Stacker Adjustment] - [01 Paper Width Adjustment]

Adjust the position of adjustment plates if output sheets show misalignment in crosswise direction on thestacker tray of Large Capacity Stacker LS-505.

Objects of Adjustment: Stacker No. 1, Stacker No. 2


2 Press [03 Finisher Adjustment], [05 Stacker Adjustment], and [01 Paper Width Adjustment] in sequence.

The Paper Width Adjustment Screen will be displayed.

3 If two units of Large Capacity Stacker LS-505 are connected, select either [Stacker No. 1] or [StackerNo. 2].


5 Load the desired paper size into a tray, then select that tray key.





11.7 [03 Finisher Adjustment] (Large Capacity Stacker LS-505) 11

7 Check the misalignment (a) in the sheets delivered to the stacker.

8 If any adjustment is required, press [Exit Print Mode] to return to the Paper Width Adjustment Screen.






11 Press [Return] to restore the Stacker Adjustment Menu Screen.

11.7.2 [05 Stacker Adjustment] - [02 Paper Length Adjustment]

Adjust the position of the front stopper if output sheets show misalignment in paper feed direction on thestacker tray of Large Capacity Stacker LS-505.

Objects of Adjustment: Stacker No. 1, Stacker No. 2



[03 Finisher Adjustment] (Large Capacity Stacker LS-505)11


11.7


2 Press [03 Finisher Adjustment], [05 Stacker Adjustment], and [02 Paper Length Adjustment] in se-quence.

The Paper Length Adjustment Screen will be displayed.

3 If two units of Large Capacity Stacker LS-505 are connected, select either [Stacker No. 1] or [StackerNo. 2].




7 Check the misalignment (a) in the sheets delivered to the stacker.

8 If any adjustment is required, press [Exit Print Mode] to return to the Paper Length Adjustment Screen.




% Adjustment Range: -20 (Opposite direction) to +20 (Paper feed direction) (1 step = 0.1 mm)


11 Press [Return] to restore the Stacker Adjustment Menu Screen.




11.8 [03 Finisher Adjustment] (Saddle Stitcher SD-506) 11

11.8 [03 Finisher Adjustment] (Saddle Stitcher SD-506)

11.8.1 [06 Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.] - [01 Staple Center Position]

Adjust the center position of staples determined by Saddle Stitcher SD-506.

NOTICE Make this adjustment after completing [01 Staple Finisher Adjustment] - [02 Paper Width Adj. (Staple)].


2 Press [03 Finisher Adjustment], [06 Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.], and [01 Staple Center Position] in se-quence.

The Staple Center Position Adjustment Screen will be displayed.




NOTICE Without the saddle stitcher tray withdrawn, the machine will not start printing even if Start is pressed.Be sure to withdraw the saddle stitcher tray.

6 Measure the difference (a) between the center line and center position of staples.

Allowance: a = 0 +/- 2 mm

7 If any adjustment is required, press [Exit Print Mode] to return to the Staple Center Position AdjustmentScreen.

[1] Center position of staples [2] Center line of paper



[03 Finisher Adjustment] (Saddle Stitcher SD-506)11


11.8




% Adjustment Range: -20 (Leftward) to +20 (Rightward) (1 step = 0.1 mm)


10 Press [Return] to restore the Saddle Stitcher Adjustment Menu Screen.

11.8.2 [06 Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.] - [02 Staple Paper Width Adj.]

Adjust the width of adjustment plates of Saddle Stitcher SD-506 to be used in Staple mode.

Objects of Adjustment: Full Area, SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w, B5 w, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w, 8.125 e 13.25 w, 8.5 e 13 w, 8.25 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K w, Custom(380-463 mm), Custom (257-379 mm)



2 Press [03 Finisher Adjustment], [06 Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.], and [02 Staple Paper Width Adj.] in se-quence.

The Staple Paper Width Adjustment Screen will be displayed.










7 Check if the stapled set shows misalignment (a) (caused if specified paper width is larger than the actualwidth), or is curved (b) (caused if specified paper width is smaller than the actual width).

Allowance: a = 1 mm or less

8 If any adjustment is required, press [Exit Print Mode] to return to the Staple Paper Width AdjustmentScreen.





% Staple Paper Width Adjustment is subject to the following conditions depending on the actual paperwidth. For paper sizes of less than 222 mm in actual width, such as A4 w, the staple pitch will beset to 91 mm automatically even if an adjustment value to make it less than 91 mm is entered.



11.8.3 [06 Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.] - []03 Staple Pitch Adjustment

Adjust the staple pitch determined by Saddle Stitcher SD-506.



Actual paper width Minimum value Maximum value

Less than 222 mm 91 mm Actual width minus 91mm

222 mm to 290 mm Not limited Not limited

More than 290 mm Not limited 165 mm





11.8


2 Press [03 Finisher Adjustment], [06 Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.], and [03 Staple Pitch Adjustment] in se-quence.

The Staple Pitch Adjustment Screen will be displayed.






7 Check the staple pitch (a) of the sample.

Allowance: a = b/2 +/- 2 mm

8 If any adjustment is required, press [Exit Print Mode] to return to the Staple Pitch Adjustment Screen.


% First enter the numeric value, then use [+/-] to specify the value to be positive or negative.% Press [Set] to change the current data.



% Available range of the adjustment varies depending on paper sizes. The minimum value is subjectto the traveling range of stapler, while the maximum value requires that the exit guides and staplerdo not interfere in the saddle stitcher.

B5 w: Setting unavailable (91 mm fixed)

B4 w: -20 to +20 mm (108.5 to 148.5 mm)

A4 w: -14 to +14 mm (91 to 119 mm)

A3 w: -20 to +16.5 mm (128.5 to 165 mm)






11.8.4 [06 Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.] - [04 Half-Fold Position Adj.]

Adjust the half-folded position determined by Saddle Stitcher SD-506.


NOTICE



2 Press [03 Finisher Adjustment], [06 Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.], and [04 Half-Fold Position Adj.] in se-quence.

The Half-Fold Position Adjustment Screen will be displayed.






7 Check the misalignment (a) of the edges of output sheet.

Allowance: a = 1.5 mm or less

8 If any adjustment is required, press [Exit Print Mode] to return to the Half-Fold Position AdjustmentScreen.




% Adjustment Range: -50 (Short) to +50 (Long) (1 step = 0.1 mm)% The measurement (a) in step 7 will increase with positive value entered, and decrease with negative

value entered.





11.8



11.8.5 [06 Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.] - [05 Tri-Fold Position Adj.]

Adjust the folded positions in Tri-Fold-in mode determined by Saddle Stitcher SD-506.

Objects of Adjustment: Full Area, A4 w, 8.5 e 11 w

NOTICE When adjusting both Single Fold and Double Fold, be sure to start with the Double Fold adjustment. The position of Single Fold is calculated from the edge of the sheet, while that of Double Fold is calculated from theposition of Single Fold; consequently the measurement (b) in step 7 is subject to the change in either positionof the fold.



2 Press [03 Finisher Adjustment], [06 Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.], and [05 Tri-Fold Position Adj.] in se-quence.

3 Select the size to be adjusted.






Paper Size a b

A4 w 97.5 +/- 2.0 mm 102.0 +/- 2.0 mm

8.5 e 11 w 91.6 +/- 2.0 mm 96.1 +/- 2.0 mm





8 If any adjustment is required, press [Exit Print Mode] to return to the Tri-Fold Position AdjustmentScreen.





% Adjustment Range: Single Fold: -100 (Short) to +100 (Long) (1 step = 0.1 mm) Double Fold: -100(Long) to +100 (Short) (1 step = 0.1 mm)



12 Repeat step 10.




11.8.6 [06 Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.] - [06 Fold Paper Width Adj.]

Adjust the width of adjustment plates of Saddle Stitcher SD-506 if half-folded or tri-folded sheets show mis-alignment.

Objects of Adjustment: Full Area, SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w, B5 w, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w, 8.125 e 13.25 w, 8.5 e 13 w, 8.25 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K w, PI, Custom(380-463 mm), Custom (257-379 mm)







11.8


2 Press [03 Finisher Adjustment], [06 Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.], and [06 Fold Paper Width Adj.] in se-quence.

The Fold Paper Width Adjustment Screen will be displayed.





7 Check that any misalignment is found in the output set.

a: Misalignment occurs at random if specified paper width is wider than the actual width.

b: Misalignment occurs in one direction if specified paper width is narrower than the actual width.

8 If any adjustment is required, press [Exit Print Mode] to return to the Fold Paper Width AdjustmentScreen.



% Press [Set] to change the current data.% Adjustment Range: -50 (Narrow) to +50 (Wide) (1 step = 0.1 mm)

% If the setting data is too wide, misalignment may become worse.







11.8.7 [06 Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.] - [07 Trimming Adjustment]

Adjust the trimming width determined by Saddle Stitcher SD-506. The trimming width should be more than2.0 mm, otherwise the trimming operation may not performed properly.




2 Press [03 Finisher Adjustment], [06 Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.], and [07 Trimming Adjustment] in se-quence.

The Trimming Adjustment Screen will be displayed.






7 Check the trimming width (a) of the output sheets.

Allowance: a = 2 mm or more

8 If any adjustment is required, press [Exit Print Mode] to return to the Trimming Adjustment Screen.





% Enter the value so that the cover should be cut by 2.0 mm or more. If the trimming width is less than2.0 mm, the trimming operation may not performed properly.





11.8



11.8.8 [06 Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.] - [08 Trimmer Receiver Adj.]

Frequent trimming operations may cause damage to the receiver, resulting in trimming failures.

Trim Count: Select the count of trimming operations to move the receiver periodically.Move Pitch: Select the pitch to move the receiver.

Execute Compulsive Movement: Manually move the receiver.

NOTICE Service setting is required to display [08 Trimmer Receiver Adj.] on the screen. Contact your service representative, if desired.


2 Press [03 Finisher Adjustment], [06 Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.], and [08 Trimmer Receiver Adj.] in se-quence.

The Trimmer Receiver Adjustment Screen will be displayed.

3 Select [700 times], [500 times], or [300 times] for Trim Count.

4 Select [1.0 mm], [1.5 mm], or [2.0 mm] for Move Pitch.

5 Press [Execute Compulsive Movement] to move the receiver manually.

NOTICE Please do not use this function at short intervals.

6 Press [OK] to restore the Saddle Stitcher Adjustment Menu Screen.




11.9 [03 Finisher Adjustment] (Perfect Binder PB-503) 11

11.9 [03 Finisher Adjustment] (Perfect Binder PB-503)

11.9.1 [07 Perfect Binder Adjustment] - [01 Cover Trimming Adjustment]

Adjust the trimming width on the lead edge of the right cover page determined by Perfect Binder PB-503.

Objects of Adjustment: Perfect Binder Tray, Except PB Tray

NOTICE Make this adjustment after completing [07 Perfect Binder Adjustment] - [02 Cover Lead Edge Adj.].


2 Press [03 Finisher Adjustment], [07 Perfect Binder Adjustment], and [01 Cover Trimming Adjustment] insequence.

The Cover Trimming Adjustment Screen will be displayed.

3Load cover sheets in either cover tray of perfect binder or any other tray.

4 Load paper for body sets in the desired tray.

5 Select either [Perfect Binder Tray] or [Except PB Tray] for the tray loaded with covers.


7 Select the tray key loaded with paper for body sets.

8 Press Start on the control panel. A sample pattern of perfect-bound book will be output.

9 Check that the edge of the right cover page is neatly aligned with that of the left cover page.

10 If any adjustment is required, press [Exit Print Mode] to return to the Cover Trimming AdjustmentScreen.

[1] Left cover page [2] Right cover page [3] Trimming position



[03 Finisher Adjustment] (Perfect Binder PB-503)11


11.9






13 Press [Return] to restore the Perfect Binder Adjustment Menu Screen.

11.9.2 [07 Perfect Binder Adjustment] - [02 Cover Lead Edge Adj.]

Adjust the lead edge position of left cover page determined with reference to the body set using PerfectBinder PB-503. The sizes referred in this section are those of body sets corresponding to cover sizes.

Objects of Adjustment: Full Area, A4 v, B5 v, A5 w / v, 8.5 e 11 v, 5.5 e 8.5 w, 16K v, Custom (220-379 mm),Custom (148-219 mm)



2 Press [03 Finisher Adjustment], [07 Perfect Binder Adjustment], and [02 Cover Lead Edge Adj.] in se-quence.

The Cover Lead Edge Adjustment Screen will be displayed.

3 Load cover sheets in either cover tray of perfect binder or any other tray.


5 Select either [PB Tray] or [Except PB Tray].









10 Check that the edge of the left cover page extends out of the body set by the desired amount.

11 If any adjustment is required, press [Exit Print Mode] to return to the Cover Lead Edge AdjustmentScreen.







11.9.3 [07 Perfect Binder Adjustment] - [03 Spine Corner Forming Pos.]

Adjust the state of spine corners formed in cover sheets using Perfect Binder PB-503.

Objects of Adjustment: Up/Down Forward Adj. (Front), Up/Down Rear Adj. (Rear)


2 Press [03 Finisher Adjustment], [07 Perfect Binder Adjustment], and [03 Spine Corner Forming Pos.] insequence.

The Spine Corner Forming Position Adjustment Screen will be displayed.






[1] Left cover page [2] Right cover page [3] Length differential [4] Edge of the left cover page [5] Bodypages





11.9

8 Check that the spine corner of the cover is formed uniformly against the horizontal scanning direction.

9 If any adjustment is required, press [Exit Print Mode] to return to the Spine Corner Forming Position Adjustment Screen.

10 Select either [Up/Down Forward Adj.] or [Up/Down Rear Adj.].




% Adjustment Range: -128 (Down: circle) to +127 (Up: square) (1 step = 0.1 mm)

% If desired, display the help message to view details of the adjustment you made.



11.9.4 [07 Perfect Binder Adjustment] - [04 Glue Start Position] Adjust the position to start gluing on the body set using Perfect Binder PB-503. The sizes referred in thissection are those of body sets corresponding to cover sizes.

Objects of Adjustment: Ahead (rear): Full Area, A4 v, B5 v, A5 w / v, 8.5 e 11 v, 5.5 e 8.5 w, 16K v, Custom(220-379 mm), Custom (148-219 mm) Back (front): Full Area, A4 v, B5 v, A5 w / v, 8.5 e 11 v, 5.5 e 8.5 w,16K v, Custom (220-379 mm), Custom (148-219 mm)


[1] Left cover page [2] Spine [3] Right cover page [4] Horizontal scanning direction






2 Press [03 Finisher Adjustment], [07 Perfect Binder Adjustment], and [04 Glue Start Position] in se-quence.

The Glue Start Position Adjustment Screen will be displayed.




% The size referred here is that of perfect-bound books.




9 Check that the glue starts in proper position on both frontward and backward ends of the body set.

10 If any adjustment is required, press [Exit Print Mode] to return to the Glue Start Position AdjustmentScreen.

11 Select either [Ahead] or [Back].




% Adjustment Range: -128 (Soon) to +127 (Late) (1 step = 0.1 mm)




[1] Body pages [2] Start position of backward gluing [3] Start position of frontward gluing





11.9

11.9.5 [07 Perfect Binder Adjustment] - [05 Glue Finish Position]

Adjust the position to finish gluing on the body set using Perfect Binder PB-503. The sizes referred in thissection are those of body sets corresponding to cover sizes.

Objects of Adjustment: Ahead (rear): Full Area, A4 v, B5 v, A5 w / v, 8.5 e 11 v, 5.5 e 8.5 w, 16K v, Custom(220-379 mm), Custom (148-219 mm) Back (front): Full Area, A4 v, B5 v, A5 w / v, 8.5 e 11 v, 5.5 e 8.5 w,16K v, Custom (220-379 mm), Custom (148-219 mm)



2 Press [03 Finisher Adjustment], [07 Perfect Binder Adjustment], and [05 Glue Finish Position] in se-quence.

The Glue Finish Position Adjustment Screen will be displayed.







9 Check that the glue finishes in proper position on both frontward and backward ends of the body set.

[1] Body pages [2] Finish position of backward gluing [3] Finish position of frontward gluing





10 If any adjustment is required, press [Exit Print Mode] to return to the Glue Finish Position AdjustmentScreen.

11 Select either [Ahead] or [Back].








11.9.6 [07 Perfect Binder Adjustment] - [06 Glue Formation Finish Pos.]

Adjust the position to finish equalizing the glue applied on the body set using Perfect Binder PB-503. Thesizes referred in this section are those of body sets corresponding to cover sizes.




2 Press [03 Finisher Adjustment], [07 Perfect Binder Adjustment], and [06 Glue Formation Finish Pos.] insequence.

The Glue Form Finish Position Adjustment Screen will be displayed.







9 Check that the glue on the body set finishes to be equalized in proper position.





11.9

10 If any adjustment is required, press [Exit Print Mode] to return to the Glue Form Finish Position Adjust-ment Screen.








11.9.7 [07 Perfect Binder Adjustment] - [07 Temperature Adjustment]

Control the condition of glue to be dried by setting temperature on the sensors inside the melt tank and ofthe glue apply roller using Perfect Binder PB-503.

The following four types of sensors are provided.

Glue Tank -Top:

The machine supplies glue pellets on detecting the temperature of solution surface lower than the set point.Recommended to be set higher in thermal environment where the machine tends to fail in detection.

Initial: 132°C, Recommended: 128 to 136°C

Glue Tank -Mid:

Set the temperature to reach when warm-up is completed, and to start rotating the roller. Setting it higherhelps glue temperature to be stable sooner.

Initial: 145°C, Recommended: 140 to 145°C

Contact your service representative for setting change in Glue Tank - Top and Glue Tank - Mid is desired.

Glue Tank -Low:

Adjust the temperature to control the tank heater.

Low temperature: Increases glue viscosity High temperature: Decreases glue viscosity

Initial: 185°C

Recommended: 180 to 190°C

Glue Apply Roller:

Adjust the temperature to control the roller heater. This also supports heating of the glue.

Low temperature: Increases glue viscosity High temperature: Decreases glue viscosity

Initial: 165°C

Recommended: 160 to 170°C

NOTICE

Do not make unnecessary change in the temperature setting of sensors inside the melt tank.






2 Press [03 Finisher Adjustment], [07 Perfect Binder Adjustment], and [07 Temperature Adjustment] in se-quence.

The Temperature Adjustment Screen will be displayed.



5 Press the key of the item to be adjusted.




9 Check that the glue applied on the body set is in proper condition.

10 If any adjustment is required, press [Exit Print Mode] to return to the Temperature Adjustment Screen.






11.9.8 [07 Perfect Binder Adjustment] - [08 Sub Compile CD Width Adj.]

Change the adjustment width if output sheets cannot be aligned in sub compile section using Perfect Binder

PB-503. The sizes referred in this section are those of body sets corresponding to cover sizes.


NOTICE Use this adjustment if the former half of body pages is misaligned when making more than one perfect-boundbook. If misalignment appears on the latter half of body pages, use [07 Perfect Binder Adjustment] - [09Clamp CD Width Adjustment].






11.9


2 Press [03 Finisher Adjustment], [07 Perfect Binder Adjustment], and [08 Sub Compile CD Width Adj.] insequence.

The Sub Compile CD Width Adjustment Screen will be displayed.







9 Check that the horizontal scanning direction is equal on every page of the body set.

10 If it is not equal on all pages, proceed to the next step.

If unequalness appears on the latter half of body pages while the former half shows equalness, use [07Perfect Binder Adjustment] - [09 Clamp CD Width Adjustment].

If any adjustment is required, press [Exit Print Mode] to return to the Sub Compile CD Width AdjustmentScreen.








11.9.9 [07 Perfect Binder Adjustment] - [09 Clamp CD Width Adjustment]

Change the adjustment width in crosswise direction if output sheets show misalignment in a body set usingPerfect Binder PB-503. The sizes referred in this section are those of body sets corresponding to cover siz-es.


NOTICE Use this adjustment if body pages are misaligned in horizontal scanning direction or on the latter half of body

pages, when making more than one perfect-bound book. If misalignment appears on the former half of bodypages, use [07 Perfect Binder Adjustment] - [08 Sub Compile CD Width Adjustment].







2 Press [03 Finisher Adjustment], [07 Perfect Binder Adjustment], and [09 Clamp CD Width Adjustment]in sequence.

The Clamp CD Width Adjustment Screen will be displayed.







9 Check that the horizontal scanning direction is equal on every page of the body set.

If unequalness appears on the latter half of body pages while the former half shows equalness, proceedto the next step.

If it is not equal on all pages, use [07 Perfect Binder Adjustment] - [08 Sub Compile CD Width Adjust-ment].

10 If any adjustment is required, press [Exit Print Mode] to return to the Clamp CD Width AdjustmentScreen.



% Press [Set] to change the current data.% Adjustment Range: -20 (Wide) to +20 (Narrow) (1 step = 0.1 mm)








11.9

11.9.10 [07 Perfect Binder Adjustment] - [10 Cover Up/Down CD Width Adj.]

Change the adjustment width in matching body sets and covers in order to adjust their positions in crosswisedirection using Perfect Binder PB-503.

Objects of Adjustment: Perfect Binder Tray, Except PB Tray


2 Press [03 Finisher Adjustment], [07 Perfect Binder Adjustment], and [10 Cover Up/Down CD Width Adj.]in sequence.

The Cover Up/Down CD Width Adjustment Screen will be displayed.



5 Select either [Perfect Binder Tray] or [Except PB Tray] for the tray loaded with covers.




9 Check that the horizontal scanning position of body set matches with that of the cover.

10 If any adjustment is required, press [Exit Print Mode] to return to the Cover Up/Down CD Width Adjust-ment Screen.


% First enter the numeric value, then use [+/-] to specify the value to be positive or negative.% Press [Set] to change the current data.









11.9.11 [07 Perfect Binder Adjustment] - [11 Clamp FD Position Adj.]

Change the adjustment width in paper feed direction if body pages show misalignment using Perfect BinderPB-503. The sizes referred in this section are those of body sets corresponding to cover sizes.

Objects of Adjustment: Full Area, A4 v, B5 v, A5 w / v, 8.5 e 11 v, 5.5 e 8.5 v, 16K v, Custom (220-379 mm),Custom (148-219 mm)

NOTICE



2 Press [03 Finisher Adjustment], [07 Perfect Binder Adjustment], and [11 Clamp FD Position Adj.] in se-quence.

The Clamp FD Position Adjustment Screen will be displayed.







9 Check that the vertical scanning direction is equal on every page of the body set.

10 If any adjustment is required, press [Exit Print Mode] to return to the Clamp FD Position AdjustmentScreen.










[03 Finisher Adjustment] (Finisher FS-531/Finisher FS-612)11


11.10

11.10 [03 Finisher Adjustment] (Finisher FS-531/Finisher FS-612)

11.10.1 [01 Saddle Stitcher Stopper] (Finisher FS-612 only)

Adjust the dislocation of staple positions in widthwise direction of paper using Fold & Staple mode operatedby Finisher FS-612.

Objects of Adjustment: Full Area, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w,8.125 e 13.25 w, 8.5 e 13 w, 8.25 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K w, Custom (380-460 mm), Custom(220-379 mm)


2 Press [03 Finisher Adjustment] and [01 Saddle Stitcher Stopper] in sequence.


4Press [Print Mode].



7 Check the misalignment of the center fold and the position of staples on the output sheet.


8 If any adjustment is required, press [Exit Print Mode] to return to the Fold & Staple Stopper AdjustmentScreen.




% Adjustment Range: -128 (Bottom) to +127 (Top) (1 step = 0.1 mm)

% Enter a negative value for (a), or a positive value for (b).





11.10 [03 Finisher Adjustment] (Finisher FS-531/Finisher FS-612) 11

11 Press [Return] to restore the Finisher Adjustment Menu Screen.

11.10.2 [612 Half-Fold Stopper Adj.] (Finisher FS-612 only)

Adjust the misalignment in edges of output sheets for each paper size if needed, when using FinisherFS-612.

Objects of Adjustment: Full Area, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w,

8.125 e 13.25 w, 8.5 e 13 w, 8.25 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K w, Custom (380-460 mm), Custom (220-379 mm)


2 Press [03 Finisher Adjustment] and [02 Half-Fold Stopper Adj.] in sequence.

The Half-Fold Stopper Adjustment Screen will be displayed.





7 Check the misalignment (a) of the edges of output sheet.


8 If any adjustment is required, press [Exit Print Mode] to return to the Half-Fold Stopper AdjustmentScreen.





% If misalignment appears as shown above, enter a negative value.







11.10

11.10.3 [03 Punch Adjustment] - [01 Vertical Position Adj.]

Adjust the misalignment in center positions of paper and punch holes for each paper size if needed, whenusing Punch Kit PK-512 mounted on Finisher FS-531 or Finisher FS-612.

Objects of Adjustment: Full Area, A3 w, B4 w, A4 w / v, B5 w / v, A5 w / v, 11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w,8.5 e 11 w / v, 5.5 e 8.5 w / v, 8.125 e 13.25 w, 8.5 e 13 w, 8.25 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K w / v, 9 e 11 v


2 Press [03 Finisher Adjustment], [03 Punch Adjustment], and [01 Vertical Position Adj.] in sequence.

The Vertical Position Adjustment Screen will be displayed.





7 Measure the difference (a) between the center line of output sheet to the center position of punch holes.


8 If any adjustment is required, press [Exit Print Mode] to return to the Vertical Position AdjustmentScreen.




% Adjustment Range: -50 (Backward) to +50 (Forward) (1 step = 0.1 mm)


[1] Center of sheet [2] Center position of punch holes





11 Press [Return] to restore the Punch Adjustment Menu Screen.

11.10.4 [03 Punch Adjustment] - [02 Horizontal Position Adj.]

Adjust the distance from the edge of output sheet to the center of punch holes if needed, when using PunchKit PK-512 mounted on Finisher FS-531 or Finisher FS-612.

Objects of Adjustment: PI Tray, Main Body Tray


2 Press [03 Finisher Adjustment], [03 Punch Adjustment], and [02 Horizontal Position Adj.] in sequence.

The Horizontal Position Adjustment Screen will be displayed.

3 Select either [PI Tray] or [Main Body Tray].


5 Select the tray loaded with paper.


7 Measure the distance (a) from the edge of the output sheet to the center of punch holes.

Allowance: a = 10.5 +/- 5.0 mm

8 If any adjustment is required, press [Exit Print Mode] to return to the Horizontal Position AdjustmentScreen.










11.10


11.10.5 [03 Punch Adjustment] - [03 Registration Adjustment]

Adjust the registration amount if punch holes are positioned obliquely when using Punch Kit PK-512 mount-ed on Finisher FS-531 or Finisher FS-612.

Objects of Adjustment: Main Body/Reverse, Main Body/ADU, PI 1 Tray, PI 2 Tray


2 Press [03 Finisher Adjustment], [03 Punch Adjustment], and [03 Registration Adjustment] in sequence.

The Registration Adjustment Screen will be displayed.



5 Select the tray loaded with paper.


7 Check if the punch holes are skew on the output sheet.

8 If any adjustment is required, press [Exit Print Mode] to return to the Registration Adjustment Screen.




% Adjustment Range: -20 to +20 (1 step = 0.8 mm)







11.10.6 [03 Punch Adjustment] - [04 Paper Edge Detect Sensor]

Detect the edge of paper to be a reference point in punching operation using Punch Kit PK-512 mounted onFinisher FS-531 or Finisher FS-612.


2 Press [03 Finisher Adjustment], [03 Punch Adjustment], and [04 Paper Edge Detect Sensor] in se-quence.

3 Press [Start] on the control panel.


11.10.7 [04 Tri-Fold Adjustment]

Adjust the tri-folded positions for each paper size if needed, when Punch Kit PK-512 is mounted on FinisherFS-531 or Finisher FS-612.

Objects of Adjustment: Full Area, A4 w, 8.5 e 11 w, 16K w


2 Press [04 Finisher Adjustment] and [04 Tri-Fold Adjustment] in sequence.

The Tri-Fold Adjustment Screen will be displayed.

3 Select the size to be adjusted.







11.10


7 Check the folding positions on the output sheet.

Allowance: a = 93 +/- 2 mm or less for A4 w, a = 86.4 +/- 2 mm or less for 8.5 e 11 w

8 If any adjustment is required, press [Exit Print Mode] to return to the Tri-Fold Adjustment Screen.

9Use the touch panel keypad or control panel keypad to enter the setting data.



% Adjustment Range: -128 (Leftward) to +127 (Rightward) (1 step = 0.1 mm)

% Enter a negative value to move the folding position leftward (a), or a positive value to move it right-ward (b).



11.10.8 [05 2 Pos. Staple Pitch Adj.]

Adjust the staple pitch in Fold & Staple and Staple modes, when Punch Kit PK-512 is mounted on FinisherFS-612 or Finisher FS-511.

Objects of Adjustment: Fold & Staple, Staple


2 Press [03 Finisher Adjustment] and [05 2 Pos. Staple Pitch Adj.] in sequence.

3 Select either [Fold & Staple] or [Staple].








7 Check the amount of staple pitch.

8 If any adjustment is required, press [Exit Print Mode] to return to the 2 Position Staple Pitch AdjustmentScreen.




% Adjustment Range: +128 to +160 (1 step = 1 mm)



11.10.9 [06 Post Inserter Tray Size]

Adjust the tray size of post inserter if needed, when using Post Inserter PI-502 mounted on FinisherFS-531 or Finisher FS-612.

Objects of Adjustment: Full Area, A4 w, 8.5 e 11 w


2 Press [03 Finisher Adjustment] and [06 Post Inserter Tray Size] in sequence.

3 Use [Next] and [Previous] to select either PI 1 Tray or PI 2 Tray .

4 Load the specified paper size into the post inserter tray to be adjusted, then press the Start/Stop but-

ton of the post inserter.






11.10

11.10.10 [07 Output Quantity Limit]

Specify the limit of output quantity delivered to the tray when using Finisher FS-531 or Finisher FS-612.

Objects of Adjustment: Staple 64-80 g/m2, Staple 81-105 g/m2, Staple 106-209 g/m2, Fold & Staple 64-80g/m2, Fold & Staple 81-105 g/m2, Half-Fold 64-105 g/m2, Tri-Fold 64-80 g/m2

(Only four Staple options are available for Finisher FS-531.)


2 Press [04 Finisher Adjustment] and [07 Output Quantity Limit] in sequence.

The Output Quantity Limit Screen is displayed.

3 Press the desired item key to be specified with the limit of output quantity.



% Press [Set] to change the current data.% Adjustment Range: Staple 64-80 g/m2, Staple 81-105 g/m2: +2 to +50 (1 step = 1 sheet), Staple 106-

220 g/m2: 0, +2 to +20 (1 step = 1 sheet), Fold & Staple 64-80 g/m2, Fold & Staple 81-105 g/m2: +2to +20 (1 step = 1 sheet), Half-Fold 64-105 g/m2, Tri-Fold 64-80 g/m2: +1 to +3 (1 step = 1 sheet)






11.10.11 [08 Curl Adjustment]

The [08 Curl Adjustment] key is displayed on the Finisher Adjustment Menu Screen accessed from the Ad- justment Menu Screen, when the machine is equipped with Finisher FS-531 or Finisher FS-612 without Re-

lay Unit RU-508 mounted.

Set the curl adjustment to be made in the decurling section of the main body.


2 Press [04 Finisher Adjustment] and [08 Curl Adjustment] in sequence.


3 Select the desired key from [+0] to [+2] for each adjustment item classified by output mode.

% Selections for [Simplex Tri-Fold 64-80 g/m2 Inside Print] and [Simplex Tri-Fold 81-105 g/m2 InsidePrint] are unavailable for Finisher FS-531.

% Press [Unit Change] to switch the unit of paper weight displayed on the screen.



In either case, the Finisher Adjustment Menu Screen will be restored.



[04 Density Balance Adjustment]11


11.11

11.11 [04 Density Balance Adjustment]

11.11.1 [01 Density Balance Chart Output]

There are two methods of density balance adjustment in crosswise direction.

- Create colorimetric data using Spectrophotometer i1-iSis XL or i1-PRO, then register the data on themachine.

- Register the density balance data manually.

The colorimetric data can be created and measured by the following procedure.

- Output the density balance chart from the machine.

- Load the density balance chart into the spectrophotometer.

- Create colorimetric data using the data loaded into the spectrophotometer.

- Register the colorimetric data on the machine using a USB flash drive.

This section describes how to output the density balance chart to be loaded into the spectrophotometer.

Setting items in Density Balance Chart Output

- Two spectrophotometers are provided; Spectrophotometer i1-iSis XL and Spectrophotometer i1-Pro.Select the desired one.

- Two types of chart, Type 1 (simple checking chart) and Type 2 (detailed checking chart), are provided

for each spectrophotometer. Select the desired one.- Output a chart individually for each of predefined screen types. [Stochastic], however, cannot be se-

lected to output a chart.

d ReferenceSpecify whether to allow or restrict the use of four screens individually in the User Setting. Dot 1, one of the

four screens, cannot be restricted.

The dot screen and line screen are provided with five types for each, and one for each can be specified in the

Administrator Setting.




11.11 [04 Density Balance Adjustment] 11


2 Press [04 Density Balance Adjustment] and [01 Density Balance Chart Output] in sequence.

3 Select the desired spectrophotometer and type of chart to be used.

% To use Spectrophotometer i1-iSis XL, select [Type 1] or [Type 2] provided under "Measure Spectro-photometer-1 (i1-iSis XL)".

% To use Spectrophotometer i1-Pro, select [Type 1] or [Type 2] provided under "Measure Spectropho-tometer-2 (i1-Pro)".



5 Select the screen type.

% Press [Quality Adj.] to display the Quality Adjustment Screen.

% Press [)] on the right side of [Screen] to display the desired screen type. Or, press [Screen] to dis-play the Screen Setting Screen, then select the desired screen type. Press [OK] on the Screen Set-ting Screen, if displayed.

% Press [Close] on the Quality Adjustment Screen.

6 Select a paper size for the chart.

% Load 12 e 18 w, SRA3 w, 11 e 17 w, or A3 w paper in a tray, then select that tray.


The machine will output a sheet of chart with [Type 1] of "Measure Spectrophotometer-1 (i1-iSis XL)"selected in step 3, or two sheets of chart with [Type 2] selected.

For "Measure Spectrophotometer-2 (i1-Pro)," one sheet of chart will be output with either of [Type 1]and [Type 2] selected.

8 Press [Exit Print Mode]. The Density Balance Chart Output Screen will be restored

9 Press [Return] to restore the Density Balance Adjustment Menu Screen.

10 Press [02 Density Balance Data Reg/Del] to display the Density Balance Adjustment Data Register/De-lete Screen.

NOTICE Proceed to the actions described on page 11-78 .





11.11

11.11.2 [02 Density Balance Data Reg/Del]

There are two methods of density balance adjustment in crosswise direction.

- Create colorimetric data using Spectrophotometer i1-iSis XL or i1-PRO, then register the data on themachine.

- Register the density balance data manually.

This section describes the following 5 procedures:

- Registering colorimetric data measured with spectrophotometer- Editing and registering existing density balance data manually

- Registering new density balance data manually

- Duplicating/Deleting density balance data

- Enabling/Disabling density balance data

Registering colorimetric data measured with spectrophotometer

To create the colorimetric data using spectrophotometer:

- Prepare Spectrophotometer i1-iSis XL or i1-Pro, a PC connected with the spectrophotometer, and aUSB flash drive.

- Use the ProfileMaker Measure Tool.

- Please refer to the user's guide of the spectrophotometer for usage.- A script file is required to operate the Spectrophotometer i1-iSis XL via PC. Contact your service rep-

resentative, if desired.

To save the colorimetric data:

- When the measurement in spectrophotometer is completed, click [Close] on the computer screen todisplay another window. Be sure to click [Export Lab...] in that window to save the file. Clicking [File] inthe tool bar also allows you to save the file with the desired name specified, however, the machine can-not recognize the data saved in this way.

- Specify the file name of the colorimetric data using the following texts up to 40 characters. [(Up to 14characters of identifying information printed on the chart)_(up to 21 characters of user-customized in-formation).txt] When the colorimetric data is registered, (up to 21 characters of user-customized infor-mation) will be displayed as Adj. Data Profile Name.

- To save the colorimetric data on a USB flash drive, set the path [\C7000\ADJUST_DATA] to the drive,

and save the data in the lowest directory.

- With [Type 2] selected for "Measure Spectrophotometer-1 (i1-iSis XL)", two sheets of chart will be out-put. After loading the first chart, a message will appear to prompt you to load the second chart; how-ever, be sure to save the colorimetric data of the first chart before loading the second chart. Use thesame user-customized information for the first and second charts to enter the file name.

To register the colorimetric data on the machine:

- Up to 10 colorimetric data can be registered on the machine. No more than 10 pieces of data can beregistered, however, the data can be overwritten or synthesized.

- When overwritten, the existing data (former data) will be replaced by newly created colorimetric data(new data).

- When synthesized, the new data will be merged with the former data to be registered. To synthesizedata, the new data and former data should have the same screen type, paper type, and weight. You

can adjust the percentages of the new data and former data to be synthesized. Please contact yourservice representative.





1 Load the density balance chart that has been output by following the procedure in 8.10.1 [01 Density

Balance Chart Output], in order to create the measured colorimetric data.

2 Specify the desired name to the colorimetric data.

% Enter [(Up to 14 characters of identifying information printed on the chart)_(up to 21 characters ofuser-customized information).txt] as a file name.

3 Set the path [\C7000\ADJUST_DATA] to a USB flash drive, and save the measured data in the lowestdirectory.

NOTICE The colorimetric data cannot be recognized on the machine with any path other than that specified. Besure to set the designated path to save the data. The machine will output two sheets of chart with [Type2] of "Measure Spectrophotometer-1 (i1-iSis XL)" selected. Load the two sheets of chart in succession,then save those data together. Use the same user-customized information for the first and second

charts to enter the file name.

4 Press [02 Density Balance Data Reg/Del] on the Density Balance Adjustment Menu Screen to displaythe Density Balance Adjustment Data Register/Delete Screen.





11.11

5 Select the desired number of row from the 10 on the list.

NOTICE No more than 10 pieces of data can be registered, however, the data can be overwritten. If desired,select the data to be overwritten.

NOTICE The colorimetric data can be synthesized and registered. To synthesize data, select the row having thesame screen type, paper type, and weight.

6 Press [Measured data load].

A dialog appears to prompt you to connect the USB flash drive.

7 Connect the USB flash drive stored with the measured data intothe USB port of the machine.

% This port is available for low-power devices only. Pleaseprovide an external supply of power for devices that requirea large amount of power.

8 Press [OK].

The file name of the measured data will be displayed on the Density Balance Adjustment Data Regis-ter/Delete Screen.

9 Select the file name of the data to be registered, then press [OK].

With a row of the existing data selected in step 5, a confirmation dialog will be displayed.

% To replace the selected data by the new data, press [Overwrite].

% To synthesize the selected data with the new data, press [Combination]. If any discrepancy occursin screen type, paper type, or weight, [Combination] will appear grayed out.

% To stop overwriting or synthesizing the data, press [Cancel].The Density Balance Adjustment Data Register/Delete Screen will be restored, showing (up to 21 char-acters of user-customized information) specified in step 2 as [Adj. Data Profile Name].

% You can change the Adj. Data Profile Name, if desired. Press [Change Name] to display the ChangeProfile Name Screen. Enter the desired profile name, then press [OK].


Editing and registering existing density balance data manually

Follow the procedure below to edit and register the existing density balance data manually.

Adjustment points: 9 points in [All e 9 points], 512 points in [16 e 32 points]

Adjustment Range: -128 to +127

- For manual setting of the density balance adjustment, the following two modes, [All e 9 points] and [16e 32 points], are provided.

- Use [All e 9 points] to enter the density value into 9 points out of 32 points dividing the crosswise direc-tion, so that the machine automatically determines the density value in surrounding area.

- Use [16 e 32 points] to manually enter the density value into a total of 512 points; 32 points in crosswisedirection, and 16 points in feeding direction.

- This setting can be made individually for each of predefined screen types. The five screen types pro-vided to [Stochastic] are [ED 1], [ED 2], [ED 3], [FM 1], and [FM 2], all of which cannot be used for anyscreen.

d ReferenceSpecify whether to allow or restrict the use of the four screens individually in the User Setting. Dot 1, one of

the four screens, cannot be restricted.











11.11


2 Press [04 Density Balance Adjustment] and [02 Density Balance Data Reg/Del] in sequence.

The Density Balance Adjustment Data Register/Delete Screen will be displayed.

3 Select the row of the existing data to be edited.

4 Press [Manual Setting].

The Density Adjustment Manual Setting Screen will be displayed.

5 Select a color to be adjusted from [Yellow], [Magenta], [Cyan], and [Black].

6 Select either [All e 9 points] or [16 e 32 points].

7 Select the screen type on which the adjusted density balance should be reflected.

% Press [Screen] to display the Screen Setting Screen.

% Select the desired key.

% Press [OK].

NOTICE The screen type cannot be changed if the data to be edited is the colorimetric data measured with spectrophotometer. [Screen] will appear grayed out to show inactivity.

8 For [All e 9 points] selected in step 6, enter the desired adjustment value in the following 9 points takenout from 01 to 32 on the X-axis: [01], [01], [09], [13], [17], [21], [25], [29], [32].

For [16 e 32 points] selected in step 6, enter the adjustment value into your desired points selected froma total of 512 points; 32 points in crosswise direction, and 16 points in feeding direction.

% Use [*] and [)] as needed to display the desired point on the X-axis.

% Pressing the top row of the X-axis selects all the column and allows you to enter the same valuecollectively.

% Use the touch panel keypad to enter the desired value, then use [+/-] to specify the value to be pos-itive or negative. Press [Clear] to set the value at 0.

% Press [Set].

9 Repeat steps 5 to 8 to adjust the density balance for all the desired colors.

% To clear the adjustment data, press [Clear Adj. Data]. All the adjustment values will return to 0.

NOTICE Pressing [Clear Adj. Data] clears not only the adjustment values specified for the selected color, but alsothose specified for any other colors. Please be careful with the use of this key.



11 Select the paper size.



The machine will output a chart with its density balance adjusted.

13 Press [Exit Print Mode] to return to the Density Balance Manual Setting Screen.

14 Check the chart output in step 12, then repeat steps 5 to 13 till the desired density balance is obtained.

15 When the adjustment is completed, press [OK] on the Density Balance Manual Setting Screen.

NOTICE Without [OK] pressed after output of the chart, the colorimetric data will not be changed and registered.Be sure to press [OK].

The Density Balance Adjustment Data Register/Delete Screen will be restored.





16 To change the profile name, press [Change Name].

The Change Profile Name Screen will be displayed.

% Enter the desired profile name, then press [OK].


Registering new density balance data manually

Follow the procedure below to register the new density balance data manually.

Adjustment points: 9 points in [All e 9 points], 512 points in [16 e 32 points].

Adjustment Range: -128 to +127

- For manual setting of the density balance adjustment, the following two modes, [All e 9 points] and[16 x 32 points], are provided.

- Use [All e 9 points] to enter the density value into 9 points out of 32 points dividing the crosswise direc-tion, so that the machine automatically determines the density value in surrounding area.

- Use [16 e 32 points] to manually enter the adjustment data into a total of 512 points; 32 points in cross-wise direction, and 16 points in feeding direction.

- This setting can be made individually for each of predefined screen types. The five screen types pro-

vided to [Stochastic] are [ED 1], [ED 2], [ED 3], [FM 1], and [FM 2], all of which cannot be used for anyscreen.

d ReferenceSpecify whether to allow or restrict the use of the four screens individually in the User Setting. Dot 1, one of

the four screens, cannot be restricted.







11.11




3 Select the desired number of row from the list to register new data.

NOTICE No more than 10 pieces of data can be registered, however, the data can be overwritten.

4 Press [Manual Setting].

The Density Adjustment Manual Setting Screen will be displayed.

With the existing data selected in step 3, the registered density balance adjustment data will be dis-played.

5 Select the screen type on which the adjusted density balance should be reflected.

% Press [Screen] to display the Screen Setting Screen.

% Select the desired key.% Press [OK].







9 Check the output chart.


11 Select a color to be adjusted from [Yellow], [Magenta], [Cyan], and [Black].

12 Select either [All e 9 points] or [16 e 32 points].





13 For [All e 9 points] selected in step 12, enter the desired adjustment value in the following 9 points takenout from 01 to 32 on the X-axis: [01], [05], [09], [13], [17], [21], [25], [29], [32].

For [16 e 32 points] selected in step 12, enter the adjustment value into your desired points selectedfrom a total of 512 points; 32 points in crosswise direction, and 16 points in feeding direction.

% Use [*] and [)] as needed to display the desired point on the X-axis.

% Pressing the top row of the X-axis selects all the column and allows you to enter the same valuecollectively.

% Use the touch panel keypad to enter the desired value, then use [+/-] to specify the value to be pos-itive or negative. Press [Clear] to set the value at 0.

% Press [Set].


To clear the adjustment data, press [Clear Adj. Data]. All the adjustment values will return to 0.











% To clear the adjustment data, press [Clear Adj. Data]. All the adjustment values will return to 0.


21 When the adjustment is completed, press [OK] on the Density Balance Manual Setting Screen.

NOTICE Without a chart output after making an adjustment, pressing [OK] on the Density Adjustment ManualSetting Screen will not function for the data to be changed and registered. Be sure to output a chartafter making an adjustment, then press [OK].

The Density Balance Adjustment Data Register/Delete Screen will be restored, with [NEW PROFILE]displayed in the [Adj. Data Profile Name] field.

22 Press [Change Name].The Change Profile Name Screen will be displayed.

% Enter the desired profile name, then press [OK].






11.11

Duplicating/Deleting density balance data

Follow the procedure below to duplicate or delete the density balance data.

- Duplication is unavailable if 10 pieces of adjustment data has already been registered. Delete one fromthe list, if desired.




3 Select the desired number of row from the 10 on the list.

4 Press [Delete] to delete the adjustment data selected in step 3, or press [Copy] to duplicate it.

% Pressing [Delete] will display a confirmation dialog on the screen. Press [Yes]. The restored screenshows that the selected data is deleted from the list.

% The duplicated data can be modified manually. See page 11-83 for details.






Enabling/Disabling density balance data

Follow the procedure below to enable or disable the density balance data.

- Setting [Enable] is allowed for only one among multiple pieces of adjustment data specified for thesame screen type, paper type, and weight. The data set to [Enable] will be effective only when that adjusted screen type is used for output.

- The density balance data being grayed out on the list do not function even if [Enable] is selected. Thisis because the screen type of grayed-out data is not the same as that specified for the machine. If you

select the same screen type as that displayed on the list, the grayed-out data will restore the normaldisplay and allow [Enable] to function normally.




3 Press either [Enable] or [Disable] in the right side area of the screen.

If multiple pieces of adjustment data are registered for the same screen type, paper type, and weight,

selecting [Enable] for the desired one will automatically set the others to [Disable].




[05 Color Density]11


11.12

11.12 [05 Color Density]

The gamma correction is usually operated by an IDC sensor internally mounted on the machine. This machinealso offers the method using a density sensor attached to the optional Relay Unit RU-509 to scan chartsoutput for the gamma correction. In this method, the gamma correction can properly reflect the status of the2nd transfer unit and fusing unit, and also the characteristics of paper, as the sensor scans the images actu-ally output for the correction.

The gamma correction using the sensor of Relay Unit RU-509 provides the two methods: automatic adjust-

ment and manual adjustment.

The gamma correction requires the colorimetric data to be the base of correction, in addition to the scannedcharts to be compared with them.

The following two types of colorimetric data are provided:

- Colorimetric data provided as factory default

- Custom colorimetric data measured with the desired paper and screen types

The custom colorimetric data should be precomposed using the Spectrophotometer i1-iSis XL and regis-tered into the machine by creating a paper category.

This section describes how to select the gamma correction sensor, to make automatic/manual adjustmentusing the sensor of Relay Unit RU-509, and to create the paper category.

Select the colorimetric data to be the base of correction while making the paper setting for each tray.

11.12.1 [01 Color Density Control]

Select either an internal IDC sensor or the density sensor attached to Relay Unit RU-509 for the gamma cor-rection.

- While operating the color density control, the machine outputs several sheets of chart to be scannedwith the density sensor of Relay Unit RU-509. In automatic adjustment, the charts will be delivered tothe secondary (sub) tray in order to separate them from normal output jobs. In manual adjustment, theywill be delivered to the tray selected in the Output Setting.

- The number of output sheets varies depending on the paper size.

The number of sheets output as charts are included in the print count.

If you use the density sensor attached to Relay Unit RU-509 for the gamma correction (referred to as thecolor density control hereafter), select either automatic or manual mode to operate it.

For the automatic adjustment, the following settings are required:

- Adjustment Level: Specify the level of the change between before and after the adjustment.

- Adjustment Interval: Set the timing for the adjustment.

- [Adjustment While Job Running]: Specify whether to wait for completion of a job or to make the adjust-ment during a job in progress, when the output count specified as Adjustment Interval is reached.

Group Details Output sheetcount

Large sizes Paper sizes of 271.0 mm or more in width (Y) 3 sheets

Medium sizes Paper sizes of 210 mm to 270.9 mm in width (Y) 4 sheets

Small sizes Paper sizes of 176 mm to 209.9 mm in width (Y) 6 sheets

Irregular siz-es

Paper sizes of 175.9 mm or less in width (Y), 168 mm or less in length(X)

Not correctedas being exempt




11.12 [05 Color Density] 11


2 Press [05 Color Density Control] and [01 Color Density Control] in sequence.

The Color Density Control Screen will be displayed.

3 Select either [Yes] or [No] for [Use Color Density Control].

% Select [Yes] to make the Color Density Control adjustment. Select [No] to operate the gamma cor-rection using the IDC sensor internally mounted on the machine.

% If you select [Yes], be sure to perform Color Density Manual Control before making any job opera-tion.

4 Select either [ON] or [OFF] for [Automatic Adjustment].

% Select [ON] to operate the color density control automatically, or select [OFF] to operate it manually.

% With [OFF] specified by [Color Density] in Paper Setting, the adjustment will not be made even if[ON] is selected for [Automatic Adjustment]. Select either [Default Adj. Data] or [Paper Category] for[Color Density] in Paper Setting.

5 For the automatic adjustment selected in step 4, specify the adjustment level using [Weak] and [Strong]provided for [Adjustment Level].

% Specifying [1], for example, eases a drastic change due to the adjustment, by adopting the correc-tion curve added with 10% change, in comparison to the difference between the data scanned fromcharts and the base data.

6 For the automatic adjustment selected in step 4, check the interval of the adjustment displayed on theright side of [Adjustment Interval], then change it as needed.

% To change the interval, press [Change] to display the Change Adjustment Interval Screen, then usethe touch panel keypad to enter the desired value. Available range is from 100 to 99999. When com-

pleted, press [OK].





11.12

7 For the automatic adjustment selected in step 4, select either [Yes] or [No] for [Adjustment While JobRunning].

% Select [Yes] to make the adjustment during a job operation, or select [No] to wait. Selecting [No] willnot make the adjustment even when specified interval is past, but make it before the next job starts.

8 Press [OK] to restore the Color Density Control Menu Screen.

11.12.2 [02 Color Density Manual Control]

This section describes how to operate the gamma correction manually (referred to as the color density man-ual control hereafter), using the sensor attached to the optional Relay Unit RU-509.

- The Color Density Manual Control allows you to make the adjustment individually for each of predefinedscreen types. [Auto] is unavailable for the adjustment.

- Select the desired paper type in the procedure of manual adjustment.

- Select either default colorimetric data or custom colorimetric data registered by creating a paper cate-gory, in order to use them as the base data in the adjustment.

- The number of sheets output as charts are included in the print count.

- With [Yes] specified for Use Color Density Control, this manual adjustment is requisite and should beperformed before any job operation.






2 Press [05 Color Density Control] and [02 Color Density Manual Control] in sequence.

The Color Density Manual Control Screen will be displayed.



NOTICE The list displayed on the Color Density Manual Control Screen is the history of manual adjustment. Toclear the history, select the desired row from the list, then press [Delete]. Do not select the row on thelist except when deleting it. Otherwise, the Print Mode Screen cannot be displayed.

Up to 15 records of the history can be registered. If all 15 entries are already made, the oldest entry willbe overwritten. If there is an entry with the same paper and screen types, that entry will be overwritten.





11.12





5 Select the tray to output the charts.% Press [Output Setting] to display the Output Setting Screen.

% Select the desired output tray key, then press [OK].

6 Display the Change Individual Set Screen.

% Press [Paper Setting] on the Print Mode Screen to display the Paper Setting Screen, then press[Change Set] to display the Change Individual Set Screen.

7 Select an output paper type.

% Press [Paper Type] to select the desired paper type.

8 Select colorimetric data to be the base of the adjustment.

% Press [Color Density].% Select [Default Adj. Data] to use the data provided as factory default.

% To use custom colorimetric data, press [Paper Category] to display the Paper Category Screen, thenselect the desired paper category. When completed, press [OK].

9 Return to the Print Mode Screen.

% Press [OK] on the Change Individual Set Screen to return to the Paper Setting Screen.

% Press [Close] on the Paper Setting Screen to return to the Print Mode Screen.


The charts required for the adjustment will be output to the tray selected in step 5.

11 Press [Exit Print Mode]. The Color Density Manual Control Screen will be restored.

12 Press [Return] to restore the Color Density Control Menu Screen.

11.12.3 [ 03 Register Paper Category]

As the colorimetric data to be the base of gamma correction, the machine can be provided with the customdata measured with the desired paper and screen types, in addition to the data provided as factory default.

The custom colorimetric data should be precomposed using the Spectrophotometer i1-iSis XL or i1-Pro andregistered into the machine.

Creating the custom colorimetric data

This section describes how to create the custom colorimetric data.

- Output charts to create the custom colorimetric data. The number of output sheets varies dependingon the paper size.

Group Details Output sheetcount

Large sizes Paper sizes of 271.0 mm or more in width (Y) 3 sheets

Medium sizes Paper sizes of 210 mm to 270.9 mm in width (Y) 4 sheets

Small sizes Paper sizes of 176 mm to 209.9 mm in width (Y) 6 sheets

Irregular siz-es

Paper sizes of 175.9 mm or less in width (Y), or 168 mm or less inlength (X)

Not correctedas being exempt





- The number of sheets output as charts are included in the print count.

- Prepare Spectrophotometer i1-iSis XL or i1-Pro, a PC connected with the spectrophotometer, and aUSB flash drive.

- Use the ProfileMaker Measure Tool.

- A script file is required to operate the spectrophotometer via PC. Contact your service representative,if desired.

To save the colorimetric data:- Please refer to the user's guide of the spectrophotometer for usage.

- When using the Spectrophotometer i1-iSis XL to create the colorimetric data, cut off the left edge of thechart leaving the edge positioning line on the yellow side of the chart before scanning it.

- Save the colorimetric data in the lowest level directory, setting the path [\C7000\ADJUST_DATA] to theUSB flash drive. The number of files to be saved is the same as the number of output sheets. The filename is 4-digit number printed on the chart (2-digit paper category number + 1-digit total page count+ 1-digit page number).

- When the measurement in spectrophotometer is completed, click [Close] on the computer screen todisplay another window. Be sure to click [Export Lab...] in that window to save the file. Clicking [File] inthe tool bar also allows you to save the file with the desired name specified, however, the machine can-not recognize the data saved in this way.

- Multiple sheets of chart will be output. After loading the first chart, a message will appear to prompt youto load the second chart; however, be sure to save the colorimetric data for every chart before loadingthe next chart.





11.12


2 Press [05 Color Density Control] and [03 Register Paper Category] in sequence.

The Register Paper Category Screen will be displayed.

3 Select the desired row on the paper category list, then press [Print Mode].

NOTICE If you select a row already registered with data, it will be overwritten with the colorimetric data.

The Input Paper Category Name Screen will be displayed.

4 Enter the desired name, then press [OK]










6 Select the tray to output the charts.% Press [Output Setting] to display the Output Setting Screen.

% Select the desired output tray key, then press [OK].


% Select the desired paper tray key on the Print Mode Screen.


% The machine will output the charts of the size selected in step 7.

9 Press [Exit Print Mode]. The Register Paper Category Screen will be restored.

The Register Paper Category Screen shows the name entered in step 4, and is ready to have the color-

imetric data of that name loaded.

10 Scan multiple sheets of output charts with Spectrophotometer i1-iSis XL or i1-Pro to create the color-imetric data.

11 Set the path [\C7000\ADJUST_DATA] to a USB flash drive, and save the measured data in the lowestdirectory.

NOTICE The measured data cannot be saved with any path other than that specified. Be sure to set the designated path to save the data. Also, be sure to save all the data created from multiple charts together.

12 Connect the USB flash drive stored with the measured data intothe USB port of the machine.

13 Press [Measured data load] on the Register Paper Category Screen.

The Colored Data File Select Screen will be displayed, which shows multiple colorimetric data saved inthe USB flash drive.

14 Select a file from the list, then press [OK].

The machine will start loading all the related files.

NOTICE If the data cannot be loaded, check that the path is properly set to the USB flash drive. If you fail to saveall the data created from the charts, an error screen will be displayed. Check the files to recover.

15 Press [OK] on the Colored Data File Select Screen. The Register Paper Category Screen will be re-stored.

16 Press [Return] to restore the Color Density Control Menu Screen.





11.12

Deleting the custom colorimetric data

This section describes how to delete the custom colorimetric data.


2 Press [05 Color Density Control] and [03 Register Paper Category] in sequence.

The Register Paper Category Screen will be displayed.

3 Select the paper category name to be deleted from the list, then press [Delete].

A dialog will pop up on the screen for confirmation.

4 Press [Yes].

The selected paper category name will be deleted from the list.

NOTICE Once deleted, the paper category cannot be restored. Please be careful in deletion.




11.13 [06 Curl Adjustment] 11

11.13 [06 Curl Adjustment]

The [06 Curl Adjustment] key is provided on the screen when no finishing options are installed.

Set the curl adjustment to be made in the decurling section of the main body.


2 Press [06 Curl Adjustment].


3 Select [Manual] to make the curl adjustment manualy.

4 Select one from [0] to [+2] for each of [Face Up], [Face Down], and [Duplex] in order to make the curladjustment as desired.



In either case, the Adjustment Menu Screen will be restored.



[06 Curl Adjustment]11


11.13



12Utility Menu Screen






12.1 Utility Menu Screen Outlines 12

12 Utility Menu Screen

12.1 Utility Menu Screen Outlines

Press Utility/Counter on the control panel to display the Utility Menu Screen.On the Utility Menu Screen, [01 Scan Address Register], menu items in [02 User Setting] and [04 Touch Panel Adjustment] are available to any user, while [03 Administrator Setting] can be set to require an administratorpassword to access the administrator setting menu.

Menu items in [03 Administrator Setting] includes functions such as monitoring machine performance, ormanaging authentication and security settings. It is recommended to delegate an administrator who will bethe sole person to control the administrator settings.

NOTICE Please contact your service representative to set up an administrator password.

NOTICE The machine mounted with Hard Disk Kit HD-514 provides different menu items on the Utility Menu Screen.

12.1.1 How to Access the Utility Menu Screen

1 Press Utility/Counter.


% Select the desired menu item from [01 Scan Address Register], [02 User Setting], and [04 TouchPanel Adjustment] to make settings.

% When you select [03 Administrator Setting], proceed to step 2.



Utility Menu Screen Outlines12


12.1

2 Press [03 Administrator Setting].

The Administrator Setting Menu Screen will be displayed.

3 If a password entry screen is displayed, enter the eight-digit administrator password, then press [OK].

The Administrator Setting Menu Screen will be displayed.

4 Make the desired administrator settings from this screen.

5 Press [Exit].

The screen displayed before pressing Utility/Counter on the control panel will be restored.





12.1.2 List of Utility Menu Items

The menu items grayed out in the following table are available only when the machine is mounted with HardDisk Kit HD-514.

01 Scan Address Register

02 User Setting

Menu Item/Description Setting Items/Options (with default un-derlined)

[01 Address Edit]Edit or delete registered destinations of scanned data.

—

[02 E-mail Title Setting]Register up to 5 templates which can optionally be used asa title when sending scanned data in e-mail.

—

[E-mail Text Setting]Register up to 5 templates which can optionally be used asbody text when sending scanned data in e-mail.


[01 System Setting]

[01 Language Setting]Select the language used in the touch panel and voicemessages.

Language used in LCD: English, French,Spanish, Japanese, ChineseLanguage in voice message: English,French, Spanish, Japanese, OFF

[02 Unit Setting]Select the unit of measurement for numeric values to bedisplayed on the touch panel.

mm, Inch (Decimal Point), Inch (Fraction)

[03 Paper Tray Setting]

[01 Paper Setting]Register or delete the paper settings. Up to 500 canbe registered.

Paper Type, Profile Name, Paper Size,Weight, Colored Paper, Punch, Both Sides Adjust, Curl Adjustment, Air Assist, Proc-ess Adjustment, Color Density

[02 Auto Tray Selection Setting]Select the tray to take over the feeding when the traycurrently used becomes out of paper. This functionis called Auto Tray Switch (ATS). When selectingmultiple trays for ATS, determine the priority of thetrays.

ATS/APS Switch: Trays 1 to 5, BypassTray Priority: Order of priority for selectedtrays

[03 Type for Auto Paper]Specify paper conditions that enable a tray to be se-lected in Auto Paper or ATS.Paper conditions to be specified here are PaperType, Weight, Punch, Tab Paper, and Colored Pa-per.

Paper Type: Plain, Fine, Color Specific,Coated-GL, Coated-ML, Coated-GO,Coated-MOWeight: 64-74 g/m2, 75-80 g/m2,81-105 g/m2, 106-135 g/m2, 136-162 g/m2, 163-209 g/m2, 210-256 g/m2,257-300 g/m2

Punch: Allow, RestrictTab Paper: Allow, RestrictColored Paper: Allow, Restrict

[04 Dehumidify Fan Heater]Set the operating conditions of the dehumidifyingfan heater installed in the paper feeder unit (trays 4and 5).

Dryness Preparation:ON, OFFFan Heater Control (Tray 4, Tray 5): Auto, Compulsive ON, Compulsive OFF

[04 Reset Setting]

[01 Auto Reset Setting]The machine automatically restores the screenspecified as default after a certain period of inactiv-ity. Select the time interval to activate this function.

OFF, 60 seconds, 120 seconds, 180 sec-onds, 240 seconds, 300 seconds,360 seconds, 420 seconds, 480 seconds,540 seconds





12.1

[02 Job Reset Setting]Specify whether or not to initialize the setting cur-rently specified when the machine takes it that theuser has changed, or original document is loadedinto the ADF. And select the settings to be initializedeach time a single job has been completed.

Change User: Yes, No ADF Original Direction: Reset, Not ResetReset Button Function: Initialize, Full AutoMode Memory Auto Call: ON, OFFFinisher Mode when Full Auto: Offset Sort,Offset Group, Sort, Group, Staple Sort,

Fold & Staple, Half-Fold, Face Up, FaceDownInitial by Key Counter Insert: ON, OFFStatus Hold When Auto Reset: Not Keep,KeepNext Job Staple Setting: Release, Do NotReleaseOriginal Set/Bind Direction: Release, DoNot Release

[05 Default Screen Setting]Select the screen to be displayed when the sub powerswitch is turned on or Auto Reset is activated.

MACHINE, JOB LIST/Hold Job, JOBLIST/Reserved Job

[06 Set Zoom Ratio Setting]

Modify predefined fixed ratios. Also, preset frequentlyused magnification ratios.

Fixed (Enlarge/Reduce): 8

Fixed (Enlarge/Reduce): 8

[07 Power Save Setting]Select the period of time that must elapse before AutoLow Power or Auto Shut OFF is activated. Also selecteither Auto Low Power or Auto Shut OFF to be activatedwhen Power Save is pressed on the control panel.

Auto Low Power: --- min., 5 min., 10 min.,15 min., 30 min., 60 min., 90 min., 120min., 240 min. Auto Shut OFF: --- min.,0 min., 1 min., 30 min., 60 min., 90 min.,120 min., 240 min.Power Save Function: Auto Low Power, Auto Shut OFF

[08 Date/Time Setting]Set the current date and time, the daylight-saving time,and the time difference.

Setting TimeDaylight Saving Time: OFF, ON(1-150 min.)Time Zone

[09 Operation/Info. Sound Setting]

[01 Volume Setting]Specify whether or not to enable the key operationsound or information sound and voice message,and also set the volume when they are turned on.

Operation Sound (Buzzer): ON, OFF1 (Small) to 8 (Big)Info. Sound/Voice (Speaker): ON, OFF, 1(Small) to 10 (Big)

[02 Info. Sound Item Setting]Specify each items provided for information soundand voice message.

Repeat Number SettingInfo. Sound Repeat Number: 1 time, 2times, 3 times Voice Repeat Number: 1 time, 2 times, 3timesNotice Set for Machine StopPaper JAM: Voice, Info. Sound, OFFPaper Empty: Voice, Info. Sound, OFFPaper Differ: Voice, Info. Sound, OFF

Replenish Toner: Voice, Info. Sound, OFFService Call: Info. Sound, OFFOther Notification SettingJob Complete prenotice: Voice, OFFJob Quantity: Over 3 minutes, Over 5 min-utes, Over 10 minutesStop Button Acception: Voice, OFFSample Print Completion: Voice, OFFFinisher Front Door Alert: Voice, OFFFinisher JAM Notification: Voice, OFFOther Info. Sound SettingFor System Starting: Info. Sound, OFFFor Sample Printing: Info. Sound, OFFFor Print Job Receiving: Info. Sound, OFF

[10 Key Response Time]Select the time interval to get the response from the ma-chine when a key is pressed on the touch panel.

Normal, 0.5 seconds, 1 second, 2 sec-onds, 3 seconds






[11 Shortcut Key Register]

[01 Application]Select shortcut keys to be displayed under [Applica-tion] on the Copy Screen. Up to 4 keys can be se-lected.

Combine, Booklet, Image Repeat, FrameCenter Erase, Image Centering, Page Mar-gin, Stamp

[02 Quality Adj. (Copy)]Select shortcut keys to be displayed under [Quality Adj.] on the Copy Screen. Up to 4 keys can be se-lected.

Copy Density, Background Removal,Bleed Prevention, Red, Green, Blue, Hue,Saturation, Brightness, Sharpness, Con-trast, Image Distinction Level, Screen,Glossy Color Balance

[03 Quality Adj. (Scan)]Select shortcut keys to be displayed under [Quality Adj.] on the Scan Settings Screen of Scan Screen.Up to 4 keys can be selected.

Scan Density, Background Removal, Red,Green, Blue, Sharpness, Contrast

[04 Quality Adj. Area Setting]Select either shortcut keys or density setting to bedisplayed under [Quality Adj.] on the Copy Screen orScan Settings Screen of Scan Screen.

Shortcut Display, Density Setting Display

[05 Output Setting]Select shortcut keys to be displayed under [OutputSetting] on the Copy Screen. Up to 4 keys can beselected.

Fold, Multi Half Fold, Multi Tri-Fold/Tri-Fold, Fold & Staple, Staple, Punch, OffsetSort, Sort, Offset Group, Group, PerfectBindMulti Tri-Fold is provided for the machinewith Saddle Stitcher SD-506 equipped.Tri-Fold is provided for the machine withFinisher FS-612 equipped.

[12 Service Port Device Setting]Specify whether or not to use a service port device, andselect the keyboard type if the service port device isused.

Service Port Device: ON, OFFKeyboard Type: EN65, EN104, JP101,JP106, JP109

[02 Initial Setting]

[01 Copy Initial Setting]Specify the initial settings to be restored when [Reset] ispressed.Hold Setting is available only when the machine isequipped with Hard Disk Kit HD-514 and Preview KitPH-102.

Copy initial setting: Original Setting, Quali-ty Adjustment, Zoom, Auto Zoom, Sim-plex/Duplex, Output Setting, Color, Papertray selection, Auto Paper, Image RotationON/OFF, ADF, Hold Setting

[02 Scan Initial Setting]Specify the initial settings to be restored when [Reset] ispressed.

Scan initial setting: Original Setting, Quali-ty Adjustment, Color, Color Space, ScanSize, Resolution (dpi), Default Server, ADF,Simplex/Duplex

[03 Common Setting]

[1 Shot Message Indication Time]Select the time span to display a shot message in the

message area of the touch panel.

3 seconds, 5 seconds

[Offset by Job Unit]Specify whether or not to offset the output sheets by job. Also specify the number of jobs to be offset whenselecting ON for this function.

ON, OFF (Selecting ON: Offset JobNumber, Initial Value: 1)

[Continuation Print]Specify whether or not to output multiple reserve jobs insuccession without stopping the machine at a jobbreak.

Copy ON, Copy OFF, Printer ON, PrinterOFF

[Stop Button Function]Specify whether to pause or abort a job when Stop ispressed on the control panel.

Job Temp. Stop, Job Stop Function

[Back Side Magnification Adj.]Select whether or not to activate the back side magnifi-cation adjustment mode.

ON, OFF






12.1

[Tray Change Time]Specify the length of time before copying becomesavailable when selecting another tray loaded with differ-ent paper type after a copy/print job is completed.

Short, Standard

[Prior Paper Type]

Specify whether or not to maintain the temperature suit-able for coated paper by turning the fixing unit roller.

Others, Coated

[Dash Length (Page Stamp)]Select the length of the dash to be used in a style of[Page No.] in [Stamp].

Long, Short

[Center Crop Mark Trim Margin]Specify the space between the center crop mark andimage area (center crop mark trim margin).

0.0-20.0 mm (default: 1.0)

[Schedule Cross Axle Unit (Init. Value)]Select the unit of horizontal axis on the ScheduleScreen.

Timetable, Time Volume (m), Sheet Volume

[Hold Job for Outputting (Init. Value)]Specify whether or not to delete the output data of hold job.

Delete, Save

[Destination for HDD Recall (Default)]Select the desired operation from printing, holding, orboth printing and holding for the job data recalled fromthe HDD.

Print, Hold, Print & Hold

[Offset Output Mode]Specify how to offset the output sets.

Change Out Pos., Partition Paper (Tray 1to 5, PI 1, PI 2), Stop Print

[Needless Tab Paper Exit]Specify whether or not to automatically discharge theoddments of tabbed sheets loaded in a tray as a set.

ON, OFF

[Detect Double Feed JAM]Specify whether or not to detect the double feeding in

Paper Feeder Unit PF-602.

ON, OFF

[04 Copy Setting]

[Fold & Staple Auto Selection]Specify whether or not to automatically set the Bookletmode when Fold & Staple mode is selected.

Yes, No

[Orig. Glass Auto Size Select]Specify whether or not to automatically select the samesize of copy paper as the original when placed on theoriginal glass.

ON, OFF

[ADF Auto Size Select]Specify whether or not to automatically select the samesize of copy paper as the original when placed on the ADF.

ON, OFF

[Auto Zoom (Original Glass)]Specify whether or not to automatically set an appropri-ate magnification ratio to correspond to the selectedpaper size when detecting the original size placed onthe original glass.

ON, OFF

[Auto Zoom (ADF)]Specify whether or not to automatically set an appropri-ate magnification ratio to correspond to the selectedpaper size when detecting the original size placed onthe ADF.

ON, OFF

[Non-Image Area Erase]Specify the condition of Non-Image Area Erase functionto be activated when Image Centering is selected in Ap-plication.

Yes, APS/AMS, Except Orig. Glass (1:1)

[ADF Frame Erase]Set to erase the frame when copying in ADF mode.

None, 1 mm, 2 mm, 3 mm, 4 mm, 5 mm






[Interruption Suspend Setting]Set the timing to interrupt the current job when pressingInterrupt while copying.

Stop Immediately, When Current Comp.

[Printer Prohibit Timer]Set the time interval to suspend the print job via PC af-

ter the last operation of touch keys.

Off, 15 seconds, 30 seconds, 60 seconds,90 seconds

[Orig./Out Bind Direction Set]Select whether or not to conform the bind direction inOutput Setting with that specified in Original Setting.

ON, OFF

[Specify Default Tray APS OFF]Specify the tray to be automatically selected when APS(Auto Paper) is canceled.

APS Tray, Tray 1, Tray 2, Tray 3, Tray 4,Tray 5, Bypass

[Scan Stop by Pull Out Tray]Select whether or not to stop the scanning operation ifany tray is pulled out.

ON, OFF

[05 Scan Setting]

[File Type Default E-mail]

Specify the default file type when sending scanned datain e-mail.

Package PDF, Divided PDF, Package

TIFF, Divided TIFF, Package XPS, Divided XPS, JPEG

[File Type Default HDD]Specify the default file type when sending scanned datato HDD.

Package PDF, Divided PDF, PackageTIFF, Divided TIFF, Package XPS, Divided XPS, JPEG

[File Type Default FTP]Specify the default file type when sending scanned datavia FTP.


[File Type Default SMB]Specify the default file type when sending scanned datavia SMB.


[Default Address]Select the default destination to be displayed on theScan Screen.

E-mail, HDD, FTP, SMB, Queue

[Compress Method Color/Gray]Specify the compression method to be used forscanned color/grayscale image data.

High Comp., Standard, Low Comp.

[06 Printer Setting]

[01 Gray Text Outline]Specify the conditions of contour processing in printing.

600 dpi:Skeletonization: Strong+, Strong, Normal,Weak, Weak+Outline Emphasis: Strong+, Normal,Weak+Process Black Sensitivity: Strong+, Nor-mal, Weak+Thin Line Prevention: OFF, ON 1200 dpi:Skeletonization: Strong+, Strong, Normal,Weak, Weak+Outline Emphasis: Strong+, Normal,Weak+

[07 Image Quality Setting]

[01 Screen]Enable or disable the use for each of three screens outof those provided, i.e. except Dot 1.

Line 1: Permission, RestrictLine 2: Permission, RestrictDot 1: PermissionDot 2: Permission, Restrict






12.1

03 Administrator Setting

[02 Screen Initial Setting]Specify the screen type to be used when Text/Photo orPhoto mode is selected as original type.

Full Color - Text/Photo: Line 1, Line 2, Dot1, Dot 2, StochasticFull Color - Photo: Line 1, Line 2, Dot 1, Dot2, StochasticBlack - Text/Photo: Dot 1, Dot 2, Stochas-tic

Black - Photo: Line 1, Line 2, Dot 1, Dot 2,StochasticSingle Color - Text/Photo: Line 1, Line 2,Dot 1, Dot 2, StochasticSingle Color - Photo: Line 1, Line 2, Dot 1,Dot 2, Stochastic

[03 Original Density Shift]Specify the default density setting for each originaltype.

Text/Photo (Full Color): 0 to +6Photo (Full Color): 0 to +6Text (Full Color): 0 to +6Map (Full Color): 0 to +6Text/Photo (Single Color): 0 to +6Photo (Single Color): 0 to +6Text (Single Color): 0 to +6Map (Single Color): 0 to +6

Text/Photo (Black): 0 to +6Photo (Black): 0 to +6Text (Black): 0 to +6Map (Black): 0 to +6

[04 ACS Adjustment] Adjust the automatic color detection function.

Available range: -5 to +5

[08 Password Change]Change the user password previously registered with userauthentication.

Entry of a new password



[01 System Setting]

[01 Power Save Setting]Select the period of time that must elapse before AutoLow Power or Auto Shut OFF is activated. Also select either Auto Low Power or Auto Shut OFF tobe activated when Power Save is pressed on the con-trol panel.

Auto Low Power: --- min., 5 min., 10 min.,15 min., 30 min., 60 min., 90 min.,120 min., 240 min. Auto Shut OFF: --- min., 1 min., 30 min.,60 min., 90 min., 120 min., 240 min.Power Save Function: Auto Low Power, Auto Shut OFF

[02 Date/Time Setting]Set the current date and time, the daylight-saving time,and the time difference.

Setting TimeDaylight Saving Time: OFF, ON(1-150 min.)

Time Zone[03 Weekly Timer Setting]

[01 Weekly Timer On/Off Setting]Specify whether or not to use the Weekly Timerfunction.

Weekly Timer ON, Weekly Timer OFF

[02 Time Setting]Set the ON/OFF times in hours and minutes.

—

[03 Date Setting]Set the ON/OFF condition of the machine for a givenday of a given month.

—

[04 Select Time for Power Save]Set the machine to turn off and then on during the

lunch break.

Function Valid, Function Invalid





[05 Password Non-Business Hours]Set a password to use the machine by turning on thepower temporarily while the machine is in off condi-tion due to the Weekly Timer function.

0000 (4 digits)

[04 Restrict User Access]

[01 Lock/Delete Mode Memory]Lock/unlock or delete a copy/scan program that hasbeen registered using Mode Memory.

[01 Copy Mode Memory]Lock/unlock or delete a copy program that hasbeen registered using Mode Memory.

—

[02 Scan Mode Memory]Lock/unlock or delete a scan program that hasbeen registered using Mode Memory.

—

[02 Change Restrict Setting]Select whether to allow or restrict the change in ad-dress registration and set zoom ratio.

Change Address Registration: Allow/Re-strictChange Set Zoom: Allow/Restrict

[03 Scan Restrict Setting]Specify whether to allow or restrict the selection ofE-mail, FTP, HDD, SMB, Queue, or Manual Settingfor scanning functions.

E-mail: Allow/RestrictFTP: Allow/RestrictHDD: Allow/RestrictSMB: Allow/RestrictQueue: Allow/RestrictManual Setting: Allow/Restrict

[04 Sample Print Restrict]Specify whether or not to allow the use of sampleprint function.This function is available when the machine ismounted with Image Controller IC-601.

Sample Print: Allow, Restrict

[05 Expert Adjustment]

[01 AES Level Adjustment]

Change the density level to be applied when [Auto]is selected for [Copy Density] in [Quality Adjustment]on the Copy Screen.

Color: -5 to +5 (0)

Black: -5 to +5 (0)

[02 Erase Correction]

[01 Non-Image Area Erase]Specify the conditions to be applied to the Non-Image Area Erase function.

Erase Outside of Original, ON - APS/AMSOnly, Except Orig. Glass (1:1)

[02 ADF Frame Erase]Set to erase the frame when copying in ADF mode.


[03 Printer Adjustment]

[01 Restart Timing Adjustment]

Adjust the image position of lead edge in paperfeed direction in the printer engine.Prerequisite:FD-Mag. Adjustment is completed.


Restart Timing (Tray 1 to Tray 5), RestartTiming (Back), Tray Large Plain Offset,Tray Large Thick Offset, Tray Small PlainOffset, Tray Small Thick Offset, BypassOffset/L Plain, Bypass Offset/L Thick, By-pass Offset/S Plain, Bypass Offset/SThick, Large Plain Offset (ADU), LargeThick Offset (ADU), Small Plain Offset(ADU), Small Thick Offset (ADU) Adjustment Range:-60 to +60 (1 step = 0.1 mm)






12.1

[02 Centering Adjustment] Adjust the image position in crosswise directionin the printer engine.Prerequisite:CD-Mag. Adjustment is completed.

Objects of Adjustment:Tray 1 to Tray 5, Bypass, ADU, Large SizeOffset (Tray 1 to Tray 5, Bypass), SmallSize Offset (Tray 1 to Tray 5, Bypass),8.5 e 5.5 Offset (Tray 1 to Tray 3, Bypass),Large Plain Offset (ADU), Large Thick Off-

set (ADU), Small Plain Offset (ADU), SmallThick Offset (ADU), 8.5 e 5.5 Plain Offset(ADU), 8.5 e 5.5 Thick Offset (ADU) Adjustment Range:-40 (Front) to +40 (Back)(1 step = 0.1 mm)

[03 FD-Mag. Adjustment]This adjustment value will be the standard forBoth Sides Adjust in Paper Setting. Adjust the magnification in paper feed directionin the printer engine.Prerequisite:Registroller line speed adjustment is completed.

Objects of Adjustment:Printer FD-Mag., Tray 1 Offset (ADU) toTray 5 Offset (ADU), Bypass Offset (ADU) Adjustment Range:-100 (Short) to +100 (Long)(1 step = 0.01%)

[04 CD-Mag. Adjustment] Adjust the magnification in crosswise directionin the printer engine.

Objects of Adjustment:Printer CD-Mag., Tray 1 Offset (ADU) toTray 5 Offset (ADU), Bypass Offset (ADU) Adjustment Range:-100 to +100 (1 step = 0.01%)

[05 Lead Edge Erase Adjustment] Adjust the amount of image to be erased fromthe edge of the sheet.

Object of Adjustment: Erase amount Adjustment Range:-20 to +40 (1 step = 0.1 mm)

[06 Registration Loop Adj.] Adjust the paper loop amount in registration roll-er section.

Objects of Adjustment:Tray 1 Large Size to Tray 5 Large Size, Tray1 Small Size to Tray 5 Small Size, BypassLarge Size, Bypass Small Size, ADU LargeSize, ADU Small Size, ADU Plain/W Under150 mm, ADU Thick/W Under 150 mm,

Thick Adjustment Range:-99 to +99 (1 step = 0.1 mm)

[07 Pre-registration Adj.] Adjust the paper loop amount in pre-registrationroller section of the trays.

Objects of Adjustment:Tray 1 to Tray 3, ADU Large Size, ADUSmall Size, ADU Thick Paper Adjustment Range:-99 to +99 (1 step = 0.1 mm)

[04 Finisher Adjustment] ( Finisher FS-521 )

[01 Staple Finisher Adjustment]

[01 Staple Center Position] Adjust the center position of staples deter-mined by the finisher.Prerequisite: Paper Width Adjustment (Sta-ple) is completed.

Adjustment Range:-20 (Forward) to +20 (Backward)(1 step = 0.1 mm)

[02 Paper Width Adj. (Staple)] Adjust the width of stacker adjustment platesof the finisher to be used in Staple mode.

Objects of Adjustment:Full Area, SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w,SRA4 w / v, A4 w / v, B5 v, A5 v,12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w,8.5 e 11 w / v, 8.125 e 13.25 w,8.5 e 13 w, 8.25 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, 8K w,16K v, 9 e 11 v, Custom (380-460 mm),Custom (220-379 mm), Custom(148-219 mm) Adjustment Range:-20 (Wide) to +20 (Narrow)(1 step = 0.1 mm)






[03 Paper Width Adj. (Straight)] Adjust the width of stacker adjustment platesof the finisher to be used in straight delivery.

Objects of Adjustment:Full Area, SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w,SRA4 w / v, A4 w / v, B5 v, A5 v, 12 e 8 w,11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w / v,8.125 e 13.25 w, 8.5 e 13 w, 8.25 e 13 w,8 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K v, 9 e 11 v, Custom

(380-460 mm), Custom (220-379 mm),Custom (148-219 mm) Adjustment Range:-20 (Wide) to +20 (Narrow)(1 step = 0.1 mm)

[04 Exit Guide Center Pos. Adj.] Adjust the center position of exit guides ofthe finisher.

Objects of Adjustment:Straight (Small), Straight (Large), ShiftFront (Small), Shift Front (Large), ShiftBack (Small), Shift Back (Large) Adjustment Range:-50 (Forward) to +50 (Backward)(1 step = 0.1 mm)

[05 Exit Guide Paper Width Adj.]

Adjust the width of exit guides of the finisher.


Full Area, SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w,SRA4 w / v, A4 w / v, B5 v, A5 v,12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w,8.5 e 11 w / v, 8.125 e 13.25 w,8.5 e 13 w, 8.25 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, 8K w,16K v, 9 e 11 v, Custom (380-460 mm),Custom (220-379 mm), Custom(148-219 mm) Adjustment Range:-50 (Wide) to +50 (Narrow)(1 step = 0.1 mm)

[04 Finisher Adjustment (Folding Unit FD-503)]

[02 Multi Folder (Punch) Adj.]

[01 Paper Width Adjustment] Adjust the width of adjustment plates of thefolding unit.

Objects of Adjustment:Full Area, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w / v,B5 w / v, A5 w / v, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w / v, 8.125 e 13.25 w,8.5 e 13 w, 8.25 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, 8K w,16K w / v, 9 e 11 v Adjustment Range:-20 (Narrow) to +20 (Wide)(1 step = 0.1 mm)

[02 Punch Vertical Position Adj.] - [01 2-HolePunch] Adjust the vertical position of punch holesmade by the folding unit.

Objects of Adjustment:Full Area, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w / v,B5 w / v, A5 w / v, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w / v, 8.125 e 13.25 w,8.5 e 13 w, 8.25 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, 8K w,16K w / v, 9 e 11 v


[02 Punch Vertical Position Adj.] - [02 4-HolePunch] Adjust the vertical position of punch holesmade by the folding unit.

Objects of Adjustment:Full Area, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 v,B5 v, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 11 v,8K w, 16K v, 9 e 11 v Adjustment Range:-40 (Narrow) to +40 (Wide)(1 step = 0.1 mm)






12.1

[03 Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.]

[01 Half-Fold Position Adj.] Adjust the half-folded position determinedby the folding unit.

Objects of Adjustment:Full Area, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w,12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w,8.5 e 11 w, 8K w, Custom (380-458 mm),

Custom (279-379 mm) Adjustment Range:-50 (Short) to +50 (Long)(1 step = 0.1 mm)

[02 Tri-Fold-in Pos. Adj.] Adjust the folded positions in Tri-Fold-inmode determined by the folding unit.The baseline of Single Fold is calculated fromthe edge of the sheet, while that of DoubleFold is calculated from the position of theSingle Fold line. Be sure to start with theDouble Fold adjustment, then proceed to theSingle Fold adjustment.

Objects of Adjustment:Full Area, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w,12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w,8.5 e 11 w, 8K w, Custom (380-458 mm),Custom (279-379 mm) Adjustment Range:-50 (Short) to +50 (Long)(1 step = 0.1 mm)

[03 Tri-Fold-out Pos. Adj.]

Adjust the folded positions in Tri-Fold-outmode determined by the folding unit.The baseline of Single Fold is calculated fromthe edge of the sheet, while that of DoubleFold is calculated from the position of theSingle Fold line. Be sure to start with the Sin-gle Fold adjustment, then proceed to theDouble Fold adjustment.


Full Area, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w,12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w,8.5 e 11 w, 8K w, Custom (380-458 mm),Custom (279-379 mm) Adjustment Range:-50 (Short) to +50 (Long)(1 step = 0.1 mm)

[04 Double Parallel Pos. Adj.] Adjust the folded positions in Double Parallelmode determined by the folding unit.The baseline of Single Fold is calculated fromthe edge of the sheet, while that of DoubleFold is calculated from the position of the

Single Fold line. Be sure to start with the Sin-gle Fold adjustment, then proceed to theDouble Fold adjustment.

Objects of Adjustment:Full Area, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w,12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w,8.5 e 11 w, 8K w, Custom (380-458 mm),Custom (279-379 mm) Adjustment Range:

-50 (Long) to +50 (Short)(1 step = 0.1 mm)

[05 Z-Fold Position Adj.] Adjust the folded positions in Z-Fold modedetermined by the folding unit.The baseline of Single Fold is calculated fromthe edge of the sheet, while that of DoubleFold is calculated from the position of theSingle Fold line. Be sure to start with the Sin-gle Fold adjustment, then proceed to theDouble Fold adjustment.


[06 Gate Position Adj.] Adjust the folded positions in Gate mode de-

termined by the folding unit.The baseline of Single Fold is calculated fromthe edge of the sheet, while that of DoubleFold is calculated from the position of theSingle Fold line and that of Triple Fold fromthe Double Fold line. Be sure to start with theSingle Fold adjustment.

Objects of Adjustment:Full Area, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w,

12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w,8.5 e 11 w, 8K w, Custom (380-458 mm),Custom (279-379 mm) Adjustment Range:Single Fold/Triple Fold: -50 (Long) to +50(Short)(1 step = 0.1 mm)Double Fold: -50 (Short) to +50 (Long)(1 step = 0.1 mm)

[04 Finisher Adjustment] ( Large Capacity Stacker LS-505 )

[05 Stacker Adjustment]

[01 Paper Width Adjustment] Adjust the position of adjustment plates if

output sheets show misalignment in cross-wise direction on the stacker tray.

Objects of Adjustment:Stacker No. 1, Stacker No. 2







[02 Paper Length Adjustment] Adjust the position of the front stopper if out-put sheets show misalignment in paper feeddirection on the stacker tray.

Objects of Adjustment:Stacker No. 1, Stacker No. 2 Adjustment Range:-20 (Opposite direction) to +20 (Paper feeddirection)(1 step = 0.1 mm)

[04 Finisher Adjustment] ( Saddle Stitcher SD-506 )

[06 Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.]

[01 Staple Center Position] Adjust the center position of staples deter-mined by the saddle stitcher.Prerequisite: Paper Width Adjustment (Sta-ple) is completed.

Adjustment Range:-20 (Leftward) to +20 (Rightward)(1 step = 0.1 mm)

[02 Staple Paper Width Adj.] Adjust the width of adjustment plates of thesaddle stitcher to be used in Staple mode.

Objects of Adjustment:Full Area, SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w, B5 w, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17w, 8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w,8.125 e 13.25 w, 8.5 e 13 w, 8.25 e 13 w,

8 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K w, Custom(380-463 mm), Custom (257-379 mm) Adjustment Range: -20 (Narrow) to +20(Wide)(1 step = 0.1 mm)

[03 Staple Pitch Adjustment] Adjust the staple pitch determined by thesaddle stitcher.

Objects of Adjustment:Full Area, SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w, B5 w, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w,11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w,8.125 e 13.25 w, 8.5 e 13 w, 8.25 e 13 w,8 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K w, Custom(380-463 mm), Custom (257-379 mm) Adjustment Range:-20 (Narrow) to +20 (Wide)(1 step = 0.1 mm)

[04 Half-Fold Position Adj.] Adjust the half-folded position determinedby the saddle stitcher.

Objects of Adjustment:Full Area, SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w, B5 w, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w,11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w,8.125 e 13.25 w, 8.5 e 13 w, 8.25 e 13 w,8 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K w, Custom(380-463 mm), Custom (257-379 mm) Adjustment Range (Top of output sheet):-50 (Short) to +50 (Long)(1 step = 0.1 mm)

[05 Tri-Fold Position Adj.] Adjust the folded positions in Tri-Fold-inmode determined by the saddle stitcher.

The baseline of Single Fold is calculated fromthe edge of the sheet, while that of DoubleFold is calculated from the position of theSingle Fold line. Be sure to start with theDouble Fold adjustment, then proceed to theSingle Fold adjustment.

Objects of Adjustment:Full Area, A4 w, 8.5 e 11 w Adjustment Range:

Single Fold: -100 (Short) to +100 (Long)(1 step = 0.1 mm)Double Fold: -100 (Long) to +100 (Short)(1 step = 0.1 mm)

[06 Fold Paper Width Adj.] Adjust the width of adjustment plates if half-folded or tri-folded sheets show misalign-ment.

Objects of Adjustment:Full Area, SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w, B5 w, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w,11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w,8.125 e 13.25 w, 8.5 e 13 w, 8.25 e 13 w,8 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K w, PI, Custom(380-463 mm), Custom (257-379 mm) Adjustment Range:

-50 (Narrow) to +50 (Wide)(1 step = 0.1 mm)






12.1

[07 Trimming Adjustment] Adjust the trimming width. The trimmingwidth should be more than 2.0 mm, other-wise the trimming operation may not per-formed properly.

Objects of Adjustment:Full Area, SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w, B5 w, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w,11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w,8.125 e 13.25 w, 8.5 e 13 w, 8.25 e 13 w,8 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K w, Custom

(380-463 mm), Custom (257-379 mm) Adjustment Range:-400 (Short) to +400 (Long)(1 step = 0.1 mm)

[08 Trimmer Receiver Adjustment]Frequent trimming operations may causedamage to the receiver, resulting in trimmingfailures. Move the receiver automatically ormanually.

Objects of Adjustment:Trimmer Count, Move Pitch

[04 Finisher Adjustment] ( Perfect Binder PB-503 )

[07 Perfect Binder Adjustment]

[01 Cover Trimming Adjustment]

Adjust the trimming width on the lead edgeof the right cover page. To align the leadedges of left and right cover pages, be sureto perform Cover Lead Edge Adjustment inadvance.


Perfect Binder Tray, Except PB Tray Adjustment Range:-128 (Short) to +127 (Long)(1 step = 0.1 mm)

[02 Cover Lead Edge Adj.] Adjust the lead edge position of left coverpage determined with reference to the bodyset. The sizes referred in this section arethose of body sets corresponding to coversizes.

Objects of Adjustment:Full Area, A4 v, B5 v, A5 w / v, 8.5 e 11 v,5.5 e 8.5 w, 16K v, Custom (220-379 mm),Custom (148-219 mm) Adjustment Range:-128 (Short) to +127 (Long)(1 step = 0.1 mm)

[03 Spine Corner Forming Pos.] Adjust the state of spine corners formed in

cover sheets.

Objects of Adjustment:Up/Down Forward Adj. (Front), Up/Down

Rear Adj. (Rear) Adjustment Range:-128 (Down: circle) to +127 (Up: square)(1 step = 0.1 mm)

[04 Glue Start Position] Adjust the position to start gluing on thebody set. The sizes referred in this sectionare those of body sets corresponding to cov-er sizes.

Objects of Adjustment: Ahead (rear): Full Area, A4 v, B5 v, A5 w / v, 8.5 e 11 v, 5.5 e 8.5 w, 16K v,Custom (220-379 mm), Custom(148-219 mm) Back (front): Full Area, A4 v,B5 v, A5 w / v, 8.5 e 11 v, 5.5 e 8.5 w,16K v, Custom (220-379 mm), Custom(148-219 mm) Adjustment Range:-128 (Soon) to +127 (Late)

(1 step = 0.1 mm)[05 Glue Finish Position] Adjust the position to finish gluing on thebody set. The sizes referred in this sectionare those of body sets corresponding to cov-er sizes.

Objects of Adjustment: Ahead (rear): Full Area, A4 v, B5 v, A5 w / v, 8.5 e 11 v, 5.5 e 8.5 w, 16K v,Custom (220-379 mm), Custom(148-219 mm) Back (front): Full Area, A4 v,B5 v, A5 w / v, 8.5 e 11 v, 5.5 e 8.5 w,16K v, Custom (220-379 mm), Custom(148-219 mm) Adjustment Range:-128 (Soon) to +127 (Late)(1 step = 0.1 mm)






[06 Glue Formation Finish Pos.] Adjust the position to finish equalizing theglue applied on the body set. The sizes re-ferred in this section are those of body setscorresponding to cover sizes.

Objects of Adjustment:Full Area, A4 v, B5 v, A5 w / v, 8.5 e 11 v,5.5 e 8.5 w, 16K v, Custom (220-379 mm),Custom (148-219 mm) Adjustment Range:-128 (Soon) to +127 (Late)

(1 step = 0.1 mm)

[07 Temperature Adjustment]Glue Tank -Top:The machine supplies glue pellets on detect-ing the temperature of solution surface lowerthan the set point. Recommended to be sethigher in thermal environment where the ma-chine tends to fail in detection.Glue Tank -Mid:Set the temperature to reach when warm-upis completed, and to start rotating the roller.Setting it higher helps glue temperature to bestable sooner.Glue Tank -Low:

Adjust the temperature to control the tankheater.Low temperature: Increases glue viscosityHigh temperature: Decreases glue viscosityGlue Apply Roller: Adjust the temperature to control the rollerheater. This also supports heating of theglue.Low temperature: Increases glue viscosityHigh temperature: Decreases glue viscosity

Glue Tank -Top:Initial: 132°CRecommended: 128 to 136°CGlue Tank -Mid:Initial: 145°CRecommended: 140 to 145°CGlue Tank -Low:Initial: 185°CRecommended: 180 to 190°CGlue Apply Roller:Initial: 165°CRecommended: 160 to 170°C (1 step = 0.1°C)

[08 Sub Compile CD Width Adj.]Change the adjustment width if outputsheets cannot be aligned in sub compile sec-tion. The sizes referred in this section are

those of body sets corresponding to coversizes.

Objects of Adjustment:Full Area, A4 v, B5 v, A5 w / v, 8.5 e 11 v,5.5 e 8.5 w, 16K v, Custom (220-379 mm),Custom (148-219 mm)

Adjustment Range:-20 (Wide) to +20 (Narrow)(1 step = 0.1 mm)

[09 Clamp CD Width Adjustment]Change the adjustment width in crosswisedirection if output sheets show misalignmentin a body set. The sizes referred in this sec-tion are those of body sets corresponding tocover sizes.

Objects of Adjustment:Full Area, A4 v, B5 v, A5 w / v, 8.5 e 11 v,5.5 e 8.5 w, 16K v, Custom (220-379 mm),Custom (148-219 mm) Adjustment Range:-20 (Wide) to +20 (Narrow)(1 step = 0.1 mm)

[10 Cover Up/Down CD Width Adj.]Change the adjustment width in matchingbody sets and covers, in order to adjust theirpositions in crosswise direction.

Objects of Adjustment:Perfect Binder Tray, Except PB Tray Adjustment Range:-20 (Wide) to +20 (Narrow)

(1 step = 0.1 mm)

[11 Clamp FD Position Adj.]Change the adjustment width in paper feeddirection if output sheets show misalignmentin a body set. The sizes referred in this sec-tion are those of body sets corresponding tocover sizes.

Objects of Adjustment:Full Area, A4 v, B5 v, A5 w / v, 8.5 e 11 v,5.5 e 8.5 v, 16K v, Custom (220-379 mm),Custom (148-219 mm) Adjustment Range:-20 (Wide) to +20 (Narrow)(1 step = 0.1 mm)






12.1

[04 Finisher Adjustment] ( Finisher FS-531 / Finisher FS-612 )

[01 Saddle Stitcher Stopper]

Adjust the staple positions in widthwise di-rection of paper determined in Fold & Staplemode.( Finisher FS-612 only)

Objects of Adjustment:Full Area, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w,12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w,8.5 e 11 w, 8.125 e 13.25 w, 8.5 e 13 w,8.25 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K w, Cus-tom (380-460 mm), Custom (220-379 mm) Adjustment Range: Adjustment Range: -128 to +127(1 step = 0.1 mm)

[02 Half-Fold Stopper Adj.]

Adjust the misalignment in edges of outputsheets for each paper size.( Finisher FS-612 only)

Objects of Adjustment:Full Area, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w,12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w,8.5 e 11 w, 8.125 e 13.25 w, 8.5 e 13 w,8.25 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K w, Cus-tom (380-460 mm), Custom (220-379 mm)

Adjustment Range (Top of output sheet):-128 (Long) to +127 (Short)(1 step = 0.1 mm)

[03 Punch Adjustment] (with Punch Kit PK-512/PK-513 only)

[01 Vertical Position Adj.] Adjust the misalignment in center positionsof paper and punch holes for each papersize.

Objects of Adjustment:Full Area, A3 w, B4 w, A4 w / v, B5 w / v, A5 w / v, 11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w,8.5 e 11 w / v, 5.5 e 8.5 w / v,8.125 e 13.25 w, 8.5 e 13 w, 8.25 e 13 w,8 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K w / v, 9 e 11 v Adjustment Range:-50 (Backward) to +50 (Forward)(1 step = 0.1 mm)

[02 Horizontal Position Adj.] Adjust the distance from the edge of the out-put sheet to the center of punch holes.

Objects of Adjustment:PI Tray, Main Body Tray Adjustment Range:-50 (Wide) to +50 (Narrow)(1 step = 0.1 mm)

[03 Registration Adjustment] Adjust the registration amount if punch posi-tions are inclined.

Objects of Adjustment:Main Body/Reverse, Main Body/ADU, PI 1Tray, PI 2 Tray Adjustment Range:-20 to +20(1 step = 0.8 mm)

[04 Paper Edge Detect Sensor]Detect the edge of paper to be a referencepoint in punching operation.

Start

[04 Tri-Fold Adjustment]

Adjust the tri-folded positions for each papersize.( Finisher FS-612 only)

Objects of Adjustment:Full Area, A4 w, 8.5 e 11 w, 16K w Adjustment Range:-128 (Leftward) to +127 (Rightward)(1 step = 0.1 mm)

[05 2 Pos. Staple Pitch Adj.]

Adjust the staple pitch determined in Fold &Staple and Staple modes.

Objects of Adjustment:Fold & Staple, Staple Adjustment Range:+128 to +160(1 step = 1 mm)






[06 Post Inserter Tray Size]

Adjust the tray size of post inserter.(Available only with Post Inserter PI-502 mounted)

Objects of Adjustment:8.5 e 11 w, A4 w

[07 Output Quantity Limit]

Specify the limit on output sheets.(Only three Staple options are available forFinisher FS-531.)

Objects of Adjustment:Staple/64-80 g/m2, Staple/81-105 g/m2,Staple/106-209 g/m2, Fold & Staple/ 64-80 g/m2, Fold & Staple/81-105 g/m2,Half-Fold/64-105 g/m2, Tri-Fold/ 64-80 g/m2

Adjustment Range:Staple 64-80 g/m2, Staple 81-105 g/m2:+2 to +50, Staple 106-220 g/m2: 0, +2 to+20, Fold & Staple 64-80 g/m2, Fold & Sta-ple 81-105 g/m2: +2 to +20, Half-Fold 64-105 g/m2, Tri-Fold 64-80 g/m2: +1 to +3 (1 step = 1 sheet)

[08 Curl Adjustment]08 Curl Adjustment*1

Make the curl adjustment for Simplex, Du-plex, and Tri-Fold (inside print) modes.(The curl adjustment on Tri-Fold (inside print)is available for Finisher FS-612 only.)*1: Displayed when the machine is equippedwith Finisher FS-531 or Finisher FS-612 without Relay Unit RU-508 mounted.

Objects of Adjustment:Simplex (Tri-Fold 64-80 g/m2: Inside Print)Simplex (Tri-Fold 81-105 g/m2: InsidePrint)Simplex (Print Side <Except Tri-Fold>:Front) Adjustment Range: +0, +1, +2

[05 Scan Adjustment]Make adjustments related to the scanning function.

[01 Restart Timing Adjustment] Adjust the position to start scanning when using

the original glass to scan the original.Prerequisite: FD-Mag. Adjustment is completed.

Objects of Adjustment:Scanning device of the original glass

Adjustment Range:-10 (Image Fast) to +20 (Image Slow)(1 step = 0.1 mm)

[02 Centering Adjustment] Adjust the image position in crosswise directionwhen scanning the original from the originalglass.Prerequisite: Printer Centering Adjustment iscompleted.

Objects of Adjustment: ADF Centering-Front, ADF Centering-Back Adjustment Range:-60 (Front) to +60 (Back)(1 step = 0.1 mm)Objects of Adjustment:Orig. Glass Centering Adjustment Range:-30 (Front) to +30 (Back)(1 step = 0.1 mm)

[03 FD-Mag. Adjustment] Adjust the magnification in paper feed directionwhen scanning the original from the originalglass.Prerequisite: Printer FD-Mag. Adjustment iscompleted.

Objects of Adjustment:Scanning device of the original glass Adjustment Range:-40 (Short) to +40 (Long) (1 step = 0.05%)

[06 Process Adjustment]

[01 Front & Back Density]Specify the adjustment value for front and backtransfer output voltage automatically set by themachine.

1st Transfer Y, 1st Transfer M, 1st TransferC, 1st Transfer K, 2nd Transfer Front, 2ndTransfer Back, 2nd Transfer Postcard Rear-3 to +3 for each

[02 Toner Density Sensor Speed]Readjust the value of toner density control volt-

age in 3/4 and 1/2 line speeds in order to clearthe problems such as image overlap or tonerscattering, mainly caused by instability of tonerdensity.

—






12.1

[03 Maximum Density Adjustment] Adjust the maximum density for each of Y, M, C,and K. The machine will start the Gamma Auto-matic Adjustment after you change the maxi-mum density. When the Gamma Automatic Adjustment is completed, proceed to the cali-

bration with the printer controller.Be sure to perform Color Density Manual Controlafter changing the maximum density.

Yellow: -10 (Light) to +10 (Dark)Magenta: -10 (Light) to +10 (Dark)Cyan: -10 (Light) to +10 (Dark)Black: -10 (Light) to +10 (Dark)

[07 Quality Adjustment] Adjust the image quality.

[01 Printer Gamma Offset Adj.]Change the printer gamma curve to adjust thegradation and background density in highlights.

Line 1 (Y, M, C, K)Line 2 (Y, M, C, K)Dot 1 (Y, M, C, K)Dot 2 (Y, M, C, K)Contone (Y, M, C, K)Stochastic (Y, M, C, K) Adjustment Range: -128 to +127

[02 Printer Gamma Offset Auto.]

Change the printer gamma curve automaticallyto adjust the gradation and background densityin highlights.

Line 1 (Y, M, C, K)

Line 2 (Y, M, C, K)Dot 1 (Y, M, C, K)Dot 2 (Y, M, C, K)Stochastic (Y, M, C, K)

[03 Printer Gamma Sensor Adj.] Adjust the IDC sensor using a scanner.

Line 1, Line 2, Dot 1, Dot 2, Contone, Sto-chastic

[04 Stabilization Adj. Setting]Set priority to either output speed or image qual-ity stability for each of copy job and printer job.When selecting the image quality stability, spec-ify the frequency of gamma correction and max-imum density correction.

Copy Job: Speed, StabilityPrinter Job: Speed, StabilityCustomization of correction for imagequality stabilityCopy Job Gamma Correction: None, -2, -1, Normal, +1, +2Copy Job Maximum Density Correction: -2, -1, Normal, +1, +2Printer Job Gamma Correction: None, -2, -1, Normal, +1, +2Printer Job Maximum Density Correction: -2, -1, Normal, +1, +2

[05 Custom Screen]Select a screen type to be used for each of linescreens (Line 1, Line 2), dot screens (Dot 1, Dot2), and Stochastic.The machine will start the Gamma Automatic Adjustment after you change the screen type.When the Gamma Automatic Adjustment iscompleted, proceed to the Printer Gamma Off-set Adjustment for the changed screen type.

Line 1: Line 200, Line 190, Line 180, Line150, WaveLine 2: Line 200, Line 190, Line 180, Line150, WaveDot 1: Dot 270, Dot 190, Dot 170, Dot 130,Dot 095Dot 2: Dot 270, Dot 190, Dot 170, Dot 130,Dot 095Stochastic: ED 1, ED 2, ED 3, FM 1, FM 2

[08 Execute Adjust Operation]Execute each of the four adjustment operationsmanually.

Gamma Automatic Adj., Color Registration Adj., Toner Refresh Mode, Belt RefreshMode

[06 List/Counter]Output the mode memory list or the audit log report. Al-so, collectively save the data mentioned above on theUSB flash drive connected to the USB port.

Mode Memory List, User ManagementList, Use Management List, Font PatternList, Audit Log ReportOutput All to USB

[07 Size Setting]Specify the settings related to paper sizes of the origi-nals to be placed on the original glass or ADF, or of thepaper placed in the post inserter.

[01 Orig. Glass Size Search]Specify the size system of the original to be detect-

ed on the original glass.

Full Size, Metric A/B, Inch Series, OnlyMetric A






[02 ADF Original Size Search]Specify the size system of the original to be detect-ed in the ADF.

Full Size, Metric A/B, Inch Series, OnlyMetric A

[03 Original Glass Small Size]Specify the minimum original size to be detected on

the original glass.

A5 v, 5.5 e 8.5 v, B5 v, A4 v, 8.5 e 11 v

[04 K Size]Specify whether or not to use the K sizes such as 8Kand 16K.

K Size ON, K Size OFF

[05 ADF/Orig. Glass Priority]Specify the standard sizes which cannot be detect-able from the ADF or original glass.

8.5 e 14 w, 8 e 13 w, 8.12 e 13.2 w,8.25 e 13 w, 8.5 e 13 w A5 v, A4 w, 5.5 e 8.5 v, 8.5 e 11 w A5 w, B6 w, 5.5 e 8.5 w

[08 Perfect Binder Setting]

[01 Usable Paper Weight Select]Specify the paper weight available for each of bodyand cover when using the perfect binder.

Usable Paper Weight Select Body:64-74 g/m2, 75-80 g/m2, 81-105 g/m2

Cover: 81-105 g/m2, 106-135 g/m2, 136-162 g/m2, 163-209 g/m2, 210-256 g/m2,257-300 g/m2

Unit Changeg/m2, Duodecimo-Kg, Octavo-Kg, lbBond, lb Index, lb Cover

[02 Paper Count Limit for PB]Specify the minimum and maximum numbers ofsheets to be bound as a body set, individually foreach paper weight.This setting can be made individually for two papertypes: Plain and Fine/Color Specific/Coated.

Plain:64-74 g/m2

Minimum Quantity: 10, 15, 20, 25Maximum Quantity: 200, 250, 270, 30075-80 g/m2


Minimum Quantity: 10, 15, 20, 25Maximum Quantity: 200, 250, 270, 300

Fine/Color Specific/Coated:64-74 g/m2



Minimum Quantity: 10, 15, 20, 25Maximum Quantity: 110, 120, 130, 150Unit Changeg/m2, Duodecimo-Kg, Octavo-Kg, lbBond, lb Index, lb Cover

[03 Unfitting Cover Stop]

Specify whether or not to stop the current job whenthe cover width is not suitable for the body papersize and thickness.

Temporary Stop, Not Temporary Stop

[09 Operation Screen Customize]

[01 Font Weight Setting]Select the font weight for the screen.

Standard, Bold

[02 Copy Screen Customize Set]Change the layout of setting items displayed on theupper half of the Copy Screen.

—

[03 Scan Screen Customize Set]Change the layout of setting items displayed on theupper half of the Scan Screen.

—






12.1

[02 Administrator Registration]Register the name, extension number, and e-mail addressof the administrator. The administrator name and extensionnumber are always displayed in the upper-right corner ofthe Utility Menu Screen.

Administrator Name (up to 8 characters),Extension No. (up to 5 digits), E-mail Ad-dress

[03 Scan Address Register][01 Address Edit]Edit or delete registered destinations of scanned data.

—

[02 E-mail Title Setting]Register up to 5 templates which can optionally be usedas a title when sending scanned data in e-mail.

—

[E-mail Text Setting]Register up to 5 templates which can optionally be usedas body text when sending scanned data in e-mail.

—

[04 User Auth./Account Track]Specify whether or not to use the user authentication andaccount track functions. With these functions enabled, youcan specify or change the conditions in authentication.

[01 Authentication Method]Specify the authentication method and the number ofaccounts to be managed. Also, specify whether or notto use account track function for each mode, and selectthe action of the machine when the limit count isreached.

User Authentication: ON (External Serv),ON (MFP), OFFPublic User: Allow, Restrict Account Track: Manage, Not Manage Account Track Input Method: Account +Password, PasswordSynchronize User/Account Track: Syn-chronize, Not SynchronizeUser Distribute Number:Upper Limit Achieve Movement: Stop Im-mediately, Stop After Print, Warning OnlyCount Sample Print: ON, OFF

[02 User Authentication Set]

[01 Management Setting]Specify whether or not to display the user name list. Also place restrictions on users.

User Name List: Display, Not DisplayInitial Setting LimitOutput Allow: Color, BlackManagement System: Total, IndividualUpper Limit Setting: Enable, DisableCopy Operation: Allow, RestrictScan Operation: Allow, RestrictPrinter Operation: Allow, RestrictHDD Hold Operation: Allow, Restrict

[02 User Registration] Add, change, or delete entries of users to be al-lowed in user authentication.

User No., User Name, Password, AccountName, Output Allow (Color, Black), UpperLimit Setting, Usable Function (Copy,Scan, Printer, HDD Hold), From AddressSetting

[03 User Counter] View or reset the print count of authenticated users.

—

[03 Account Track]

[01 Account Track Registration]Change, add, or delete accounts to be tracked.

Account No., Account Name, Password,Name, Output Allow (Color, Black), UpperLimit Setting, Usable Function (Copy,Scan, Printer, HDD Hold)

[02 Account Track Counter] View or reset the print count of accounts beingtracked.

—

[04 Print without Authentication]Specify whether to make functions available to users

without authentication.

Print: Allow, RestrictPull Scan: Allow, Restrict






[05 Network Setting]

[01 Machine NIC Setting]Configure various NIC settings.

IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway Ad-dress, DNS Server 1, DNS Server 2, LineSpeed Setting: Auto Negotiation, 10M HalfDuplex, 10M Full Duplex, 100M Half Du-

plex, 100M Full Duplex[02 E-Mail Initial Setting]Configure the initial settings for e-mail.

Use E-mail System: ON/OFF, Time Zone,Trans (SMTP) Mail Server, SMTP PortNumber, Trans Mail Server Timeout, New-arrival Check Interval, Receive Mail ServerType,Receive Mail Server Type: POP3, IMAP,POP3/IMAP Port Number, Receive Mail Account, Receive Mail Password, E-mail Address for Machine, POP (IMAP) beforeSMTP Auth.: ON/OFF, SSL Encryption ofSMTP: ON/OFF, SSL Encryption of POP(IMAP): ON/OFF, Test

[03 http Communication Setting]

Configure the http communication settings.

Enable Proxy Server, Proxy Server Ad-

dress, Proxy Server Port, Enable SSL, En-able Authentication: ON/OFF, Authentication User Name, AuthenticationPassword

[04 Web LCD Setting]Configure the Web LCD settings.

Use Web LCD

[06 Common Setting]

[1 Shot Message Indication Time]Select the time span to display a shot message in themessage area of the touch panel.

3 seconds, 5 seconds

[Offset by Job Unit]Specify whether or not to offset the output sheets by

job. Also specify the number of jobs to be offset whenselecting ON for this function.

ON, OFF (Selecting ON: Offset JobNumber, Initial Value: 1)

[Continuation Print]Specify whether or not to output multiple reserve jobs insuccession without stopping the machine at a jobbreak.

Copy ON, Copy OFF, Printer ON, PrinterOFF

[Stop Button Function]Specify whether to pause or abort a job when Stop ispressed on the control panel.

Job Temp. Stop, Job Stop Function

[Back Side Magnification Adj.]Select whether or not to activate the back side magnifi-cation adjustment mode.

ON, OFF

[Tray Change Time]

Specify the length of time before copying becomesavailable when selecting another tray loaded with differ-ent paper type after a copy/print job is completed.

Short, Standard

[Prior Paper Type]Specify whether or not to maintain the temperature suit-able for coated paper by turning the fixing unit roller.

Others, Coated

[Dash Length (Page Stamp)]Select the length of the dash to be used in a style of[Page No.] in [Stamp].

Long, Short

[Center Crop Mark Trim Margin]Specify the space between the center crop mark andimage area (center crop mark trim margin).

0.0-20.0 mm (default: 1.0)

[Schedule Cross Axile Unit (Init. Value)]Select the unit of horizontal axis on the ScheduleScreen.

Timetable, Time Volume (m), Sheet Volume






12.1

[Hold Job for Outputting (Init. Value)]Specify whether or not to delete the output data of hold job.

Delete, Save

[Destination for HDD Recall (Default)]Select the desired operation from printing, holding, or

both printing and holding for the job data recalled fromthe HDD.

Print, Hold, Print & Hold

[Offset Output Mode]Specify how to offset the output sets.

Change Out Pos., Partition Paper (Tray 1to 5, PI 1, PI 2), Stop Print

[Needless Tab Paper Exit]Specify whether or not to automatically discharge theoddments of tabbed sheets loaded in a tray as a set.

ON, OFF

[Detect Double Feed JAM]Specify whether or not to detect the double feeding inPaper Feeder Unit PF-602.

ON, OFF

[07 Copy Setting]

[Fold & Staple Auto Selection]

Specify whether or not to automatically set the Bookletmode when Fold & Staple mode is selected.

Yes, No

[Orig. Glass Auto Size Select]Specify whether or not to automatically select the samesize of copy paper as the original when placed on theoriginal glass.

ON, OFF

[ADF Auto Size Select]Specify whether or not to automatically select the samesize of copy paper as the original when placed on the ADF.

ON, OFF

[Auto Zoom (Original Glass)]Specify whether or not to automatically set an appropri-ate magnification ratio to correspond to the selected

paper size when detecting the original size placed onthe original glass.

ON, OFF

[Auto Zoom (ADF)]Specify whether or not to automatically set an appropri-ate magnification ratio to correspond to the selectedpaper size when detecting the original size placed onthe ADF.

ON, OFF

[Non-Image Area Erase]Specify the condition of Non-Image Area Erase func-tion.

Yes, APS/AMS, Except Orig. Glass (1:1)

[ADF Frame Erase]Set to erase the frame when copying in ADF mode.


[Interruption Suspend Setting]Set the timing to interrupt the current job when pressingInterrupt while copying.

Stop Immediately, When Current Comp.

[Printer Prohibit Timer]Set the time interval to suspend the print job via PC af-ter the last operation of touch keys.

Off, 15 seconds, 30 seconds, 60 seconds,90 seconds

[Orig./Out Bind Direction Set]Select whether or not to conform the bind direction inOutput Setting with that specified in Original Setting.

ON, OFF

[Specify Default Tray APS OFF]Specify the tray to be automatically selected when APS(Auto Paper) is canceled.

APS Tray, Tray 1 to Tray 5, Bypass(Selectable tray options vary depending onthe option configuration.)

[Scan Stop by Pull Out Tray]

Select whether or not to stop the scanning operation ifany tray is pulled out.

ON, OFF






[08 Scan Setting]

[File Type Default E-mail]Specify the default file type when sending scanned datain e-mail.


[File Type Default HDD]Specify the default file type when sending scanned datato HDD.


[File Type Default FTP]Specify the default file type when sending scanned datavia FTP.


[File Type Default SMB]Specify the default file type when sending scanned datavia SMB.


[Default Address]Select the default destination to be displayed on theScan Screen.

E-mail, HDD, FTP, SMB, Queue

[Compress Method Color/Gray]

Specify the compression method to be used forscanned color/grayscale image data.

High Comp., Standard, Low Comp.

[09 System Connection]

[01 Administrator Call]Press [Start] to call via CSRC.

Start

[10 Security Setting]

[01 Administrator Password]Change the administrator password.

12345678

[02 HDD Management Setting](Displayed when the machine is mounted with HardDisk Kit HD-514.)

[01 HDD Lock Password]Change the HDD lock password. —

[02 Delete Temp. Data Setting]Select whether or not to overwrite the temporary im-age data, and also the erase mode.

Setting Switch: ON, OFFErase Mode: Mode 1, Mode 2

[03 Delete All Data Setting]Select the desired erase mode to delete all the data.

Erase Mode: Mode 1 to 8

[04 Delete hold Job]Use this function to delete hold jobs.

—

[05 Delete HDD Job]Use this function to delete the jobs stored on theHDD.

—

[06 HDD Restore/Backup]Make a backup of, or restore the HDD. —

[01 HDD Backup]Make a backup of the HDD.

Start

[02 HDD Restore]Restore the HDD.

Start

[03 Enhanced Security Mode]Specify whether or not to activate the Enhanced Secu-rity mode.

ON, OFF




[01 Scan Address Register]12


12.2

12.2 [01 Scan Address Register]

Add, change or delete destinations of images scanned by this machine. Also register up to 5 templates whichcan optionally be used as a title or body text when sending scanned data. For detailed procedure of eachsetting, see User's Guide - Network Scanner.




12.3 [02 User Setting] - [01 System Setting] 12

12.3 [02 User Setting] - [01 System Setting]

12.3.1 [01 Language Setting]

Select the language used in the touch panel, as well as in voice messages if used.

English is selected as default for the language used in LCD, and the voice message is deactivated.

1 Follow the procedure on page 12-3 to display the User Setting Menu Screen.

2 Press [01 System Setting] and [01 Language Setting] in sequence.

3 Select the desired language from the keys provided under "Language used in LCD".

4 To activate the voice message function, select the desired language from the keys provided under"Language in voice message". To deactivate the voice message function, press [OFF].


% To cancel the change, press [Cancel]. In either case, the System Setting Menu Screen will be re-stored.



[02 User Setting] - [01 System Setting]12


12.3

12.3.2 [02 Unit Setting]

Select the unit of measurement for numeric values to be entered or displayed on the touch panel.

The default setting is [mm].


2 Press [01 System Setting] and [02 Unit Setting] in sequence.

3 Select the desired unit of measurement.



12.3.3 [03 Paper Tray Setting] - [01 Paper Setting]

The paper setting offers two types of usage depending on what the setting is intended for.One is to make the setting for a paper tray which needs paper conditions specified.

The other is to register paper conditions for the paper to be used.

This section describes how to register paper conditions for the paper to be used.

% Paper setting for paper trays can be made from the Machine Screen of Copy Screen.

Paper setting for the paper to be used consists of the following 12 conditions that can be specified as desired.


Paper Type Seven paper types are provided ac-cording to the plainness of paper.See the table "Paper type descriptions"

provided below for details of the papertype.

Plain, Fine, Color Specific, Coated-GL,Coated-ML, Coated-GO, Coated-MO

Profile Name The registered profile name will be usedto recall the paper conditions for a pa-per tray. The profile name representingrecalled paper conditions will be dis-played on the Machine Screen andCopy Screen.

Up to 50 alphanumeric characters canbe entered.





Paper Size To specify Standard, select one of 27standard sizes provided on the screen.Selecting Custom allows you to enterthe desired dimensions from thescreen. This setting can also be madeby recalling a custom size previouslyregistered.

To specify Tab Paper, select either A4Tv or 8.5 e 11 v and specify the numberof tabs.

Standard:SRA3 w, SRA4 v, SRA4 w, A3 w, A4 v, A4 w, A5 w, A5 v, A6 w, B4 w,B5 v, B5 w, B6 w, 13 e 19 w,12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 9 e 11 v,8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 13 w, 8.5 e 11 w,8.5 e 11 v, 8.25 e 13 w, 8.12 e 13.2 w,

8 e 13 w, 5.5 e 8.5 w, 5.5 e 8.5 vCustom:Min. 100 mm e 182 mm to max.330 mm e 487 mm Up to 20 customsizes can be registered and recalled.Tab Paper: A4T v, 8.5 e 11T v (number of tabs: 1 to15)

Weight Select one of 8 types provided on thescreen. Four types of coated paper be-comes available when the weight over81 g/m2 is selected.The unit of weight can be switched. Theunit used to register the condition will

also be used to display that conditionon the Machine Screen and CopyScreen when recalled.Speed setting is available only for 106-135 g/m2 paper, providing [High], [Mid-dle], and [Auto Change] as setting op-tions. As default, [Middle] is specified for plainpaper, and [Auto Change] for coatedpaper. Setting with Glossy mode, ifspecified, takes priority. With ProcessSpeed Down specified, this speed set-ting will be ineffective.

Weight Setting:64-74 g/m2

75-80 g/m2

81-105 g/m2

106-135 g/m2

136-162 g/m2

163-209 g/m2210-256 g/m2

257-300 g/m2

Unit Change:g/m2, Duodecimo-Kg, Octavo-Kg, lbBond, lb Index, lb CoverSpeed Setting:High, Middle, Auto Change

Colored Paper Specify whether or not the paper is

colored.

White, Non-White

Punch Specify whether or not the paper ispunched. Use this setting to avoid us-ing the punched paper mixed with pa-per without punch holes.

Pre-Punched, No Hole-Punch

Both Sides Adjust Specify magnification ratios (vertical,horizontal), image shift amounts(up/down, right/left), and registrationloop amount for both front and backpages, in order to align the imagesprinted on front and back pages in du-plex printing.For Both Sides Adjust, note that the de-gree of shrinkage varies depending on

the type or brand of paper, and hygro-thermal environment of storage. It isrecommended to make the adjustmentfor each paper to be used.The horizontal magnification ratio of theback page can be adjusted from [Com-mon Setting] of the Administrator Set-ting.This procedure does not include thechart adjustment.

Vertical Zoom:-100 to +100 (1 step = 0.01%)Horizontal Zoom:Front -100 to +100 (1 step = 0.01%),Back -80 to +20 (1 step = 0.01%)Image Shift Up/Down:-100 to +100 (1 step = 0.1 mm)Image Shift Right/Left:-30 to +30 (1 step = 0.1 mm)

Registration Loop:-99 to +99 (1 step = 0.1 mm)

Curl Adjustment The machine mounted with Relay UnitRU-509 provides [Curl Adjustment] onthe screen, which allows you to correctthe curl of output paper.

Also, switching ON and [OFF] for Hu-midifier Setting is available if the relayunit is equipped with [Humidifier HM-102].

Curl Adjustment:-2, -1, 0 +1, +2Humidifier Setting: ON, OFF






12.3

d ReferenceFor details of the processing speed, see "5 Paper Information" .

Air Assist Use this function to blow air to paperfrom paper guides inside the tray in or-der to prevent feeding multiple sheetsor paper misfeed, which is likely to oc-cur depending on the paper type.The Air Assist function provided toLarge Capacity Unit LU-202 and cov-

er tray of Perfect Binder PB-503 canalso be turned ON/OFF, but is unavail-able to be controlled with ON (Strong)and ON (Weak) options.

Auto, ON (Strong), ON (Weak), OFF

Thickness Specify the paper thickness in order tocalculate the amount of paper remain-ing in the tray more precisely.

Not Specify, Specify

Process Adjust-ment

Make the process adjustment for eachof transfer, separation, and fusing func-tions, and make a selection for SpeedDown, 2nd Transfer Pressure, CPMDown, and Fusing Air Level.Selecting [ON] for Speed Down may re-

quire further adjustments to 2nd Trans-fer Output, Separation AC, orSeparation DC.

2nd Transfer Output Adj. (Front): -50 to+502nd Transfer Output Adj. (Back): -50 to+502nd Transfer-Lead Edge (Front): -20 to+ 0

2nd Transfer-Lead Edge (Back): -20 to+ 02nd Transfer-Rear Edge (Front): -50 to+502nd Transfer-Rear Edge (Back): -50 to+50Separation AC (Front): -50 to +50Separation AC (Back): -50 to +50Separation DC (Front): -30 to +30Separation DC (Back): -30 to +30Upper Roller Temperature (Idle): -10 to+10Upper Roller Temperature (Print): -10 to+10Lower Roller Temperature (Idle): -20 to

+20 Lower Roller Temperature (Print): -20 to +20Compulsive OFF Up Heater: <261 mm:-20 to +20Compulsive OFF Up Heater: <=261mm: -20 to +20Speed Down: OFF, ONCPM Down: Normal, Down

Color Density The machine mounted with Relay UnitRU-509 provides [Color Density] on thescreen. This setting is enabled when[Yes] is selected for [Use Color DensityControl] accessed from [06 Color Den-sity Control] - [01 Color Density Control]on the Adjustment Menu Screen.

Default Adj. Data, Paper Category, OFF






Paper type descriptions

Adding/Editing Paper Conditions


2 Press [01 System Setting], [03 Paper Tray Setting], and [01 Paper Setting] in sequence.

Paper Setting Register/Delete Screen will be displayed.

Paper name Description

Plain The plain paper is used for copying/printing in general and is called"PPC paper", and is usually not recycled. Select [Plain] for the plainpaper or recycled paper to be used in monochrome copying/print-ing.

Fine The fine paper is non-coated paper generally used for offset printing.This paper type has a high degree of whiteness and used for variouspurposes. Select [Fine] for the paper having such characteristics asmentioned above.

Color Specific Color Specific is the type of paper used in color copying/printing toprevent the color from dulling on fine paper. Specify [Color Specific]for the paper having such characteristics as mentioned above.

Coated-GL (Gloss Laser) Glossy paper for laser printing. This paper type is selectable onlywhen the weight is set to 81 g/m2 or heavier.

Coated-ML (Mat Laser) Matte paper for laser printing. This paper type is selectable onlywhen the weight is set to 81 g/m2 or heavier.

Coated-GO (Gloss Offset) Glossy paper for offset printing. This paper type is selectable onlywhen the weight is set to 81 g/m2 or heavier.

Coated-MO (Mat Offset) Matte paper for offset printing. This paper type is selectable onlywhen the weight is set to 81 g/m2 or heavier.





12.3

3 Select the destination to register paper conditions.

% Use the scroll keys [+] and [,] to display the desired destination, select that row, then press[Add/Edit].

% To edit the paper conditions previously registered, select that row.

The Register Type/Weight Screen will be displayed.

4 Select the desired one from the keys under [Paper Type].

% You can select [Coated-GL], [Coated-ML], [Coated-GO], and [Coated-MO] when you set the valueof [Weight] more than 81 g/m2.





5 Press [Profile Name].

% Enter the desired paper profile name. Up to 50 alphanumerical characters can be entered.

% Press [OK].

6 Press [Paper Size].

The Paper Size Screen will be displayed.

7 Select the desired one from [Standard], [Custom], and [Tab Paper].

% Proceed to step 8 when selecting [Standard].

% Proceed to step 9 when selecting [Custom].

% Proceed to step 10 when selecting [Tab Paper].





12.3

8 Pressing [Standard] will display the Standard Size Setting Screen.

% Select the desired standard size key.

% Press [OK].


9 Selecting [Custom] will display the Custom Size Setting Screen.

To specify a custom size:

% Press [(1)], then use the touch panel keypad, [+], [,], or control panel keypad to enter the desiredlengthwise dimension.

% Press [(2)], then use the touch panel keypad, [+], [,], or control panel keypad to enter the desiredwidthwise dimension.

% Press [(3)], then use the touch panel keypad, [+], [,], or control panel keypad to enter the desiredtrimming amount for covers used in Fold & Staple/Multi Half Fold mode. The key to enter the trim-ming amount appears for the machine with Saddle Stitcher SD-506 installed.





To recall a registered custom size:

% Press [Size Recall]. The Size Recall Screen will be displayed.

% Use [Previous] and [Next] to scroll to the desired custom size. Entries from [01] to [20 ] are providedon the screen.

% Press the number key of the custom size to be used, then press [OK].

Proceed to step 11.

10 Pressing [Tab Paper] will display the Tab Paper Screen.

% Select either [A4T] or [8.5x11T].

% Use the touch panel keypad, [,], or [+] to enter the number of tabs. Setting range for the number oftabs is from 1 to 15.

% Press [OK].





12.3

11 Press [Weight].

% The Weight Setting Screen will be displayed. Select the desired weight key under [Weight Setting].

% Select the desired unit key under [Unit Change]. The screen will display the paper weight in the se-lected unit.

% Selecting the weight [(4) 106-135 g/m2] enables the keys provided under [Speed Setting] to specifythe processing speed. Select the desired key.

12 Press [Colored Paper].

% Select [Non-White] for colored paper, or select [White] for white paper.





13 Press [Punch].

% Select [Pre-Punched] for punched paper, or select [No Hole-Punch] for paper without punch holes.

14 Press [Both Sides Adj.].The Both Sides Adjust Screen will be displayed.

To adjust the amount of registration loop:

% Press [Front], then press [Registration Loop]. Use the touch panel keypad, [,], [+], or the controlpanel keypad to enter the desired value.


% Press [Back] to similarly enter the desired adjustment value, specifying it to be positive or negative.

% Press [Reset] to restore the previous values.





12.3



% For 64-135 g/m2 of [Color Specific] and 81-135 g/m2 of [Coated GL], [Coated ML], [Coated GO], and[Coated MO], selecting [ON] or [OFF] for [Humidifier Setting] is unavailable.

16 Press [Air Assist].

% Select the desired key from under [Air Assist].

% Selecting [Auto] sets the machine to automatically activate the Air Assist function according to thepaper type and weight.





17 Press [Thickness].

% Select the desired key from under [Thickness].

% Select [Specify] to calculate the amount of paper remaining in the tray more precisely.

18 Press [Process Adj.].

% To set the items from [2nd Transfer Output Adj. (Front)] to [Compulsive OFF Up Heater: >=261 mm]accessed by pressing [Next] on the screen, select the desired item key, then use the touch panelkeypad, [,], [+], or control panel keypad to enter the adjustment value.






12.3

% Press [Next] to display the screen that provides [Speed Down], [2nd Trans. Pressure], and [CPMDown].

% Select the desired key for each item.

% See page 12-28 for details of the processing speed.

% Press [Next] to display the screen that provides [Fusing Air Separation Air Level Setting].

% To operate it automatically, press [Auto].

% The air level decreases each time [Weak] is pressed, or increases each time [Strong] is pressed.

% Press [OK] to complete the setting. To cancel the change, press [Cancel]. In either case, the RegisterType/Weight Screen will be restored.





19 Press [Color Density].

The Color Density Screen will be displayed.

% The Color Density adjustment becomes available when [Yes] is selected for "Use Color DensityControl" accessed from [01 Color Density Control] on the Adjustment Menu Screen.

20 To make the Color Density adjustment, press [Default Adj. Data] or [Paper Category].





12.3

% With [Default Adj. Data] selected, the machine periodically performs Gamma Correction with refer-ence to the adjustment data preset on the machine.

% Selecting [Paper Category] will display the Paper Category Screen. Select the desired paper cate-gory name, then press [OK]. The list displayed on the Paper Category List Screen shows the user-customized adjustment data that have been registered in [06 Color Density Control] - [03 RegisterPaper Category] accessed from the Adjustment Menu Screen.

% Select [OFF] if the Color Density Adjustment is not required.

21 Press [OK] on the Register Type/Weight Screen. Paper Setting Register/Delete Screen will be restored.

22 Press [Close] to return to the Paper Tray Setting Menu Screen.





Deleting Paper Conditions


2 Press [01 System Setting], [03 Paper Tray Setting], and [01 Paper Setting] in sequence.

Paper Setting Register/Delete Screen will be displayed.

3 Select the row to be deleted from the list of paper conditions, then press [Del].

4 Press [Yes] on the confirmation dialog.

% Or, press [No] to cancel.





12.3

5 Press [Close] to return to the Paper Tray Setting Menu Screen.

12.3.4 [03 Paper Tray Setting] - [02 Auto Tray Selection Setting]

When the tray currently used for printing becomes out of paper, the machine automatically feeds the samepaper size from another tray to continue the output job (Auto Tray Switch: ATS).

Follow the procedure below to select the trays to take over the feeding when ATS functions, and to determine

the priority of the selected trays.


2 Press [01 System Setting], [03 Paper Tray Setting], and [02 Auto Tray Selection Setting] in sequence.

3 Select the trays to take over the feeding when ATS functions, from the keys provided under "ATS/APSSwitch" on the left side of the screen.

% The trays selected here will be detected automatically when ATS functions.

4 Specify the priority of selected trays using the keys provided under "Tray Priority" on the right side ofthe screen.

% Select the tray to change the order of priority, then use "Up [+]" or "Down [,]" to change it.


% To cancel the change, press [Cancel]. In either case, the Paper Tray Setting Menu Screen will berestored.





12.3.5 [03 Paper Tray Setting] - [03 Type for Auto Paper]

Specify paper conditions for trays to be selected when Auto Paper or ATS functions.

The machine indicates "Paper Differ" if paper conditions specified here are not set to the tray automaticallyselected by Auto Paper or ATS.


2 Press [01 System Setting], [03 Paper Tray Setting], and [03 Type for Auto Paper] in sequence.

3 Specify paper conditions for trays to be selected in Auto Paper or ATS.

% Select the desired condition for each item. Multiple conditions can be selected for "Paper Type" and"Weight".

% Press [Unit Change] to switch the unit of weight.


% To cancel the change, press [Cancel]. In either case, the Paper Tray Setting Menu Screen will be

restored.





12.3

12.3.6 [03 Paper Tray Setting] - [04 Dehumidify Fan Heater]

Turn on/off the preliminary drying function of the fan heater, and set the machine to automatically or compul-sively turn on/off the fan heater of each tray, if Paper Feeder Unit PF-602 (trays 4 and 5) is equipped withDehumidifier Heater HT-504, or Large Capacity Unit LU-202 (tray 4) with Dehumidifier Heater HT-503.


2 Press [01 System Setting], [03 Paper Tray Setting], and [04 Dehumidify Fan Heater] in sequence.

3 Set the fan heater functions as desired.

% Select [ON] to activate the Dryness Preparation function, or select [OFF] to deactivate it.

% Select [Auto], [Compulsive ON], or [Compulsive OFF] for the function to control the fan heater in-stalled in each tray of Paper Feeder Unit PF-602 (trays 4 and 5) or in Large Capacity Unit LU-202 (tray 4).


% To cancel the change, press [Cancel]. In either case, the Paper Tray Setting Menu Screen will be

restored.





12.3.7 [04 Reset Setting] - [01 Auto Reset Setting]

Auto Reset is a function that automatically restores the screen specified as default, when a certain period oftime has elapsed without any key pressed on the touch panel or control panel.

Use this setting to specify the period of time to elapse before Auto Reset is activated.


2 Press [01 System Setting], [04 Reset Setting], and [01 Auto Reset Setting] in sequence.

3 Select the desired time.

% Selecting [OFF] will deactivate the Auto Reset function.


% To cancel the change, press [Cancel]. In either case, the Reset Setting Menu Screen will be re-stored.





12.3

12.3.8 [04 Reset Setting] - [02 Job Reset Setting]

The following features can be provided by switching the selection.

- [Change User]: Specify whether or not to initialize the settings currently specified when the machine de-cides that the user has changed. When one of the following operations is performed, this machine de-cides that a user has changed (Change User).

– Removing the key counter or copy card– Pressing Access on the control panel after user/account authentication has been successfully per-

formed- [ADF Original Direction]: Specify whether or not to initialize the settings currently specified when

the original document is loaded into the ADF.

- [Reset Button Function]: Select either the factory default setting (Full Auto) or the desired copy condi-tions (Initialize) as the one to be resumed when the machine is reset. Of the Full Auto settings, the fin-isher mode can be changed in [Finisher Mode when Full Auto] as required.

- [Mode Memory Auto Call]: Select [OFF] to resume the setting specified by selecting [02 User Setting] -[02 Initial Setting] - [01 Copy Initial Setting], or [ON] to resume the copy conditions registered to ModeMemory 30, both of which are to be used as the initial setting when Initialize is selected in Reset ButtonFunction.

- [Finisher Mode when Full Auto]: Specify the finisher function to be used as [Full Auto], when selected inReset Button Function.

- [Initial by Key Counter Insert]: Specify whether or not to resume the initial setting when the key counteror copy card is inserted.

- [Status Hold When Auto Reset]: Specify whether or not to resume the initial setting for the originalglass / ADF mode when the machine is reset.

- [Next Job Staple Setting]: Specify whether or not to deselect the Staple mode automatically when a jobusing Staple is completed.

- [Original Set/Bind Direction]: Specify whether or not to reset the Direction setting made for the originaland the Bind Direction setting made on the Output Setting Screen after completion of each job.





12.3.9 [05 Default Screen Setting]

Select the screen to be initially displayed (default) when the sub power switch is turned on.


2 Press [01 System Setting] and [05 Default Screen Setting] in sequence.

3 Select the desired initial screen.



Setting item Default Screen

[MACHINE] The Machine Screen will be displayed.

[JOB LIST/Hold Job] The Job List/Hold Job Screen will be displayed.

[JOB LIST/Reserved Job] The Job List/Reserved Job Screen will be displayed.





12.3

12.3.10 [06 Set Zoom Ratio Setting]

Specify the 3 Set Zoom Ratios provided on the Zoom Screen.

The initial setting for Set Zoom Ratio 1 is 4.000, Set Zoom Ratio 2 is 2.000, and Set Zoom Ratio 3 is 0.500.


2 Press [01 System Setting] and [06 Set Zoom Ratio Setting] in sequence.

3 Select the desired one from [Set Zoom Ratio 1] to [Set Zoom Ratio 3].

% Use the touch panel keypad to display the desired zoom ratio on the right side of the key.



In either case, the System Setting Menu Screen will be restored.





12.3.11 [07 Power Save Setting]

Select either Auto Low Power or Auto Shut OFF for the power save mode to be activated when Power Save is pressed on the control panel. Select also the period of time to elapse before Auto Low Power or Auto ShutOFF is activated.

Auto Low Power: OFF, 5 min., 10 min., 15 min., 30 min., 60 min., 90 min., 120 min., 240 min.

Auto Shut OFF: OFF, 1 min., 30 min., 60 min., 90 min., 120 min., 240 min.


2 Press [01 System Setting] and [07 Power Save Setting] in sequence.

3 Select the Power Save mode to be set manually by pressing Power Save on the control panel, bypressing [Auto Low Power] or [Auto Shut OFF].

4 Specify the period of time that must elapse before Auto Low Power is activated.

% Use the keys [+] and [,] provided under "Auto Low Power" on the right side of the screen to selectthe desired period of time. The default setting is 5 minutes.

% Select [---min.] to deactivate the Auto Low Power function.

NOTICE The period of time selected for Auto Low Power cannot exceed that selected for Auto Shut OFF. Thehighlighted indication of the time in Auto Low Power area will go dark when the same period of time asthat of Auto Shut OFF is selected. In this case, Auto Shut OFF will function instead of Auto Low Power.

5 Select the period of time that must elapse before Auto Shut OFF is activated.

% Use the keys [+] and [,] provided under "Auto Shut OFF" on the right side of the screen to selectthe desired period of time. The default setting is 30 minutes.

% Select [---min.] to deactivate the Auto Shut OFF function.







12.3

12.3.12 [08 Date/Time Setting]

Set the current date and time for built-in clock of the machine, and specify whether or not to activate the Day-light Saving Time function. With Daylight Saving Time activated, the time lag can be specified as desired. Al-so, use Time Zone to specify the time difference from the universal time. The Daylight Saving Time isdeactivated as default.


2 Press [01 System Setting] and [08 Date/Time Setting] in sequence.

3 Set the current date and time for built-in clock of the machine.

The screen shows the current setting of date and time, ordered by year, month, date, and time (in 24-hour expression).

% Use the touch panel keypad to enter the last two digits of the year.

% Press [Set] in the lower right corner of the touch panel keypad to fix the entry. The highlighted sec-tion shifts to the right. Repeat the same procedure for month, date, and time.

4 Set the Daylight Saving Time.

The Daylight Saving Time is deactivated as default.

% To activate the Daylight Saving Time, press [ON] on the right side of [Daylight Saving Time]. [DaylightSaving Time] will be highlighted on the screen.

% Use the touch panel keypad to enter the time to gain.

% Press [Set] in the lower right corner of the touch panel keypad to fix the entry.

5 Specify the time difference from the standard time.

This gives the time difference information at the same time when an e-mail is received. The time differ-ence is predefined for each country or region.

% Press [Time Zone], then enter the time difference from the touch panel keypad. (e.g. "-0600" for sixhours later than the universal time)

% Press [+/-] to display "+" for the local time earlier than the universal time, or "-" for the later.

% Press [Set] in the lower right corner of the touch panel keypad to fix the entry.







12.3.13 [09 Operation/Info. Sound Setting] - [01 Volume Setting]

Specify whether or not to enable the key operation sound (buzzer) or information sound and voice message(speaker), and also set the volume when they are turned on.


2 Press [01 System Setting], [09 Operation/Info. Sound Setting], and [01 Volume Setting] in sequence.

3 Set the buzzer using the keys provided under "Operation Sound (Buzzer)".

% Press [ON] to enable the key operation sound (buzzer), then select the desired volume.

% Press [OFF] to disable the key operation sound (buzzer).

4 Set the speaker using the keys provided under "Info. Sound/Voice (Speaker)".

% Press [ON] to enable the information sound and voice message (speaker), then select the desiredvolume.

% Press [OFF] to disable the information sound and voice message (speaker).


% To cancel the change, press [Cancel]. In either case, the Operation/Info. Sound Setting MenuScreen will be restored.





12.3

12.3.14 [09 Operation/Info. Sound Setting] - [02 Info. Sound Item Setting]

Specify the repeat count of information sound or voice message that sounds when a job stops due to papermisfeed or paper out, and also specify whether or not to enable the sound individually for given items.


2 Press [01 System Setting], [09 Operation/Info. Sound Setting], and [02 Info. Sound Item Setting] in se-quence.

3 Select the desired repeat count for each of the information sound and voice message, using the keysprovided under "Repeat Number Setting".

4 Set the information sound for the machine stoppage item by item, using the keys provided under "No-tice Set for Machine Stop".

% To enable the information sound, select the desired sound type. Press [Check] to check the selectedsound.

% Press [OFF] to disable the information sound.

5 Press [Next] in the lower left corner of the screen to continue the setting.

% The "Job Complete prenotice" provided under "Other Notification Setting" allows you to specifywhether or not to enable the information sound depending on the time to elapse before the job com-pletion. Press [Detail Setting], then select the desired time. Press [OK] to complete the setting andreturn to the previous screen.

% Setting keys of [For Sample Printing] are displayed on the screen when the machine is mounted withImage Controller IC-601.


% To cancel the change, press [Cancel]. In either case, the Operation/Info. Sound Setting Menu

Screen will be restored.





12.3.15 [10 Key Response Time]

Select the time interval to get the response from the machine when a key is pressed on the touch panel.


2 Press [01 System Setting] and [10 Key Response Time] in sequence.

3 Select the desired time.



12.3.16 [11 Shortcut Key Register]

Select the desired shortcut keys of the following settings to be displayed on the Copy Screen and ScanScreen in order to improve the operability.

- Up to 4 shortcut keys can be displayed under [Application] on the Copy Screen.

- Up to 4 shortcut keys can be displayed under [Quality Adj.] on the Copy Screen.

- Up to 4 shortcut keys can be displayed under [Quality Adj.] on the Scan Settings Screen of ScanScreen.

- Select either shortcuts or density setting to be displayed under [Quality Adj.] on the Copy Screen andScan Settings Screen of Scan Screen. With the density setting selected, the screen will not display thespecified shortcuts of [Quality Adj.] on the Copy Screen and Scan Settings Screen of Scan Screen.

- Up to 4 shortcut keys can be displayed under [Output Setting] on the Copy Screen.





12.3


2 Press [01 System Setting] and [11 Shortcut Key Register] in sequence.

3 To display the shortcut keys under [Application] on the Copy Screen, press [01 Application] to displaythe Application Shortcut Key Register Screen.

% Select the desired application function keys. Up to 4 keys can be selected.


The Shortcut Key Register Menu Screen will be restored.

5 To display the shortcut keys under [Quality Adj.] on the Copy Screen, press [02 Quality Adj. (Copy)] todisplay the Quality Adjustment (Copy) Shortcut Key Register Screen.

% Select the desired quality adjustment keys. Up to 4 keys can be selected.

6 Press [OK] to complete the setting. The Shortcut Key Register Menu Screen will be restored.

7 To display the shortcut keys under [Quality Adj.] on the Scan Settings Screen of Scan Screen, press [03Quality Adj. (Scanner)] to display the Quality Adjustment (Scan) Shortcut Key Register Screen.

% Select the desired quality adjustment keys. Up to 4 keys can be selected.


9 To select either shortcuts or density setting to be displayed under [Quality Adj.] on the Copy Screen andScan Settings Screen of Scan Screen, press [04 Quality Adj. Area Setting] to display the Quality Adjust-ment Area Setting Screen.

% Select either [Shortcut Display] or [Density Setting Display].






11 To display the shortcut keys under [Output Setting] on the Copy Screen, press [05 Output Setting] todisplay the Output Setting Shortcut Key Register Screen.

% Select the desired output setting keys. Up to 4 keys can be selected.

12.3.17 [12 Service Port Device Setting]

Specify whether or not to use a service port device. Also, select the keyboard type if the service port device

is used.


2 Press [01 System Setting] and [12 Service Port Device Setting] in sequence.

3 Select either [ON] or [OFF].

% When selecting [ON], also select the desired keyboard type.



NOTICE When using the service port device, contact your service representative.



[02 User Setting] - [02 Initial Setting]12


12.4

12.4 [02 User Setting] - [02 Initial Setting]

12.4.1 [01 Copy Initial Setting]

Besides the factory default setting (Full Auto), you can specify the desired copy conditions to be used as thedefault setting.

To resume your selections as default when the machine is reset, select [02 User Setting] - [01 System Setting]- [04 Reset Setting] - [02 Job Reset Setting] in sequence, and then select [Initialize] for Reset Button Functionand [OFF] for Mode Memory Auto Recall.


2 Press [02 Initial Setting] and [01 Copy Initial Setting] in sequence.

3 Specify the initial setting for each of following items: Original Setting, Quality Adjustment, Zoom, AutoZoom, Simplex/Duplex, Output Setting, Color, paper tray selection, Auto Paper, and Automatic ImageRotation ON/OFF. Follow the same procedure as setting them from the Copy Screen.

% Press [ADF] to specify the ADF mode as the initial setting.

% Application and Paper Setting cannot be specified.



In either case, the Initial Setting Menu Screen will be restored.




12.4 [02 User Setting] - [02 Initial Setting] 12

12.4.2 [02 Scan Initial Setting]

Besides the factory default setting (Full Auto), you can specify the desired scanning conditions to be used asthe default setting.

To resume your selections as default when the machine is reset, select [02 User Setting] - [01 System Setting]- [04 Reset Setting] - [02 Job Reset Setting] in sequence, and then select [Initialize] for Reset Button Function.


2 Press [02 Initial Setting] and [02 Scan Initial Setting] in sequence.

3 Specify the initial setting for each of following items: Original Setting, Quality Adjustment, Color, ColorSpace, Scan Size, Resolution, Simplex/Duplex, ADF, and Default Server. Follow the same procedureas setting them from the Scan Settings Screen of Scan Screen.

% Press [ADF] to specify the ADF mode as the initial setting.

% Zoom and File Type cannot be specified.



In either case, the Initial Setting Menu Screen will be restored.



[02 User Setting] - [03 Common Setting]12


12.5

12.5 [02 User Setting] - [03 Common Setting]


- [1 Shot Message Indication Time]: Select the time span to display a shot message, such as [Originalsize is A4], in the message area of the touch panel.

– 3 seconds, 5 seconds

- [Offset by Job Unit]: Specify whether or not to offset the output sheets by job.

– ON, OFF– Also specify the number of jobs to be offset when selecting ON for this function (default: 1).

- [Continuation Print]: Specify whether or not to output multiple reserve jobs in succession without stop-ping the machine at a job break.

– Copy ON, Copy OFF, Printer ON, Printer OFF

- [Stop Button Function]: Specify whether to pause or abort a job when Stop is pressed on the controlpanel.

– Job Temp. Stop, Job Stop Function

- [Back Side Magnification Adj.]: Specify whether or not to activate the back side magnification adjust-ment mode.

– ON, OFF

- [Tray Change Time]: Select the time to wait before copying becomes available when selecting anothertray loaded with different paper type after a copy/print job is completed.

– Short, Standard

- [Prior Paper Type]: Specify whether or not to maintain the temperature suitable for coated paper byturning the fixing unit roller.

– Others, Coated

- [Dash Length (Page Stamp)]: Select the length of the dash to be used in a style of [Page No.] in [Stamp].

– Long, Short

- [Center Crop Mark Trim Margin]: Specify the space between the center crop mark and image area(center crop mark trim margin).

– 0.0-20.0 mm (default: 1.0)

- [Schedule Cross Axle Unit (Init. Value)]: Select the unit of horizontal axis on the Schedule Screen.

– Timetable, Time Volume (m), Sheet Volume

- [Hold Job for Outputting (Init. Value)]: Specify whether or not to delete the output data of hold job.– Delete, Save

- [Destination for HDD Recall (Default)]: Select the desired operation from printing, holding, or both print-ing and holding for the job data recalled from the HDD.

– Print, Hold, Hold + Print

- [Offset Output Mode]: Specify how to offset the output sets.

– Change Out Pos., Partition Paper (Tray 1 to 5, PI 1, PI 2), Stop Print

- [Needless Tab Paper Exit]: Specify whether or not to automatically discharge the oddments of tabbedsheets loaded in a tray as a set.

– ON, OFF

- [Detect Double Feed JAM]: Specify whether or not to detect the double feed jam.

– ON, OFF

NOTICE [Center Crop Mark Trim Margin], [Schedule Cross Axle Unit (Init. Value)], [Hold Job for Outputting (Init. Value)],[Destination for HDD Recall (Default)], and [Detect Double Feed JAM] are displayed when the machine ismounted with Hard Disk Kit HD-514 and Preview Kit PH-102 .




12.5 [02 User Setting] - [03 Common Setting] 12


2 Press [03 Common Setting].

3 Make the desired selection for each item on the left side area of the screen.

% This setting screen has 2 pages to go through. Use [Next] or [Previous] to scroll.

% Selecting [ON] for [Offset by Job Unit] will display the Offset by Job Unit Screen. Use the touch panelkeypad to specify the number of jobs to be offset. Press [OK].



In either case, the User Setting Menu Screen will be restored.



[02 User Setting] - [04 Copy Setting]12


12.6

12.6 [02 User Setting] - [04 Copy Setting]


- [Fold & Staple Auto Selection]: Specify whether or not to automatically set the Booklet mode when Fold& Staple mode is selected.

– Yes, No

- [Orig. Glass Auto Size Select]: Specify whether or not to automatically select the same size of copy pa-per as the original when placed on the original glass.

– ON, OFF

- [ADF Auto Size Select]: Specify whether or not to automatically select the same size of copy paper asthe original when placed on the ADF.

– ON, OFF

- [Auto Zoom (Original Glass)]: Specify whether or not to automatically set an appropriate magnificationratio to correspond to the selected paper size when detecting the original size placed on the original

glass.

- [Auto Zoom (ADF)]: Specify whether or not to automatically set an appropriate magnification ratio tocorrespond to the selected paper size when detecting the original size placed on the ADF.

– ON, OFF

- [Non-Image Area Erase]: Specify the condition of Non-Image Area Erase function.

– Yes, APS/AMS, Except Orig. Glass (1:1)

- [ADF Frame Erase]: Specify the frame erase amount for copies made in ADF mode.

– None, 1 mm, 2 mm, 3 mm, 4 mm, 5 mm

- [Interruption Suspend Setting]: Set the timing to interrupt the current job when Interrupt is pressedwhile copying.

– Stop Immediately, When Current Comp.

- [Printer Prohibit Timer]: Set the time interval to suspend the print job via PC after the last operation oftouch keys.

– Off, 15 seconds, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90 seconds

- [Orig./Out Bind Direction Set]: Specify whether or not to conform the bind direction in Output Settingwith that specified in Original Setting.

– ON, OFF

- [Specify Default Tray APS OFF]: Specify the tray to be automatically selected when APS (Auto Paper)is canceled.

– APS Tray, Tray 1, Tray 2, Tray 3, Tray 4, Tray 5, Bypass

- [Scan Stop by Pull Out Tray]: Specify whether or not to stop the scanning operation if any tray is pulledout.

– ON, OFF




12.6 [02 User Setting] - [04 Copy Setting] 12


2 Press [04 Copy Setting].








[02 User Setting] - [05 Scan Setting]12


12.7

12.7 [02 User Setting] - [05 Scan Setting]


- [File Type Default E-mail]: Specify the default file type when sending scanned data in e-mail.

– Package PDF, Divided PDF, Package TIFF, Divided TIFF, Package XPS, Divided XPS, JPEG

- [File Type Default HDD]: Specify the default file type when sending scanned data to HDD.

- [File Type Default FTP]: Specify the default file type when sending scanned data via FTP.

– Package PDF, Divided PDF, Package TIFF, Divided TIFF, Package XPS, Divided XPS, JPEG- [File Type Default SMB]: Specify the default file type when sending scanned data via SMB.


- [Default Address]: Select the default destination to be displayed when selecting the Scan Screen.

– E-mail, HDD, FTP, SMB, Queue

- [Compress Method Color/Gray]: Specify the compression method to be used for scanned color/gray-scale image data.

– High Comp., Standard, Low Comp.


2 Press [05 Scan Setting].








12.8 [02 User Setting] - [06 Printer Setting] 12

12.8 [02 User Setting] - [06 Printer Setting]

12.8.1 [01 Gray Text Outline]

Select the process for gray text outline in printing. Specify the following items as desired.

- 600 dpi: Skeletonization, Outline Emphasis, Process Black Sensitivity, Thin Line Prevention

- 1200 dpi: Skeletonization, Outline Emphasis


2 Press [06 Printer Setting] and [01 Gray Text Outline] in sequence.

3 Select the desired process for each.


% To cancel the change, press [Cancel]. In either case, the Printer Setting Menu Screen will be re-stored.



[02 User Setting] - [07 Image Quality Setting]12


12.9

12.9 [02 User Setting] - [07 Image Quality Setting]

12.9.1 [ 01 Screen]

Enable or disable the use for each of three screens (Dot 2, Line 1, Line 2) out of those provided, i.e. exceptDot 1.


2 Press [09 Image Quality Setting] and [01 Screen] in sequence.

3 Specify the screens to be used.

% Dot 1 cannot be disabled.


% To cancel the change, press [Cancel]. In either case, the Image Quality Setting Menu Screen will berestored.

12.9.2 [02 Screen Initial Setting]

Specify the screen type to be used when [Text/Photo] or [Photo] mode is selected as original type.

- Full Color - Text/Photo:

– Line 1, Line 2, Dot 1, Dot 2, Stochastic

- Full Color - Photo:


- Black - Text/Photo:


- Black - Photo:

– Line 1, Line 2, Dot 1, Dot 2, Stochastic- Single Color - Text/Photo:


- Single Color - Photo:





12.9 [02 User Setting] - [07 Image Quality Setting] 12


2 Press [07 Image Quality Setting] and [02 Screen Initial Setting] in sequence.

3Select the desired keys.




In either case, the Image Quality Setting Menu Screen will be restored.

12.9.3 [03 Original Density Shift]

Specify the default density setting for each original type.

0 - 6 (Text/Photo: 3, Map: 3, Text: 3, Photo: 3)


2 Press [07 Image Quality Setting] and [03 Original Density Shift] in sequence.

3 Select an item to be specified using [+] and [,] keys.

4 Use the touch panel keypad to enter the desired value, then press [Set].

% Available range: 0 to +6

5 Press [Return].

The Image Quality Setting Menu Screen will be restored.



[02 User Setting] - [07 Image Quality Setting]12


12.9

12.9.4 [04 ACS Adjustment]

Adjust the automatic color detection function if a colored original is identified as monochrome or a mono-chrome original is identified as colored when using this function.


2 Press [07 Image Quality Setting] and [04 ACS Adjustment] in sequence.

3 Place the original onto the original glass, and then press [Scan].

Scanned result will be displayed in the message area.

4 If colored original is read as monochrome, enter a higher value from the touch panel keypad, then press[Set]. If monochrome original is read as colored, enter a lower value, then press [Set].

% Available range: -5 to +5

5 Repeat the adjustment steps from 3 to 4 until the desired result is obtained.

6 Press [Return].

The Image Quality Setting Menu Screen will be restored.




12.10 [02 User Setting] - [08 Password Change] 12

12.10 [02 User Setting] - [08 Password Change]

Users can change the password that an administrator has been set in combination with a user name (userpassword). The password changed in this setting will be used in the user authentication.

NOTICE Password change is unavailable on the machine without being configured for the user authentication.

NOTICE

Entries of both user name and password are required to change the password. You can change the passwordonly; user name cannot be changed here. The password paired with an account name (account password)cannot be changed.


2 Press [08 Password Change].

3 Press [User Name], then enter the registered user name. Press [OK].

4 Press [Current Password], then enter the current password. Press [OK].

5 Press [New Password], then enter a new user password. Press [OK].

6 Press [Input Confirmation] to reenter the new password. Press [OK].


% To cancel the change, press [Cancel]. In either case, the User Setting Menu Screen will be restored.



[03 Administrator Setting] - [01 System Setting]12


12.11

12.11 [03 Administrator Setting] - [01 System Setting]

12.11.1 [01 Power Save Setting]

Select either Auto Low Power or Auto Shut OFF for the power save mode to be activated when Power Save is pressed on the control panel. Select also the period of time to elapse before Auto Low Power or Auto ShutOFF is activated.

Auto Low Power: OFF, 5 min., 10 min., 15 min., 30 min., 60 min., 90 min., 120 min., 240 min.

Auto Shut OFF: OFF, 1 min., 30 min., 60 min., 90 min., 120 min., 240 min.

1 Follow the procedure on page 12-3 to display the Administrator Setting Menu Screen.

2 Press [01 System Setting] and [01 Power Save Setting] in sequence.

The Power Save Setting Screen will be displayed.

% For subsequent operations, follow the same procedure as that in [01 User Setting] - [01 System Set-ting] - [07 Power Save Setting]. See page 12-51 for details.




12.11 [03 Administrator Setting] - [01 System Setting] 12

12.11.2 [02 Date/Time Setting]

Set the current date and time for built-in clock of the machine, and specify whether or not to activate the Day-light Saving Time function.

With Daylight Saving Time activated, the time lag can be specified as desired. Also, use Time Zone to specifythe time difference from the universal time.

The Daylight Saving Time is deactivated as default.


2 Press [01 System Setting] and [02 Date/Time Setting] in sequence.

The Date/Time Setting Screen will be displayed.

% For subsequent operations, follow the same procedure as that in [01 User Setting] - [01 System Set-ting] - [08 Date/Time Setting]. See page 12-52 for details.





12.11

12.11.3 [03 Weekly Timer Setting] - [01 Weekly Timer ON/OFF Setting]

The Weekly Timer is a management function provided in Administrator Setting, which shuts down the ma-chine power on a daily or hourly basis.

In this section, specify whether or not to use the Weekly Timer. The Weekly Timer is not activated as factorydefault.

Conditions required to use the Weekly Timer:

- The power plug is inserted into the wall socket. (The Weekly Timer does not function when the powerplug is disconnected, while the data such as the ON/OFF time are stored.)

- The sub power switch is turned on.

- The current date and time are correctly set.


2 Press [01 System Setting], [03 Weekly Timer Setting], and [01 Weekly Timer ON/OFF Setting] in se-quence.

3 Select either [Weekly Timer ON] or [Weekly Timer OFF].

NOTICE The default setting is [Weekly Timer OFF]. Selecting [Weekly Timer ON] will activate the Weekly Timer.For the machine with the Weekly Timer activated, the sub power switch should be kept turned on. Se- lecting [Weekly Timer OFF] will deactivate the Weekly Timer. Use the sub power switch to turn on/offthe machine power.


% To cancel the change, press [Cancel]. In either case, the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen will berestored.





12.11.4 [03 Weekly Timer Setting] - [02 Time Setting]

Set the ON/OFF time in hours and minutes for each day of the week, or set the time collectively for an entireweek.

NOTICE Even if ON/OFF time is specified here, [Date Setting] (see page 12-74 ) still needs to be made in order to activate the timer. Setting ON/OFF times for holidays will not turn on the machine power on those holidays.

If specified ON-time and OFF-time are the same, the power will not be turned on even on a machine workingday.


2 Press [01 System Setting], [03 Weekly Timer Setting], and [02 Time Setting] in sequence.

3 Set the ON/OFF time collectively for an entire week.

% Press [Daily Setting] to display the Daily Setting Screen.

% Select the day(s) of the week to be collectively set.

% Use the touch panel keypad or the control panel keypad to enter the desired ON/OFF time. Press[Set] to shift the highlighted area.

% Press [OK] to return to the Time Setting Screen.

4 Enter the ON/OFF time for each day.

% Press [Set] to select the ON time for the desired day of the week.

% Use the touch panel keypad or the control panel keypad to enter the desired time. Press [Set] toshift the highlighted area.

% Repeat the procedure above to enter all ON/OFF times needed.


% To cancel the change, press [Cancel]. In either case, the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen will be

restored.





12.11

12.11.5 [03 Weekly Timer Setting] - [03 Date Setting]

Set the timer on/off for a given day of a given month, according to the ON/OFF times specified in Time Set-ting. Set the ON/OFF condition for specific days individually or collectively for all Mondays through Sundaysof the given month.

NOTICE The default setting is collective: ON for Mondays through Saturdays, and OFF for Sundays.


2 Press [01 System Setting], [03 Weekly Timer Setting], and [03 Date Setting] in sequence.

3 To collectively set the ON/OFF condition for the entire month by the day of the week, use the Daily Set-ting provided at the bottom of the screen.

% Pressing either [ON] or [OFF] will display the confirmation dialog. Press [Yes] to fix the change madein the Daily Setting. Or, press [No] to cancel the change.

% The settings made in the Daily Setting will supersede settings made for individual days.

4 To individually set the ON/OFF condition for the entire month, use the calendar displayed in the centerof the screen.

% Press the key of the desired day to change the setting.

% Use [+] and [,] to scroll to the desired year/month.







12.11.6 [03 Weekly Timer Setting] - [04 Select Time for Power Save]

The Weekly Timer, when activated, turns the machine power on/off once a day according to the specifiedON/OFF time.

This function sets an off-time interval while the machine is powered under control of the Weekly Timer, con-sequently turns the machine power on and off once more in a day.

Only one off-time interval can be specified for all days of the week.

NOTICE This function will be ineffective if specified off-time interval does not fall within the working time of the machine.

This function is deactivated as factory default.


2 Press [01 System Setting], [03 Weekly Timer Setting], and [04 Select Time for Power Save] in sequence.

3 Select [Function Valid], then set the OFF time and Restart time.

% Use the touch panel keypad or the control panel keypad to enter the desired OFF time (in 24-hourexpression). Press [Set], then similarly enter the Restart time.

% Selecting [Function Invalid] will deactivate this function.







12.11

12.11.7 [03 Weekly Timer Setting] - [05 Password for Non-Business Hours]

This machine can be turned on with a specific password entered after Power Save is pressed on the controlpanel, even in off condition according to the Weekly Timer.

This section describes how to set a 4-digit password required to use the machine in non-business hours.With this password specified and entered after Power Save is pressed on the control panel, the machineallows you to specify the duration of use as desired.


2 Press [01 System Setting], [03 Weekly Timer Setting], and [05 Password for Non-Business Hours] in se-quence.

3 Use the touch panel keypad or the control panel keypad to enter the desired 4-digit password.

NOTICE If the password is set to "0000", the machine can be used simply by pressing Power Save on the control panel during off hours. In this case, you will be asked to enter the duration of use (the time to elapsebefore the machine power is turned off again). The factory default setting is 0000.







12.11.8 [04 Restrict User Access] - [01 Lock/Delete Mode Memory] - [01 Copy ModeMemory]

Lock copy job settings stored in Mode Memory to avoid being erased while making another entry. Lockedmode memory can also be released, or deleted from this setting screen.


2 Press [01 System Setting], [04 Restrict User Access], [01 Lock/Delete Mode Memory], and [01 CopyMode Memory] in sequence.

3 Lock/unlock a mode memory.

% A specified name shows on the right side of the entry number, if that entry has already been made.

% Press the key on the left side of the desired number to lock the entry, with a lock mark displayed onthat key.

% Pressing the locked key will clear the lock mark and release the lock.

% Pressing the key without a name entered will neither lock the entry nor display the lock mark.

4 Delete a mode memory.

% Select the entry number you want to delete.

% Pressing [Delete] will delete the selected entry and the name of it. The highlighted key restores nor-mal display.

NOTICE Locked entry of Mode Memory can also be deleted. Note that the entry once deleted cannot be recalled.

Up to 30 job settings can be stored in Mode Memory. Use [Next] or [Previous] to scroll to the desiredentry.



In either case, the Lock/Delete Mode Memory Menu Screen will be restored.





12.11

12.11.9 [04 Restrict User Access] - [01 Lock/Delete Mode Memory] - [02 Scan ModeMemory]

Lock scan job settings stored in Mode Memory to avoid being erased while making another entry. Lockedmode memory can also be released, or deleted from this setting screen.


2 Press [01 System Setting], [04 Restrict User Access], [01 Lock/Delete Mode Memory], and [02 ScanMode Memory] in sequence.

3 Lock/unlock a mode memory.

% A specified name shows on the right side of the entry number, if that entry has already been made.

% Press the key on the left side of the desired number to lock the entry, with a lock mark displayed onthat key.

% Pressing the locked key will clear the lock mark and release the lock.

% Pressing the key without a name entered will neither lock the entry nor display the lock mark.

4 Delete a mode memory.

% Select the entry number you want to delete.

% Pressing [Delete] will delete the selected entry and the name of it. The highlighted key restores nor-mal display.

NOTICE Locked entry of Mode Memory can also be deleted. Note that the entry once deleted cannot be recalled.

Up to 30 job settings can be stored in Mode Memory. Use [Next] or [Previous] to scroll to the desiredentry.



In either case, the Lock/Delete Mode Memory Menu Screen will be restored.





12.11.10 [04 Restrict User Access] - [02 Change Restrict Setting]

Select whether to allow or restrict the following items.


2 Press [01 System Setting], [04 Restrict User Access], and [02 Change Restrict Setting] in sequence.

3 Select [Allow] or [Restrict] for each of Change Address Registration and Change Set Zoom.


% To cancel the change, press [Cancel].In either case, the Restrict User Access Menu Screen will be restored.

Setting item

Change Address Registra-tion:

Allow/Restrict entering a sender address manually on the Scan Screen.

Change Set Zoom: Allow/Restrict changing programmed magnification ratios.





12.11

12.11.11 [04 Restrict User Access] - [03 Scan Restrict Setting]

Allow/Restrict sending scanned data to the following devices.

- E-mail

- FTP

- HDD

- SMB

- Queue

- Manual Setting


2 Press [01 System Setting], [04 Restrict User Access], and [03 Scan Restrict Setting] in sequence.

3 Select [Allow] or [Restrict] for each of E-mail, FTP, HDD, SMB, Queue, and Manual Setting.



In either case, the Restrict User Access Menu Screen will be restored.





12.11.12 [04 Restrict User Access] - [04 Sample Print Restrict]

Specify whether or not to allow the use of sample print function.

This function is available when the machine is mounted with Image Controller IC-601.


2 Press [01 System Setting], [04 Restrict User Access], and [04 Sample Print Restrict] in sequence.

3 Select either [Allow] or [Restrict].



In either case, the Restrict User Access Menu Screen will be restored.

Setting item Description

[Allow] Allows the use of sample print function.

[Restrict] Restricts the use of sample print function.





12.11

12.11.13 [05 Expert Adjustment] - [01 AES Level Adjustment]

Change the color/black density level to be applied when [Auto] is selected for [Copy Density] in [Quality Ad- justment] on the Copy Screen.


2 Press [01 System Setting], [05 Expert Adjustment], and [01 AES Level Adjustment] in sequence.

3 Select the desired level for each of [Color] and [Black].



In either case, the Expert Adjustment Menu Screen will be restored.





12.11.14 [05 Expert Adjustment] - [02 Erase Correction] - [01 Non-Image Area Erase]

The following three options are provided to specify the condition of Non-Image Area Erase function.

- [Erase Outside of Original]: Always erase the outside area of the original.

- [ON - APS/AMS Only]: Erase the outside area of the original only when Auto Paper or Auto Zoom isactivated.

- [Except Orig. Glass (1:1)]: Erase the outside area except when making a same-sized copy as the originalscanned from the original glass.


2 Press [01 System Setting], [05 Expert Adjustment], [02 Erase Correction], and [01 Non-Image AreaErase] in sequence.

The Original Scan Area Setting Screen will be displayed.

3 Select the desired setting key.



In either case, the Erase Correction Menu Screen will be restored.





12.11

12.11.15 [05 Expert Adjustment] - [02 Erase Correction] - [02 ADF Frame Erase]

Set Frame Erase to function anytime when copying in ADF mode, and set the amount of the outside area tobe deleted.


2 Press [01 System Setting], [05 Expert Adjustment], []02 Erase Correction[, and 02 ADF Frame Erase] insequence.

The Original Scan Area Setting Screen will be displayed.

3 Select the desired setting key.



In either case, the Erase Correction Menu Screen will be restored.





12.11.16 [05 Expert Adjustment] - [03 Printer Adjustment] - [01 Restart Timing Adjust-ment]

Adjust the image position of lead edge in paper feed direction in the printer engine.

This operation is the same as that in [Adjustment] - [01 Machine Adjustment] - [01 Printer Adjustment] - [01Restart Timing Adjustment], accessed from the Machine Screen.

NOTICE

Make this adjustment after completing the FD-Mag. Adjustment.


2 Press [01 System Setting], [05 Expert Adjustment], [03 Printer Adjustment], and [01 Restart Timing Ad- justment] in sequence.


% Please refer to page 11-12 for details of subsequent operations.





12.11

12.11.17 [05 Expert Adjustment] - [03 Printer Adjustment] - [02 Centering Adjustment]

Adjust the image position in crosswise direction in the printer engine.

This operation is the same as that in [Adjustment] - [01 Machine Adjustment] - [01 Printer Adjustment] - [02Centering Adjustment], accessed from the Machine Screen.

NOTICE Make this adjustment after completing the CD-Mag. Adjustment.


2 Press [01 System Setting], [05 Expert Adjustment], [03 Printer Adjustment], and [02 Centering Adjust-ment] in sequence.







12.11.18 [05 Expert Adjustment] - [03 Printer Adjustment] - [03 FD-Mag. Adjustment]

This adjustment value will be the standard for Both Sides Adjust in Paper Setting. Adjust the magnification inpaper feed direction in the printer engine.

This operation is the same as that in [Adjustment] - [01 Machine Adjustment] - [01 Printer Adjustment] - [03FD-Mag. Adjustment], accessed from the Machine Screen.

NOTICE

Perform this adjustment after completing the registroller line speed adjustment.


2 Press [01 System Setting], [05 Expert Adjustment], [03 Printer Adjustment], and [03 FD-Mag. Adjust-ment] in sequence.







12.11

12.11.19 [05 Expert Adjustment] - [03 Printer Adjustment] - [04 CD-Mag. Adjustment]

Adjust the magnification in crosswise direction in the printer engine.

This operation is the same as that in [Adjustment] - [01 Machine Adjustment] - [01 Printer Adjustment] - [04CD-Mag. Adjustment] accessed from the Machine Screen.


2 Press [01 System Setting], [05 Expert Adjustment], [03 Printer Adjustment], and [04 CD-Mag. Adjust-ment] in sequence.

The CD-Mag. Adjustment Screen will be displayed.






12.11.20 [05 Expert Adjustment] - [03 Printer Adjustment] - [05 Lead Edge Erase Ad- justment]

Adjust the amount of image erase from the edge of the sheet.


2 Press [01 System Setting], [05 Expert Adjustment], [03 Printer Adjustment], and [05 Lead Edge Erase Adjustment] in sequence.

The Lead Edge Erase Adjustment Screen will be displayed.



4 Select A3 w paper tray, then press Start on the control panel.

A sample pattern will be output.

Press [Exit Print Mode] to return to the Lead Edge Erase Adjustment Screen.

5 Measure the resultant restart timing.

6 If any adjustment is required, enter the desired adjustment value using the touch panel keypad.


% Press [Set] to change the current value.

% Adjustment Range: -20 to +40 (1 step = 0.1 mm)







12.11

12.11.21 [05 Expert Adjustment] - [03 Printer Adjustment] - [06 Registration Loop Adj.]

Adjust the paper loop amount in registration roller section. This adjustment is required when output papershows skew or wrinkles, or paper misfeed occurs in registration roller section.

Objects of Adjustment: Tray 1 Large Size to Tray 5 Large Size, Tray 1 Small Size to Tray 5 Small Size, BypassLarge Size, Bypass Small Size, ADU Large Size, ADU Small Size, ADU Plain/W Under 150 mm, ADU Thick/WUnder 150 mm, Thick


2 Press [01 System Setting], [05 Expert Adjustment], [03 Printer Adjustment], and [06 Registration Loop Adj.] in sequence.

The Registration Loop Adjustment Screen will be displayed.




5 Select A3 w for the tray to be adjusted, then press Start on the control panel.

The sample pattern will be output.

6 Check the sample pattern.

7 If any adjustment is required, press [Exit Print Mode] to return to the Registration Loop AdjustmentScreen.




% Adjustment Range: -99 (smaller) to +99 (larger) (1 step = 0.1 mm)







12.11.22 [05 Expert Adjustment] - [03 Printer Adjustment] - [07 Pre-registration Adj.]

Adjust the paper loop amount in pre-registration roller section of the trays. This adjustment is required whenoutput paper shows skew or wrinkles, or paper misfeed occurs in registration roller section.

Objects of Adjustment: Tray 1, Tray 2, Tray 3, Tray 4, Tray 5, ADU Large Size, ADU Small Size, ADU ThickPaper


2 Press [01 System Setting], [05 Expert Adjustment], [03 Printer Adjustment], and [07 Pre-registration Adj.] in sequence.

The Pre-registration Adjustment Screen will be displayed.




5 Select A3 w for the tray to be adjusted, then press Start on the control panel.

The sample pattern will be output.

6 Check the sample pattern.

7 If any adjustment is required, press [Exit Print Mode] to return to the Pre-registration AdjustmentScreen.




% Adjustment Range: -99 (smaller) to +99 (larger) (1 step = 0.1 mm)







12.11

12.11.23 [05 Expert Adjustment] - [04 Finisher Adjustment]

Make adjustments related to the finisher.

This operation is the same as that in [Adjustment] - [03 Finisher Adjustment] accessed from the MachineScreen.


2 Press [01 System Setting], [05 Expert Adjustment], and [04 Finisher Adjustment] in sequence.

The Finisher Adjustment Menu Screen will be displayed.


12.11.24 [05 Expert Adjustment] - [05 Scan Adjustment]

Make adjustments related to scanning function.

This adjustment can also be performed by selecting [Adjustment] - [01 Machine Adjustment] - [02 Scanner Adjustment] from the Machine Screen.


2 Press [01 System Setting], [05 Expert Adjustment], and [05 Scan Adjustment] in sequence.

The Scan Adjustment Screen will be displayed.






12.11.25 [05 Expert Adjustment] - [06 Process Adjustment] - [01 Front & Back Density]

Specify the adjustment value for front and back transfer output voltage automatically set by the machine.


2 Press [01 System Setting], [05 Expert Adjustment], [06 Process Adjustment], and [01 Front & Back Den-sity] in sequence.

3 Select the item to be adjusted.




% Adjustment Range: -3 to +3

5 Press [Return] to restore the Process Adjustment Menu Screen.





12.11

12.11.26 [05 Expert Adjustment] - [06 Process Adjustment] - [02 Toner Density SensorSpeed]

Readjust the value of toner density control voltage in 3/4 and 1/2 line speeds in order to clear the problemssuch as image overlap or toner scattering, mainly caused by instability of toner density.


2 Press [01 System Setting], [05 Expert Adjustment], [06 Process Adjustment], and [02 Toner DensitySensor Speed] in sequence.

3 Press [Start] to display the adjustment values.

% To cancel the checking operation, press [Stop].

4 Press [Return] to restore the Process Adjustment Menu Screen.





12.11.27 [05 Expert Adjustment] - [06 Process Adjustment] - [03 Maximum Density Adjustment]

Adjust the maximum density for each of Y, M, C, and K.

NOTICE The machine will start the Gamma Automatic Adjustment after you change the maximum density and exit theUtility mode. When the Gamma Automatic Adjustment is completed, proceed to the calibration with the printer controller.

Be sure to perform Color Density Manual Control after changing the maximum density.


2 Press [01 System Setting], [05 Expert Adjustment], [06 Process Adjustment], and [03 Maximum Density Adjustment] in sequence.

3 Select the desired density value for each of C, M, Y, and K.


% To cancel the change, press [Cancel]. In either case, the Process Adjustment Menu Screen will berestored.





12.11

12.11.28 [05 Expert Adjustment] - [07 Quality Adjustment] - [01 Printer Gamma Offset Adj.]

Change the printer gamma curve to adjust the gradation and background density in highlights. This adjust-ment is required when the color reproducibility varies depending on the selection of screen in copy mode.

NOTICE Make this adjustment after completing the Gamma Automatic Adjustment.

NOTICE For the machine with ADF equipped, the Printer Gamma Offset Automatic Adjustment is to be made for theprinter gamma adjustment. Make this adjustment especially when the printer gamma requires to be finely adjusted.

NOTICE This adjustment is not necessary if you make the adjustment "05 Color Density Control" in the Adjustmentmode.


2 Press [01 System Setting], [05 Expert Adjustment], [07 Quality Adjustment], and [01 Printer Gamma Off-set Adj.] in sequence.

The Printer Gamma Offset Adjustment Screen will be displayed.

3 Use [Next] and [Previous] to select the screen to be adjusted.

% Contone is the screen used in texts when Line 1, Line 2, Dot 1, or Dot 2 is used, and consequentlydoes not require this adjustment.



5 Select A4 w, then press Start on the control panel.

A test chart will be output.

6 Press [Exit Print Mode] to return to the Printer Gamma Offset Adjustment Screen.






Check that the highlights of C and K start uniformly and appear aligned to the gray base line [1].

8 Make an adjustment, if required.

Press the color key (C or K) to be adjusted, then use the touch panel keypad or control panel keypad to enter the desired adjustment value.



% Adjustment Range: -128 (lighter) to +127 (darker)


10 Next, focusing on the gray gradation pattern [1] created with C, M, and Y, check that the gray balanceshows uniformity in the sections of square marks [2] and [3].

If the gray balance shows any difference, press the color key (Y or M) to be adjusted, then use the touchpanel keypad or control panel keypad to enter the desired adjustment value.



% Adjustment Range: -128 (lighter) to +127 (darker)Follow the procedure below to adjust the gray balance.

% Focus on the 49 gray patches [4] created with C, M, and Y. These 49 patches show that M becomesdeeper to the right, and Y becomes deeper to the bottom. C is fixed. The color of the patch in thecenter [5] is the same as the gray [2].

% The color of the patches at four corners [6] of the patch [5] is the same as the gray [3]. Select thegray of the same hue as that of the gray [6] from among 49 patches.

% When the appropriate patch is located in the lower right area of the central patch [5]: Adjust M andY to the positive direction.

% When the appropriate patch is located in the upper left area of the central patch [5]: Adjust M andY to the negative direction.







12.11

12 Select A4 w, then press Start on the control panel.

A test chart will be output.

13 Press [Exit Print Mode] to return to the Printer Gamma Offset Adjustment Screen.



12.11.29 [05 Expert Adjustment] - [07 Quality Adjustment] - [02 Printer Gamma Offset Auto.]

Change the printer gamma curve automatically to adjust the gradation and background density in highlights.

Use this function when the color reproducibility varies depending on the selection of screen for each of [Line1], [Line 2], [Dot 1], [Dot 2], and [Stochastic].


NOTICE Please use plain paper or white paper for color printing in this adjustment. Using colored paper cannot make

this adjustment properly, affecting the color of output test pattern.

NOTICE Normally, this adjustment is made as the printer gamma adjustment. Perform [01 Printer Gamma Offset Adj.]if fine adjustment is needed.






2 Press [01 System Setting], [05 Expert Adjustment], [07 Quality Adjustment], and [02 Printer Gamma Off-set Auto.] in sequence.

The Printer Gamma Offset Automatic Adjustment Screen will be displayed.

3 Use [Next] and [Previous] to select the screen to be adjusted.

% Contone is the screen used in texts when Line 1, Line 2, Dot 1, or Dot 2 is used, and consequentlydoes not require this adjustment.

4 Press [Readjust].

% If the gradation appears widely misaligned in highlights of the image, press [Reset Adj. Data] to setthe printer gamma offset adjustment value to "0", then press [Readjust].

A dialog will be displayed for confirmation of readjustment.

5 Press [Yes].

Or, press [No] to cancel the readjustment.



7 Select A4 v paper tray, then press Start on the control panel.

A test pattern will be output, and the Printer Gamma Offset Automatic Adjustment Screen will be re-stored automatically.

8 Place the test pattern on the original glass.

% Position the test pattern [1] face down, with green arrow [2] pointing at the left side.

% Carefully align the test pattern [1] to the vertical original size guide [3] and horizontal original size

guide [4] on the original glass.% Place about 10 sheets of blank copy paper on top of the test pattern [1].

% Close the ADF.





12.11

9 Press [Start] on the screen, or Start on the control panel. The current data of YMCK will be updated.

NOTICE Since the machine does not determine the adjustment data to be effective or not for the first scanning,the message [Completed normally] will not be displayed. Repeat the steps from 6 to 9 until the message

[Completed normally] is displayed.NOTICE If an error code (Error 1, 2, or 10) is displayed, check that the test pattern is positioned properly.

If any other error code is displayed, please contact your service representative.

10 Check that the message [Completed normally] is displayed.

11 If any message other than [Completed normally] is displayed, repeat the steps from 6 to 10.

12 Press [Return] to restore the Quality Adjustment Menu Screen.

12.11.30 [05 Expert Adjustment] - [07 Quality Adjustment] - [03 Printer Gamma Sensor

Adj.]The printer gamma correction is periodically and automatically made on this machine. The automatic gammacorrection uses an IDC sensor to scan the pattern on the transfer belt. Should the IDC sensor be change incharacteristics, the automatic gamma correction may not be performed properly. The printer gamma sensoradjustment allows you to correct the IDC sensor using the scanner, in order to make the gamma correctionproperly.


NOTICE Please use plain paper or white paper for color printing in this adjustment, otherwise it cannot be performedproperly due to the color of paper affecting the color of output test pattern.

NOTICE To restore the factory default data, press [Reset Adj. Data] to reset it.






2 Press [01 System Setting], [05 Expert Adjustment], [07 Quality Adjustment], and [03 Printer Gamma

Sensor Adj.] in sequence.

The Printer Gamma Sensor Adjustment Screen will be displayed.

3 Select the screen to be adjusted.

% The screens provided here are the same as those provided in the Printer Gamma Offset Adjustment.

% To clear the colorimetric data currently set on the machine and restore the factory default data,press [Reset Adj. data]. Press [Yes] on the dialog. Or, press [No] to cancel resetting the data.



5 Select A4 v paper tray, then press Start on the control panel.

A test pattern will be output, and the Printer Gamma Sensor Adjustment Screen will be restored auto-matically.

6 Place the test pattern on the original glass.

% Position the test pattern [1] face down, with green arrow [2] pointing at the left side.

% Carefully align the test pattern [1] to the vertical original size guide [3] and horizontal original sizeguide [4].

% Place about 10 sheets of blank copy paper on top of the test pattern [1].

% Close the ADF.





12.11

7 Press [Start] on the screen, or Start on the control panel. The machine starts the adjustment automat-ically.

% If any failure is found, an error code will be displayed to indicate the cause for each. Consult thefollowing table to fix the errors.

8 Repeat the steps from 4 to 7 until the message [Completed] is displayed.

9 Press [Return] to restore the Quality Adjustment Menu Screen.

Error code Error Cause

Error 1 Register marks cannot be detected. Chart is positioned incorrectly.

Error 2 Chart is positioned upside down. Chart is positioned incorrectly.

Error 3 Pattern of chart cannot be detected. Wrong chart is used.

Error 4 Adjustment is unavailable. Software bug

Error 5 Out of standard range Readjustment

Error 6 Nonvolatile data error Check the installation of memory board.

Error 7 Accessed undesignated memory. Software bug

Error 8 Error related to memory Software bug

Error 9 Program error Software bug

Error 10 Chart is skew. Chart is positioned incorrectly.

Error 11 Failed in scanning the image header in-formation.

Software bug

Error 12 RGB data error Wrong chart or software bug

Error 13 Parameter setting error Software bug

Error 31 Abnormal sensor data Readjustment

Error 51 Regression calculation error Readjustment

Error 52 Array number overflow Software bug

Error 53 Regression order error Software bug

Error 54 Selected screen information error Software bug

Error 55 Color information error Software bug

[3]

[2]

[4]

[1]





12.11.31 [05 Expert Adjustment] - [07 Quality Adjustment] - [04 Stabilization Adj. Set-ting]

Set priority to either output speed or image quality stability for each of copy job and print job. When selectingthe image quality stability, specify the frequency of gamma correction and maximum density correction indi-vidually for copy job and print job.


2 Press [01 System Setting], [05 Expert Adjustment], [07 Quality Adjustment], and [04 Stabilization Adj.Setting] in sequence.

The Stabilization Adj. Setting Screen will be displayed.

3 Select either [Speed] or [Stability] on the right side of [Copy Job] to give priority in output.

Select either [Speed] or [Stability] on the right side of [Printer Job] to give priority in output.

Selection can be made individually for [Copy Job] and [Printer Job].

4When selecting the image quality stability, the correction operation can be customized for that job.

Select one of the desired frequency level from [-2] to [+2] for each of [Gamma Correction] and [Maxi-mum Density Correction].

For [Gamma Correction], you can also select [None].


% To cancel the change, press [Cancel]. In either case, the Quality Adjustment Menu Screen will berestored.





12.11

12.11.32 [05 Expert Adjustment] - [07 Quality Adjustment] - [05 Custom Screen]

Select a screen type to be used for each of line screens (Line 1, Line 2), dot screens (Dot 1, Dot 2), and Sto-chastic.

The line screens and dot screens available to select a screen type here are those allowed in the User Setting,accessed from [Image Quality Setting] - [01 Screen] on the menu. If [Restrict] is specified for Line 1, Line 2,or Dot 2, selection for those screens will be unavailable.

Stochastic, however, is always available.

Each screen type has a feature as described below. Use this information as a guide to select an appropriateone.

Line screen (Line 1, Line 2)

Dot screen (Dot 1, Dot 2)

Stochastic

NOTICE The machine will automatically start the Gamma Adjustment after you change the screen type and exit theUtility mode. When the Gamma Adjustment is completed, please proceed to the Printer Gamma Offset Ad- justment for the changed screen type.

d ReferenceSee page 12-96 for details of the Printer Gamma Offset Adjustment.

Type Description

Line 200 Uses fine lines to reproduce an image. Suitable for office documents includinggraphs.

Line 190 Uses dots and lines to reproduce an image. Suitable for office documents includ-ing photos.

Line 180 Uses lines to reproduce an image. Suitable for office documents.

Line 150 Uses lines to reproduce an image. Suitable for black-and-white printing.

Wave Uses large wave lines to reproduce an image. This screen type can help preventforgery, as images deteriorate when color-printed from the original previously re-produced using this screen.

Type Description

Dot 270 Uses ultrafine dots to reproduce an image. Suitable for printing maps including finepatterns and small texts.

Dot 190 Uses fine dots to reproduce an image. Suitable for printing catalogs.

Dot 170 Uses dots to reproduce an image. Suitable for printing color photos.

Dot 130 Uses dots to reproduce an image. Suitable for printing black-and-white photos.

Dot 095 Uses dots to reproduce an image. Suitable for printing posters.

Type Description

ED 1 Uses aperiodic (coarse) dots to reproduce an image. Suitable for normal copying.

ED 2 Uses aperiodic dots to reproduce an image. Black texts can be finely reproduced.Suitable for copying office documents.

ED 3 Uses aperiodic dots to reproduce an image. Black texts can be finely reproduced.Suitable for copying office documents.

FM 1 Uses aperiodic dots to reproduce an image. Suitable for printing photos of clothesor textiles finely designed.

FM 2 Uses aperiodic dots to reproduce an image. Suitable for printing maps.






2 Press [01 System Setting], [05 Expert Adjustment], [07 Quality Adjustment], and [05 Custom Screen] insequence.

The Custom Screen Setting Screen will be displayed.

3 Select the desired screen type according to the print type for each.


% To cancel the change, press [Cancel]. In either case, the Quality Adjustment Menu Screen will berestored.

5 If you have changed the screen type, press [Exit] on the Quality Adjustment Menu Screen to return tothe Machine Screen.

The Gamma Adjustment will start automatically.

6 When the Gamma Adjustment is completed, reenter the Administrator Setting mode and proceed to the

Printer Gamma Offset Adjustment for the changed screen type.





12.11

12.11.33 [05 Expert Adjustment] - [08 Execute Adjust Operation]

Execute adjustment operations of [Gamma Automatic Adjustment], [Color Registration Auto Adj.], [Toner Re-fresh Mode], and [Belt Refresh Mode].

This operation is the same as that in [Adjustment] - [03 Execute Adjust Operation] accessed from the MachineScreen.


2 Press [01 System Setting], [05 Expert Adjustment], and [08 Execute Adjust Operation] in sequence.

The Execute Adjust Operation Screen will be displayed.

3 Select the desired adjustment.

4 Press [OK] to execute the selected adjustment.

% To cancel the operation, press [Cancel]. In either case, the Expert Adjustment Menu Screen will berestored.

12.11.34 [06 List/Counter]

Use this function to print out the list selected from the following items.

- Mode Memory List: Programed contents of Mode Memory

- User Management List: Settings made by users

- Use Management List: Information to be managed by user authentication/account track

- Font Pattern List: Font patterns used in the machine

- Audit Log Report: Audit logs

Also, collectively save the list and report mentioned above on the USB flash drive connected to the USB port.






2 Press [01 System Setting] and [06 List/Counter] in sequence.

3 Select the list or audit log report to be printed out.



5 Press Start on the control panel to start printing.

% To suspend printing, press Stop on the control panel.

% When printing is completed, press [Exit Print Mode] to return to the List/Counter Screen.

6 To save the data of lists and reports collectively on a USB flash drive, press [Output All to USB].

% Connect the USB flash drive to a USB port, then press [OK].

% Press [OK] on the dialog for completion.

7 Press [Return].

The System Setting Menu Screen will be restored.





12.11

12.11.35 [07 Size Setting] - [01 Orig. Glass Size Search]

Specify the size system of the original to be detected on the original glass.

[Full Size]: Detect all size systems of Metric A, Metric B, and Inch series (detectable sizes for each will be lessthan individual series specified).

[Metric A/B]: Detect Metric A/B series.

[Inch Series]: Detect Inch series.

[Only Metric A]: Detect Metric A series only.


2 Press [01 System Setting], [07 Size Setting], and [01 Orig. Glass Size Search] in sequence.

3 Select the desired one of the keys provided on the screen.



In either case, the Size Setting Menu Screen will be restored.

12.11.36 [07 Size Setting] - [02 ADF Original Size Search]

Specify the size system of the original to be detected in the ADF.

[Full Size]: Detect all size systems of Metric A, Metric B, and Inch series (detectable sizes for each will be lessthan individual series specified).

[Metric A/B]: Detect Metric A/B series.

[Inch Series]: Detect Inch series.

[Only Metric A]: Detect Metric A series only.






2 Press [01 System Setting], [07 Size Setting], and [02 ADF Original Size Search] in sequence.





12.11.37 [07 Size Setting] - [03 Original Glass Small Size]

Specify the minimum original size to be detected on the original glass.


2 Press [01 System Setting], [07 Size Setting], and [03 Original Glass Small Size] in sequence.









12.11

12.11.38 [07 Size Setting] - [04 K Size]

Specify whether or not to use the K sizes such as 8K and 16K.


2 Press [01 System Setting], [07 Size Setting], and [04 K Size] in sequence.

3 Select either [K Size ON] or [K Size OFF].


% To cancel the change, press [Cancel]. In either case, the Size Setting Menu Screen will be restored.

12.11.39 [07 Size Setting] - [05 ADF/Orig. Glass Priority]

Identify the standard sizes normally undetectable on the ADF or original glass so as to prevent similar sizesfrom being detected instead.


2 Press [01 System Setting], [07 Size Setting], and [05 ADF/Orig. Glass Priority] in sequence.

3 Select the desired one of the keys from each row.








12.11.40 [08 Perfect Binder Setting] - [01 Usable Paper Weight Select]

Specify the paper weight available for each of body and cover when using the perfect binder.


2 Press [01 System Setting], [08 Size Setting], and [01 Usable Paper Weight Select] in sequence.

3 Select the desired paper weight for each of body and cover.

% Use [Unit Change] on the right side of the screen to switch the unit of weight.

NOTICE If one of the paper weight selected here is not specified for the tray to be used in perfect binding, thebinding operation will become unavailable with an "unsuitable" message displayed.


% To cancel the change, press [Cancel]. In either case, the Perfect Binder Setting Menu Screen will berestored.





12.11

12.11.41 [08 Perfect Binder Setting] - [02 Paper Count Limit for PB]

Specify the minimum and maximum numbers of sheets to be bound as a body set, individually for each paperweight.


2 Press [01 System Setting], [08 Perfect Binder Setting], and [02 Paper Count Limit for PB] in sequence.

3 Specify the minimum and maximum numbers of sheets for each paper weight, as desired.

% Use [Unit Change] on the right side of the screen to switch the units of weight.



12.11.42 [08 Perfect Binder Setting] - [03 Unfitting Cover Stop]

Specify whether or not to stop the current job when the cover width is not suitable for the body paper sizeand thickness.


2 Press [01 System Setting], [08 Perfect Binder Setting], and [03 Unfitting Cover Stop] in sequence.

3 Select either [Temporary Stop] or [Not Temporary Stop].







12.11.43 [09 Operation Screen Customize] - [01 Font Weight Setting]

Select the font weight for the screen.


2 Press [01 System Setting], [09 Operation Screen Customize], and [01 Font Weight Setting] in sequence.

3 Select either [Standard] or [Bold].


% To cancel the change, press [Cancel]. In either case, the Operation Screen Customize Menu Screenwill be restored.

12.11.44 [09 Operation Screen Customize] - [02 Copy Screen Customize Set]

Change the layout of setting items displayed on the upper half of the Copy Screen.


2 Press [01 System Setting], [09 Operation Screen Customize], and [02 Copy Screen Customize Set] insequence.

3 Select a function key, then use [*] and [)] to shift it to the desired position.



In either case, the Operation Screen Customize Menu Screen will be restored.





12.11

12.11.45 [09 Operation Screen Customize] - [03 Scan Screen Customize Set]

Change the layout of setting items displayed on the upper half of the Scan Screen.


2 Press [01 System Setting], [09 Operation Screen Customize], and [03 Scan Screen Customize Set] insequence.

3 Select a function key, then use [*] and [)] to shift it to the desired position. The function key cannot bemoved up or down.



In either case, the Operation Screen Customize Menu Screen will be restored.




12.12 [03 Administrator Setting] - [02 Administrator Registration] 12

12.12 [03 Administrator Setting] - [02 Administrator Registration]

Register the administrator name and extension number to be displayed in the upper-right corner of the UtilityMenu Screen. Also, register the e-mail address of the administrator.


2 Press [02 Administrator Registration].

The Administrator Registration Screen will be displayed.

3 Press [Admin. Name Setting], then enter the administrator name.

% Up to 8 characters including a hyphen (-) can be entered.

% Press [OK] to complete the entry and return to the Administrator Registration Screen.

4 Press [Extension No. Setting], then enter the extension number using the touch screen keypad.

% Up to 5 digits including a hyphen (-) can be entered.

% If the extension number is less than 5 digits, add hyphens to make it five. A hyphen entered at the

beginning will appear as a space on the Utility Menu Screen.% Entered number will appear from the last digit, and shift leftward as the next number is entered.

5 Press [E-mail Address Setting], then enter the e-mail address of the administrator.

% Up to 64 characters including symbols can be entered.

% Press [OK] to complete the entry and return to the Administrator Registration Screen.


% To cancel the change, press [Cancel]. In either case, the Administrator Setting Menu Screen will berestored.



[03 Administrator Setting] - [03 Scan Address Register]12


12.13

12.13 [03 Administrator Setting] - [03 Scan Address Register]

Add, change or delete destinations of images scanned by this machine. Also register up to 5 templates whichcan optionally be used as a title or body text when transmitting scanned data. For detailed procedure of eachsetting, see User's Guide - Network Scanner.




12.14 [03 Administrator Setting] - [04 User Auth./Account Track] 12

12.14 [03 Administrator Setting] - [04 User Auth./Account Track]

This section provides various settings for User Authentication and Account Track functions to control the useof this machine.

User Authentication is suitable for managing individuals, and Account Track is for groups and multiple users.

Using User Authentication and Account Track in combination, you can manage the counters of each accountwith individual user counters included.

NOTICE This machine accepts a total of 1,000 users and accounts to be registered.

NOTICE Setting an authentication method will display the authentication screen while the machine is on standby. Inorder to use the machine managed by User Authentication/Account Track, you need to enter your user nameand password on the authentication screen.

NOTICE User Authentication and Account Track can be set to function asynchronously.

User Authentication and Account Track

Each of User Authentication and Account Track provides the following functions.

User Authentication- Limit operable functions (copy operations, scanning operations, storing data, recalling data from HDD).

- Make a count in output/scanning job for every user.

Account Track

- Make a count in output/scanning job for every account.

Synchronizing User Authentication and Account Track

This system configuration is suitable for tracking individual users managed by each department when the ma-chine is shared with multiple departments. With this setup made, the machine allows you to maintain the sta-tistics both on each employee (each user) and on each department (each account).

To manage the machine use as described above, the following settings are required in Authentication Meth-od.

Setting menu of AuthenticationMethod

Required setting

User Authentication Select [ON (MFP)].

Account Track Select [Manage] and set an account name and password

Synchronize User/Account Track Select [Synchronize].

User Registration/Account Name Specify the account when [ON (MFP)] is selected for User Authenti-cation.

User 1

User 2

Account

Group A

Group B



[03 Administrator Setting] - [04 User Auth./Account Track]12


12.14

Using User Authentication and Account Track separately

This system configuration is suitable for tracking multiple use of the machine distributed to each projectgroup when the machine is shared with multiple employees. With this setup made, the machine allows youto maintain the statistics on each project group (each account). This also suggests that the statistics can bemaintained on each project group (each account) even when two different employees (User 1 and User 2) areinvolved in the same project.

To manage the machine use as described above, the following settings are required in Authentication Meth-od.

12.14.1 [01 Authentication Method]

Establish the authentication settings by combining the following 8 elements.

- User Authentication: ON (External Serv), ON (MFP), OFF

- Public User: Allow, Restrict

- Account Track: Manage, Not Manage (Setting unavailable with [ON (External Serv)] selected for User Authentication)

- Account Track Input Method: Account + Password, Password (Setting unavailable with [Not Manage]selected for Account Track)

- Synchronize User/Account Track: If User Authentication is set to [ON (MFP)], Account Track set to[Manage], and Synchronize User/Account Track set to [Synchronize], only the user authentication willbe asked in the modes that require an authentication. In other cases, Account Track functions prefer-entially.

- User Distribute Number: Enter the number of users to be authenticated. A total of 1,000 authenticationentries should be distributed to User Authentication and Account Track. The number of entries for Ac-

count Track will be the remainder after subtracting the set number from 1,000.- Upper Limit Achieve Movement: Select the action of the machine when the specified limit count is

reached.

– [Stop Immediately]: The machine stops the job operation immediately as soon as the limit count isreached. In this case, output data and scanned data will not be retained.

– [Stop After Print]: The machine does not stop the job operation even though the limit count is reached. After completion of that job, the machine becomes unavailable for use.

– [Warning Only]: The machine displays the message to inform you that the limit count is reached, how-ever, and allows the next job to be operated.

- Count Sample Print: Specify whether or not to include the page count of sample prints into the counter.

NOTICE If all entries of authentication are assigned to either User Authentication or Account Track, the other withoutan entry becomes unavailable for use. It is recommended to distribute the entries as desired, when using both

authentication methods.

Setting menu of AuthenticationMethod

Required setting

User Authentication Select [OFF].

Account Track Select [Manage] and set an account name and password

Synchronize User/Account Track Select [Not Synchronize].

User 1

User 2

Account

Group A

Group B

Group C






2 Press [04 User Auth./Account Track] and [01 Authentication Method] in sequence.

The Authentication Method Screen will be displayed.

3 Select the desired setting key on the right side of "User Authentication", "Public User", "AccountTrack", "Account Track Input Method", and "Synchronize User/Account Track".

4 Press [User Distribute Number] to enter the quota.

% Use the touch panel keypad, [+], or [,] to enter the desired value, then press [OK].

5 Press [Next] to make the desired setting for "Upper Limit Achieve Movement" and "Count SamplePrint".


% To cancel the change, press [Cancel]. In either case, the User Auth./Account Track Menu Screenwill be restored.





12.14

12.14.2 [02 User Authentication Set] - [01 Management Setting]

A list of registered user names can be displayed on the authentication screen or on the screen to enter theuser/account name when any authentication mode is activated.

The list displayed with [List] pressed on the screen allows you to enter a user name simply by selecting thedesired name from that list.

Also, this setting allows you to limit authenticated users to specific functions or number of counters.


2 Press [04 User Auth./Account Track], [02 User Authentication Set], and [01 Management Setting] in se-quence.

The Management Setting Screen will be displayed.

3 Select [Display] or [Not Display] on the right side of the "User Name List".





4 Press [Initial Setting Limit], then make the settings as desired.

% Specify the functions available to authenticated users.

% When selecting [Enable] for "Upper Limit Setting", press [Upper] to enter the desired limit count.

% Press [OK] to complete the setting and return to the Management Setting Screen.


% To cancel the change, press [Cancel]. In either case, the User Authentication Setting Menu Screen

will be restored.

12.14.3 [02 User Authentication Set] - [02 User Registration]

Use this function to assign a number to each user, and set User Name, Password, Account Name, Output Allow, Upper Limit Setting, etc. for each user number.

The registered user will be listed on the screen. This list enables you to select a user to change the user dataas desired, or to delete the user.


2 Press [04 User Auth./Account Track], [02 User Authentication Set], and [02 User Registration] in se-quence.

The User Registration Screen will be displayed.

% Follow the instructions below to add, change or delete the user data.

3 Add user data.

Press [Add] to display the User Registration - Add/Change Screen.

% Press [User No.], then use the touch panel keypad to enter the desired user number. You may enterup to 4 digits for the user number.





12.14

% Press [User Name], then enter the desired user name. You may enter up to 64 characters for theuser name.

% Press [Password], then enter the desired password. You may enter up to 64 digits for the user pass-word.

% Press [Account Name], then select the desired account name.

% Press [Color] or [Black] on the right side of [Output Allow] to select the print type available to theuser.

% Press [Upper Limit Setting], then specify the functions to be allowed for the authenticated user. Se-lecting [Individual] for the "Management System" enables the limit count to be specified separatelyfor color printing and black-and-white printing. Select [Enable], then press [Upper] to enter the de-sired limit count.

% Press [Copy], [Scan], [Printer], or [HDD Hold] on the right side of [Usable Function] to select the func-tions to be allowed for the user.

% Press [From Address Setting], then select the desired address. To register a new address, press[Address Register], then enter the desired address. With a reference name registered at the same

time, that address can be readily selected from the search result list when needed.% Press [OK] to complete the setting.





4 Change user data.

% Select the user name of the data to be changed, then press [Change] to display the User Registra-tion - Add/Change Screen.

% Setting options provided on the screen and setting method are the same as those of adding user

data, described in step 3.% When finished with making the desired changes, press [OK].

5 Delete user data.

% Select the user name to be deleted, then press [Delete].

% Press [Yes] on the confirmation dialog to delete it. Or, press [No] to cancel.

6 Upper Limit Setting and Output Allow can be changed collectively for all users.

% Press [Package Change] to display the Change All Users Screen.





12.14

% The batch change is available only for [Upper Limit Setting] and [Output Allow]. The setting methodis the same as that of adding user data, described in step 3.

% Pressing [OK] will display the confirmation dialog for the batch change. Press [Yes] to determine thechange and return to the User Registration Screen. Pressing [No] will restore the Change All UsersScreen. To return to the User Registration Screen, press [Cancel].

7 Press [Return].

The User Authentication Setting Menu Screen will be restored.

12.14.4 [02 User Authentication Set] - [03 User Counter]

Reset print counters for authenticated users and public users individually or collectively.


2 Press [03 User Auth./Account Track], [02 User Authentication Set], and [03 User Counter] in sequence.

The User Counter Screen will be displayed.





3 Reset counters for authenticated users and public users individually.

% Select the user name of the counter to be reset. Press [Public] to reset the counter of public users.The Counter List Screen will be displayed.

% Pressing [Counter Clear] will display the dialog with the 4 keys described in the following table.

Press the desired key.% Press [Return] to restore the User Counter Screen.

4 Reset user counters collectively.

% Press [Reset All].

% Press either [Yes] or [No] on the confirmation dialog.

5 Press [Return] to restore the User Authentication Setting Menu Screen.

Key Function

[All] Resets all of the copy, printer, and scan counters.

[Copy/Printer] Resets the copy and printer counters.

[Scan] Resets the scan counter.

[Cancel] Exits without resetting the counter.





12.14

12.14.5 [03 Account Track] - [01 Account Track Registration]

Use this function to assign a number to each account, and set Account Name, Password, Output Allow, Up-per Limit Setting, etc. for each account number.

The registered account will be listed on the screen. This list enables you to select an account to change thedata as desired, or to delete that account.


2 Press [03 User Auth./Account Track], [03 Account Track], and then [01 Account Track Registration] insequence.

The Account Track Registration Screen will be displayed.

% Follow the instructions below to add, change or delete the account data.

3 Add account data.

% Press [Add] to display the Account Track Registration - Add/Change Screen.





% Press [Account No.], then use the touch panel keypad to enter the desired account number. Youmay enter up to 4 digits for the account number.

% Press [Account Name], then enter the desired account name. You may enter up to 8 characters forthe account name.

% Press [Password], then enter the desired password. You may enter up to 8 digits for the password.

% Press [Name], then enter the desired name. You may enter up to 20 characters for the name.

% Press [Color] or [Black] on the right side of [Output Allow] to select the type of printing to be allowed

for the account.





12.14

% Press [Upper Limit Setting], then specify the functions to be allowed for the authenticated account.Selecting [Individual] for the "Management System" enables the limit count to be specified sepa-rately for color printing and black-and-white printing. Select [Enable], then press [Upper] to enterthe desired limit count.

% Press [Copy], [Scan], [Printer], or [HDD Hold] on the right side of [Usable Function] to select the func-tions to be allowed for the user.

% Press [OK] to complete the setting.

4 Change account data.

% Select the account name of the data to be changed, then press [Change] to display the AccountTrack Registration - Add/Change Screen.

% Setting options provided on the screen and setting method are the same as those of adding accountdata, described in step 3.

% When finished with making the desired changes, press [OK].





5 Delete account data.

% Select the account name to be deleted, then press [Delete].

% Press [Yes] on the confirmation dialog to delete it. Or, press [No] to cancel.

6 Upper Limit Setting and Output Allow can be changed collectively for all accounts.

% Press [Package Change] to display the Change All Accounts Screen.

The batch change is available only for [Upper Limit Setting] and [Output Allow]. The setting method isthe same as that of adding account data, described in step 3.

% Pressing [OK] will display the confirmation dialog for the batch change. Press [Yes] to determine thechange and return to the Account Track Registration Screen. Pressing [No] will restore the Change

All Accounts Screen. To return to the Account Track Registration Screen, press [Cancel].

7 Press [Return] to restore the Account Track Menu Screen.





12.14

12.14.6 [03 Account Track] - [02 Account Track Counter]

Reset print counters for authenticated accounts and public accounts individually or collectively.


2 Press [03 User Auth./Account Track], [03 Account Track], and [02 Account Track Counter] in sequence.

The Account Track Counter Screen will be displayed.

3 Reset counters for authenticated accounts and public accounts individually.





% Select the account name of the counter to be reset. Press [Public] to reset the counter of public ac-counts. The Counter List Screen will be displayed.

% Pressing [Counter Clear] will display the dialog with the 4 keys described in the following table.Press the desired key.

% Press [Return] to restore the Account Track Counter Screen.

4 Reset account counters collectively.

% Press [Reset All].

% Press either [Yes] or [No] on the confirmation dialog.

5 Press [Return] to restore the Account Track Menu Screen.

Key Function

[All] Resets all of the copy, printer, and scan counters.

[Copy/Printer] Resets the copy and printer counters.

[Scan] Resets the scan counter.

[Cancel] Exits without resetting the counter.





12.14

12.14.7 [04 Print without Authentication]

Specify whether or not to allow printing and pull scanning without user/account authentication.


2 Press [03 User Auth./Account Track] and [04 Print without Authentication] in sequence.

The Print without Authentication Screen will be displayed.

3 Select either [Allow] or [Restrict] for each of "Print" and the "Pull Scan".


% To cancel the change, press [Cancel]. In either case, the User Auth./Account Track Menu Screenwill be restored.




12.15 [03 Administrator Setting] - [05 Network Setting] 12

12.15 [03 Administrator Setting] - [05 Network Setting]

12.15.1 [01 Machine NIC Setting]

Configure the NIC settings such as the IP address or line speed of the machine.


2 Press [05 Network Setting] and [01 Machine NIC Setting] in sequence.

The Machine NIC Setting Screen will be displayed.

3 Make a setting for each item.

% Use the touch panel keypad or control panel keypad to enter numeric values. Press [Set] to high-light the next area for entry.

% To specify the mail server by the host name, enter the IP address of either DNS Server 1 or DNSServer 2. When using two DNS servers, enter the IP address of both.

NOTICE To activate this setting change of the DNS server, the main body needs to be rebooted. Press [OK], andturn off then on the sub power switch .

% Specify the line speed of the network in Line Speed Setting. Select the desired line speed from op-tions provided on the screen.


% To cancel the change, press [Cancel]. In either case, the Network Setting Menu Screen will be re-stored.



[03 Administrator Setting] - [05 Network Setting]12


12.15

12.15.2 [02 E-mail Initial Setting]

Configure the initial settings of e-mail.


2 Press [05 Network Setting] and [02 E-Mail Initial Setting] in sequence.

The E-Mail Initial Setting Screen will be displayed.


% Use the touch panel keypad or control panel keypad to enter numeric values. Press [Set] to high-light the next area for entry.

% When the DNS server is used, the host name can be entered in the field of mail server. (Full path,up to 128 characters)

NOTICE When using the Enhanced Security mode, only the IP address can be entered.

4 When required entries are completed, run a transceiving test.

% Pressing [Test] will display the confirmation dialog. Press [Yes] to check that the setting has beenmade properly.






12.15 [03 Administrator Setting] - [05 Network Setting] 12

12.15.3 [03 http Communication Setting]

Configure the http communication settings.


2 Press [05 Network Setting] and [03 http Communication Setting] in sequence.

The http Communication Setting Screen will be displayed.


% Press an item key to display the setting screen for each. When an entry screen or screen with touchpanel keypad is displayed, make an entry as desired, then press [OK] to complete it.





[03 Administrator Setting] - [05 Network Setting]12


12.15

12.15.4 [04 Web LCD Setting]

Make a setting for the Web LCD server.

This setting is provided for Image Controller IC-306.


2 Press [05 Network Setting] and [04 Web LCD Setting] in sequence.

The Web LCD Setting Screen will be displayed.

3 Press [OFF] to disable the Web LCD.

To turn it on again, setting from IC-306 controller is required.

4 Press [Close].

The Network Setting Menu Screen will be restored.

dReference

For details of the Web LCD, see the User's Guide supplied with IC-306 .




12.16 [03 Administrator Setting] - [06 Common Setting] 12

12.16 [03 Administrator Setting] - [06 Common Setting]

The following features can be provided by switching the selection. This setting can also be performed by se-lecting [02 Common Setting] from the User Setting.

- [1 Shot Message Indication Time]: Select the time span to display a shot message, such as [Originalsize is A4], in the message area of the touch panel.

– 3 seconds, 5 seconds

- [Offset by Job Unit]: Specify whether or not to offset the output sheets by job.

– ON, OFF– Also specify the number of jobs to be offset when selecting ON for this function (default: 1).

- [Continuation Print]: Specify whether or not to output multiple reserve jobs in succession without stop-ping the machine at a job break.

– Copy ON, Copy OFF, Printer ON, Printer OFF

- [Stop Button Function]: Specify whether to pause or abort a job when Stop is pressed on the control

panel.

– Job Temp. Stop, Job Stop Function

- [Back Side Magnification Adj.]: Specify whether or not to activate the back side magnification adjust-ment mode.

– ON, OFF

- [Tray Change Time]: Select the time to wait before copying becomes available when selecting another

tray loaded with different paper type after a copy/print job is completed.

– Short, Standard

- [Prior Paper Type]: Specify whether or not to maintain the temperature suitable for coated paper byturning the fixing unit roller.

– Others, Coated

- [Dash Length (Page Stamp)]: Select the length of the dash to be used in a style of [Page No.] in [Stamp].

– Long, Short

- [Hold Job for Outputting (Init. Value)]: Specify whether or not to delete the output data of hold job.

– Delete, Save

- [Center Crop Mark Trim Margin]: Specify the space between the center crop mark and image area(center crop mark trim margin).

– 0.0-20.0 mm (default: 1.0)

- [Schedule Cross Axle Unit (Init. Value)]: Select the unit of horizontal axis on the Schedule Screen.

– Timetable, Time Volume (m), Sheet Volume

- [Destination for HDD Recall (Default)]: Select the desired operation from printing, holding, or both print-ing and holding for the job data recalled from the HDD.

– Print, Hold, Hold + Print

- [Offset Output Mode]: Specify how to offset the output sets.

– Change Out Pos., Partition Paper (Tray 1 to 5, PI 1, PI 2), Stop Print

- [Needless Tab Paper Exit]: Specify whether or not to automatically discharge the oddments of tabbedsheets loaded in a tray as a set.

– ON, OFF

- [Detect Double Feed JAM]: Specify whether or not to detect the double feed jam.

– ON, OFFNOTICE [Center Crop Mark Trim Margin], [Schedule Cross Axle Unit (Init. Value)], [Hold Job for Outputting (Init. Value)],[Destination for HDD Recall (Default)], and [Detect Double Feed JAM] are displayed when the machine ismounted with Hard Disk Kit HD-514 and Preview Kit PH-102 .



[03 Administrator Setting] - [06 Common Setting]12


12.16


2 Press [06 Common Setting].

The Common Setting Screen will be displayed.

% For subsequent operations, follow the same procedure as that in [User Setting] - [03 Common Set-ting]. See page 12-60 for details.




12.17 [03 Administrator Setting] - [07 Copy Setting] 12

12.17 [03 Administrator Setting] - [07 Copy Setting]

The following features can be provided by switching the selection. This setting can also be performed by se-lecting [04 Copy Setting] from the User Setting.

- [Fold & Staple Auto Selection]: Specify whether or not to automatically set the Booklet mode when Fold& Staple mode is selected.

– Yes, No

- [Orig. Glass Auto Size Select]: Specify whether or not to automatically select the same size of copy pa-per as the original when placed on the original glass.

– ON, OFF

- [ADF Auto Size Select]: Specify whether or not to automatically select the same size of copy paper asthe original when placed on the ADF.

– ON, OFF

- [Auto Zoom (Original Glass)]: Specify whether or not to automatically set an appropriate magnificationratio to correspond to the selected paper size when detecting the original size placed on the originalglass.

– ON, OFF

- [Auto Zoom (ADF)]: Specify whether or not to automatically set an appropriate magnification ratio tocorrespond to the selected paper size when detecting the original size placed on the ADF.

– ON, OFF

- [Non-Image Area Erase]: Specify the condition of Non-Image Area Erase function.

– Yes, APS/AMS, Except Orig. Glass (1:1)

- [ADF Frame Erase]: Specify the frame erase amount for copies made in ADF mode.

– None, 1 mm, 2 mm, 3 mm, 4 mm, 5 mm

- [Interruption Suspend Setting]: Set the timing to interrupt the current job when Interrupt is pressedwhile copying.

– Stop Immediately, When Current Comp.

- [Printer Prohibit Timer]: Set the time interval to suspend the print job via PC after the last operation oftouch keys.

– Off, 15 seconds, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90 seconds

- [Orig./Out Bind Direction Set]: Specify whether or not to conform the bind direction in Output Settingwith that specified in Original Setting.

– ON, OFF

- [Specify Default Tray APS OFF]: Specify the tray to be automatically selected when APS (Auto Paper)is canceled.

– APS Tray, Tray 1, Tray 2, Tray 3, Tray 4, Tray 5, Bypass

- [Scan Stop by Pull Out Tray]: Specify whether or not to stop the scanning operation if any tray is pulledout.

– ON, OFF



[03 Administrator Setting] - [07 Copy Setting]12


12.17


2 Press [07 Copy Setting].

The Copy Setting Screen will be displayed.

% For subsequent operations, follow the same procedure as that in [02 User Setting] - [04 Copy Set-ting]. See page 12-62 for details.




12.18 [03 Administrator Setting] - [08 Scan Setting] 12

12.18 [03 Administrator Setting] - [08 Scan Setting]

The following features can be provided by switching the selection. This setting can also be performed by se-lecting [05 Scan Setting] from the User Setting.

- File Type Default E-mail: Specify the default file type when sending scanned data in e-mail.


- File Type Default HDD: Specify the default file type when sending scanned data to HDD.


- File Type Default FTP: Specify the default file type when sending scanned data via FTP.


- File Type Default SMB: Specify the default file type when sending scanned data via SMB.


- Default Address: Select the default destination to be displayed when selecting the Scan Screen.

– E-mail, HDD, FTP, SMB, Queue

- Compress Method Color/Gray: Specify the compression method to be used for scanned color/gray-scale image data.

– High Comp., Standard, Low Comp.


2 Press [08 Scan Setting].

The Scan Setting Screen will be displayed.

% For subsequent operations, follow the same procedure as that in [02 User Setting] - [05 Scan Set-ting]. See page 12-64 for details.



[03 Administrator Setting] - [09 System Connection]12


12.19

12.19 [03 Administrator Setting] - [09 System Connection]

12.19.1 [ 01 Administrator Call]

Use this function to call your service representative for maintenance. Your service representative is monitor-ing the machine status as needed basis. The monitored information will be useful for maintenance.


2 Press [09 System Connection] and [01 Administrator Call] in sequence.

The Administrator Call Screen will be displayed.

3 Press [Start].

4 Press [Return].

The System Connection Menu Screen will be restored.




12.20 [03 Administrator Setting] - [09 Security Setting] 12

12.20 [03 Administrator Setting] - [09 Security Setting]

12.20.1 [01 Administrator Password]

Change the administrator password.


2 Press [07 Security Setting] and [01 Administrator Password] in sequence.

The Administrator Password Screen will be displayed.

3 Press [Current Password] to enter the password currently used, then press [OK].

4 Press [New Password] to enter your new password, then press [OK].

5 Press [Input Confirmation] to enter your new password once more, then press [OK].

6 Press [OK] to complete the setting.% To cancel the change, press [Cancel]. In either case, the Security Setting Menu Screen will be re-

stored.



[03 Administrator Setting] - [09 Security Setting]12


12.20

12.20.2 [02 HDD Management Setting] - [01 HDD Lock Password]

Change the HDD lock password.

NOTICE 02 HDD Management Setting will not be displayed without [Hard Disk Kit HD-02] mounted on the machine.

The HDD lock password cannot be changed unless the Enhanced Security mode is activated.


2 Press [10 Security Setting], [02 HDD Management Setting], and [01 HDD Lock Password] in sequence.

The HDD Lock Password Screen will be displayed.

3 Press [Current Password] to enter the password currently used, then press [OK].

4 Press [New Password] to enter your new password, then press [OK].

5 Press [Input Confirmation] to enter your new password once more, then press [OK].



In either case, the HDD Management Setting Menu Screen will be restored.





12.20.3 [02 HDD Management Setting] - [02 Delete Temp. Data Setting]

Specify whether or not to overwrite the temporary image data, and also the erase mode for the data to beoverwritten.



2 Press [10 Security Setting], [02 HDD Management Setting], and [02 Delete Temp. Data Setting] in se-quence.

The Delete Temporary Data Setting Screen will be displayed.

3 Select either [Yes] or [No] for [Setting Switch].

% When selecting [Yes], also select either [Mode 1] or [Mode 2] for [Erase Mode].


% To cancel the change, press [Cancel].In either case, the HDD Management Setting Menu Screen will be restored.





12.20

12.20.4 [02 HDD Management Setting] - [03 Delete All Data Setting]

Use this function to delete all the data on the HDD, selecting the desired erase mode.



2 Press [10 Security Setting], [02 HDD Management Setting], and [03 Delete All Data Setting] in sequence.

The Delete All Data Setting Screen will be displayed.

3 Select either [Mode 1] or [Mode 2] from [Erase Mode].

4 Press [Execute Deletion].

5 Press [Return] to restore the HDD Management Setting Menu Screen.





12.20.5 [02 HDD Management Setting] - [04 Delete hold Job]

Use this function to delete hold jobs.



2 Press [10 Security Setting], [02 HDD Management Setting], and [04 Delete hold Job] in sequence.

The Delete Hold Job Screen will be displayed.


% Press [Multi-Sel.] to select multiple jobs.

% Pressing [All Select] selects all the jobs at a time.

4Press [Delete].


5 Press [Yes].

% To cancel the deletion, press [No].






12.20

12.20.6 [02 HDD Management Setting] - [05 Delete HDD Job]

Use this function to delete the jobs stored on the HDD.







2 Press [10 Security Setting], [02 HDD Management Setting], and [05 Delete HDD Job] in sequence.

The Delete HDD Job Screen will be displayed.

3 Delete a job located outside a folder.

% Select the row of the job to be deleted.

% Press [Multi-Sel.] first to select multiple jobs.% Press [All Select] to select all jobs on the list.

NOTICE You cannot select a folder to delete it. To delete a folder or jobs stored in a folder, see step 4.

% Press [Delete]. A confirmation dialog will be displayed.

% Press [Yes]. To cancel the deletion, press [No].

4 Delete a folder or jobs stored in a folder.

% Press the row of the folder that contains the job to be deleted. The folder opens up. If the folderrequires a password entry, enter the password to open it.

NOTICE The folder containing jobs cannot be deleted. You can delete the folder after deleting all jobs in that

folder.

% Follow the same procedure as in step 3 to delete the jobs in a folder.

% The [Delete] key at the upper left side of the screen becomes available after all the jobs in the folderare deleted. Press [Delete]. A confirmation dialog will be displayed.

% Press [Yes]. To cancel the deletion, press [No].






12.20

12.20.7 [02 HDD Management Setting] - [06 HDD Restore/Backup]

Use this function to make a backup of, or restore the HDD.


1 Connect an external storage medium for backup to the machine.

% This port is available for low-power devices only. Please provide an external supply of power for de-vices that require a large amount of power.


3 Press [10 Security Setting], [02 HDD Management Setting], and [06 HDD Restore/Backup] in sequence.

The HDD Restore/Backup Menu Screen will be displayed.

4 Press [01 HDD Backup] to make a backup of the HDD.

% Press [Start] on the screen to initiate the backup operation.

% When the backup operation is completed, turn the sub power switch OFF then ON.

5 Press [02 HDD Restore] to restore the HDD.

% Press [Start] on the screen to initiate restoring the HDD.

% When the restoring operation is completed, turn the sub power switch OFF then ON.

NOTICE If an error occurs in restoring the HDD, the original data cannot be protected.





12.20.8 [02/03 Enhanced Security Mode]

Specify whether or not to activate the Enhanced Security mode.

NOTICE The screen displays 02 Enhanced Security Mode without [Hard Disk HD-514] mounted on the machine, ordisplays [03 Enhanced Security Mode] with that option mounted.

To turn the Enhanced Security mode ON, the service representative should set a CE authentication passwordand administrator password on the machine.


2 Press [10 Security Setting] and [02/03 Enhanced Security Mode] in sequence.

The Enhanced Security Mode Screen will be displayed.

3 Select [ON] to activate the Enhanced Security mode, or select [OFF] to deactivate it, then press [OK].


4 Press [Yes] to complete the setting.

The machine power will be turned off, then on automatically.

% To cancel the change, press [No], then press [Cancel] at the lower right corner of the screen to returnto the Administrator Setting Screen.



[04 Touch Panel Adjustment]12


12.21

12.21 [04 Touch Panel Adjustment]

Use this function to check that the keys displayed on the screen and the touch sensor are properly aligned,if the machine does not respond to the press on the touch panel properly.

NOTICE The Touch Panel Adjustment Screen can be accessed also by pressing Utility/Counter on the control panel and [4] from the control panel keypad in sequence. The machine can be set to delete this setting from theUtility menu, but to display the Touch Panel Adjustment Screen only when [4] is pressed from the control

panel keypad . Contact your service representative, if desired.

1 Press Utility/Counter on the control panel.


2 Press [04 Touch Panel Adjustment].

The Touch Panel Adjustment Screen will be displayed.

3 Press the "+" symbol at the upper right corner, then lower left corner on the screen.

The present coordinates will be displayed in the message area of the screen.




12.21 [04 Touch Panel Adjustment] 12

4 Check the coordinates.

% Check that the X coordinate and Y coordinate displayed in the first line under "Touch Panel Adjust-ment" fall within the range of standard value displayed in the second line.

% If the coordinates fall out of the range, repeat the adjustment procedure or contact your service rep-resentative.

5 Press each Check Button at the upper left and lower right corners on the screen to check that the buzz-er tone functions normally.

% If the buzzer tone does not sound, repeat the adjustment procedure or contact your service repre-sentative.

6 Press [0] on the control panel keypad to complete the setting.

% To cancel the setting, press [1] on the control panel keypad to return to the Utility Menu Screen.



[04 Touch Panel Adjustment]12


12.21



13Specifications






13.1 Main Body Specifications 13

13 Specifications

13.1 Main Body Specifications

13.1.1 Main Body

Item Description

Name bizhub PRO C6000/C7000bizhub PRESS C6000/C7000/C7000P

Type Console

Printing process Quad-drum tandem laser electrostatographic process

Photoconductor OPC

Developing system Dry, dual-component reverse magnetic brush developing

Transfer method Belt/RollerFusing method Belt

Original type 4 types (Text/Photo, Photo, Text, Map)

Quality adjustment Copy Density (Auto, Manual, Background Removal, BleedPrevention), Red, Green, Blue, Hue, Saturation, Brightness,Sharpness, Contrast, Glossy, Image Distinction (Text/Photo,Color Text), Screen, Color Balance, Adjustment Proof Copy

Magnification ratio 1:1 (100%)Enlargement:1:1.154 (115.4%), 1:1.224 (122.4%), 1:1.414 (141.4%),1:2.000 (200%)Reduction:1:0.866 (86.6%), 1:0.816 (81.6%), 1:0.707 (70.7%),

1:0.500 (50%)Zoom: 0.250 to 4.000 (25% to 400% in 0.1% increments)Set Zoom Ratio: 3 Vertical/Horizontal Zoom: 0.250 to 4.000 (25% to 400% in0.1% increments, available individually for vertical and hori-zontal dimensions)• Method: Image processing + mirror scanning speed con-

trol• Main (horizontal) scanning direction: Digital image

processing (linear interpolation)• Sub (vertical) scanning direction: Mirror scanning speed

control

Resolution Scanning resolution: 600 dpi e 600 dpiPrinting resolution: 1200 dpi e 1200 dpi (1800 dpi when se-

lecting smoothing in 600 dpi mode)

Gradation/Color 256 (8-bit)/16.7 million colors

Copy paper (main body trays) 64 g/m2 to 209 g/m2: sizes less than 215.9 mm in width andless than 279.4 mm in length (such as A5 w or B5 w / v )64 g/m2 to 256 g/m2: sizes 215.9 mm or larger in width and279.4 mm or larger in length (such as A4 w / v, 8.5 e 11 w / v,B4 w, A3 w )Reverse delivery: 64 g/m2 to 300 g/m2

Duplex delivery: 64 g/m2 to 300 g/m2

Copying speed Color/Black:bizhub PRO C7000, bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P:71 sheets/min. (A4 v ), 70 sheets/min. (8.5 e 11 v )bizhub PRO C6000, bizhub PRESS C6000: 60 sheets/min.

(A4 v, 8.5 e 11 v ) Achieved by the main body only, using Separate Scan andSimplex modes manually specified with full speed setting.The speed per hour is assumed with speed priority specified.



Main Body Specifications13


13.1

Continuous copying 1 to 9,999 copies

Memory C, M, Y, K, Preview, TAG: 384 MB each

Original type Sheets, books, three-dimensional objects

Original size Standard: Max. A3 w (11 e 17 w )Custom: 303 mm e 438 mm (for the original glass only)

Original weight Approx. 6.8 kg at maximum

Paper size (trays 1 to 3) Standard: SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w,SRA4 w, A4 w / v, A5 w,B5 w / v, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 11 w



Detectable standard sizes can be switched as follows.• SRA4 w, (8.5 e 14 w and 8.5 e 11 w ), 8 e 13 w,

8.12 e 13.2 w, 8.25 e 13 w, or 8.5 e 13 w• (SRA3 w, A4 w, and A5 w ) or (13 e 19 w, 8.5 e 11 w,

and 5.5 e 8.5 w )• 9 e 11 v or 8.5 e 11 v

Image loss Leading and trailing edges: 4 mm or lessFront and rear edges: 3 mm or lessFor trailing edge of 200 g/m2 or more: 6 mm or less• Specified for full size copying.

Paper tray capacity Main body trays 1 to 3: 500 sheets each (80 g/m2 )

Warm-up time 7.0 minutes or less (20°C, 50% RH, 230 V)

Power requirements Rated voltage: AC 220 to 240 VRated current: 25 A Rated frequency: 50/60 Hz

Power consumption 4,400 W (for the whole system excluding the options withdedicated power code)

Weight Main body: 356 kg

Dimensions Main body + original cover:760 (W)*1 e 992.7 (D)*2 e 1,075.6 (H)*3 mm

*1: Excluding control panel, exit tray, work table*2: Including rear duct*3: Height to the top of original cover excluding control panel

Space requirements Main body + ADF DF-622 + Large Capacity Unit LU-202 +Finisher FS-612:2,266 (W)*1 e 1,621.3 (D)*2 mm

*1: With the primary (main) tray of Finisher FS-612 pulled out*2: With the ADU drawer pulled out

Operating temperature 10°C to 30°C

Humidity 10 to 80% RH

Item Description




13.2 Original Related Option Specifications 13

13.2 Original Related Option Specifications

13.2.1 ADF DF-622

13.2.2 Others

In addition to the above mentioned, the following products are provided as original related options.

- Original Cover OC-506

- Work Table WT-508

Item Description

Name DF-622

Original paper type Single-sided: 35 g/m2 to 210 g/m2

Double-sided: 50 g/m2 to 210 g/m2

Original size A3 w, B4 w, A4 w / v, B5 w / v, A5 w / v, B6 w, 11 e 17 w,8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w, 5.5 e 8.5 w / v

Capacity of document feeder Max. 100 sheets (80 g/m2 )

Feeding method Automatic

Weight Approx. 14.5 kg

Dimensions 588 (W) e 519 (D) e 135 (H) mm

Power source Supplied from main body



Feeding Option Specifications13


13.3

13.3 Feeding Option Specifications

13.3.1 Paper Feeder Unit PF-602

13.3.2 Large Capacity Unit LU-202

Item Description

Name PF-602

Function Feed paper into main body

Configuration 2 paper trays

Paper size Standard: SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w / v, A4 w / v,B5 w / v, A5 w / v*, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w / v*: A5 v or postcards can be loaded in the lower tray only.

Custom:Tray 4 (upper tray): Max. 330 mm e 487 mm to min. 100 mme 182 mmTray 5 (lower tray): Max. 330 mm e 487 mm to min. 100 mme 148 mm


For the upper tray, detectable standard sizes can beswitched as follows.• A5 w or 5.5 e 8.5 w• SRA4 w or Foolscap

Paper type Plain, Fine, Color, Coated-GL, Coated-ML, Coated-GO,Coated-MO, Tab paper

Paper weight Upper tray (tray 4): 64 g/m2 to 256 g/m2

Lower tray (tray 5): 64 g/m2 to 300 g/m2

Paper tray capacity 6,000 sheets (80 g/m2 )

Dimensions 947 (W) e 750 (D) e 1,045 (H) mm

Weight Approx. 171 kg

Power source Supplied from main body

Item Description

Name LU-202

Function Feed paper into main body

Paper tray capacity 2,500 sheets (80 g/m2 )

Paper size Standard: SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w / v, A4 w / v, B5 v,

13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w / v

Detectable standard sizes can be switched as follows.• A4 v or 12 e 18 w• (SRA4 w, A4 w ) or (8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w )• 8.5 e 11 v or 9 e 11 v

Paper type Plain, Fine, Color, Coated-GL, Coated-ML, Coated-GO,Coated-MO, Tab paper

Paper weight 64 g/m2 to 300 g/m2

All coated types of paper: 81 g/m2 to 300 g/m2

Use optional postcard kit when loading postcards.


Weight Approx. 42 kgPower source Supplied from main body




13.3 Feeding Option Specifications 13

13.3.3 Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray MB-504

13.3.4 Dehumidifier Heater HT-504/505

Item Description

Name MB-504

Type Bypass tray for feeding large amount of paper

Paper tray capacity 250 sheets (80 g/m2 ), height 27.5 mm

Paper size Standard: A3 w, B4 w, A4 v, B5 w / v, A6 w, 13 e 19 w,12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w / v,5.5 e 8.5 w

Custom*1: 330 mm e 487*2 mm to min. 100 mm e 148 mm


Detectable standard sizes can be switched as follows.• (SRA4 w and A4 w ), 8.5 e 14 w, 8 e 13 w,

8.12 e 13.2 w, 8.25 e 13 w, or 8.5 e 13 w• (SRA3 w, A5 v / w, and B6 w ) or (13 e 19 w, 8.5 e 11 w,

and 5.5 e 8.5 w )

• A6 w or Postcard• 9 e 11 v or 8.5 e 11 v• (8K w and 16K v / w ) or (B4 w and B5 v / w )

*1: Use small size guides for paper width less than139.7 mm.*2: Max. 1,200 mm only with special setting made

Paper type Plain, Fine, Color, Coated-GL, Coated-ML, Coated-GO,Coated-MO, Tab paper, Labels


• Paper type is designated for 300 g/m2.• Coated paper requires single-sheet feeding.



Power source/requirements 5/24 VDC

Maximum power consumption DC: 28 W or less

Item Description

Name HT-504/505

Function Dehumidifier of fan heater type (two units)

Dimensions Dehumidifier fan unit:197 (W) e 293 (D) e 82 (H) mmPower supply unit:121 (W) e 160 (D) e 80 (H) mm

Weight Dehumidifier fan unit: 1.5 kg (per unit) AC power supply unit: 0.9 kg

Power consumption DC: 6 W or less AC: 580 W or less (per unit)



Feeding Option Specifications13


13.3

13.3.5 Dehumidifier Heater HT-503

Item Description

Name HT-503

Function Dehumidifier of fan heater type

Dimensions Dehumidifier fan unit:197 (W) e 293 (D) e 82 (H) mmPower supply unit:121 (W) e 160 (D) e 80 (H) mm

Weight Dehumidifier fan unit: 1.5 kg (per unit) AC power supply unit: 0.9 kg

Power consumption DC: 4W or less AC: 290 W or less (per unit)




13.4 Output Option Specifications 13

13.4 Output Option Specifications


13.4.2 Humidifier HM-102

Item Description

Name RU-509

Type Relay unit with paper-cooling and curl adjustment functions

Mechanical curl adjustment Adjust paper curl by letting it through a zigzag path, then de-liver paper accelerating it according to the basic line speeddetermined for finishing operation.

Humidifying curl adjustment Humidify paper using Humidifier HM-102 (option), then de-liver paper accelerating it according to the basic line speeddetermined for finishing operation.

Straight delivery Deliver paper accelerating it according to the basic linespeed determined for finishing operation, without makingmechanical or humidifying curl adjustment.

Reverse delivery Reverse and deliver paper accelerating it according to thebasic line speed determined for finishing operation.

Color density adjustment Measure the color density of the density patch printed on pa-per, in order to use it as the data for image stabilization adjustment.

Conveyance speed 71 sheets/min. (A4 v ), 70 sheets/min. (8.5 e 11 v )

Paper size SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w / v, A4 w / v, B5 w / v, A5 w / v, B6 w, A6 w, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w / v, 5.5 e 8.5 w / v, Foolscap,9 e 11 v, Custom, Tab PaperMax. 330 mm e 487 mm to min. 100 mm e 140 mm

Paper type Recommended for main body


Dimensions 410 (W) e 735 (D) e 1,020 (H) mmWeight Approx. 60 kg

Power source 220 to 240 V AC/5 V DC (supplied from main body

Item Description

Name HM-102

Type Paper humidifying kit

Function Humidify paper on both front and back sides uniformly to

make a curl adjustment.Processing speed 71 sheets/min. (A4 v ), 70 sheets/min. (8.5 e 11 v )

Humidifier tank capacity 20 liters (equivalent of approx. 100,000 prints)

Paper size Conforms to that of Relay Unit RU-509

Paper type Recommended for main body (except Coated)


Dimensions Humidifying section:194 (W) e 492 (D) e 83 (H) mmTank section:339 (W) e 646 (D) e 246 (H) mm


Power source 24 V DC inlet (internal battery), except 5 V DC supplied fromRelay Unit RU-509



Output Option Specifications13


13.4


Item Description

Name FS-521

Type Staple-cut type stapling equipment

Delivery modes Straight mode Deliver non-offset sets to the primary (main) tray .

Shift mode Offset each set upon exit to the primary (main) tray .

Secondary (sub)tray mode

Deliver non-offset sets to the secondary (sub) tray .

Staple mode Deliver stapled sets to the primary (main) tray .

Subset staplemode

Deliver stapled sets or single sheet to the primary (main)tray .

Available sizes in primary (main) tray (straight/offset delivery)

Large sizes: A3 w, B4 w, Foolscap, SRA3 w, SRA4 w / v,13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w, Custom(Max. 324 mm e 460 mm)

Small sizes: A4 w / v, B5 w / v, 8.5 e 11 w / v, 9 e 11 v

Extra-small sizes: A5 w / v, B6 w, 5.5 e 8.5 w / v

Others: Custom (Max. 330 mm e 487 mm to min. 100 mm e 140 mm), Tab Paper (A4T v, 8.5 e 11T v )

Available weight in primary (main) tray (straight/offset delivery)

64 g/m2 to 300 g/m2

Available sizes in primary (main) tray (Staple)

SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, A4 w / v, SRA4 w / v, B5 v, A5 v,12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w / v,5.5 e 8.5 v, Foolscap, 9 e 11 v, Custom, Tab Paper (A4T v,8.5 e 11T v )Max. 324 mm e 463 mm to min. 203 mm e 139 mm

Available weight in primary (main) tray (Staple)

64 g/m2 to 244 g/m2

Available sizes in secondary (sub) tray SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w*1, A4 w / v, SRA4 w / v, B5 w / v*1, A5 w / v, B6 w, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w / v, 5.5 e 8.5 w / v, 9 e 11 v, Cus-tom, Tab Paper (A4T v, 8.5 e 11T v )Max. 330 mm e 487 mm to min. 100 mm e 140*2 mm

*1: B4 and B5 are ISO standard sizes. If JIS standard sizesare desired, please contact your service representative.*2: Only when FS-521 is installed as the sole option. It will be139 mm when any other option is installed.

Available weight in secondary (sub) tray 64 g/m2 to 300 g/m2

Dimensions 544 (W)* e 723 (D) e 1,020 (H) mm* Width including primary (main) tray: 798 mm/915 mm (with

the edge pulled out)Weight Approx. 80 kg

Power source 24/5 VDC (supplied from Relay Unit RU-509, or from Per-fect Binder PB-503 when connected)

Power consumption 110 VA





13.4.4 Folding Unit FD-503

Item Description

Name FD-503

Function Punch, multi-folding, post inserting of single sheet

Number of punch holes 2 or 4

Hole diameter 6.5 mm ± 0.5 mm

Hole pitch 80 mm ± 0.5 mm

Hole vertical position 10.5 mm ± 4 mm

Paper weight in Punch mode 50 g/m2 to 216 g/m2

Available sizes in Punch mode 2 holes:SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w / v, B5 w / v, A5 w / v,Foolscap, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w / v,5.5 e 8.5 v, 9 e 11 v, Tab paper4 holes: A3 w, B4 w, A4 v, B5 v, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 11 v,9 e 11 v, Tab paper

Fold type Z-Fold, Tri-Fold-in, Tri-Fold-out, Half-Fold, Double Parallel,

Gate

Paper weight in Fold mode Z-Fold, Tri-Fold-in, Tri-Fold-out, Half-Fold: 64 g/m2 to130 g/m2

Double Parallel, Gate: 64 g/m2 to 91 g/m2

Available sizes in Fold mode SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w, 11 e 17 w,8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w, CustomMax. 305 mm e 458 mm to min. 210 mm e 279 mm

Straight delivery Deliver sheets output from the main body to the primary(main) tray or secondary (sub) tray .

Paper weight in straight delivery 50 g/m2 to 300 g/m2

Available sizes in straight delivery SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w / v, A4 w / v, B5 w / v, A5 w / v, B6 w, Foolscap, A6 w, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w,11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w / v, 5.5 e 8.5 w / v, Cus-tom, Tab Paper (only with the tab side ahead in output direc-tion)Max. 330 mm e 487 mm to min. 100 mm e 140 mm

Paper types in post inserter Plain, recycled, fine, special

Paper weight in post inserter 50 g/m2 to 300 g/m2

Available sizes in post inserter Standard (detectable sizes): SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w,SRA4 w / v, A4 w / v, B5 w / v, A5 v, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w,11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w / v, 5.5 e 8.5 v, Foolscap,Custom, Tab PaperMax. 331 mm e 483 mm to min. 182 mm e 139 mm

Stack capacity of PI upper/lower tray 500 sheets (80 g/m2 ) for each tray

Dimensions 400* (W) e 723 (D) e 1,231 (H) mm* Width including primary (main) tray : 667 mm/784 mm(with the edge pulled out)


Power source 100 to 240 VAC, 5 VDC supplied from Relay Unit RU-509





13.4

13.4.5 Large Capacity Stacker LS-505

Item Description

Name LS-505

Type Grip conveyer type horizontal stacking equipment

Function Stacker tray Sort

Deliver non-offset sets to the stacker tray .

Secondary (sub)tray

Deliver non-offset sets to the secondary (sub) tray .

Stacker tray Offset Sort

Offset sorted sets by 20 mm upon exit to the stacker tray .


SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w / v, A4 w / v, B5 v, A5 v,13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w,8.5 e 11 w / v, Foolscap, 9 e 11 v, Custom (max. 330 mm e 487 mm to min. 100 mm e 140 mm)Tab paper (1 to 15 tabs) (However, output sets cannot be off-set when including tabbed sheets.)

Available weight in primary (main) tray (straight/offset delivery)

64 g/m2 to 256 g/m2

Available sizes in secondary (sub) tray SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w / v, B5 w / v, A5 w / v,B6 w, Foolscap, A6 w, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w / v, 5.5 e 8.5 v, 9 e 11 v, Custom,Tab Paper (A4T v, 8.5 e 11T v )Max. 330 mm e 488 mm to min. 100 mm e 140 mm




Power source 100 to 240 VAC, 5 VDC (supplied from Relay Unit RU-509 )

Power consumption 143 W or less





13.4.6 Saddle Stitcher SD-506

Item Description

Name SD-506

Type Multi folding, folding and stapling, trimming, straight delivery

Delivery modes Secondary (sub) tray delivery

Deliver non-processed sheets to the secondary (sub) tray .

Connective delivery Deliver non-processed sheets to another finishing equip-ment.

Fold & Staple Output saddle-stitched sets.

Fold & Staple withTrimming

Output saddle-stitched and trimmed sets.

Multi Half Fold Output a sheet or set of paper folded in half.

Multi Half Fold withTrimming

Output a sheet or set of paper half-folded and trimmed in theedge.

Multi Tri-Fold Output a sheet or set of paper folded in three.

Multi folding Folding type Half fold, tri-fold

Paper size Multi Half Fold: SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w,B5 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w,Foolscap, CustomMax. 324 mm e 463 mm to min. 182 mm e 257 mmMulti Tri-Fold: A4 w, 8.5 e 11 w

Paper weight 64 to 244 g/m2 for half fold, 64 to 91g/m2 for tri-fold

Number of sheets perfolded set

5 sheets (64 to 81g/m2 ) in half fold/tri-fold3 sheets (82 to 91 g/m2 ) in tri-fold3 sheets (82 to 130 g/m2 ), 2 sheets (131 to 244 g/m2 ) in halffold

Stack capacity 30 sets for half fold20 sets for tri-foldProvided with full-load detection function

Folding and sta-pling

Paper size SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w, B5 w, 12 e 18 w,11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w, Foolscap, CustomMax. 324 mm e 463 mm to min. 182 mm e 257 mm


Binding pitch Variable (90 to 165 mm)

Trimming Paper size SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w, B5 w, 12 e 18 w,11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w, Foolscap, CustomMax. 324 mm e 463 mm to min. 182 mm e 257 mm


Trimming capacity 50 sheets (80 g/m2 ) e 2, or 49 sheets (80 g/m2 ) + 1 (200 g/m2 )e 2

Straight delivery Paper size SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w / v, A4 w / v, B5 w / v, A5 w / v, B6 w, Foolscap, A6 w, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w,11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w / v, 5.5 e 8.5 w / v,9 e 11 v, Custom, Tab Paper (only with the tab side ahead inoutput direction)Max. 330 mm e 487 mm to min. 100 mm e 140 mm



Power source 100 to 240 VAC, 5 VDC (supplied from Relay Unit RU-509 )

Power consumption 270 W





13.4

13.4.7 Perfect Binder PB-503

Item Description

Name PB-503

Type Console, hot-melt type perfect binder

Function Perfect binding Output perfect-bound books to the perfect binder tray .

Secondary (sub) tray Deliver non-processed sheets to the secondary (sub) tray .

Connective delivery Deliver non-processed sheets to another finishing equip-ment ( Finisher FS-521 ).

Number of sheets per set 10 to 300 sheets, or within 30 mm thick10 to 150 sheets, or within 15 mm thick for colored/mattedpaperUp to 4 sheets of z-folded insertions can be included in a setin duplex printing, up to 2 sheets in simplex printing.

Paper size Perfect binder tray Body: A4 v, B5 v, A5 w / v, 8.5 e 11 w, 5.5 e 8.5 w / v; max.307 mm e 221 mm to min. 139 mm e 210 mmCover: max. 307 mm e 221 mm to min. 139 mm e 210 mm

Secondary (sub) tray SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w / v, A4 w / v, B5 w / v, A5 v,

Foolscap, A6 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w,8.5 e 11 w / v, 5.5 e 8.5 v, 9 e 11 v, Custom, Tab Paper (on-ly with the tab side ahead in output direction)Max. 330 mm e 487 mm to min. 100 mm e 140 mm

Paper weight Perfect binder tray 64 g/m2 to 105 g/m2 for body81 g/m2 to 210 g/m2 for cover

Secondary (sub) tray 64 g/m2 to 300 g/m2

Paper type Perfect binder tray Plain, Fine for bodyFine, Coat for cover

Secondary (sub) tray All types available in main body

Stack capacity Cover tray 1,000 sheets (82 g/m2 )/ 500 sheets (216 g/m2 )

Perfect binder tray Perfect binder tray :1 set of maximum thickness (approx. 30mm) e 2 columns(approx. 6,600 sheets)The full-load detection function activated on perfect binderlimits the capacity as follows in order to prevent the piledsets from collapsing.10 to 30-sheet-bound set: 50 sets31 to 150-sheet-bound set: 35 sets or until detected as fullload151 to 300-sheet-bound set: Until detected as full load

Secondary (sub) tray 200 sheets (80 g/m2 ) (with full-load detection function acti-vated)

Warm-up time Approx. 20 minutes

Dimensions 1,360 (W) e 775 (D) e 1,223 (H) mm


Power source AC 230 V 50 Hz (supplied from internal battery, 5 VDC sup-plied from Relay Unit RU-509 )

Power consumption 1,000 W max.






Item Description

Name FS-531

Type Staple, straight delivery

Processing speed Max. 65 sheets/min.

Staple Paper size Standard: A3 w, B4 w, A4 w / v, B5 w / v, 11 e 17 w,8.5 e 11 w / v, 8.5 e 14 w / v, 8.5 e 11 w / v



Staple capacity Max. 50 sheets (Plain, Fine: 64 g/m2 to 80 g/m2 )The maximum number of stapled sheets varies dependingon paper types.

Fold & Staple bind-ing position

Front/Rear corner: 1 stapleCenter: 2 staples

Stack capacity forFold & Staple

2-9 sheets stapled: 100 sets (150-417 mm in length)2-9 sheets stapled: 50 sets (148-149 mm/418-458 mm in

length)10-20 sheets stapled: 50 sets21-30 sheets stapled: 30 sets31-40 sheets stapled: 25 sets41-50 sheets staples: 20 sets

Number of staples 5,000 staples

Dimensions 424 (W)* e 656 (D) e 990 (H) mm* Width including primary (main) tray: 676 mm/1,440 mm(with the edge pulled out)


Power source Supplied from the main body





13.4


Item Description

Name FS-612

Type Straight delivery, offset delivery, secondary (sub) tray deliv-ery, Staple, Fold & Staple, Multi Half-Fold, Multi Tri-Fold,Punch (with Punch Kit PK-512/PK-513 installed), using

post inserter (with Post Inserter PI-502 installed)Function Sort Output non-offset sets to the primary (main) tray .

Offset Sort/OffsetGroup

Offset each set upon exit to the primary (main) tray .

Secondary (sub) tray Output non-offset sets to the secondary (sub) tray .

Staple Output stapled sets to the primary (main) tray .

Fold & Staple Output saddle-stitched and half-folded sets to the fold &staple mode tray .

Half Fold Output half-folded paper to the fold & staple mode tray .

Tri-Fold Output tri-folded paper to the fold & staple mode tray .

Punch Output punched paper to the primary (main) tray or sec-ondary (sub) tray .

Post inserter Feed paper.

Stapling position 3 positions (1 staple at front/rear corner, 2 staples in center)

Available sizes in primary (main) tray (Staple)

A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w / v, B5 w / v, A5 v, 12 e 18 w,11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w / v, 5.5 e 8.5 v, Foolscap,9 e 11 v, CustomMax. 314 mm e 458 mm to min. 182 mm e 139 mmTab Paper (only with the tab side ahead in output direction)

Available sizes in primary (main) tray (Fold & Staple)

A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w, CustomMax. 314 mm e 458 mm to min. 210 mm e 279 mm

Available sizes in primary (main) tray (Half Fold, Tri-Fold)

Half-Fold: A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w, 12 e 18 w,11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w, CustomMax. 314 mm e 458 mm to min. 210 mm e 279 mmTri-Fold: A4 w, 8.5 e 11 w


SRA4 w, A4 w / v, B5 w / v, A5 v, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w / v, A3 w, B4 w, Foolscap, 9 e 11 v,CustomMax. 314 mm e 458 mm to min. 182 mm e 148 mmTab Paper (only with the tab side ahead in output direction)

The following sizes are available only in straight delivery: A5 w, B6 w, 5.5 e 8.5 wMin. 128 mm e 139 mm

Available sizes in secondary (sub) tray SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w / v, A4 w / v, B5 w / v, A5 w / v, B6 w, A6 w, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w / v, 5.5 e 8.5 w / v, Foolscap,9 e 11 v, CustomMax. 331 mm e 488 mm to min. 100 mm e 139 mmTab Paper (only with the tab side ahead in output direction)

Available weight in primary (main) tray Staple, Fold & Staple, Half Fold, Tri-Fold: 64 to 105 g/m2

Straight delivery, offset delivery: 64 to 300 g/m2


Dimensions 424 (W)* e 656 (D) e 990 (H) mm* Width including primary (main) tray: 674.5 mm/790.5 mm(with the edge pulled out)


Power source 24/5 VDC (supplied from Relay Unit RU-509 )





13.4.10 Post Inserter PI-502

13.4.11 Multi Punch GP-501 (Die Set DS-508 to DS-516, except DS-514)

Item Description

Name PI-502

Type Paper feeding equipment with separable torque limiter

Function Automatic Feed paper into the finisher on receiving a command fromthe main body.

Manual Feed paper into the finisher on receiving a command manu-ally sent from the control panel of the post inserter.

Paper sizes Upper tray A4 w / v, B5 w / v, A5 v, 8.5 e 11 w / v, 5.5 e 8.5 v, Custom(max. 216 mm e 297 mm to min. 182 mm e 139 mm)

Lower tray A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w / v, B5 w / v, A5 v, Foolscap,12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 14 w, 8.5 e 11 w / v,5.5 e 8.5 v, Custom (max. 314 mm e 458 mm to min.182 mm e 139 mm)

Paper type Plain, Fine, Color, Coated


Stack capacity 200 sheets (80 g/m2 ) or within 30 mm thick for each of up-

per/lower tray



Power source 24/5 VDC (supplied from Relay Unit RU-509 )

Power consumption 30 W or less

Item Description

Name GP-501

Speed Up to 80 sheets per minute

Punch Sheet Size A4 v

Punch Edge 11

Paper Stock 80 to 300 g/m2 cover

Paper Bypass Mode Sheet Size Paper sizes and stocks same as printer

Punch Capacity Single Sheet

Power Supply 235 V, 50 Hz, Single Phase

Electrical BTUs/Hour 1100 BTU/HRWatts 414 W Amps 1.8 A

Safety TUV/GS, CE



Shipping Weight Approx. 123 kg





13.4


13.4.13 Punch Kit PK-512/PK-513

13.4.14 Others

In addition to the above mentioned, the following products are provided as output options.

- Carriage for Large Capacity Stacker LC-501

- Staple Kit MS-5C

- Staple Kit SK-601

- Staple Kit SK-701

- Glue Chip GC-501

- Output Tray OT-502

Item Description

Name RU-506

Function Layering conveyance function:Layers two copied/printed sheets, then reverses and con-veys them to the finishing options in simplex copying/print-

ing.Reversing conveyance function:Reverses copied/printed sheets and conveys them to thefinishing options in simplex copying/printing.Conveyance function:Provides straight delivery in duplex copying/printing.

Conveyance speed 80 sheets/min. (A4 v /8.5 e 11 v )

Paper type Plain, Fine, Coat, Blank Insert, Book/News, Embossed• OHP transparencies and tracing paper are unavailable.




Item Description

Name PK-512/PK-513

Function Punch file holes

Number of holes PK-512: 2 or 4 holesPK-513: Swedish 4 holes

Hole pitch PK-512: 80 ± 0.5 mmPK-513: 21/70/21 ± 0.5 mm Adjustable range: ± 5 mm

Hole diameter 6.5 ± 0.5 mm

Maximum power consumption 40 W or less


Power source Supplied from Finisher FS-612

Weight Approx. 3 kg




13.5 Electronic Option Specifications 13

13.5 Electronic Option Specifications

13.5.1 Image Controller IC-601

13.5.2 Image Controller IC-306

13.5.3 Others

In addition to the above mentioned, the following products are provided as electronic options.

- Hard Disk Kit HD-514

- Preview Kit PH-102

Item Description

Name IC-601

CPU processor Intel Core2 Duo 2.8 GHz

Internal HDD 250 GB e 2 SATA

Networks 10/100/1000 Base-T

Operating system Linux

Type Internally mounted on the machine

Power source Max. 350 W

Speed bizhub PRESS C7000: 71 ppm (A4)bizhub PRESS C7000: 70 ppm (8.5 e 11)bizhub PRESS C6000: 60 ppm (A4, 8.5 e 11)

Resolution 600 dpi e 600 dpi, 1200 dpi e 1200 dpi

Item Description

Name IC-306

CPU processor Intel Core2 Quad Q9400 2.66 GHz

Internal HDD 160 GB 7200 RPM 3.5 inch SATA

Networks 10/100/1000 Base-T

Operating system Windows XP PRO

Type External server box type

Power source 100 to 240 V 50/60 Hz 2A Max. 350 W

Speed bizhub PRESS C7000: 71 ppm (A4)bizhub PRESS C7000: 70 ppm (8.5 e 11)bizhub PRESS C6000: 60 ppm (A4, 8.5 e 11)

Resolution Print: 600 dpi e 600 dpi, 1200 dpi e 1200 dpiScan: 200 dpi, 300 dpi, 400 dpi, 600 dpi



Other Options13


13.6

13.6 Other Options

Other options provided for this machine are as listed below.

- Authentication Unit AU-201

- Key counter




13.7 Incompatible Copy Conditions 13

13.7 Incompatible Copy Conditions

13.7.1 Copy Conditions Incompatible with Basic Settings and Original Settings

Table of Functional Compatibility Basic Original Setting

1 > 1

1 > 2

2 > 1

2 > 2

U s i n g O r i g i n a l G l a s s

U s i n g A D F

S e p a r a t e S c a n

F u l l C o l o r

B l a c k

S i n g l e C o l o r

G r a y S c a l e

A u t o C o l o r

A u t o P a p e r

A u t o Z o o m

x 1 . 0

Z o o m

I m a g e R o t a t i o n B i n d D i r e c

t i o n

D i r e c t i o n

T y p e

R i g h t & L e f t

T o p N o r m a l

L e f t

U p s i d e D o w n

R i g h t

T e x t / P h o t o

P h o t o

T e x t

M a p

B a s i c

1>1 . . . -1>2 . . . *

2-

2>1 . . . *2 -

2>2 . . . *2

-

Using Original Glass *1

e e . -

Using ADF . -Separate Scan -Full Color . . - .

Black . . - .

Single Color . . - .

Gray Scale - - . . . - - - - - - - Auto Color . . . - Auto Paper - .

Auto Zoom - . . .x1.0 - . .

Zoom - . .

Image Rotation -

O r i g

i n a l S e t t i n g

Bind Di-rection

Right & Left - .

Top - .

Direction Normal -Left - . .

Upside Down - . .

Right - . .

Type Text/Photo - . . .

Photo - . . .

Text - . . .

Map - . . .

ImageType

Printed + + -Photo Paper + + -Copied + + -Inkjet + + -

Special Normal -Mixed - *

3Z-Folded -

Thick-ness

Normal -Thick -Thin -

OriginalSize

Standard -Custom (Size) -

Custom (Full Area) - e eTab Paper e e + e e - e e e



Incompatible Copy Conditions13


13.7

Table of Functional Compatibility Original Setting Quality AdjustmentImageType

Spe-cial

Thickness

OriginalSize

C o p y D e n s i t y

B a c k g r o u n d R

e m o v a l

B l e e d P r e v e n t i o n

R G B A d j u s t m

e n t

H u e

S a t u r a t i o n

B r i g h t n e s s

S c r e e n

S h a r p n e s s

C o n t r a s t

D i s t i n c t i o n

C o l o r B a l a n c e

P r i n t e d

P h o t o P a p e r

C o p i e d

I n k j e t

N o r m a l

M i x e d

Z - F o l d e d

N o r m a l

T h i c k

T h i n

S t a n d a r d

C u s t o m ( S i z e )

C u s t o m ( e x c e

p t F u l l A r e a )

T a b P a p e r

B a s i c

1>11>22>1 *

10

2>2 *10

Using Original Glass *9Using ADF +

Separate ScanFull Color .

Black e e e e e e e *6

e

Single Color e e e e . e e e *6

e

Gray Scale - - - - - *4

- - - - - -

Auto Color .

Auto Paper . .

Auto Zoom . .

x1.0ZoomImage Rotation *

3+ +

O r i g i n a l S e t t i n g

Bind Di-rection

Right & LeftTop

Direction NormalLeftUpside DownRight

Type Text/PhotoPhotoText e

Map e

ImageType

Printed . . . +Photo Paper . . . +Copied . . . +Inkjet . . . +

Special Normal . .

Mixed . . e e e

Z-Folded . . e e e

Thick-ness

Normal . .

Thick . .

Thin . .

OriginalSize

Standard . . .

Custom (Size) e e . . .

Custom (Full Area) e e . . .

Tab Paper e e e e e e . . .





Table of Functional Compatibility Application Output Setting

F a c e U p

F a c e D o w

n

1 t o N

N t o 1

S o r t

G r o u p

O f f s e t S o r t

O f f s e t G r o

u p

S t a p l e

2 - , 4 - H o l e

P u n c h

M u l t i P u n c h

F o l d & S t a

p l e

T r i m m i n g

A d h e s i v e B i n d

M u l t i H a l f

F o l d

T r i - F o l d ( I n s i d e P r i n t )

T r i - F o l d ( O

u t s i d e P r i n t )

M u l t i - f o l d i n g ( I n s i d e P r i n t )

M u l t i - f o l d i n g ( O u t s i d e P r i n t )

Z - F o l d ( S i n g l e )

P e r f e c t B i n d

C o m b i n e

B o o k l e t

I m a g e C e n t e r i n g

P a g e M a r g i n

I m a g e R e p e a t

F r a m e C e n t e r E r a s e

P r i n t P o s i t i o n

S t a m p

B a s i c

1>1 *7

e

1>22>1 *

7*8

e

2>2 *8

Using Original Glass *1

*1

Using ADF *8

Separate Scan ) ) )

Full ColorBlackSingle ColorGray Scale - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Auto Color *

10

*10

Auto Paper . . . .

Auto Zoom . .

x1.0Zoom

Image Rotation e e

O

r i g i n a l S e t t i n g

Bind Di-rection

Right & LeftTop

Direction NormalLeftUpside DownRight

Type Text/PhotoPhotoTextMap

ImageType

PrintedPhoto PaperCopied

InkjetSpecial Normal

Mixed e e e e e e e e e e *20

Z-Folded e e *20

Thick-ness

NormalThickThin

OriginalSize

StandardCustom (Size) e

Custom (Full Area) e e e e

Tab Paper e e e





13.7

Table of Functional Compatibility Others

S e p a r a t e S c a n ( d u r i n g s c a n n i n g )

I n t e r r u p t C o p y ( W h e

n C u r r e n t c o m p . )

I n t e r r u p t C o p y ( S t o p i m m e d i a t e l y )

I P S c a n n e r

R e s e r v e J o b

W i t h o u t A D F

B a s i c

1>1 -1>2 -2>1 -2>2 -Using Original Glass -Using ADF -

Separate Scan -Full Color -Black -Single Color -Gray Scale - - Auto Color - Auto Paper - Auto Zoom -x1.0 -Zoom -Image Rotation -

O r i g i n a l S e t t i n g

Bind Di-rection

Right & Left -Top -

Direction Normal -Left -Upside Down -Right -

Type Text/Photo -Photo -Text -Map -

ImageType

Printed -Photo Paper -Copied -Inkjet -

Special Normal -Mixed -

Z-Folded -Thick-ness

Normal -Thick -Thin -

OriginalSize

Standard -Custom (Size) -Custom (Full Area) -Tab Paper -

None : Compatible (selectable)

e : Grayed out

. : Gives priority to the last selected condition (the one in the far left column canceled).+ : Displays warning message.

* : Selects the condition in the top row automatically. Unavailable to be canceled.





) : Selects the condition in the top row automatically. Available to be canceled.

- : Not specified

+ : Deactivates the condition in the far left column (ignored).

- : Deactivates the condition in the top row (ignored).

/ : Not grayed out but unavailable

*1 Selects Separate Scan mode automatically.

*2 Selects 1->1 mode automatically.

*3 Image Rotation without Auto Zoom is unavailable in Mixed mode.

*4 Using IP scanner, Auto in Copy Density is unavailable.

*5 Distinction: Color text adjustment only is grayed out or canceled automatically.

*6 2 in 1 or 2 Repeat only is available. 4 in 1 is available only for Page No. of Stamp.Others are grayed out or the message "These functions cannot be combined" appears.

2-in-1/2 Repeat 4-in-1/4 Repeat 8-in-1

Stamp Page No. . . . e e

Set Numbering . . e e e

Date/Time . . e e e

*7 Selects 1 -> 2 or 2 -> 2 mode automatically.

*8 Selects 1->1 or 1->2 mode automatically. Selects Separate Scan automatically in 1->2mode.

*9 Activates ADF mode automatically.

*10 Selects 1->1 or 1->2 mode automatically.

*11 Available only with Booklet selected.

*12 Output to the secondary (sub) tray only.

*13 Image Centering will not be canceled when selected in combination with Non-Image AreaErase.

*14 Unavailable with Auto Paper selected.

*15 e for 1 to N, * for N to 1.

*16 * for 1 to N, e for N to 1.

*17 Grayed out with cover printing specified.

*18 Selects Full Color automatically with cover printing specified.

Notes:

The section 8 in weight (257 g/m2 - 300 g/m2 ) is available for the lower tray of paper feeder unit, andcannot be specified with Face Down or duplex mode.

The sections 1 (64 g/m2 - 74 g/m2 ) and 2 (75 g/m2 - 80 g/m2 ) in weight are grayed out with Coated(gloss, matte) selected.

The sections 1 (64 g/m2 - 74 g/m2 ) and 2 (75 g/m2 - 80 g/m2 ) in weight are grayed out with Coated(gloss, matte) selected.

For Scan to HDD/Queue of IP scanner, the file format (JPG, TIFF, PDF) is grayed out.

Auto Color is grayed out for output of internal pattern.





13.7

13.7.2 Copy Conditions Incompatible with Quality Adjustment, Application, andOutput Settings

Table of Functional Compatibility Basic Original Setting

1 > 1

1 > 2

2 > 1

2 > 2

U s i n g O r i g i n a l G l a s s

U s i n g A D F

S e p a r a t e S c a n

F u l l C o l o r

B l a c k

S i n g l e C o l o r

G r a y S c a l e

A u t o C o l o r

A u t o P a p e r

A u t o Z o o m

x 1 . 0

Z o o m

I m a g e R o t a t i o n

BindDire

ction

Direc-tion

Type

R i g h t & L e f t

T o p N o r m a l

L e f t

U p s i d e D o w n

R i g h t

T e x t / P h o t o

P h o t o

T e x t

M a p

Q u a l i t y A d j u s t m e n

t

Copy Density -Background Removal -Bleed Prevention -RGB Adjustment -Hue e e -Saturation e e -

Brightness e e -Screen - . .

Sharpness -Contrast -Distinction *

5*5

-

Color Balance e e -

A p p l i c a t i o n

Combine *1

- e e

Booklet e e *1

- e e

Image Centering *13

- e e

Page Margin -Image Repeat - e e

Frame Center Erase -Print PositionStamp -

O u t p u t S e t t i n g

Face Up -Face Down -1 to N -N to 1 -Sort -Group -Offset Sort -Offset Group -

Staple -2-, 4-Hole Punch -Multi Punch -Fold & Staple -Trimming - Adhesive Bind e e e

Multi Half Fold -Tri-Fold (Inside Print) -Tri-Fold (Outside Print) -Multi-folding (Inside Print) -Multi-folding (Outside Print) -Z-Fold (Single) -Perfect Bind





O t h e r s

Separate Scan (during scanning) e / / / / / / / / Interrupt Copy (When Currentcomp.)

-

Interrupt Copy (Stop immediate-ly)

-

IP Scanner - - - - - - e e e e

Reserve Job -Without ADF e e -





13.7

Table of Functional Compatibility Original Setting Quality AdjustmentImageType

Spe-cial

Thickness

OriginalSize

C o p y D e n s i t y

B a c k g r o u n d R

e m o v a l

B l e e d P r e v e n t i o n

R G B A d j u s t m

e n t

H u e

S a t u r a t i o n

B r i g h t n e s s

S c r e e n

S h a r p n e s s

C o n t r a s t

D i s t i n c t i o n

C o l o r B a l a n c e

P r i n t e d

P h o t o P a p e r

C o p i e d

I n k j e t

N o r m a l

M i x e d

Z - F o l d e d

N o r m a l

T h i c k

T h i n

S t a n d a r d

C u s t o m ( S i z e )

C u s t o m ( e x c e

p t F u l l A r e a )

T a b P a p e r

Q u a l i t y A d j u s t m e n t

Copy DensityBackground RemovalBleed PreventionRGB AdjustmentHueSaturationBrightnessScreen

SharpnessContrastDistinctionColor Balance


Combine e e e

Booklet e e e

Image Centering e e

Page Margin e

Image Repeat e e

Frame Center ErasePrint PositionStamp


Face Up

Face Down1 to NN to 1SortGroupOffset SortOffset GroupStaple2-, 4-Hole PunchMulti PunchFold & Staple .

Trimming .

Adhesive Bind e e e

Multi Half Fold .

Tri-Fold (Inside Print) .Tri-Fold (Outside Print) .

Multi-folding (Inside Print)Multi-folding (Outside Print)Z-Fold (Single)Perfect Bind

O t h e r s

Separate Scan (during scanning) / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Interrupt Copy (When Currentcomp.)Interrupt Copy (Stop immediate-ly)

e e

IP Scanner e e e e e *4

- - - - - -

Reserve JobWithout ADF e





Table of Functional Compatibility Application Output Setting

B o o k l e t

I m a g e C e n t e r i n g

I m a g e S h i f t

I m a g e R e p e a t

F r a m e E r a

s e

P r i n t P o s i t i o n

S t a m p

F a c e U p

F a c e D o w

n

1 t o N

N t o 1

S o r t

G r o u p

O f f s e t S o r t

O f f s e t G r o

u p

S t a p l e

2 - , 4 - H o l e

P u n c h

M u l t i P u n c h

F o l d & S t a

p l e

T r i m m i n g

A d h e s i v e B i n d

M u l t i H a l f

F o l d

T r i - F o l d ( I n s i d e P r i n t )

T r i - F o l d ( O

u t s i d e P r i n t )

M u l t i - f o l d i n g ( I n s i d e P r i n t )

M u l t i - f o l d i n g ( O u t s i d e P r i n t )

Z - F o l d ( S i n g l e )

P e r f e c t B i n d

C o m b i n e

Q u a l i t y A d j u s t m e n t

Copy DensityBackground RemovalBleed PreventionRGB AdjustmentHueSaturation

BrightnessScreenSharpness

ContrastDistinctionColor Balance


Combine e e *6

e e e e e

Booklet e e e e e . e e e

Image Centering e e e

Page Margin e

Image Repeat e e e e *6

e e e e e

Frame Center Erase e

Print Position e

Stamp *6

*6


Face Up . . . . . . . . . . . .Face Down . . . .

1 to N . . . . . .

N to 1 * e e e e . . . .

Sort . . .

Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . e

Offset Sort . . . . . . . . . - - e

Offset Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . e

Staple e * * e . . . . . . . . . . . . e

2-, 4-Hole Punch e * * e . . . . . . . . e

Multi Punch e * * e . . . . . . . . . . e

Fold & Staple e * *17

*17

. . . . . . . . . . . . . e

Trimming e * e * . . . . . . . . . . . e

Adhesive Bind e . e e e . . . . . . . . . . e

Multi Half Fold e * *17

*17

. . . . . . . . . . . . . e

Tri-Fold (Inside Print) . . . * e *18

*18

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . e

Tri-Fold (Outside Print) . . e * *17

*17

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . e

Multi-folding (Inside Print) * e * e - . - . . . . . . . . . . . e

Multi-folding (Outside Print) e * e * - . - . . . . . . . . . . . e

Z-Fold (Single) e * * e . . . . . . . . . . .

Perfect Bind e e e e * * e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e





13.7

O t h e r s

Separate Scan (during scanning) / / / / / / / Interrupt Copy (When Currentcomp.)

e e e e e e e e


e e e e e e e e e e e e

IP Scanner - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -Reserve JobWithout ADF





Table of Functional Compatibility Others

S e p a r a t e S c a n ( d u r i n g s c a n n i n g )

I n t e r r u p t C o p y ( W h e

n C u r r e n t c o m p . )

I n t e r r u p t C o p y ( S t o p i m m e d i a t e l y )

I P S c a n n e r

R e s e r v e J o b

W i t h o u t A D F

Q u a l i t y A d j u s t m

e n t

Copy Density -Background Removal -Bleed Prevention -RGB Adjustment -Hue -Saturation -

Brightness -Screen -Sharpness -Contrast -Distinction -Color Balance -


Combine -Booklet -Image Centering -Page Margin -Image Repeat -Frame Center Erase -Print Position

Stamp


Face Up -Face Down -1 to N -N to 1 -Sort -Group -Offset Sort -Offset Group -Staple -2-, 4-Hole Punch -Multi Punch -Fold & Staple -Trimming -

Adhesive Bind e

Multi Half Fold -Multi Tri-Fold (Inside Print) -Multi Tri-Fold (Outside Print)Multi-folding (Inside Print) -Multi-folding (Outside Print)Z-Fold (Single) -Perfect Bind

O t h e r s

Separate Scan (during scanning)Interrupt Copy (When Currentcomp.)

- e e -


- e e -

IP Scanner - - - -Reserve Job -Without ADF





13.7

None : Compatible (selectable)

e : Grayed out

. : Gives priority to the last selected condition (the one in the far left column canceled).

+ : Warning message appears.

* : Selects the condition in the top row automatically. Unavailable to be canceled.

) : Selects the condition in the top row automatically. Available to be canceled.- : Not specified

+ : Deactivates the condition in the far left column (ignored).

- : Deactivates the condition in the top row (ignored).

/ : Not grayed out but unavailable

*1 Selects Separate Scan mode automatically.

*2 Selects 1->1 mode automatically.

*3 Image Rotation without Auto Zoom is unavailable in Mixed mode.

*4 Using IP scanner, Auto in Copy Density is unavailable.*5 Distinction: Color text adjustment only is grayed out or canceled automatically.

*6 2 in 1 or 2 Repeat only is available. 4 in 1 is available only for Page No. of Stamp.Others are grayed out or the message "These functions cannot be combined" appears.

2-in-1/2 Repeat 4-in-1/4 Repeat 8-in-1

Stamp Page No. . . . e e

Set Numbering . . e e e

Date/Time . . e e e

*7 Selects 1 -> 2 or 2 -> 2 mode automatically.

*8 Selects 1->1 or 1->2 mode automatically. Selects Separate Scan automatically in 1->2mode.

*9 Activates ADF mode automatically.

*10 Selects 1->1 or 1->2 mode automatically.

*11 Available only with Booklet selected.

*12 Output to the secondary (sub) tray only.

*13 Image Centering will not be canceled when selected in combination with Non-Image AreaErase.

*14 Unavailable with Auto Paper selected.

*15 e for 1 to N, * for N to 1.

*16 * for 1 to N, e for N to 1.

*17 Grayed out with cover printing specified.

*18 Selects Full Color automatically with cover printing specified.

Notes:

The section 8 in weight (257 g/m2 - 300 g/m2 ) is available for the lower tray of paper feeder unit, andcannot be specified with Face Down or duplex mode.

The sections 1 (64 g/m2 - 74 g/m2 ) and 2 (75 g/m2 - 80 g/m2 ) in weight are grayed out with Coated

(gloss, matte) selected.The sections 1 (64 g/m2 - 74 g/m2 ) and 2 (75 g/m2 - 80 g/m2 ) in weight are grayed out with Coated(gloss, matte) selected.





For Scan to HDD/Queue of IP scanner, the file format (JPG, TIFF, PDF) is grayed out.

ACS is grayed out for output of internal pattern.





13.7



14Software License Agreement






14

14 Software License Agreement

Printing Software, Font Program and Host Software

This package contains the following materials provided by KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES,

INC. (KMBT): software included as part of the printing system ("Printing Software"), the digitally-encoded ma-chine-readable outline data encoded in the special format and in the encrypted form ("Font Programs"), othersoftware which runs on a computer system for use in conjunction with the Printing Software ("Host Soft-ware"), and related explanatory written materials ("Documentation"). The term "Software" shall be used todescribe Printing Software, Font Programs and/or Host Software and also include any upgrades, modifiedversions, additions, and copies of the Software.

KMBT grants to you a non-exclusive license to use the Software and Documentation, provided that you agreeto the following:

This package may contain a software program or module owned by a third party. The provisions in this SOFT-WARE LICENSE AGREEMENT always take precedence if a license for the software program or module isprovided in a document, such as a "User's Guide" separately from this SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT.

1. You may use this Software solely for your own internal business purposes.

2. You may make one backup copy of the Host Software, provided your backup copy is not installed orused on any computer. Notwithstanding the above restrictions, you may install the on any number ofcomputers solely for use with one or more printing systems running the Printing Software.

3. You may assign its rights under this Agreement to an assignee of all of Licensee's right and interest tosuch Software and Documentation ("Assignee") provided you transfer to Assignee all copies of suchSoftware and Documentation Assignee agrees to be bound by all of the terms and conditions of this Agreement.

4. You may not give, rent, lease or sublicense the "Software" or "Documentation" in all cases, unless oth-erwise set forth in Section 3 above.

5. You agree not to modify, adapt or translate the Software and Documentation.

6. You agree that you will not attempt to alter, disassemble, decrypt, reverse engineer or decompile theSoftware.

7. Title to and ownership of the Software and Documentation and any reproductions thereof shall remain

with KMBT and its licensor.8. IN NO EVENT WILL KMBT OR ITS LICENSOR BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL, INCI-

DENTAL INDIRECT, PUNITIVE OR SPECIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOSTSAVING, EVEN IF KMBT HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY ANY THIRD PARTY. KMBT OR ITS LICENSOR DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITHREGARD TO THE SOFTWARE, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION IMPLIEDWARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. SOME STATES OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOWTHE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR SPECIAL DAMAGES, SOTHE ABOVE LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.

9. Notice to Government End Users: The Software is a "commercial item," as that term is defined at 48C.F.R.2.101, consisting of "commercial computer software" and "commercial computer software doc-umentation," as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 and 48

C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4, all U.S. Government End Users acquire the Software with onlythose rights set forth herein.

10. You agree that you will not export the Software in any form in violation of any applicable laws and reg-ulations regarding export control of any countries.



14


Printing Software, Font Program and Host Software

This package contains the following materials provided by Konica Minolta Business Technologies, Inc.(KMBT): software included as part of the printing system ("Printing Software"), the digitally-encoded ma-chine-readable outline data encoded in the special format and in the encrypted form ("Font Programs"), othersoftware which runs on a computer system for use in conjunction with the Printing Software ("Host Soft-ware"), and related explanatory written materials ("Documentation").

The term "Software" shall be used to describe Printing Software, Font Programs and/or Host Software and

also include any upgrades, modified versions, additions, and copies of the Software.

This is a license agreement and not an agreement for sale. The Software is being licensed to you (either aprivate person or a corporate entity): under the terms of this Agreement.KMBT grants to you a non-exclusive sublicense to use the Software and Documentation, provided that youagree to the following:

1. You may use the Software and accompanying Font Programs solely for your own internal business pur-poses.

2. In addition to the license for Font Programs set forth in Section 1 above, you may use Roman Font Pro-grams to reproduce weights, styles, and versions of letters, numerals, characters and symbols ("Type-faces") on the display or monitor for your own internal business purposes.

3. You may make one backup copy of the Host Software, provided your backup copy is not installed or

used on any computer. Notwithstanding the above restrictions, you may install the Host Software onany number of computers solely for use with one or more printing systems running the Printing Soft-ware.

4. You may assign its rights under this Agreement to an assignee of all of Licensee's right and interest tosuch Software and Documentation ("Assignee") provided you transfer to Assignee all copies of suchSoftware and Documentation Assignee agrees to be bound by all of the terms and conditions of this Agreement.

5. You agree not to modify, adapt or translate the Software and Documentation.

6. You agree that you will not attempt to alter, disassemble, decrypt, reverse engineer or decompile theSoftware.

7. Title to and ownership of the Software and Documentation and any reproductions thereof shall remainwith KMBT and its licensors.

8. You may not rent, lease, sublicense, lend or transfer versions or copies of the Software that Licenseedoes not use, or Software contained on any unused media, except as part of the permanent transfer ofall Software and Documentation as described above.

9. IN NO EVENT WILL KMBT OR ITS LICENSOR BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL, INCI-DENTAL INDIRECT, PUNITIVE OR SPECIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOSTSAVING, EVEN IF KMBT HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY ANY THIRD PARTY. KMBT OR ITS LICENSOR DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITHREGARD TO THE SOFTWARE, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION IMPLIEDWARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. SOME STATES OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOWTHE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR SPECIAL DAMAGES, SOTHE ABOVE LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.

10. Notice to Government End Users: The Software is a "commercial item," as that term is defined at 48C.F.R.2.101, consisting of "commercial computer software" and "commercial computer software doc-

umentation," as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 and 48C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4, all U.S. Government End Users acquire the Software with onlythose rights set forth herein.

11. You agree that you will not export the Software in any form in violation of any applicable laws and reg-ulations regarding export control of any countries.

12. THIRD PARTY BENEFICIARY: You are hereby notified that Adobe? Systems Incorporated, a Delawarecorporation, located at 345 Park Avenue, San Jose, CA 95110-2704 is a third-party beneficiary to thisLicense Agreement to the extent that this agreement contains provisions which relate to your use of theSoftware, Font Programs and Typefaces. Such provisions are made expressly for the benefit of Adobeand are enforceable by Adobe in addition to KMBT.




14

About This Software

PLEASE READ CAREFULLY THE LICENSE AGREEMENT BELOW BEFORE OPENING THE PACKAGE OFTHIS SOFTWARE ("SOFTWARE"), DOWNLOADING, INSTALLING OR USING THE SOFTWARE. OPENINGTHE PACKAGE, OR DOWNLOADING, INSTALLING OR USING THE SOFTWARE SHALL BE DEEMED YOURLAWFUL ACCEPTANCE OF THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS BELOW. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THEM,DO NOT DOWNLOAD, INSTALL, USE THE SOFTWARE, NOR OPEN THE PACKAGE.

1. COPYRIGHT AND INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTSThis is a l icense agreement and not an agreement for sale. Konica Minolta Business Technologies,Inc.("Konica Minolta") owns, or has been licensed from other owners ("Konica Minolta Licensor"), cop-yrights and other intellectual property rights of the Software, and any and all rights and title to the Soft-ware and any copy made from it are retained by Konica Minolta or Konica Minolta Licensor. In no event,this Agreement shall be deemed to assign any copyright and/or any intellectual property rights of theSoftware from Konica Minolta or Konica Minolta Licensor to you. The Software is protected by copy-right laws and international treaty provisions.

2. LICENSEKonica Minolta hereby grant to you a non-exclusive and limited license, and you may:(1) install and use the Software only on your computer(s) connected with Konica Minolta product forwhich this Software is designed;(2) allow users of the computers described above to use the Software, provided that you assure that all

such users comply with the terms of this Agreement;(3) use the Software only for your own customary business or personal purpose;(4) make one copy of the Software only for backup purpose in the support of the normal and intendeduse of the Software.(5) transfer the Software to other party by transferring a copy of this Agreement and all documentationalong with the Software, provided that(a) you must, at the same time, either transfer to such other party or destroy all your other copies of theSoftware,(b) such transfer of passession terminates your license from Konica Minolta, and(c) you must assure that such other party has agreed to accept the terms and conditions of this Agree-ment.If such other party does not accept such terms and conditions then you shall not transfer any copy ofthe Software.

3. RESTRICTIONS(1) You shall not without the written consent of KONICA MINOLTA:(i) use, copy, modify, merge or transfer copies of the Software except as provided herein;(ii) reverse engineer, reverse assemble, reverse compile or any other way analyze the Software;(iii) sublicense, rent, lease or distribute the Software or any copy thereof; or(iv) remove, use, or alter any trademark, logo, copyright or other proprietary notices, legends, symbolsor labels in the Software.(2) You agree that you will not export the Software in any form in violation of any applicable laws andregulations regarding export control of any country.

4. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES(1) If the Software is furnished on CD-ROM(s) or other tangible object that is used for storage of digitaldata (hereinafter collectively "Storage Medium"), , Konica Minolta warrants the Storage Medium to befree from the defects in material and workmanship under normal use, for a period of ninety (90) daysfrom the date of delivery to you. WITH THE EXCEPTION OF THE FOREGOING EXPRESS WARRANTIES

APPLICABLE TO STORAGE MEDIUM ONLY, THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED TO YOU "AS IS" WITH-OUT ANY WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER. KONICA MINOLTA, ITS AFFILIATE COMPANIES AND KONI-CA MINOLTA LICENSOR DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THE SOFTWARE,EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MER-CHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRDPARTY RIGHTS.(2) IN NO EVENT WILL KONICA MINOLTA, ITS AFFILIATE COMPANIES NOR KONICA MINOLTA LI-CENSOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST DATA, OR ANY OTHER INDIRECT, SPECIAL,PUNITIVE, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES THAT RESULT FROM USE OR INABILITYTO USE THE SOFTWARE INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL,COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION OR ANY AND ALL OTHER COMMERCIAL OR OTHERDAMAGES OR LOSSES, EVEN IF KONICA MINOLTA, ITS AFFILIATE COMPANIES OR KONICA MI-NOLTA LICENSOR HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES OR FOR ANY

CLAIM BY YOU BASED ON A THIRD SUCH DAMAGES OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY YOU BASED ON ATHIRD SUCH DAMAGES OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY YOU BASED ON A THIRD PARTY CLAIM.



14


(3) The disclaimer of warranty hereunder does not affect your statutory rights. In case of the disclaimeris not allowed by applicable law, the disclaimer shall only apply to you to the maximum extent permittedby the law.

5. TERMINATIONYou may terminate this license at any time by destroying the Software and all your copies of it. This Agreement shall also terminate if you fail to comply with any terms hereof. Upon such termination, youmust immediately destroy all copies of the Software in your possession.

6. GOVERNING LAW

This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of Japan.

7. SEVERABILITYIn the event that any part or parts of this agreement shall be held illegal or null and void by any court oradministrative body of competent jurisdiction, such determination shall not effect the remaining partsof this agreement and they shall remain in full force and effect as if such part or parts determined illegalor void had not been included.

8. NOTICE TO US GOVERNMENT END USERSThe Software is a "commercial item," as that term is defi ned at 48 C.F.R. 2.101 (October 1995), con-sisting of "commercial computer software" and "commercial computer software documentation," assuch terms are used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212 (September 1995). Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 and 48C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4 (June 1995), all U.S. Government End Users shall acquire theSoftware with only those rights set forth herein.YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS AGREEMENT, UNDERSTAND IT, AND AGREE TO

BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND CONDITIONS. NEITHER PARTY SHALL BE BOUND BY ANY OTHERSTATEMENTS OR REPRESENTATIONS THAT ARE INCONSISTENT WITH THE TERMS AND CONDI-TIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT. NO AMENDMENT TO THIS AGREEMENT IS EFFECTIVE UNLESSWRITTEN AND SIGNED BY PROPERLY AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVES OF EACH PARTY. BYOPENING THE PACKAGE, DOWNLOADING, INSTALLING OR USING THE SOFTWARE YOU AGREETO ACCEPT THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT.



15Index





15